Citation: Version 7 dated 13/10/2006


Sample and Result Registration Overview

Description

The Sample and Result Registration module is used to enter monitoring samples and results into the WMS system.

Scope

The Sample and Result Registration module deals with the following sub-modules:

•	Register Non-Programme Sample

•	Register Programme Sample

•	Register Results

•	Non Programme Sample View

Related System Topics

Register Non- Programme Samples

Register Samples

Non-Programme Sample View

Peripheral Information Overview


Register Non Programme Samples

Description

The Register Non-Programme Samples process is used to register samples and observations that are not part of a monitoring programme, as well as programme samples that do not occur within a scheduled time frame.

Pre-requisites

•	A Monitoring Point must have been registered.

•	The Monitor responsible for sampling must have been registered.

•	The Laboratory must have been registered and linked to the monitor.

•	The Monitoring Variable as analysed by the laboratory and their respective analysis methods must have been registered.

•	Preservative and Container for the sample type must be registered and linked to the Laboratory and Analysis Method.

•	Client Office/Client Person must be have been registered.

Steps

View a Non Programme Sample:

1.	Click on the [image] Locate a Record button.

2.	In the Non Programme Sample ID field enter an ID then press enter to display the record. Only Non-Programme samples that have not yet been received will be displayed.

Register a Non Programme Sample:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	In the Eco Compartment field, either enter the Eco Compartment ID and tab, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Eco Compartment form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] to return the record.

3.	In the Sam/Obs Type Ind field, either enter O for Observation or S for Sample and tab, or click on the [image] Drop Down button and select either a Sample or Observation by clicking on the record, and tab.

4.	In the Monitoring Action Specification field, either enter the Monitoring Action Specification ID and tab, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup Monitoring Action Spec form. Click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

5.	In the Monitoring Point field, either enter the Monitoring Point ID and tab, or click on the [image]  Zoom button to open the Lookup Mon Feature/Ext Ref. form.

You can search for and select a record in the following way:

•	Click on the System Datasource list button to display a drop down list. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button. All the records will be displayed for the specific datasource.

•	Click on the [image] Range button and click in the right-hand side of the Monitoring Feature grid to highlight the field. Enter the Monitoring Point ID and * and press enter. The required record will be displayed, click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

6.	In the Monitor field, depending on the Sam/Obs Type Ind that you have selected, the following process must be followed:

Sample

•	Click on the [image]  Zoom button to open the Lookup Mon/Lab/Sample Type form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button or for additional combinations click on the Additional Monitors button and select the record. The Monitor, Laboratory and Sam/Obs Type record will be displayed in the fields.

Observation

•	Click on the [image]  Zoom button to open the Lookup Monitor form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record. The Monitor and Sam/Obs Type record will be displayed in the fields.

7.	In the Preservative field, click on the [image]  Zoom button to open the Lookup Laboratory/Sample Type form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the Preservative and Container record.  The Laboratory, Preservative and Container fields are not applicable to observation type.

8.	In the Client Office field, either enter a Client Office ID  or click on the [image]  Zoom button to open the person or organisation form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

9.	In the Client Person field, either enter a Client Person ID or click on the [image]  Zoom button to open the Person form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

10.	In the Reason field, enter a reason for analysis.

11.	Display variables for the new Non-Programme Sample that you are registering, in one of the following ways:

•	Click on the Variables button to display default variables to be registered for this new sample.

•	Click on the Analysis Group field, either enter an Analysis Group ID and tab, or click on the [image]  Zoom button to open the Analysis Groups form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record. Click on the Variables Button  to display the variables for this analysis group.

Define variables for analysis:

1.	Click on the Variables button to display all the variables. Edit as required by adding or deleting variables, and click on the Samples button to select the group of variables. The number of variables in the group, and the registration date is displayed.

2.	The non-programme sample number is automatically displayed, as the sample information has now been registered.

3.	Click on the Receive Sample button to open the Register Samples form.

Modify a Non Programme Sample:

You cannot modify records when the Non-scheduled Sample ID exists on the Monitoring Sample Schedule.

1.	Do a View Non-Programme Sample to locate the required record for modification.

2.	Click on the field to be modified and enter the changes, as explained in the Register Steps 2-11.

3.	Tab to accept the changes.

Important

The Delete Sample button is used to permanently erase a non-programme sample from the system. This action is only performed by the Sample Administrator. Contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information. You cannot modify or delete records when the Non-scheduled Sample ID exists on the Monitoring Sample Schedule.

Related System Topics

Register Sample

Ecological Compartment Maintenance

Lookup Monitoring Action Spec

Lookup Mon Feature/Ext. Ref.

Person Form

Analysis Groups


Lookup Mon Feature/Feature Reference

Description

The Lookup Mon Feature/Feature Reference form is used to select a Monitoring Point by using external data feature reference codes.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Select a Mon Feature/Feature Reference:

By default, all Monitoring Feature records are displayed when opening the form.

You can search for and select a record in the following way:

1.	Click on the System Datasource list button to display a drop down list. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button. All the records will be displayed for the specific datasource.

2.	Click on the [image] Range button and click in the right-hand side of the Monitoring Feature grid to highlight the field. Enter the Monitoring Point ID and * and press enter. The required record will be displayed, click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

Related System Topics

Register Non-Programme Samples


Register Sample

Description

The Register Sample process is used to register samples or observations that are part of a monitoring programme.

Pre-requisites

The Monitoring Programme must have been registered for a specific sample(s)

Steps

View Sample Tag Information:

You can view Sample Tag Information in the following ways:

1.	Enter or scan the Consolidation ID and press enter.

2.	Leave fields blank and press enter to display all samples.

3.	Click on the Consolidation ID field and click on the [image]  Zoom button to open the Range Mon Feature form. Either enter the Monitoring Point ID or enter a Monitoring Point Name or portion of the Name with * and enter. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button. The Sample Type form will be displayed with all the registered sample type records. Click on the required sample type record and click on the [image] Select button to return the Mon Feature Id and the sample type combination to the Scheduled Consolidation ID form. Click on the required combination and click on the [image] Select button to return all the TAG information to the Receive Samples form.

Register Programme Samples:

1.	A message will be displayed  "Tag Confirmation Accept/ Reject". Click on the Accept button if the tag information corresponds with the sample information.

2.	The Quality Control form will be displayed for LIMS and Manual data type sources. Check that the details are correct, and confirm by clicking on the check box. Click on the OK button. A message will be displayed " are you sure the information is correct? Once you continue you will not have another chance to change?" Click on the Continue option if the information is correct to open the Receive Programme Samples form or click on the Return option to change the details and repeat the process.

3.	Enter the Sample Date and tab.

4.	In the Sample Time field enter the time and tab.

5.	A Confirm dates and time screen will be displayed, re-enter the dates and time and tab. If the information is correct, it will be displayed in the Receive Sample form.

6.	In the Depth fields, one or more Depths will be highlighted (this depends on the monitoring action specification) enter the depth and tab. (Note: Integrated samples have a begin and end depth – if both fields are not entered, the sample will be marked as a problem.)

7.	In the Analyst Sample Reference no. field you can enter information if required, and tab. (this field is optional. LIMS samples will be updated with LIMS sample ID. )

8.	In the Flow field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select either a yes, no or irrelevant flow from the list and tab. (When the dam is spilling, during a big flood, then the flow indicator should be yes)

9.	In the Remarks field, enter any remarks appearing on the tag e.g. ALGAE BLOOM and tab (this field is optional).

10.	Click on the Accept Sample button.

11.	A message will be displayed, " Print certification?" if you require a printed copy of the sample information click yes to receive a print. Check the information and click the Correct button if the information is correct. If the information is incorrect, click on the Incorrect button and repeat the Receive Programme Sample steps.

12.	A sample id, and where applicable, a LIMS box number and position in the box, will be displayed. Click on Print to print a label with a sample id if you require a label.

13.	Either click on Exit, Next Sample ( to receive the next sample) or Input Results  (to immediately enter the results for the registered sample).

Important

When you register a sample ensure the information is correct, as you cannot edit it afterwards.

Related System Topics

Sample and Result Registration Overview

Register Non-Programme Samples


Result Registration Filter Criteria

Description

The Register Results process is used to enter analysis results into the WMS system. The Result Registration Filter Criteria form is used to enter filter criterion to obtain specific sample type and monitoring action rule in order to register results.

Pre-requisites

The sample must already have been registered via the Register Non-Programme Sample process or the Register Programme Sample process, and not yet be verified.

Steps

View Samples

 Note: If this form was accessed through Register Sample form, then the sample number field will have the value, else if it is accessed through the menu, the sample number field will be empty and will have to be entered.

1.	Enter a valid Sample ID Number and tab or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Selection form. Click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return the record. The Sample Type and Monitoring Action specifications are then displayed and all the information relating to the selected sample will be displayed.

2.	Click on the Input Results button to capture/enter the results to be received. The results to be received may be of type "Single", "Multiple", "Depth Profile" or "Time Interval".

3.	The Result Type will determine the Results Input form to be displayed for the specified sample:

•	If Result Type is "Single" – the Single Monitoring Variable Results Registration form will be displayed, as there is only one result for each variable, analysis combination.

•	If Result Type is "Multiple" – the Multiple Monitoring Variable Method Maintenance form will be displayed to input the common information to all results as each variable analysis combination may have many results. The results values will be entered in a separate form.

•	If Result Type is "Depth Profile" – the Depth Profile Method Maintenance form will be displayed.

•	If Result Type is "Time Interval" – the Time Interval Method Maintenance form will be displayed.

Important

LIMS sample results cannot be entered through this form. Once results have been verified they cannot be changed.

Related System Topics

Single Monitoring Variable Result Registration

Multiple Monitoring Variable Method Maintenance

Depth Profile Method Maintenance

Time Interval Method Maintenance

Register Non-programme Sample

Register Sample


Single Monitoring Variable Result Registration

Description

The Single Monitoring Variable Result Registration form provides the requested list of variables for a sample, and is used to enter results and modify the specified defaults for the analyst (Laboratory/Monitor), the analysis method and the measuring unit.

Pre-requisites

The Sample must be have been selected in the Result Registration Filter Criteria form.

Steps

Check all the variable information:

•	If the information is correct, proceed with the Register Single Results process.

•	If the information is incorrect, Edit a Record, and then proceed with the Register Single Results process.

•	If the record does not exist, Create a Record, and then proceed with the Register Single Results process.

Register Single Results

1.	Tab to the Results field, enter the results and tab. A warning will be displayed if the entered result value does not conform to the specified quality control parameters. You must check that the entered value corresponds with the measured value, and proceed.

2.	In the Analysis Date field and enter the date and tab.

3.	In the Measuring Unit field, either tab to allow the system to enter the measuring unit default into the field, or enter a Measuring Unit ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit Selection form. Click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return the record. If the record is not found in the list, click on the Not found button and enter the required measuring unit.

4.	Repeat this process for all the required result records. (A shortcut is to enter the result and tab – the other fields will automatically be populated)

5.	Once the last result information has been entered, click on the Last Result button to activate the result validation programme.

Create a Record

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	In the Monitoring Variable field, either enter the Monitoring Variable ID and tab, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form. Either click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

3.	In the Analyst field, either enter the Analyst ID and tab, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form. Either click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

4.	In the Analysis Method field, either enter the Analysis Method ID and tab, or click on the [image]   Zoom button to open the Analysis Method Selection form. Either click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

5.	Continue with the Register Single Results steps 1-5.

Edit a Record

1.	Click on the required record, and tab to the incorrect field that requires modification.

2.	Follow the relevant steps listed in Create a Record.

3.	Once the Record has been successfully modified, continue with the Register Single Results steps 1-5.

Important

It is only necessary to enter results for the variables that have results. It is therefore unnecessary to complete results for every sample variable.

Related System Topics

Result Registration Filter Criteria


Validate Result Totals

Description

The Validate Result Totals form is used to validate a sample’s entered results to ensure that the correct information is typed into the system.  The numeric value total as calculated on the result sheet will be compared to the calculated numeric value total of results entered into the system.  The number of results on the result sheet will be compared to the calculated number of results entered into the system.  The number of alpha result values on the result sheet will be compared to the calculated number of alpha results entered into the system.  The windows calculator can be activated to assist with the calculations on the result sheet.

Pre-requisites

The results must have been received.

Steps

1.	Calculate the numeric total of all entered results and enter the value in the Numeric Results Total field.

2.	In the Number of Result Records field enter the total number of result records.

3.	If alpha results have been entered, enter the total Number of Alpha Result records.

4.	In certain instances, if the check weight indicator has been checked in the Monitoring Variable form, a Total Weight field will appear and you must calculate and enter the total weight of all results received.

5.	Click on the OK button to activate the validation process. If the validation is unsuccessful a warning will be displayed. Click OK and the Results form will be reopened. Make the necessary changes to the results data and Click on the Last Results button to Validate the Result Sample_Status_Totals.

6.	Click on the Calculator Button to activate the Windows Calculator.  After  completing the calculation, close the Calculator to return to Result Registration Validation.

Important

Once the results have been validated after the Ok button was pressed and all Totals match, the results cannot be re-entered. Changes can only be made in the Result Administration module by the Results Administrator.

Related System Topics

Single Monitoring Variable Result Registration

Multiple Monitoring Variable Result Registration

Depth Profile Result Registration

Time Interval Result Registration


Select new Analysis Method

Description

The Select new Analysis Method form is used to select and modify multiple type sample result default parameters for analysis method, analyst, measuring unit, and analysis date. The selected multiple sample information is then used to enter results in the Multiple Results form.

Pre-requisites

The Sample must have been selected in the Register Results form.

Steps

Check all the sample information:

•	If the information is correct, click on the Continue button to register the results in the Multiple Results form.

•	If the information is incorrect, first Modify a Record, and then click on the Continue button to register the results in the Multiple Results form.

Modify a Record

Click in the field that requires modification and follow the relevant steps:

1.	In the Analysis Method field, either enter the Analysis Method ID and tab, or click on the [image]   Zoom button to open the Lookup Sample Methods form. Either click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

2.	In the Analyst field either enter the Analyst ID and tab, or click on the [image]   Zoom button to open the Lookup Laboratory form. Either click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new  record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

3.	In the Measuring Unit field, either enter the Measuring Unit ID and tab, or click on the [image]   Zoom button to open the Lookup Valid Measuring Unit form. Either click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new  record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

4.	In the Analysis Date field, enter the date.

Related System Topics

Multiple Monitoring Variable Result Registration


Multiple Monitoring Variable Result Registration

Description

The Multiple Monitoring Variable Result Registration form is used to enter results for the parameters of a Multiple Variable. The user may also create parameters for the selected Multiple variable.

Pre-requisites

The Sample must have been selected in the Register Results form and the Multiple Variable must have been selected on the Multiple Monitoring Variable Method Maintenance form.

Steps

Check the multiple monitoring variable parameter information:

•	If the information is correct, proceed with the Register Multiple Results process.

•	If the information is incorrect, Edit a Parameter Record, and then proceed with the Register Multiple Results process.

•	If the record does not exist, Create a Parameter Record, and then proceed with the Register Multiple Results process.

Register Multiple Results:

1.	Tab to the Alpha field and enter the Alpha result value if required.

2.	Tab to the Numeric Result field and enter the Numeric Result value if required.

3.	Tab to the Greater than field, and enter the ">" sign if required.

4.	Tab to the Accreditation Status field, and indicate if the result is accredited or not, if required.

5.	Repeat this process for all the result records.

6.	Click on the Exit button.

Create a Parameter Record:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	In the Parameter ID field, enter the valid Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Parameter Code, Multiple Variable Parameter Description , and the Multiple Monitoring variable Parameter Parent Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Multiple Variable Parameter ID.

4.	Continue with the Register Multiple Results steps 1-6.

Edit a Parameter Record:

 Note: The multiple monitoring variable parameter may only be modified when the Additional Result Indicator is checked.

1.	Click on the record that requires modification.

2.	Follow steps 2 – 3 listed in Create a Parameter Record.

3.	Once the Record has been successfully modified, continue with the Register Multiple Results steps 1-6.

Delete a Parameter Record:

 Note: Deletion will only be possible if the Additional Result Indicator is checked.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

It is only necessary to enter results for the variables that have results. It is therefore unnecessary to complete results for every sample variable.

Related System Topics

Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Selection


Depth Profile Result Registration

Description

The Depth Profile Result Registration form provides the requested list of variables for a sample, and is used to enter results and modify the specified defaults for the monitoring variable, result depth, monitor, analysis method and measuring unit. The template is created from the begin and end depth as specified when registering the sample.

Pre-requisites

The Sample must have been selected in the Register Results form.

Steps

Check all the variable information:

•	If the information is correct, proceed with the Depth Profile Results process.

•	If the information is incorrect, Edit a Result Depth, and then proceed with the Depth Profile Results process.

•	If the record does not exist, Create a Result Depth, and then proceed with the Depth Profile Results process.

Register Depth Profile Results

1.	Tab to the Numeric Result field and enter the result value if required.  A warning will be displayed if the entered result value does not conform to the specified quality control parameters. Check that the entered value corresponds with the measured value and proceed.

2.	Tab to the Greater than field, and enter the ">"sign if required.

3.	Tab to the Detect Limit field and enter the Numeric Result value if required.

4.	In the Measuring Unit field, either tab to allow the system to enter the measuring unit default into the field, or enter a Measuring Unit ID or click on the [image]  Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit Selection form. Click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return the record. If the record is not found in the list, click on the Not found button and enter the required measuring unit.

5.	Tab to the Accreditation Status field, and indicate if the result is accredited or not, if required.

6.	Repeat this process for all the required result records. (A shortcut is to enter the result and tab – the other fields will automatically be populated)

7.	Click on the Exit button.

Create a New Result Depth:

Deletion of a record is only allowed if the Additional Result Indicator is checked.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	In the Result Depth field, enter the result depth and tab.

3.	Continue with the Register Depth Profile Results steps 1-7.

Edit a Result Depth:

 Note: The Result Depth may only be modified if the Additional Result Indicator is checked.

1.	Click on the required record, and tab to the incorrect field that requires modification.

2.	Modify the record as required.

3.	Once the Record has been successfully modified, continue with the Register Depth Profile Results steps 1-7.

Delete a Result Depth Record:

 Note: Deletion will only be possible if the Additional Result Indicator is checked.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

Deletion of a record is only allowed if the Additional Result Indicator is checked.

Related System Topics

Measuring Unit Selection


Time Interval Result Registration

Description

The Time Interval Result Registration form provides the requested list of variables for a sample, and is used to enter results and modify the specified defaults for the monitoring variable, sample date and time, monitor, analysis method, and measuring unit. The template is created from the start date and time and end date and time and time interval.

Pre-requisites

The Sample must be have been selected in the Register Results form.

Steps

Check all the variable information:

•	If the information is correct, proceed with the Time Interval Results process.

•	If the information is incorrect, Edit a Record, and then proceed with the Time Interval Results process.

•	If the record does not exist, Create a Record, and then proceed with the Time Interval Results process.

Register Time Interval Results:

1.	Tab to the Result field and enter the result value if required.  A warning will be displayed if the entered result value does not conform to the specified quality control parameters. Check that the entered value corresponds with the measured value and proceed.

2.	Tab to the Greater than field, and enter the ">"sign if required.

3.	Tab to the Detection Limit field and enter the Result value if required.

4.	In the Measuring Unit field, either tab to allow the system to enter the measuring unit default into the field, or enter a Measuring Unit ID or click on the [image]  Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit Selection form. Click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return the record. If the record is not found in the list, click on the Not Found button and enter the required measuring unit.

5.	Repeat this process for all the required result records. (A shortcut is to enter the result and tab – the other fields will automatically be populated)

6.	Click on the Exit button.

Create a Record:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	 In the Analysis Date field, enter the date and tab.

3.	In the Sample Time field, enter the time and tab.

4.	Continue with the Receive Time Interval Results steps 1-6.

Edit a Record:

 Note: The Results may only be modified if the Additional Result Indicator is checked and not the sample time and the analysis date.

1.	Click on the required record, and tab to the incorrect field that requires modification.

2.	Follow the relevant step listed in Register Time Interval Results.

3.	Once the Record has been successfully modified, click on the Exit button to close the form.

Delete a Record:

 Note: Deletion will only be possible if the Additional Result Indicator is checked.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

It is only necessary to enter results for the variables that have results. It is therefore unnecessary to complete results for every sample variable.

Related System Topics

Measuring Unit Selection


Non-Programme Sample View

Description

The Non-Programme Samples/Observation View form is used to query and display the status of all Non-Programme Samples and Non-Programme Observations that have been registered.

Pre-requisites

•	The sample must already have been registered via the Register Non-Programme Sample process.

Steps

View a Non Programme Sample:

1.	Click on the [image] Locate a Record button.

2.	In the Sample ID field enter an ID and press enter to display the record.

View Non Programme Sample variables:

1.	Click on the Mon Variables button to open the View Variables form and view all the monitoring variables required for analysis of the specific sample.

Print Results

1.	Click on the Print Result Sheet button to print results.

Related System Topics

Register Non-Programme Samples

Reports Overview


LIMS Functions Overview

Description

The Laboratory Information Management System( LIMS) high level component is used to perform tasks only relevant to LIMS.

The following main tasks are performed:

1.	Pack and verify samples placed together in a worksheet

2.	Import samples and results from the LIMS system.

Scope

The LIMS Functions high level component deals with the following functions:

•	Close LIMS Box Manually

•	Verify Packing List

•	Print un-verified worksheets

•	Re-print Sample Packing List

•	Re-print verify Packing List

Related System Topics

Close LIMs Box Manually

Packing List Verification

Reprint Unverified Worksheets

Re-print Sample Packing List

Re-print verify Packing List


Close LIMS Box Manually

Description

The Close LIMS Box Manually form is used to group samples in a sample receive batch for sample analysis on LIMS.

Pre-requisites

Samples must have been entered into the system.

Steps

1.	Enter your WMS Login Code and tab.

2.	The number of samples grouped in the box will be displayed along with the box number.

3.	Check that the number of samples is correct, and click on the Close Box button to send the samples to LIMS.

Important

This form is only for users with LIMS sample receive rights.

Related System Topics

LIMS Functions Overview


Packing List Verification

Description

The Packing List Verification form is used to confirm that the sample positioning in the analysis box has been packed according to the worksheet. The analysis box can then be sent to the laboratory for analysis.

Pre-requisites

A Consolidation ID and Sample ID is required.

Steps

1.	In the Worksheet Number field, either enter a number or click on the [image]  Zoom button to open the Select Verified Worksheet form. The Lookup Worksheet ID form opens.Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record.Tab.

2.	Tab and click on OK to open the Verify Packing List form.

3.	Enter or scan in the Sample ID.

4.	Enter or scan in the Consolidation ID.

5.	Tab to the next record and repeat the steps until all records are completed.

6.	Click on the Print button to print the packing list if required.

7.	Click on the Print Label button to print a label for a specific sample.

8.	Verify packing list information and click on the Verify button, the verified packing list is automatically printed. If you exit the function before verifying the information, the same information will be displayed when re-entering.

9.	If one or more samples are marked missing, obtain a Force Accept number from the Sample Administrator, and enter the number when prompted. The force accept number is required for completing verification.

Important

If no Sample ID and/or Consolidation ID is entered, the sample is marked as missing.

Related System Topics

LIMS Functions Overview


Reprint Unverified Worksheets

Description

The Reprint Unverified Worksheets form is used to print a report of all unverified worksheets.

Pre-requisites

The Worksheets must have been registered in the LIMS system, and be unverified.

Steps

1.	Click on the OK button.

Related System Topics

LIMS Function Overview


Reprint Sample Packing List

Description

The Reprint Sample Packing List form is used to print a sample worksheet (packing list).

Pre-requisites

The Sample Packing List must have been registered in the LIMS system.

Steps

1.	In the Sample Worksheet ID field, either enter an ID or click on the [image]  Zoom button to open the Select Sample Packing List form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

2.	Click on the OK button.

Related System Topics

LIMS Function Overview


Reprint Verify Packing List

Description

The Reprint Verify Packing List form is used to print the Packing List verification.

Pre-requisites

The Packing List must have been verified in the Verify Worksheet Packing List form.

Steps

1.	In the Worksheet Number field, either enter a number or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Select Verified Worksheet form. Click on the required record, and click on the Select button to return the record.

2.	Click on the OK button.

Related System Topics

LIMS Functions Overview


Receive Registered Electronic Samples Overview

Description

The Receive Registered Electronic Samples module is used to view and electronically transfer LIMS sample information with registered monitoring points, to WMS.

Scope

The Receive Registered Electronic Samples high level component deals with the following functions:

•	LIMS Samples not on WMS

•	LIMS Transfer Problem Report Filter Criteria

•	Electronic Transfer Admin

•	Print Non Map Points

Related System Topics

LIMS Samples not on WMS

LIMS Transfer Problem Reprot Filter Criteria

Electronic Transfer Admin

Print Non Map Points


LIMS Samples not on WMS

Description

The LIMS Samples not on WMS form is used to transfer LIMS sample information with WMS registered monitoring points, to the WMS.

Pre-requisites

•	A LIMS sample number is required.

•	A Registered Monitoring Point link is required.

Steps

View and Select a Sample

1.	Click on the Range button and enter the Project ID and enter.

2.	Click on the sample record to be transferred.

3.	Click on the Register Sample button.

4.	The Select WMS Monitoring Point form will be displayed. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record.

Register a Non Programme Sample

Two messages will be displayed:

1.	" No scheduled samples found. Do you want to register sample as a Non Programme sample? "

•	Click on the Yes button.

•	Register a Non-Programme Sample. The LIMS Sample information will be displayed on the right-hand side of the screen.

•	A message will be displayed confirming the Sample registration. Click on the OK button to display the list of variables to be transferred.

2.	"Select Scheduled Sample"

•	A Select Scheduled Sample form will be displayed containing a selection of sample types.

•	View the samples and if the required sample is displayed, click on the sample record and click on the Compare Variables button.

•	A Compare LIMS variables with WMS variables form is displayed. If the variables correspond (with the exception of TDS which is a LIMS variable not found on WMS), click on the Register Sample Button.

•	A message will be displayed confirming the Sample registration. Click on the OK button to display the list of variables to be transferred. If the variables do not correspond, click on the Sample not found button and continue to Register a Non Programme Sample.

Important

Click on the Reject Sample button to cancel the sample’s transfer from LIMS.

Related System Topics

Receive Registered Electronic Samples Overview


Electronic Transfer Admin

Description

The Electronic Transfer Admin form is used to display a list of all LIMS samples with problems that can be transferred to the WMS through the electronic transfer process. The Sample status is also displayed, and can be Resolved, Not Resolved Rejected or All.

Pre-requisites

The samples must have been registered on the LIMS system, and have a status of Resolved/Not Resolved/Rejected or All.

Steps

View Problem Samples

•	Click on the Locate  [image] button and enter the information into one of the fields and press enter.

•	The required record will be displayed.

•	Click on Print Non Mapping Points button to print the required list.

Important

Reject a sample by clicking on the sample record, and by clicking on the Reject button.

Related System Topics

Receive Registered Electronic Samples Overview


Print Non Map Points

Description

The Print Non Map Points form is used to print a list of the LIMS samples that do not map to a WMS Monitoring Point and can be transferred to the WMS through the Electronic Transfer Process.

Pre-requisites

The samples must have been registered on the LIMS system, without mapping to a Monitoring Point.

Steps

Print Non-Map Points

1.	You can print Non-Map Points with the following ranges:

•	Enter a Project ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Q Lookup Projects (R info) form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record.

•	Enter the Client ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Q Lookup Clients (R info) form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record.

2.	Click in the Print Sample ID tick box if you require a report of all the LIMS samples registered at a specific monitoring point.

3.	Click on the Print Report button to print the report.

Related System Topics

Receive Registered Electronic Samples Overview


LIMS Transfer Problem Report Filter Criteria

Description

The LIMS Transfer Problem Report Filter Criteria form is used to print a list of the LIMS problem samples that can be transferred to WMS through the electronic transfer process, according to the status of the samples (Resolved/Not Resolved/Rejected/All).

Pre-requisites

The samples must have been registered on the LIMS system, and have a status of Resolved/Not Resolved/Rejected or All.

Steps

1.	Enter a Date From and tab.

2.	Enter a Date To and tab.

3.	Click on the required status box in the Select status field.

4.	Click on the Print Report Button.

Related System Topics

Receive Registered Electronic Samples Overview


Reports Overview

Description

The Samples and Results Registration Reports module is used to view or print reports on the amount of WMS samples registered by an operator, within a specific time period.

Scope

The Reports module deals with the following sub-modules:

•	Sample Registration Productivity Report for users Filter Criteria

•	Non-Scheduled Sample Registration Productivity Report for users Filter Criteria

Related System Topics

Sample Registration Productivity Report for users Filter Criteria

Non-Scheduled Sample Registration Productivity Report for users Filter Criteria


Sample Registration Productivity Report for users Filter Criteria

Description

The Sample Registration Productivity Report for users Filter Criteria provides information on the amount of WMS samples registered by an operator, within a specific time period.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Enter a Date From and tab (YYYY-MM-DD).

2.	Enter a Date To and tab (YYYY-MM-DD).

3.	Enter the Operator’s Login Code.

4.	Select either a detail or a summary report by clicking on the required Print Option radio button.

5.	Click on the Print or Display Samples button to obtain the required report.

Important

The information displayed is subject to the correct interpretation of the report.

Related System Topics

Reports Overview

Non-Scheduled Sample Registration Productivity Report for users Filter Criteria


Non-Scheduled Sample Registration Productivity Report for users Filter Criteria

Description

The Non-Scheduled Sample Registration Productivity Report for users Filter Criteria provides information on the amount of Non-Scheduled WMS samples registered within a specific time period by an operator.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Enter a Date From and tab (YYYY-MM-DD).

2.	Enter a Date To and tab (YYYY-MM-DD).

3.	Enter the Operator’s Login Code.

4.	Select either a detail or a summary report by clicking on the required option.

5.	Click on the Print or Display Samples button to obtain the required report.

Important

The information displayed is subject to the correct interpretation of the report.

Related System Topics

Report Overview

Sample Registration Productivity Report for users Filter Criteria


Data Format Selection Wizard

Description

The Data Format Selection Wizard form is used to select a specific format of the data to be imported  from other sources providing data. E.g. The Geo-database provides a geodata/format.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Click on the required data format record.

2.	Click on the Next button

You also have the option to view the import history samples of a specific data format by clicking on the History button.

Related System Topics

Import History


Import Directory Selection Wizard

Description

The Import Directory Selection Wizard form is used to select the directory where the files that are to be imported are stored.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Press F5 to open the path directory and select the specific path required.

2.	Click on the Next button

Related System Topics


Import File Select Wizard

Description

The Import File Select Wizard form is used to select all files to be imported.

Pre-requisites

This imported files must exist.

Steps

1.	In the Directory Name field, enter the name of a directory, click on the [image] Zoom button

2.	In the Import File Name field, enter a file name with its path, or click on the [image] button to select a file name.

3.	Click on the Next button

Related System Topics


Electronic Import Wizard

Description

The Electronic Import Wizard form is used to select/specify basic information needed to electronically import data

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	In the transfer type drop down field, select the type of source from which data will be imported.

•	S – Standard

•	E – External

•	A – Analyst

•	L – Logger

2.	Check the checkbox to specify that the data is monitoring program related.

3.	Click on the Next button to open the Data Format Select Wizard.

Related System Topics

Data Format Select Wizard


Import Summary View

Description

The Import Summary View  form is used to display a summary of the current electronic import.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

This is a view only form.

Additional options available on this form are to View Imported Data by clicking the Import Data V button, and view the History of Imported Data by clicking the View History button.

Related System Topics

Import History


Import Data View

Description

The Import Data View form is used to display imported data.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

This is a view only form.

Related System Topics

Import History


Import Batch Selection Wizard

Description

The Import Batch Selection Wizard form is used to administrate imported batches and transfer problems by registering missing ID’s and mapping external references. The batch will be sorted according to the batch start and end date.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Click on the required import batch record.

2.	Select either ‘Current Record’ or ‘All Records’ by clicking the required option.

3.	Click on the Next button.

Related System Topics


Import Monitoring Points Map

Description

The Import Monitoring Points Map (Wizard) form is used to display and map monitoring points of a specific import batch and will allow the user to specify the missing monitoring point ID’s. The monitoring point ID must be specified to map monitoring points used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Records may not be deleted. .

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

 Note: Only Monitoring Point ID may be edited.

3.	Enter the Monitoring Point ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Feature/External Reference Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

5.	Click on the Next button to go to the next form.

6.	Click on the back button to return to the previous form.

7.	Click on the exit button to go to the main menu.

You have the option to filter out records by specifying the Feature Reference Code then clicking the filter button.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Feature/External Reference Selection

Import Monitoring Variables Map


Import Conflicting References Decision Criteria

Description:

The Import Conflicting References Decision Criteria form enables you to specify whether the reference code must be the current reference code or an old (historical) reference code.

Steps:

1.	Select an option by clicking on the applicable radio button.

2.	Click on the Continue button to update the reference choice.

Related System Topics:


Consolidated Samples per WMS Sample Information Selection

Description

The Consolidated Samples per WMS Sample Information Selection (Wizard)  form is used to display and select the logical WMS samples to update the results ID’s.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Click on the required logical WMS sample.

2.	Click on the Monitoring Program Information button to update the monitoring program related information for the WMS Sample.

3.	Click on the Monitoring Action Specification button to update the monitoring action specifications for the WMS Sample.

4.	Click on the Monitor button to update the monitor for the WMS Sample.

5.	Click on the Laboratory button to update the laboratory for the WMS Sample.

6.	Click on the Analysis Method button to update the analysis method for the WMS Sample.

7.	Click on the Preservative button to update the preservative for the WMS Sample.

8.	Click on the Next button to go to the next form.

9.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

10.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics

Import Results ID’s Update Maintenance


Import Results ID's Update Maintenance

Description

The Import Results ID’s Update Maintenance form is used to maintain all the electronic imported WMS samples and to assist the user in selecting the correct ID’s for an imported WMS sample.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Focus will be on the missing ID field. Depending on the missing ID field, user must select an appropriate step below, and input the ID for each variable .

1.	Enter the Monitoring Action Specification ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Specification Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

The Monitoring Action Specification Name field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Action Specification ID.

2.	Enter the Preservative ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Preservative Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

 Note: The user can only update the Preservative ID if the Action Type is "Sample".

The Preservative Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Preservative ID.

3.	Enter the Monitor ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

The Monitor Name  will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitor ID.

4.	Enter the Laboratory ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

The Laboratory Name  will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Laboratory ID.

5.	Enter the Analysis Method ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Analysis Method Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

The Analysis Method Description  will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Analysis Method ID.

6.	Enter the Multiple Variable Parameter ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Multiple Variable Parameter Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

The Multiple Variable Parameter Name  will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multiple Variable Parameter ID.

7.	Click on the Programme Related Information button to open the Consolidated Analysis Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

 Note: This button will only be enabled if the information is monitoring programme related.

8.	Click on the Next button to go to the next form.

9.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

10.	Click on the Exit button to go the main menu.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Action Specification Selection

Preservative Selection

Analyst Selection

Analysis Method Selection

Multiple Variable Parameter Selection

Consolidated Analysis Selection


Monitoring Action Specification Selection

Description

The Monitoring Action Specification Selection form is used to select monitoring action specifications.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button. (Optional)

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to return the record.

Related System Topics


Import History View

Description:

The Import History View form is used to show all historical changes made to samples of a specific data format.

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on  the form.

Related System Topics

Import Summary View


Electronic Import Administration Wizard

Description

The Electronic Import Administration Wizard form is used to select/specify the basic information needed to electronically administrate data.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	In the transfer type drop down field, select the type of electronic import to administrate:

•	A – Analyst

•	E – External

•	L – Logger

•	S – Standard

2.	Click on the Next button.

Related System Topics

Data Format Selection Wizard


Consolidated Samples per Point and Depth Selection

Description

The Consolidated Samples per Point and Depth Selection (Wizard) form is used to display the logical WMS samples for which the imported reference data must be matched to the WMS equivalent attributes.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Click on the required sample record.

2.	Click on the Next button to go to the next form.

3.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

4.	Click on the Import Data View button to view the imported result information.

5.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

You also have the option to filter out records by specifying the Feature Reference Code then clicking on the filter button.

Related System Topics

Consolidated Samples per WMS Sample Information Selection

Import Data View


Import Monitoring Variables Map

Description

The Import Monitoring Variables Map (Wizard) form is used to display and map monitoring variables of a specific import batch and will allow the user to specify the missing monitoring variable and measuring unit ID’s.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Records may not be deleted. .

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

 Note: Only Monitoring Variable ID may be edited.

3.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

5.	Click on the Next button to go to the next form.

6.	Click on the back button to return to the previous form.

7.	Click on the exit button to go to the main menu.

You have the option to filter out records by specifying the Monitoring Variable Reference Code then clicking the filter button.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Selection

Import Samples


Consolidated Analysis Selection

Description

The Consolidated Analysis Selection form is used to select Monitoring program related information and to identify and update the missing ID’s.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button.

3.	If the correct id(s) does not appear in the list, click on the Not Found button to close the form.

Related System Topics


Consolidated Analysis Filter Criteria

Description:

The Consolidated Analysis Filter Criteria (Wizard) form is used to filter out Monitoring program related information records for selection.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Monitoring Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Monitoring Point Selection form, select a Monitoring Feature to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

2.	The Monitoring Point Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Monitoring Feature ID

3.	Enter the Monitoring Action Specification ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Specification Selection form, select a Monitoring Action Specification to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Monitoring Action Specification Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Action Specification ID.

5.	Enter the Sample Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form, select a Sample Type to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Sample Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Sample Type ID.

7.	Enter the Ecological Compartment ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Ecological Compartment Selection form, select a Eco Compartment to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Ecological Compartment Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Ecological Compartment Id

9.	Enter the Frequency Specification ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Frequency Specification Selection form, select a Frequency Specification to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

10.	The Frequency Specification Name and Frequency Specification Type will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Frequency Specification ID

11.	Enter the Monitor Liaison ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form, select a Monitoring Liaison to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

12.	The Monitor Abbreviation and Monitor Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Monitor ID

13.	Enter the Laboratory ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form, select a Laboratory to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

14.	The Laboratory Abbreviation and Laboratory Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Laboratory ID

15.	Enter the Container ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Container Selection form, select a Container Id to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

16.	The Container Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Container ID

17.	Enter the Preservative ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Preservative Selection form, select a Preservative to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

18.	The Preservative Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Preservative ID.

19.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form, select a Monitoring Variable to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

20.	The Monitoring Variable Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Monitoring Variable ID

21.	Enter the Analysis Method ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Analysis Method Selection form, select a Analysis Method to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

22.	The Analysis Method Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Analysis Method ID

 Click on the Next button to go to the next form.

 Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu

 Click the Report button to open the Options Decision Criteria for Consolidated Analysis View form where the Consolidated Analysis List Report is Executed

Related System Topics:

Monitoring Point Selection

Monitoring Action Specification Selection

Ecological Compartment Selection

Frequency Specification Selection

Analyst Selection

Container Selection

Preservative Selection

Monitoring Variable Selection

Analysis Method Selection


Import Physical WMS Analysis View

Description

The Import Physical WMS Analysis View form is used to display the results for a physical WMS sample. These results are grouped together using the WMS ID’s to come up with a possible WMS Sample.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on  the form.

Related System Topics-


Import Physical WMS Samples View

Description

The Import Physical WMS Samples View form is used to view the proposed physical WMS samples. Imported results are grouped together using the WMS ID’s and the combination of ID’s that make up a WMS sample. These WMS samples are the proposed samples that will/might be registered into WMS. To register any of the proposed samples, click on the Register button, alternatively click on the Register All button to register all the proposed samples.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

 Note: This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance will be available on  the form.

1.	Click on the Import Data View button to view the imported result information.

2.	Click on the Register Sample button to register the selected proposed sample into the WMS.

3.	Click on the Register All button to register all the WMS physical samples displayed on the form.

4.	Click on the Back button to go to previous form.

Related System Topics

Import Physical WMS Analysis View


Multiple Monitoring Variable Method Maintenance

Description

The Multiple Monitoring Variable Method Maintenance form is used to specify/maintain information that is common to the results for each variable for the sample. i.e. analysis methods, analysts, measuring units and analysis dates for variables with multiple parameters. When changes are made, all the results for that variable will be updated. The user can then proceed to enter results for each parameter.

Pre-requisites

The Sample must have been selected in the Register Results form.

Steps

Check all the multiple variable information:

•	If the information is correct, click on the Multiple Results button to register the results in the Multiple Monitoring Variable Results Registration form.

•	If the information is incorrect, first Edit a Variable Record, and then click on the Multiple Results button to register the results in the Multiple Monitoring Variable Results Registration form.

•	If the record does not exist, Create a Variable Record, and then click on the Multiple Results button to register the results in the Multiple Monitoring Variable Results Registration form.

Create a Variable Record:

 Note: The sample number and the consolidation ID will be displayed and may not change.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	In the Monitoring Variable field, either enter the Monitoring Variable ID and tab, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form. Either click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

3.	In the Analyst field, either enter the Analyst ID and tab, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form. Either click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

4.	In the Analysis Method field, either enter the Analysis Method ID and tab, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analysis Method Selection form. Either click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

5.	In the Measuring Unit field, either tab to allow the system to enter the measuring unit default into the field, or enter a Measuring Unit ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit Selection form. Click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return the record. If the record is not found in the list, click on the Not Found button and enter the required measuring unit.

6.	Tab to the Analysis Date field and enter the date.

7.	Tab to the Detection Limit field and enter the Result value if required.

8.	Tab to the Accreditation Status field, and indicate if the result is accredited or not, if required.

9.	Click on the Multiple Results button to enter the parameters of a multiple variable and their results (if available) on the Multiple Results Registration form.

10.	Once the results have been entered for all the multiple variables, click on the Last Record button to activate the result validation programme.  Note: Ensure that you’ve entered results for all the multiple variable of a sample before clicking on the Last Record button.

11.	Calculate the total numerical value of all results entered and enter this value in the field provided, when prompted.

12.	Enter the number of results entered on the template, in the field provided.

13.	Click on the OK button.

14.	Click on the Exit button.

Edit a Variable Record:

 Note: Only the analysis method, analyst, measuring unit and analysis date for a multiple variable may be modified, and not a monitoring variable name.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.  TIP: Follow relevant steps listed in Create a Variable Record.

4.	Once the Record has been successfully modified, click on the Multiple Results button to register the results in the Multiple Monitoring Variable Results Registration form OR click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Important

No deletion of records allowed.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Selection

Analyst Selection

Analysis Method Selection

Measuring Unit Selection

Multiple Monitoring Variable Results Registration


Depth Profile Method Maintenance

Description

The Depth Profile Method Maintenance form is used to specify analysis methods, analysts, measuring units and analysis dates for variables that were measured on specified depth interval (Profile).

Pre-requisites

The Sample must have been selected in the Register Results form.

Steps

Check the variable information:

•	If the information is correct, click on the Depth Profile Results button to register the results in the Depth Profile Results Registration form.

•	If the information is incorrect, first Edit a Variable Record, and then click on the Depth Profile Results button to register the results in the Depth Profile Results Registration form.

•	If the record does not exist, Create a Variable Record, and then click on the Depth Profile Results button to register the results in the Depth Profile Results Registration form.

Create a Variable Record:

 Note: The sample number and the consolidation ID will be displayed and may not change.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	In the Monitoring Variable field, either enter the Monitoring Variable ID and tab, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form. Either click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

3.	In the Analyst field, either enter the Analyst ID and tab, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form. Either click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

4.	In the Analysis Method field, either enter the Analysis Method ID and tab, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analysis Method Selection form. Either click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

5.	Tab to the Analysis Date field and enter the date.

6.	Tab to the Detection Limit field and enter the Result value if required.

7.	Tab to the Accreditation Status field, and indicate if the result is accredited or not, if required.

8.	Click on the Depth Profile Results button to create the result depth and input results (if available) on the Depth Profile Results Registration form.

9.	Once the last result information has been entered for all the variables, click on the Last Record button to activate the result validation programme.   Note: Ensure that you’ve entered results for all the variables of a sample before clicking on the Last Record button.

10.	Calculate the total numerical value of all results entered and enter this value in the field provided, when prompted.

11.	Enter the number of results entered on the template, in the field provided.

12.	Click on the OK button.

13.	Click on the Exit button.

Edit a Variable Record:

 Note: The monitoring variable ID may only be modified if the Additional Result Indicator is checked.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.  TIP: Follow relevant steps listed in Create a Variable Record.

4.	Once the Record has been successfully modified, click on the Depth Profile Results button to input the results (if available) in the Depth Profile Results Registration form OR click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Important

No deletion of variable allowed.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Selection

Analyst Selection

Analysis Method Selection

Depth Profile Results Registration


Time Interval Method Maintenance

Description

The Time Interval Method Maintenance form is used to specify analysis methods, analysts, measuring units for variables that were measured on specified time interval (logger).

Pre-requisites

The Sample must have been selected in the Register Results form.

Steps

Check the variable information:

•	If the information is correct, click on the Time Interval Results button to register the results in the Time Interval Results Registration form.

•	If the information is incorrect, first Edit a Variable Record, and then click on the Time Interval Results button to register the results in the Time Interval Results Registration form.

•	If the record does not exist, Create a Variable Record, and then click on the Time Interval Results button to register the results in the Time Interval Results Registration form.

Create a Variable Record:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	In the Monitoring Variable field, either enter the Monitoring Variable ID and tab, or click on the [image]   Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form. Either click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

3.	In the Analyst field, either enter the Analyst ID and tab, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form. Either click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

4.	In the Analysis Method field, either enter the Analysis Method ID and tab, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analysis Method Selection form. Either click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record, or if the required record is not found click on the Not Found button, enter the new record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

5.	Tab to the Detection Limit field and enter the Result value if required.

6.	Tab to the Accreditation Status field, and indicate if the result is accredited or not, if required.

7.	Click on the Time Interval Results button to input results on the Time Interval Results Registration form.

8.	Once the last result information has been entered for all the variables, click on the Last Record button to activate the result validation programme.   Note: Ensure that you’ve entered results for all the variables of a sample before clicking on the Last Record button.

9.	Calculate the total numerical value of all results entered and enter this value in the field provided, when prompted.

10.	Enter the number of results entered on the template, in the field provided.

11.	Click on the OK button.

12.	Click on the Exit button.

Edit a Variable Record:

 Note: The Variable record may only be modified if the Additional Result Indicator is checked.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.  TIP: Follow relevant steps listed in Create a Variable Record.

4.	Once the Record has been successfully modified, click on the Time Interval Results button to input the results (if available) in the Time Interval Results Registration form OR click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Important

No deletion of variable allowed.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Selection

Analyst Selection

Analysis Method Selection

Time Interval Results Registration


Register Monitoring Programme Design Maintenance

Description

The Register Monitoring Programme Design form is used to create and modify the detail of a Monitoring Programme design (as supplied by the programme custodian).

Pre-requisites

A Programme must have been registered.

Steps

Design a New Monitoring Programme:

1.	Enter an Eco Compartment ID and tab or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Ecological Compartment Selection form, choose the appropriate Ecological Compartment and click on the  [image] Select button, then tab.

2.	In the Type field click on the [image] Drop Down button to select either "Observation" or "Sample", then tab

3.	Enter a Monitoring Action Specification ID in the Monitoring Action Spec field, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Specification Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button, then tab.  If "Observation" was selected in the "Type" field, only Monitoring Actions classified as Observations is shown in the selection form.  For "Samples" only sampling actions are shown.

4.	Enter a Monitoring Frequency Specification ID in the Frequency Specification field, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Frequency Specification form, click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button, then tab

5.	The "Monitoring Points" and "Monitoring Variables" fields will open. Enter a Monitoring Point ID, and tab or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Point Selection form.  Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button, then tab.

6.	Click on the Mon Point Group button and enter a Monitoring Point Group ID  or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Point Group Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button.

7.	Click on the Select Point button to open the Monitoring Points form. These are the monitoring points that were linked to the Monitoring Point Group in the Monitoring Point Group form.

8.	Locate a monitoring point and click on the Write Points button.  Continue until all the required points are "written", i.e. copied to the Monitoring Points field in the Design Programme form OR Click on the Write All button to write all points in the table to the Monitoring Points field in the Design Programme form.

9.	 Tip:  If most of the points in the list is to be used, use the Write All button, return to the Monitoring Points field in the Design Programme form and delete the "unwanted" points.

10.	Click on the · button (top right hand corner) to close this form and click the Exit button of the Monitoring Point Group Filter Criteria form to return to the Design Programme form.

11.	The monitoring points in the "Monitoring Points" field can be edited and unwanted point deleted or points added. NOTE: Only monitoring points with a linked monitor can be entered.

12.	Tab to the Monitoring Variables field.  As with the monitoring points, different options are available to enter monitoring variables.

13.	Enter a Monitoring Variable ID, tab and click on the down arrow button to move to the next line and repeat the process for all the required Monitoring Variables OR click on the [image] button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form, click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button.  Repeat for all the required Monitoring Variables OR Select Monitoring Variables from Type by clicking on the Type button.

14.	A Select by Type request form will open.

15.	Enter a Variable Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Type form, select a Monitoring Variable Type and click on the [image] Select button.

16.	Click on the Select Variable button, the Variables form will open.

17.	Locate (Ctrl+L) the required variable and click on the Write Variable button to write single variables to the Monitoring Variables field of the Design Programme form.  Repeat for other variables OR Click on the Write All button to write all Monitoring Variables in the table to the Monitoring Variables field in the Design Programme form. TIP:   If most of the Monitoring Variables in the list are to be used, use the Write All button, return to the Monitoring Variables field in the Design Programme form and delete the "unwanted" Monitoring Variables.

18.	More than one Type can be selected and the Monitoring Variables written to the Monitoring Variables field in the Design Programme form.

19.	Click on the · button (top right hand corner) to close this form and click the Exit button of the Select by Type form to return to the Design Programme form.

20.	Monitoring Variables can be selected from Monitoring Variable Class.  Click on the Class button, a Select by Class request form will open.

21.	Enter a Monitoring Variable Class ID and tab or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Class form.  Locate the required Monitoring Variable Class and click on the [image] Select button.

22.	Click on the Select Variable button to open the Variables form.

23.	Locate (Ctrl+L) the required variable and click on the Write Variable button to write single variables to the Monitoring Variables field of the Design Programme form.  Repeat for other variables OR Click on the Write All button to write all Monitoring Variables in the form to the Monitoring Variables field in the Design Programme form.

24.	Click on the · button (top right hand corner) to close this form and click the Exit button of the Select by Class form to return to the Design Programme form.

25.	Monitoring Variables can be selected from Monitoring Variable Group. Click on the Group button, a Select by Group request form will open.

26.	Enter a Monitoring Variable Group ID and tab or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Variable Group form.  Locate the required Monitoring Variable Group and click on the [image] Select button.

27.	Click on the Select Variable button to open the Variables form.

28.	Locate (Ctrl+L) the required variable and click on the Write Variable button to write single variables to the Monitoring Variables field of the Design Programme form.  Repeat for other variables OR Click on the Write All button to write all Monitoring Variables in the form to the Monitoring Variables field in the Design Programme form.

29.	Click on the · button (top right hand corner) to close this form and click the Exit button of the Select by Group form to return to the Design Programme form.

30.	Any one or combination of the processes can be used to enter Monitoring Variables in the Design Programme form.

31.	More combinations of Eco Compartment; Type; Monitoring Action Spec and Frequency Specification can be entered in the upper half of the Design Programme form.  Repeat all the steps under point 2 for all "combinations".

32.	The functions of the Write Detail for Point and Write Detail for Selection buttons will be discussed later.

33.	After entering all the required data click on the Exit button.

34.	The next logical step is to click on Print Programme Design, (This programme is found under the Monitoring Programmes menu option in the Programme Registration submenu). Enter the Programme ID or click on the Zoom button to open the lookup list and select the relevant programme. Click on the Run Report button to print a design of the programme and hand it to the programme custodian to check.  If the custodian approves the design, then continue with 3.34.

35.	The Write Detail for Programme button starts a process that uses the information in the Programme Design and Peripheral Information to create Sample Types per Monitor for Monitoring Actions at Frequencies for specific Analysis Methods at Laboratories. Once the detail for a programme has been written, this button becomes disabled.

36.	This completes the creation of the Design of a new Monitoring Programme.

Related System Topics


Select Single File Name Wizard

Description

The Select Single File Name Wizard form is used to specify/select the name of the file containing data to be imported from other sources providing data. It is only used when the data to be imported is in a single file.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

1.	Enter the File Name and tab or click on the [image] Zoom button to browse for the file to import and click the open button.

2.	Click on the Next button to proceed.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Programme Register Filter Criteria

Description:

The Monitoring Programme Register Filter Criteria form enables you to filter out the Monitoring Programme Register records for maintenance.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: It is not compulsory to enter all the filter criteria. The user can enter any of the criteria, to narrow down the number of records retrieved.

1.	Enter the Monitoring Programme ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Programme Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Monitoring Programme Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Programme ID.

3.	Enter the Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Organisation ID.

5.	Enter the Person ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Programme Person Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Person Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Related Type Reason ID.

7.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Programme Register Maintenance form.

Note: Clicking the Back button will go to the previous form and the Exit button will go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Monitoring Programme Selection

Organisation Selection

Monitoring Programme Person Selection

Monitoring Programme Register Maintenance


Monitoring Programme Register Maintenance

Description

The Monitoring Programme Register Maintenance form is used to specify/maintain Monitoring Programme Register containing the monitoring requirements.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Monitoring Programme Record:

{ [image] Note: Only the current data owner of the record may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	In the Abbreviation field, enter the Monitoring Programme Abbreviation and tab.

3.	In the Name field, enter the Monitoring Programme Name and tab. This field must be unique

4.	In the Description field, enter the Monitoring Programme Description and tab.

5.	In the Start Date field, enter the Date on which the monitoring programme period begins.

6.	In the End Date field, enter the Date on which the monitoring programme period end.

7.	In the Priority No field, enter the Programme Priority ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Priority Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

8.	In the Monitoring Type field, click on the [image] Drop Down button and select the required option and tab.

9.	In the Program Owner field, enter the Programme Owner ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the User Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

10.	In the Custodian field, enter the Programme Custodian ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

11.	Tab to accept the new record.

12.	The Monitoring Programme ID will be automatically populated.

Edit Monitoring Programme record:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete Monitoring Programme record:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Priority Selection

User Organisation Selection

Employee Selection


Monitoring Programme Selection

Description

The Monitoring Programme Selection form is used to select monitoring programmes.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button. (Optional)

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to return the record.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Programme Priority Selection

Description

The Monitoring Programme Priority Selection form is used to select a valid Programme Priority.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button. (Optional)

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to return the record.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Programme History View

Description

The Monitoring Programme History View form is used to view all the historical changes made to the monitoring programme records.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: The user can enter any of the criteria, to narrow down the number of records retrieved and click the Filter button. Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

 Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Programme Analysis History View

Description

The Monitoring Programme Analysis History View form is used to view all the programme analysis history that belongs to the monitoring programme.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: The user can enter any of the criteria, to narrow down the number of records retrieved and click the Filter button. Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

 Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button.

Related System Topics


Programme Liaison Organisation Filter Criteria

Description:

The Programme Liaison Organisation Filter Criteria form enables you to filter out the Programme Liaison Organisation records to maintain the Monitoring Programme Register.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: It is not compulsory to enter all the filter criteria. The user can enter any of the criteria, to narrow down the number of records retrieved.

1.	Enter the Monitoring Programme ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Programme Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Monitoring Programme Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Programme ID.

3.	Enter the Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Organisation ID.

5.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Programme Register Maintenance form.

Note: Clicking the Back button will go to the previous form and the Exit button will go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Monitoring Programme Selection

Organisation Selection

Monitoring Programme Register Maintenance


Programme Liaison Person Filter Criteria

Description:

The Programme Liaison Person Filter Criteria form enables you to filter out the Programme Liaison Person records to maintain the Monitoring Programme Register.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: It is not compulsory to enter all the filter criteria. The user can enter any of the criteria, to narrow down the number of records retrieved.

1.	Enter the Monitoring Programme ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Programme Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Monitoring Programme Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Programme ID.

3.	Enter the Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Organisation ID.

5.	Enter the Person ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Programme Person Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Person Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Related Type Reason ID.

7.	Enter the Employee ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Person Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Related Type Reason ID.

9.	Enter the Employee ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

10.	The Person Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Related Type Reason ID.

11.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Programme Register Maintenance form.

Note: Clicking the Back button will go to the previous form and the Exit button will go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Monitoring Programme Selection

Organisation Selection

Monitoring Programme Person Selection

Monitoring Programme Register Maintenance


Monitoring Programme Point View

Description

The Monitoring Programme Point View form is used to view all the monitoring programme points that belong to the monitoring programme.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: The user can enter any of the criteria, to narrow down the number of records retrieved and click the Filter button. Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

 Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button, and the Monitoring Programme samples can be viewed by clicking the View button.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Programme Sample View

Description

The Monitoring Programme Sample View form is used to view all the programme samples that belongs to the monitoring programme.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: The user can enter any of the criteria, to narrow down the number of records retrieved and click the Filter button. Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance option will be available on the form.

 Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button.

Related System Topics


Consolidated Sample View

Description

The Consolidated Sample View form is used view of consolidated samples.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: The user can enter any of the criteria, to narrow down the number of records retrieved and click the Filter button. Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

 Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button, and the Monitoring Programme samples can be viewed by clicking the View button.

Related System Topics


Scheduled Samples View

Description

The Scheduled Samples View form is used to view the samples that are scheduled for monitoring.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: The user can enter any of the criteria, to narrow down the number of records retrieved and click the Filter button. Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

 Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button.

Related System Topics


Scheduled Analysis View

Description

The Scheduled Analysis View form is used to view the information required for the samples that are scheduled to be analysed.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: The user can enter any of the criteria, to narrow down the number of records retrieved and click the Filter button. Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

 Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button.

Related System Topics


Observation Analysis Schedule Report Filter Criteria

Description

The Observation Analysis Schedule Report Filter Criteria form is used to obtain a detailed report on all observations to be done by a monitor as specified in the search criteria.

Steps

1.	Enter criteria for the report you require. Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this report. You can obtain an Observation Analysis Schedule report in one of the following ways:

Date Ranges

•	Enter a Period From and Period To.

Selection Criteria

•	In the Managerial Office field, enter the Managing Organisation ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Responsible Office field, enter the Responsible Organisation ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitor field, enter Monitor ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Sample Type ID field, enter a Sample Type ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitoring Action field, enter a Monitoring Action ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitoring Point field, enter a Monitoring Point ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Point Selection form and select the required record.

2.	Once your report selection criteria has been chosen, you can do one of the following:

•	Click on the View Schedule button to display the information on Observation Analysis Schedule Report View form. After viewing the information close the form to return to the previous form.

•	To print a report, select the Reports you require by checking the checkboxes under "Select Report(s) to be printed", and click the Print Report button.

•	To export a report: In the Directory Name field, click on the Zoom button to open the Import Directory Selection Wizard form, enter the directory to import data or click on the Zoom button to select the directory, and specify the File Name in the File Name field, then click on Export button to export the saved report.

Related System Topics

Monitor Selection

Sample Type Selection

Monitoring Action Selection

Monitoring Point Selection


Sampling Process Problem Report Filter Criteria

Description

The Sampling Process Problem Report Filter Criteria form is used to obtain a detailed report on all problems encountered when processing samples.

Steps

1.	Enter criteria for the report you require. Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this report. You can obtain a report in one of the following ways:

Date Ranges

•	Enter a Period From and Period To.

Selection Criteria

•	In the Managerial Office field, enter the Managing Organisation ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Responsible Office field, enter the Responsible Organisation ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitor field, enter Monitor ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitoring Point field, enter a Monitoring Point ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Point Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Sample Type ID field, enter a Sample Type ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form and select the required record.

2.	Once your report selection criteria has been chosen, you can do one of the following:

•	To print a report, select the Reports you require by checking the checkboxes under "Select Report(s) to be printed", and click the Print Report button.

•	To export a report: In the Directory Name field, click on the Zoom button to open the Import Directory Selection Wizard form, enter the directory to import data or click on the Zoom button to select the directory, and specify the File Name in the File Name field, then click on Export Report button to export the saved report.

Related System Topics

Monitor Selection

Sample Type Selection

Monitoring Point Selection


Laboratory Analysis Schedule Report Filter Criteria

Description

The Laboratory Analysis Schedule Report Filter Criteria form is used to obtain a detailed report on all analysis to be done by laboratories as specified in the search criteria.

Steps

1.	Enter criteria for the report you require. Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this report. You can obtain a report in one of the following ways:

Date Ranges

•	Enter a Period From and Period To.

Selection Criteria

•	In the Managerial Office field, enter the Managing Organisation ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Responsible Office field, enter the Responsible Organisation ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitor field, enter Laboratory ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Sample Type ID field, enter a Sample Type ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitoring Action field, enter a Monitoring Action ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitoring Point field, enter a Monitoring Point ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Point Selection form and select the required record.

2.	Once your report selection criteria has been chosen, you can do one of the following:

•	Click on the View Report button to display the information on Laboratory Analysis Schedule Report View form. After viewing the information close the form to return to the previous form.

•	To print a report, select the Reports you require by checking the checkboxes under "Select Report(s) to be printed", and click the Print Report button.

•	To export a report, In the Directory Name field, click on the Zoom button to open the Import Directory Selection Wizard form, enter the directory to import data or click on the Zoom button to select the directory,  then click on Export Report button to export the saved report.

Related System Topics

Monitor Selection

Sample Type Selection

Monitoring Action Selection

Monitoring Point Selection


Monitoring Schedule Report Filter Criteria

Description

The Monitoring Schedule Report Filter Criteria form is used to obtain a detailed report on all samples to be taken by a monitor as specified in the search criteria.

Steps

1.	Enter criteria for the report you require. Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this report. You can obtain a report in one of the following ways:

Date Ranges

•	Enter a Period From and Period To.

Selection Criteria

•	In the Managerial Office field, enter the Managing Organisation ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Responsible Office field, enter the Responsible Organisation ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitor field, enter Monitor ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Sample Type ID field, enter a Sample Type ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitoring Action field, enter a Monitoring Action Specification ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Specification Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitoring Point field, enter a Monitoring Point ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Point Selection form and select the required record.

2.	Once your report selection criteria has been chosen, you can do one of the following:

•	Click on the View Schedule button to display the information on Monitoring Schedule Report View form. To print tags click on the Print Tags button from this form. After viewing the information close the form to return to the previous form.

•	To print a report, select the Reports you require by checking the checkboxes under "Select Report(s) to be printed", and click the Print Report button.

•	To export a report: In the Directory Name field, click on the Zoom button to open the Import Directory Selection Wizard form, enter the directory to import data or click on the Zoom button to select the directory, and specify the File Name in the File Name field, then click on Export Reports button to export the saved report.

Related System Topics

Monitor Selection

Sample Type Selection

Monitoring Action Specification Selection

Monitoring Point Selection


Tags per Monitoring Point


Tags to be Printed Maintenance


Monitoring Schedule Report View

Description

The Monitoring Schedule Report View form is used to view a schedule on all samples to be taken by a monitor.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form to view monitoring schedule report.

 Note: You also have the option to print a tag containing all the necessary information for the selected sample by clicking on the Print Tags button.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Programme Sample Analysis View

Description

The Programme Analysis View form is used to view all the programme analysis that belongs to the monitoring programme.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: The user can enter any of the criteria, to narrow down the number of records retrieved and click the Filter button. Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

 Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button.

Related System Topics


Sampling Audit Report Filter Criteria

Description

The Sampling Audit Report Filter Criteria form is used to check the amount of samples scheduled and received.

Steps

1.	Enter criteria for the report you require. Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this report. You can obtain a report in one of the following ways:

Date Ranges

•	Enter a Period From and Period To.

Selection Criteria

•	In the Managerial Office field, enter the Managing Organisation ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Responsible Office field, enter the Responsible Organisation ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitor field, enter Monitor ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Sample Type ID field, enter a Sample Type ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitoring Action field, enter a Monitoring Action Specification ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Specification Selection form and select the required record.

•	In the Monitoring Point field, enter a Monitoring Point ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Point Selection form and select the required record.

2.	Once your report selection criteria has been chosen, you can do one of the following:

•	To print a report, select the Reports you require by checking the checkboxes under "Select Report(s) to be printed", and click the Print Report button.

•	To export a report, In the Directory Name field, click on the Zoom button to open the Import Directory Selection Wizard form, enter the directory to import data or click on the Zoom button to select the directory, and specify the File Name in the File Name field, then click on Export Report button to export the saved report.

Related System Topics

Monitor Selection

Sample Type Selection

Monitoring Action Specification Selection

Monitoring Point Selection


Observation Analysis Schedule Report View

Description

The Observation Analysis Schedule Report View form is used to obtain a detailed report on all observations to be done by a monitor.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form to view observation analysis schedule report. No maintenance to be done on the form.

Related System Topics


Laboratory Analysis Schedule Report View

Description

The Laboratory Analysis Schedule Report View form is used to obtain a detailed report on all laboratories to be done by a laboratory.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form to view laboratory analysis schedule report. No maintenance to be done on the form.

Related System Topics


Consolidated Analysis View

Description

The Consolidated Analysis View form is used to view analysis that was done at a point.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: The user can enter any of the criteria, to narrow down the number of records retrieved and click the Filter button. Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

 Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button, and the Analysis can be viewed by clicking the View button.

Related System Topics


Scheduled Analysis Filter Criteria

Description

The Scheduled Analysis Filter Criteria form is used to select Scheduled Analysis to display on Scheduled View form.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Tip: If no fields are entered in the query form, the display will show all active Scheduled Analysis. By entering one or more fields, the display will be filtered to that of the selected combination.

1.	Enter the Monitoring Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Monitoring Point Selection form, select a Monitoring Feature to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

2.	The Monitoring Point Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Monitoring Feature ID

3.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form, select a Monitoring Variable to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

4.	The Monitoring Variable Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Monitoring Variable ID

5.	Enter the Analysis Method ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open an Analysis Method Selection form, select an Analysis Method to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

6.	The Analysis Method Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Analysis Method ID

 Note: The Next button will close the form and open the Scheduled Analysis View form

 Note: The Report button enables the user to open the Options Decision Criteria for Scheduled Analysis View from where the Scheduled Analysis List Report is executed

 Note: The Exit button will close the form and return to the main menu

Related System Topics

Monitoring Point Selection

Monitoring Variable Selection

Analysis Method Selection


Scheduled Sample Filter Criteria

Description

The Scheduled Sample Filter Criteria form displays all Filters that can be used to select Scheduled Sample to display on Scheduled Sample View form.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Tip: If no fields are entered in the query form, the display will show all active Scheduled Samples. By entering the Feature field, the display will be filtered to that of the selected combination.

1.	Enter the Monitoring Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Monitoring Point Selection form, select a Monitoring Feature to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

2.	The Monitoring Point Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Monitoring Feature ID

 Note: The Next button will close the form and open the Scheduled Sample View form

 Note: The Report button enables the user to open the Options Decision Criteria for Scheduled Sample View from where the Scheduled Sample List Report is executed

 Note: The Exit button will close the form and return to the main menu

Related System Topics

Monitoring Point Selection


Consolidated Sample Filter Criteria

Description:

The Consolidated Sample Filter Criteria (Wizard) form displays all Filters that can be used to select Consolidated Sample to display on Consolidated Sample View form

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Monitoring Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Monitoring Point Selection form, select a Monitoring Feature to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

2.	The Monitoring Point Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Monitoring Feature ID

3.	Enter the Monitoring Action Specification ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Specification Selection form, select a Monitoring Action Specification to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Monitoring Action Specification Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Action Specification ID.

5.	Enter the Sample Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form, select a Sample Type to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Sample Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Sample Type ID.

7.	Enter the Frequency Specification ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Frequency Specification Selection form, select a Frequency Specification to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Frequency Specification Name and Frequency Specification Type will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Frequency Specification ID

9.	Enter the Monitor Liaison ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form, select a Monitoring Liaison to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

10.	The Monitor Abbreviation and Monitor Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Monitor ID

11.	Enter the Laboratory ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form, select a Laboratory to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

12.	The Laboratory Abbreviation and Laboratory Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Laboratory ID

13.	Enter the Container ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Container Selection form, select a Container Id to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

14.	The Container Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Container ID

15.	Enter the Preservative ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Preservative Selection form, select a Preservative to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

16.	The Preservative Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Preservative ID.

 Click on the Next button will close the form and open the Consolidated Sample View form

 Click on the Exit button close the form and return to the main menu

 Click the Report button to open the Options Decision Criteria for Consolidated Analysis View form where the Consolidated Analysis List Report is Executed

Related System Topics:

Monitoring Point Selection

Monitoring Action Specification Selection

Ecological Compartment Selection

Frequency Specification Selection

Analyst Selection

Container Selection

Preservative Selection

Monitoring Variable Selection

Analysis Method Selection


Monitoring Programme Sample Filter Criteria

Description:

The Monitoring Programme Sample Filter Criteria (Wizard) form is used to filter out Monitoring program related information records for selection.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Monitoring Programme ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Monitoring Programme Selection form, select a Monitoring Programme to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

2.	The Monitoring Programme Abbreviation and Monitoring Programme Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Monitoring Feature ID

3.	Enter the Monitoring Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Monitoring Point Selection form, select a Monitoring Feature to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

4.	The Monitoring Point Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Monitoring Feature ID

5.	Enter the Monitoring Action Specification ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Specification Selection form, select a Monitoring Action Specification to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Monitoring Action Specification Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Action Specification ID.

7.	Enter the Sample Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form, select a Sample Type to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Sample Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Sample Type ID.

9.	Enter the Ecological Compartment ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Ecological Compartment Selection form, select a Eco Compartment to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

10.	The Ecological Compartment Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Ecological Compartment Id

11.	Enter the Frequency Specification ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Frequency Specification Selection form, select a Frequency Specification to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

12.	The Frequency Specification Name and Frequency Specification Type will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Frequency Specification ID

13.	Enter the Monitor Liaison ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form, select a Monitoring Liaison to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

14.	The Monitor Abbreviation and Monitor Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Monitor ID

15.	Enter the Laboratory ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form, select a Laboratory to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

16.	The Laboratory Abbreviation and Laboratory Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Laboratory ID

17.	Enter the Container ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Container Selection form, select a Container Id to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

18.	The Container Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Container ID

19.	Enter the Preservative ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Preservative Selection form, select a Preservative to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

20.	The Preservative Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Preservative ID.

 Click on the Next button will close the form and open the Monitoring Programme Sample View form.

 Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu

 Click the Report button to open the Options Decision Criteria for Consolidated Analysis View form where the Consolidated Analysis List Report is Executed

Related System Topics:

Monitoring Point Selection

Monitoring Action Specification Selection

Ecological Compartment Selection

Frequency Specification Selection

Analyst Selection

Container Selection

Preservative Selection


Monitoring Point Selection

Description

The Monitoring Point Selection form is used to select a specific monitoring point record.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The form will be automatically displayed with the monitoring point records’ information.

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

3.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

4.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Programme Sample Analysis Filter Criteria

Description:

The Monitoring Programme Sample Analysis Filter Criteria (Wizard) form displays all Filters that can be used to select Monitoring Programme Sample Analysis to display on Monitoring Programme Sample Analysis View form.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Monitoring Programme ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Monitoring Programme Selection form, select a Monitoring Programme to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

2.	The Monitoring Programme Abbreviation and Monitoring Programme Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Monitoring Feature ID

3.	Enter the Monitoring Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Monitoring Point Selection form, select a Monitoring Feature to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

4.	The Monitoring Point Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Monitoring Feature ID

5.	Enter the Monitoring Action Specification ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Specification Selection form, select a Monitoring Action Specification to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Monitoring Action Specification Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Action Specification ID.

7.	Enter the Sample Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form, select a Sample Type to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Sample Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Sample Type ID.

9.	Enter the Ecological Compartment ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Ecological Compartment Selection form, select an Eco Compartment to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

10.	The Ecological Compartment Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Ecological Compartment Id

11.	Enter the Frequency Specification ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Frequency Specification Selection form, select a Frequency Specification to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

12.	The Frequency Specification Name and Frequency Specification Type will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Frequency Specification ID

13.	Enter the Monitor Liaison ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form, select a Monitoring Liaison to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

14.	The Monitor Abbreviation and Monitor Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Monitor ID

15.	Enter the Laboratory ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form, select a Laboratory to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

16.	The Laboratory Abbreviation and Laboratory Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Laboratory ID

17.	Enter the Container ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Container Selection form, select a Container Id to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

18.	The Container Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Container ID

19.	Enter the Preservative ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Preservative Selection form, select a Preservative to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

20.	The Preservative Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Preservative ID.

21.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form, select a Variable to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

22.	The Monitoring Variable Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Monitoring Variable ID

23.	Enter the Analysis Method ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analysis Method Selection form, select an Analysis Method to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

24.	The Analysis Method Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Analysis Method ID

 Click on the Next button will close the form and open the Monitoring Programme Sample Analysis View form.

 Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu

 Click the Report button to open the Options Decision Criteria for Consolidated Analysis View form where the Consolidated Analysis List Report is Executed

Related System Topics:

Monitoring Point Selection

Monitoring Action Specification Selection

Ecological Compartment Selection

Frequency Specification Selection

Analyst Selection

Container Selection

Preservative Selection

Monitoring Variable Selection

Analysis Method Selection

Monitoring Programme Sample Analysis View


Class

Description	Class is short for classification type. Class Types are divided into parent and child types and represent a hierarchy of Class Items in a Class Structure. The Class Type form is used to group class items into class structures. For example, a river is an item in a class type that is represented in a class structure called Water Features.

Important	This field is centrally maintained; contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information.

Examples	Water Quality Feature Types


Class Type Name

Description	Class is short for classification type. Class Types are divided into parent and child types and represent a hierarchy of Class Item in a Class Structure.

Important	This field is centrally maintained; contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information.

Examples	River is a class type (river is a class item that becomes a class type when linked in a class structure hierarchy of water features)


Subset Type Caption

Description	The Subset Type Caption is a name for a specific subset type that uniquely identifies the subset.

Examples	A – Geographical Area


Name in Related Types

Description	Name refers to the specific class type in which the related type exists.

Examples	Water Quality Feature Types


Classification Structure Name in Related Types

Description	The Classification Structure Name is the name of the class structure in which the related type exists.

Examples	Water Quality Feature Types


Related Type Reason

Description	The Related Type Reason provides an explanation for the relationship between types.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters.

Examples	Dams relate to historical


! Note

Description	The ! Note indicates whether any result values were included that were higher than could be measured.

Format(s)	1 character.

Examples	>


Feature Colour

Description	The Feature Colour is the colour that is used to depict specific feature types on a map.

Format(s)	Bitmap image.

Examples


Symbol Colour

Description	Symbol Colour refers to the colour used to depict specific feature symbols on a map.

Format(s)	Bitmap image.

Examples


Symbol Image

Description	Symbols are used to indicate specific features spatially.

Format(s)	Bitmap image.

Examples


Default Colour

Description	The Default Colour is the colour in which the layer will be spatially displayed if no other colour has been specified.

Examples	Light Green


Outline Colour

Description	The Outline Colour refers to the outline colour in which the polygon feature will be displayed.

Examples	Dark Green


Find Class Item Name

Description	The Find Class Item Name field is used to search for a class item by name.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Important	This field is case sensitive.

Examples	Bio*


Item Name

Description	The Item Name identifies the Class Item.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	Biomonitoring


  Item Dwa Code

Description	The Item Dwa Code is an internal reference code.

Format(s)	Maximum 8 characters.

Examples	9


Measuring Unit Abbreviation

Description	A Measuring Unit Abbreviation is the international code for the measuring unit used to define the measured value of a monitoring variable in terms of its unit and the conversion factors between like units.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 characters.

Examples	%


Description in Class Item

Description	The Class Item Description is a full description of the item.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 Upper Case characters.

Examples	REPRESENTATIVES OF FOREIGN GOVERNMENTS


Variable Abbreviation

Description	The Variable Abbreviation is a short description of the monitoring variable.

Format(s)	Maximum 20 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field, when maintaining Minimum Required Variables for Monitoring Types.

Examples	AZAR-Diss-Water


Variable Type

Description	The Monitoring Variable Type is a type or kind of variable measured within the ecological compartment.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field when maintaining Minimum Required Variables for Monitoring Types.

Examples	Dissolved iron in water, or acid soluble iron in water and describes the analysis process/method for variables.


Exist in Class Structure

Description	This field displays the Class Structure in which the Class Item exists.

Examples	Environment Assessment Types.


Number in Structure Level

Description	The Number is the amount of valid levels in a Class Structure.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	1


Name in Structure Level

Description	The Name identifies the Structure Level.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 mixed case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	One


Class ID

Description	The Class ID uniquely identifies the class or classification.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10267


Name in Classification Structure

Description	The name identifies the Class Structure. Class Structures refer to the specific group of classification types that are distinct. Class Structures are often hierarchical, in which one or more Class Types are represented by another (parent) type.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 mixed case characters.

Important	This field is case sensitive.

Examples	Addressee Types


Explanation in Classification Structure

Description	The explanation provides a reason for the existence of the structure.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed case characters.

Examples	Addressee of the organisation legally responsible for the correspondence


Number in Valid Levels

Description	The Valid Levels number indicates the amount of valid levels in a structure.

Important	At least one level must be selected, starting from level one.

Examples	 1


Name in Valid Levels

Description	The Valid Levels name identifies the levels in a structure.

Important	At least one level must be selected, starting from level one.

Examples	one


Find Env Survey Template

Description	The Find Env Survey Template field is used to search for an Environmental Survey Template record by name.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters, automatically stored as uppercase.

Examples	SA*


Environmental Survey Template Name

Description	The Environmental Survey Template Name uniquely identifies the Environmental Survey Template.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters, automatically stored as uppercase.

Important	 When editing, take care not to change the meaning or uniqueness of the name.

Examples	SOUTH AFRICAN SCORING SYSTEM (SASS)


Environmental Survey Template Definition

Description	The Environmental Survey Template Definition specifies the function of the Environmental Survey Template.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed characters.

Examples	A biological index using macro invertebrate families to determine the ecological integrity of riverine systems.


Maintain Template Characteristics button

Click on this button to define and maintain groups of questions for each Environmental Survey Template.


Symbol ID

Description	The Symbol ID is a unique sequential number used to identify symbol items.

Format(s)	The number must be smaller than 32767.

Important	No duplicate ID’s are accepted.

Examples	10


Symbol Picture

Description	The Symbol Picture is a bitmap that represents specific features on a map. One symbol can be used for multiple types of features.

Format(s)	Bitmap image.

Examples


Colour ID

Description	The Colour ID is a unique sequential number used to identify colour items.

Format(s)	The number must be smaller than 32767.

Important	This is a compulsory information field. No duplicate ID’s are accepted.

Examples	21


Colour Name

Description	The Colour Name is a description of the colour.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 upper case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field. No duplicate names are accepted.

Examples	BLUE


Picture

Description	The Picture is a bitmap used to represent a specific feature type, with the colour on a map.

Format(s)	Bitmap image.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples


Fill Pattern ID

Description	The Fill Pattern ID is a sequential number given to a Fill Pattern.

Format(s)	The number must be smaller than 32767.

Important	This is a compulsory information field. No duplicate ID’s may be entered.

Examples	10


Fill Picture

Description	The Fill Picture is a bitmap pattern that represents a specific feature type (polygon) with the Fill Pattern on a map.

Format(s)	Bitmap image.

Important	This is a compulsory information field. No duplicate records are accepted.

Examples


Name in Map Scale

Description	The Name identifies the map scale.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field. No duplicate names are accepted.

Examples	10 000 scale


Scale value

Description	Scale is the size of the map in relation to reality.

Format(s)	The number must be smaller than 32767.

Important	This is a compulsory information field. No duplicate scales are accepted.

Examples	10 000


Default in Map Scale

Description	The Default Scale is the scale used to represent spatial layers, unless otherwise specified.

Important	One default record must always be selected.

Examples


Layer Name

Description	The Layer Name identifies the spatial layer, and is listed alphabetically.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field. No duplicate names are accepted.

Examples	BOREHOLE


Layer Description

Description	The Layer Description explains the name and use of the layer.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples	BOREHOLES on 1:50 000


Type

Description	Type indicates the status of the layer, and is by default permanent.

Important	This is a display-only field.

Example	P=Permanent


Default Colour and Picture

Description	The Default Colour and Picture in which the layer will be spatially displayed if no other colour is specified.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	Light Green


Outline Colour and Picture

Description	The Outline Colour and Picture in which the outline of the polygon feature will be spatially displayed if no other colour is specified.

Examples	Dark Green


Background Layer

Description	A Background Layer can be specified to automatically and simultaneously display with the foreground layer in GIS.

Important	One or more layers can be added, however this is not a compulsory action.

Examples	SOUTH AFRICAN RIVERS


Library Name

Description	The Library Name is the name given to a library of layers with a specific map scale.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field. No duplicate names are accepted.

Examples	LIB 50


Library Description

Description	The Library Description is the map scale ratio.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	1:50 000


From Date

Description	The From Date is the date on which the specified season begins.

Format(s)	(MM-DD).

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	03-01 (March - the first).


To Date

Description	The To Date is the date on which the specified season ends.

Format(s)	(MM-DD).

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	03-31 (March - the thirty first).


Date From

Description	The Date From is the date on which the specified period/record begins.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


Date To

Description	The Date To is the date on which the specified period ends.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD.

Examples	1999-10-30


Client
Client ID

Description	The Client ID is a user allocated reference for LIMS projects.

Format(s)	Maximum 9 characters.

Examples	IWQS


Print Sample ID's

Click in the Print Sample ID tick box if you require a report of all the LIMS samples registered at a specific monitoring point.


LIMS SMPL ID

Description	This is a LIMS System generated number that is obtained after sample information has been transferred to the LIMS, and cannot be changed.

Format(s)	Maximum 8 numerics.

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples	99875390


Project ID

Description	The Project ID is a user allocated number for LIMS projects.

Format(s)	Maximum 7 characters.

Examples	ADHOC


Source ID

Description	The Source ID identifies the monitoring point where the sample was taken.

Format(s)	Maximum 9 characters/numerics.

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples	SPOOR12


Sample/Observation Type ID

Description	The Sample/Observation Type ID uniquely identifies the type of analysis to be performed on a sample or the field measurements to be taken.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	12


Sample/Observation Type Name

Description	The Sample/Observation Type Name identifies the type of analysis to be performed on a sample or the field measurements to be taken.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 uppercase characters.

Examples	MACRO - IWQS


Sample Method ID

Description	The Sample Method ID uniquely identifies the specific type of monitoring task performed.

Format(s)	1 Character.

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples	R


Sample Method Description

Description	The Sample Method Description identifies the specific type of monitoring task performed.

Format(s)	40 Upper case characters.

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples	GRAB WATER SAMPLE


Group Code

Description	Group Code or Determinant Group refers to the analysed group of constituents or analysis methods, as used on LIMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 6 characters/numerics.

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples	TRME70


User Reference

Description	The User Reference is a reference supplied by the person submitting the sample.

Format(s)	Maximum 20 characters.

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples	SAPPI EXP1 18(D4)


Secondary Read

Description	The Secondary Read is a data field generally used to enter the depth at which a sample was taken.

Format(s)	 Decimals.

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples	2.2


Secondary Ind Code

Description	The Secondary Indicator Code indicates the type of sample depth reading taken.

Format(s)	Maximum 1 character.

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples	T = Vertical Integrated Sample.


Register Sample Button

Click on this button to Register the Sample.


Reject Sample Button

Click on the Reject Sample button to cancel the sample’s transfer from LIMS.


Print Non-Mapping Points button

Click on Print Non Mapping Points to print the required list.


Worksheet Number

Description	The Worksheet ID Number identifies the Sample Worksheet and Packing List.

Format(s)	Maximum 6 numerics/characters.

Examples	8


Sample Worksheet ID

Description	The Sample Worksheet ID identifies the Sample Worksheet and Packing List.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	001103


Login Code

Description	The Login Code identifies the person (user) performing an action.

Format(s)	Maximum 8 characters.

Examples	wmsuser


Close Box Button

Click on this button to send the samples to LIMS.


Monitoring Variable ID

Description	The Monitoring Variable ID uniquely identifies the monitoring variable. Monitoring Variables are also known as determinants or constituents.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	3


Monitoring Variable Name

Description	The Monitoring Variable Name identifies the monitoring variable. Monitoring Variables are also known as determinants or constituents.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	ALUMINIUM, ARSENIC, BORON


Monitoring Variable Abbreviation

Description	The Monitoring Variable Abbreviation is used to identify a monitoring variable and the abbreviation is derived from the names of the element or property, variable type and eco-compartment, where relevant.

Format(s)	Maximum 20 characters

Examples	Al-Diss-Water, As-Aext-Water, B-Tot-Solids


Sample Date & Time

Description	The Sample Date & Time is the date and time on which the sample was taken.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD  HH:MM

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	1999-06-10  12:10


Sample Status History

Description	The Sample Status History refers to the sample's status in the past.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 upper case characters.

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples	SAMPLE RESULTS RELEASED


Mon Variables Button

Click on this button to display all the monitoring variables required for analysis of the specific sample.


Print Result Sheet Button

Click on this button to print the sample results or to print a blank result sheet where you can manually enter results.


Action Type

Description	The Action Type refers to the method in which the sample is obtained, and can be either through observation, sample methods or survey (questionnaire).

Format(s)	Maximum 15 mixed case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	Sample, Observation or Questionnaire


Sample Status

Description	The Sample Status refers to the present status of the sample.

Format(s)	Maximum 3 upper case characters (Active, Rejected, Problem or Released).

Examples	REL


ID

Description	The ID is a system-generated Non-Programme Sample number.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples	1


Monitor ID

Description	The Monitor ID uniquely identifies an organisation that collects samples or obtains field readings. The Monitor can also be referred to as an analyst when field measurements are recorded.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	10945


Monitor Name

Description	The Monitor Name uniquely identifies an organisation that collects samples or obtains field readings. The Monitor can also be referred to as an analyst when field measurements are recorded.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	NC- UPINGTON GEOHYDROLOGY


Monitor Abbreviation

Description	The Monitor Abbreviation is a shortened version of the Monitor Name. A monitor is an organisation that collects samples or obtains field readings. The Monitor can also be referred to as an analyst when field measurements are recorded.

Format(s)	Maximum 20upper case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	NC- UPINGTON GEOHYDROLOGY


Result

Description	The Result is the value received after the variable has been analysed.

Format(s)	Maximum 8 decimals.

Important	Only enter the numerical value for results with a less than (<) sign, e.g. <5, enter 5.

Examples	12.3


Result Depth

Description	The Result Depth refers to the depth at which the sample was taken.

Format(s)	Decimals.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	 0.000


Multiple Variable Parameter ID

Description	The Multiple Variable Parameter ID uniquely identifies the parameter.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples	23


Multiple Variable Parameter Abbreviation

Description	The Multiple Variable Parameter Abbreviation identifies the default parameters.

Format(s)	Maximum 6 uppercase characters/numerics.

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples	2ACT CHLOROPHYTA - ACTINASTRUM


Alpha Result

Description	The Alpha Result value is a single character result having specific meaning. E.g. P = present.

Format(s)	1 Character only.

Important	The system will evaluate valid alpha values and a warning sign will be displayed.

Examples	P = present


Number of Alpha Results

Description	The Number of Alpha Results value indicates the number of alpha results that have been entered into the system for a specific consolidation process.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	2


Numeric Result

Description   The Numeric Result value is a numerical value that is measured according to the prescribed analysis method.

Format(s)	Decimal.

Examples	20


Analysis Date

Description	The Analysis Date is the date on which the sample was analysed.

Format(s)	YYYY/MM/DD

Examples	1999/04/19


Analyst ID

Description	The Analyst ID, also referred to as the laboratory or monitor ID uniquely identifies the person or organisation that takes and analyses samples.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	1


Analyst Name

Description	The Analyst Name, also referred to as the laboratory or monitor name identifies the person or organisation that takes and analyses samples.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	IWQS


Reason for Organisation not eligible for Selection

Description     The Reason for Organisation not eligible for Selection, provides a reason for the organisation not being selectable as a parent. This applies even though the records have the same Name, basic Org Type and Dwaf Rel. Ind Values.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples	Cannot be own parent.


Continue Button

Click on the Continue button to register the results in the Multiple Results form.


Numeric Results Total

Description	The Numeric Results Total is the calculated numeric total of all results entered for a sample.

Format(s)	Decimals.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	3.29


Number of Result Records

Description	The Number of Result Records is the total number of result records entered.

Format(s)	Maximum 6 numerics.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	7


OK Button

Click on this button to activate the process.


Detection Limit

Description	The Detection Limit is the lowest reliable value that can be measured with the specific analysis method.

Format(s)	Decimals.

Examples	0.100


Measuring Unit ID

Description	The Measuring Unit ID uniquely identifies the unit used to count or measure.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647.

Examples	1


Converted Unit ID

Description	The Converted Unit ID uniquely identifies the unit used to count or measure.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647.

Examples	1


Last Result Button

Click on this button to activate the result validation process.


Analysis Method ID

Description	The Analysis Method ID uniquely identifies the process used to analyse a sample and the analysis method for the monitoring variable.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10000027


Analysis Method Name

Description	The Analysis Method Name identifies the process used to analyse a sample.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 upper case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field. This field must summarize the instrumentation techniques and procedures used to uniquely identify changes and conditions that can be attributed to differences in the monitoring variable's measured result.

Examples	ICP EMISSION SPECTROSCOPY 34000 SPECTRO, FILTER SAMPLE THROUGH 0.45UM MEMBRANE; ACIDIFY TO PH<2; MEASURE AT 311.071NM


Instrument ID

Description	The Instrument ID uniquely identifies the tool used to analyse a sample.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	56


Instrument Name

Description	The Instrument Name identifies the tool used to analyse a sample.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 upper case characters/numerics.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	RADIOMETER-CDM83


Sample ID

Description	The Sample ID is a system generated number that identifies a sample.

Format(s)	Aplha-numeric

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	96A000176


Input Results Button

Click on this button to display the results to be received.


Consolidation ID

Description	The Consolidation ID is a system generated number used to reference the sample type combination of information.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	199904001114


Sample Date

Description	The Sample Date is the date on which the sample or field measurement is taken.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	1999-06-01


Sample Time

Description	The Sample Time is the time on which the sample or field measurement is taken.

Format(s)	HH:MM

Important	Time is indicated over a 24-hour period.

Examples	09:00


Sample End Date

Description	The Sample End Date is the last date on which a sample or field measurement was taken. The Sample End Date is relevant when measurements over time need to be entered e.g. logger data or a "combined" sample.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-12-31


Sample End Time

Description	The Sample End Time is the last time on which a sample or field measurement was taken. The Sample End Time is relevant when measurements over time need to be entered e.g. logger data or a "combined" sample.

Format(s)	HH:MM

Important	The Time is indicated over a 24-hour period.

Examples	17:00


Time Interval

Description	The Time Interval is the lapse of time between measurements.

Format(s)	Decimal.

Important	This is relevant to logger data. Time is measured in decimal hours.

Examples	0.5 = 30 minutes


Start Depth

Description	The Start Depth is the first depth at which a sample or measurement is taken.

Format(s)	Decimal.

Important	For fixed depth samples only a start depth is entered. Depth is measured in metres.

Examples	0.1


End Depth

Description	The End Depth is the last depth at which a sample or measurement is taken.

Format(s)	Decimal.

Important	The End Depth is relevant when measurements over depth is made e.g. Depth profiles, or Vertical Integrated Samples. Depth is measured in metres.

Examples	10.1


Depth Interval

Description	Depth Interval is the difference between the measurement depths and is used for Depth Profile measurements.

Format(s)	Decimal.

Important	Depth interval is measured in metres.

Examples	0.1 (start depth)    10.1  (end depth)     1(depth Interval)


Analyst Sample Reference No.

Description	The Analyst Sample Reference No. is a reference number that is supplied by the analyst, and is used to trace the analyses of samples back to the laboratory or monitor.

Format(s)	Maximum 8 characters.

Important	This field is optional. LIMS samples will be updated with LIMS sample ID.

Examples


Flow

Description	 Flow is used to state whether the water was flowing or not when the sample was taken. A selection of irrelevant is used when the flow is not pertinent to the sample taken e.g. tap water.

Format(s)	Yes/ No/ Irrelevant

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	yes


Remarks on Label

Description	The Remarks on the Label is a description field that contains important remarks noted by the monitor.

Format(s)	Maximum 100 upper case characters.

Examples	DEAD FISH


EnterTag Info Button

Click on this button to enter the Tag Information.


Accept Sample Button

Click on this button to accept the sample.


Non Programme Sample ID

Description	This is a system generated number that appears when registering a non-programme sample, and cannot be changed.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	The ID is automatically generated by the system.

Examples	100000002


Eco Compartment ID

Description	The Eco (Ecological) Compartment ID uniquely identifies the sample substance or sample environment in which monitoring variables are measured.

Format(s)	Maximum 9 numerics.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	3


Eco Compartment Name

Description	The Eco (Ecological) Compartment Name identifies the sample substance or sample environment in which monitoring variables are measured.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	WATER


Sample/Observation Type Indicator

Description	The Sample/ Observation Type Indicator identifies the type of sample taken.  A physical sample taken is termed a sample and a field reading an observation.

Examples	O or S


Monitoring Action Specification Name

Description	The Monitoring Action Specification Name uniquely identifies the type of monitoring task performed.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 Upper case characters.

Examples	0.5M VERTICAL INTEGRATED SAMPLE


Monitoring Action Specification ID

Description	The Monitoring Action Specification ID uniquely identifies the type of monitoring task performed.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	3


Monitoring Point ID

Description	The Monitoring Point ID, also known as a Monitoring Feature ID, uniquely identifies a geographical point where monitoring takes place.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	182058


Monitoring Point Name

Description	The Monitoring Point Name, also known as a Monitoring Feature Name, identifies a geographical point where monitoring takes place.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 Upper case characters/numerics.

Examples	228DD00221 GOLDMINE


Laboratory ID

Description	The Laboratory ID uniquely identifies an organisation that analyses samples. A laboratory can also be referred to as an Analyst.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This field is not applicable to an observation type.

Examples	10797


Laboratory Name

Description	The Laboratory Name uniquely identifies an organisation that analyses samples. A laboratory can also be referred to as an Analyst.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 Upper case characters.

Important	This field is not applicable to an observation type.

Examples	IWQS - PRETORIA


Laboratory Abbreviation

Description	The Laboratory Abbreviation is a shortened description of the Laboratory Name. A laboratory is an organisation that analyses samples, and can also be referred to as an Analyst.

Format(s)	Maximum 20 Upper case characters.

Important	This field is not applicable to an observation type.

Examples	IWQS


Preservative ID

Description	The Preservative ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify a specific preservative record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This is a compulsory information field for sample types, however it is not applicable to an observation type.

Examples	12


Preservative Name

Description	The Preservative Name identifies the substance used to extend the shelf life of a sample so that when analysed, the constituents measured are still a true representation of when the sample was taken.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field for sample types, however it is not applicable to an observation type.

Examples	LESS THAN 4 DEGREES CELSIUS


Preservative Abbreviation

Description	The Preservative Abbreviation is a shortened description of the Preservative Name. The Preservative is the substance or method used to extend the shelf life of a sample so that when analysed the constituents measured is still a true representation of when the sample was taken.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 characters.

Examples	COLD <4 C


Container ID

Description	The Container ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify the object that holds the sample contents.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This is a compulsory information field for sample types, however it is not applicable to an observation type.

Examples	102


Container Name

Description	The Container Name describes the object used to store physical samples.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters/numerics.

Important	This is a compulsory information field for sample types, however it is not applicable to an observation type.

Examples	25 ML GLASS BOTTLE - VOLATILES


Container Description

Description	The Container Description defines the object used to store physical samples in more detail.

Format(s)	Maximum 240 characters.

Examples	BOROSILICATE GLASS BOTTLE WITH LEAK-TIGHT SCREW CAP CA.250ML


Client Office ID

Description	The Client Office ID uniquely identifies the organisation that requested analysis or field measurements.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	11006


Client Office Name

Description	The Client Office Name identifies the organisation that requested analysis or field measurements.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters.

Examples	NC- KIMBERLEY GEOHYDROLOGY


Client Person ID

Description	The Client Person ID uniquely identifies an employee of the Client Office that requested analysis or field measurements.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10015


Client Person Name

Description	The Client Person Name identifies an employee of the Client Office that requested analysis or field measurements.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters.

Examples	KEET


Client Person Initials

Description	The Client Person Initials identifies an employee of the Client Office that requested analysis or field measurements.

Format(s)	Maximum 6 upper case characters.

Examples	M


Reason

Description	The Reason describes the purpose for requesting analysis.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 upper case characters/numerics.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	GH99GVD SURVEY


Analysis Group ID

Description	An Analysis Group ID uniquely identifies an Analysis Group. Analysis Groups contain monitoring variables with analysis methods. Analysis groups are generated by the system during consolidation or sample registration.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	39


Number of Variables

Description	The Number of Variables indicates the amount of variables specified in the Analysis Group.

Format(s)	Maximum 9 numerics.

Important	This is a display only field. The Number of Variables is selected with the Analysis Group Number in the Analysis Group form.

Examples	13


Login Person

Description	The Login Person identifies the person registering the Non Programme Sample on the system.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 upper case characters.

Examples	Martie Martie Erasmus


Registration Date

Description	The Registration Date refers to the date on which the sample/monitoring programme was registered on the system.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples	2000-01-01


Registration Time

Description	The Registration Time refers to the time on which a sample was registered.

Format(s)	HH:MM

Examples	12:10


LIMS Code

Description	The LIMS Code is a code used by the departmental laboratory information system.

Format(s)	Alphanumeric.

Examples	9, A


Variables Button

Click on this button to display and/or edit all the variables and analysis methods belonging to the sample type or a specified analysis group, if selected.


Samples Button

Click on this button to return to the Non-Programme Sample information form.


Receive Sample Button

Click on this button to receive the sample.


Delete Sample Button

This button is used to permanently erase a non-programme sample from the system, and can only be performed by the Sample Administrator. Contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information.


Exit Button

Click on this button to exit the form.


Print Tag Button

Click on this button to print a tag containing all the necessary information for the sample.


Sample Type ID

Description	The Sample Type ID is a system generated number used to identify a specific sample type record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	91


Sample Type Name

Description	The Sample Type Name identifies the type of sample taken.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples	HYDROBIOLOGICAL - IWQS


Located on ID

Description	The Located on ID uniquely identifies the geographical feature on which the monitoring point is located.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	100000023


Located on Feature Name

Description	The Located on Feature Name identifies the geographical feature on which the monitoring point is located.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters.

Examples	GROOTDRAAI DAM


Located on Feature Type

Description	The Located on Feature Type identifies the type of geographical feature in which the monitoring point is located. Examples of feature types are primary drainage region, pipeline, mine, borehole, monitoring points, reservoir/dam.

Format(s)	Characters

Examples	Sewage Works


Number of Samples

Description	The Number of Samples refers to the number of samples that have been released for the indicated period.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	66


First Sample Date

Description	The First Sample Date is the first date that a sample was taken at a specific monitoring point, within a specified period.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


Last Sample Date

Description	The Last Sample Date is the last date that a sample was taken at a specific monitoring point, within a specified period.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD.

Examples	1999-10-30


Reason for Rejection

Description	The Reason for Rejection provides an explanation for the system's rejection of the sample.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	 RIVER DRIED UP - SAMPLE NOT TAKEN


Feature ID

Description	The Feature ID is a unique system generated number that identifies a geographical/monitoring feature.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of  2 147 483 647

Examples       100000023


Geographical Feature Name

Description	The Geographical Feature Name uniquely identifies the geographical feature.

Format(s)	Maximum 100 upper case characters.

Examples       VAALDAM, KLIPRIVIER


Numbering Convention

Description	A Numbering Convention is the systematic method used to allocate numbers or codes to uniquely identify a feature.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples       SITE ID


Feature Reference Codes

Description	A Feature Reference Code is a unique number or code for a feature that is derived from a Source Providing Data.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples       C222/00/E001


Feature Reference Purpose

Description	The Feature Reference Purpose provides the reason for creating a reference between a geographical feature and a Source Providing Data.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples       Data Imported From or Additional Data Available On.


System Datasource Name

Description	The System Datasource Name identifies a computerized or manual source from which data is imported, or can be obtained.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 characters

Important	Only unique names may be used. All information entered is automatically converted to upper case characters.

Examples	PC POLMON GAUTENG


System Datasource ID

Description	The System Datasource ID is a unique system generated number that identifies a computerized or manual source from which data is imported, or can be obtained.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This is a display only field.

Examples       100000023


Custodian of Data

Description	The Custodian of Data is the name of the internal or external organisation responsible for the data that is provided by a source.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 Mixed Characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	Directorate of Hydrology


Out of Commission Indicator

Description	The Out of Commission Indicator shows whether the System Datasource is still in use, or has been put out of commission (has been de-commissioned).

Important	If this field is ticked, the Out of Commission Date must also be supplied.

Examples


Out of Commission Date

Description	The Out of Commission Date is the date on which the System Datasource was decommissioned.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Important	This is a compulsory field, if the out of commission indicator has been checked (ticked).

Examples       2000-01-05


Data Type

Description	The Data Type refers to the kind of data that is available, or which can be obtained from the System Datasource.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples       Water Quality Data, Flow Data, Geological Data


User Name

Description	The User Name uniquely identifies the person working on the system, or the person that has created a record on the system.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters, Uppercase

Examples	ANTON LOUW


Server Name

Description	The Server Name identifies a specific computer network server that the user is logged into when creating or editing a record.

Format(s)	Maximum 18 characters.

Examples 	inf_08_headq


Media ID

Description	The Media ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the Media item.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	100000048


MultiMedia Content Description

Description	The Multimedia Content Description provides a detailed explanation of the content of the media item.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters.

Important	The description should be written in understandable terms so that it will be useful to other users.

Examples	A photograph of blue/green algae at Hartebeespoort Dam, taken by Koos du Plessis from the number 3 sluice during the peak 1999 floods.


Calculation Method checkbox

Description	The Calculation Method checkbox indicates whether the record is linked to a calculation method.

Format(s)	Either Y, N or ?

Examples	Y, N or ?


Calculation Method ID

Description	The Calculation Method ID is a system generated number used to uniquely identify a calculation method.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	1


Calculation Method Description

Description	The Calculation Method Description defines the specific formula used to calculate values.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 characters.

Examples	ANION/CATION BALANCE or TOTAL DISSOLVED MACRO SALTS


Surname

Description	The Surname is the last name (family name) of a person.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 upper case characters.

Examples	MAREE


Initials

Description	The Initials are the first letters of a person's names.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 upper case characters.

Examples	E F


Title

Description	Title refers to a person's rank or status.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 characters

Examples	DR


Preferred Name

Description	The Preferred Name is the favoured name to be used when addressing a person.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 upper case characters.

Examples	BILLY


Organisation Type

Description	The Organisation Type identifies the main function or interest of an organisation.

Format(s)	Characters

Examples	Water Services Provider, Corporation.


Basic Organisation Type

Description	The Basic Organisation Type uniquely identifies an organisation's main function or interest by differentiating between companies and assemblies. A company will have an employee structure while an assembly will have a member structure. An example of a company is the Department of Water Affairs and Forestry, and an example of an assembly is the Blesbokspruit Forum.

Format(s)	Drop Down Button

Examples      Company, Assembly


Organisation  Of Abrreviation
Organisation Of Abbreviation

Description	The Organisation Of Abbreviation stores the abbreviation of the parent organisation.

Format(s)       Maximum 20 characters.

Examples	DenkoSesko.


DWAF Indicator

Description	The DWAF Indicator is checked to indicate that the organisation is part of the Department of Water Affairs and Forestry.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Status of Record


Organisation Type ID

Description	The Organisation Type ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies an organisation's main function or interest.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	2263


Organisation Name

Description	The Organisation Name identifies an organisation. This excludes the Division/Sub-division of the organisational structure and area identification.

Format(s)	Maximum 70 upper case characters.

Examples	DEPARTMENT OF WATER AFFAIRS


Organisation Caption Name

Description	The Organisation Caption Name identifies an organisation within the context of its subdivision and office area.

Format(s)	Maximum 150 upper case characters.

Examples	DEPARTMENT OF WATER AFFAIRS - GAUTENG REGION – BOSKOP


Member Caption Name

Description	The Member Caption Name represents the concatenated name of a member.

Format(s)	Maximum 150 upper case characters.

Examples	DEPARTMENT OF WATER AFFAIRS - GAUTENG REGION – BOSKOP


Organisation ID

Description	The Organisation ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies an organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Employee ID

Description	The Employee ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies an employee of an organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Member ID

Description	The Member ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies a member of an organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Organisation Abbreviation

Description	The Organisation Abbreviation uniquely identifies an Organisation. The Organisation Abbreviation is a shortened combination of the organisation name, division or sub-division and office area. The Organisation Abbreviation is used to simplify searches for users familiar with the organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters.

Examples	DWAF- IWQS -PRETORIA


Assembly Organization Abbreviation

Description	The Assembly Organisation Abbreviation uniquely identifies an Organisation. The Organisation Abbreviation is a shortened combination of the organisation name, division or sub-division and office area. The Organisation Abbreviation is used to simplify searches for users familiar with the organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 mixed case characters.

Examples	CWMRREC


Represented Organization Abbreviation

Description	The Represented Organisation Abbreviation uniquely identifies an Organisation. The Organisation Abbreviation is a shortened combination of the organisation name, division or sub-division and office area. The Organisation Abbreviation is used to simplify searches for users familiar with the organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 mixed case characters.

Examples	KLIP RIVER - FMC


Electronic File Name

Description	The Electronic File Name refers to the name and the format (extension) used to save the required Multimedia.

Format(s)	Maximum 90 Mixed Characters

Important	The extension will be stored as part of the electronic file name. In some cases the media item may require a specific Windows programme associated with it to be opened, e.g. MS Word.

Examples	A license was created using MS Word, and saved in word as "License ABC.doc" . The Electronic File name will be "License ABC.doc".


Media Type

Description	The Media Type identifies the main multimedia items that are categorised according to their characteristics.

Format(s)	Click on the Drop Down button, and select the required option.

Examples 	Document (a document contains textual information. It may also be scanned or electronic, and therefore can contain pictorial information as part of the media), Audio (sound wave information e.g. music, voices) Image (a static picture e.g. maps and drawings, photographs of people, objects and places), Video (a motion picture that may include audio information e.g. A tape of the 50/50 show.


Content Type

Description	The Content Type provides a detailed description of the specific media item's characteristics.

Format(s)	Click on the Drop Down button, and select the required option.

Examples	An Image Media Type can be described in more detail as a photograph, drawing, map etc.


Media Purpose

Description	The Media Purpose refers to the use or function of the specific media item in DWAF.

Format(s)	Click on the Drop Down button, and select the required option.

Examples	Registration is the main purpose of a document used to register a water use in terms of the National Water Act.


Cause/Trigger

Description	The Cause/Trigger identifies the action that has led to the creation of the media item.

Format(s)	Click on the Drop Down button, and select the required option.

Examples	A pollution incident may necessitate the creation of image files to show the location, area, and extent of the impact of the incident. The same pollution incident may also necessitate the creation of letters between the involved parties. This cause/trigger would be a Comply violation.


Subject Area

Description	The Subject Area is the component/directorate within DWAF that predominantly manages, or is responsible for the media content.

Format(s)	Click on the Drop Down button, and select the required option.

Examples	Environmental, Forestry


Dwaf File No

Description	The Dwaf File No is the number of the manual file used to store all relevant correspondence between DWAF and the person or organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples	16/2/7/C222/B011 (This Dwaf file is an Iscor file, concerning the 22 Tertiary Drainage basin within the Gauteng South C Drainage Region.)


Generated From Date

Description	The Generated From Date is the first possible date on which the media item was created on the WMS system.

Format(s)	yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

Examples 	2001-01-07 12:14:12


Generated To Date

Description	The Generated To Date is the last possible date on which the media item was created on the WMS system.

Format(s)	yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

Examples 	2001-01-07 12:13:04


Generate Multi Media Liaison Entity records button

Press this button for a MultiMediaLE record to be created for every Organisation in the Records To Be Generated ListBox with the specified reason.


Expected Feedback Date

Description	The Expected Feedback Date is the date when feedback is expected from the responsible organisation. This date can be in the future and in the past.

Format(s)	yyyy-mm-dd

Important	For Auto Generated Comply Violation Notification Letters this date is the system date + 56 days.

Examples	2001-03-27


Correspondence Indicator

Description	The Correspondence checkbox indicates whether the record is correspondence related.

Format(s)	Either Y, N or ?

Examples	Y, N or ?


Liaison Media Association Reason

Description	The Liaison Media Association Reason describes the link or association between a multimedia item and a specific person or organisation.

Format(s)	Click on the Drop Down button, and select the required option.

Examples	Media Owner, Legally Responsible.


Expected Feedback From Date

Description	The Expected Feedback From Date is the earliest date when feedback can be expected from the responsible organisation.

Format(s)	yyyy-mm-dd

Examples	2001-04-17


Status

Description	The Status refers to the stage of progress for outgoing correspondence.

Format(s)	Click on the Drop Down button, and select the required option.

Important	From Created the status may only change to Printed, from Printed the status may only change to Re-printed or Sent, and from Re-printed the status may only change to Sent.

Examples	Created, Printed, Reprinted, Sent


Executive ID

Description	The Executive ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the monitoring office that is responsible for doing Monitoring at that specific Monitoring Point.

Format(s)	 Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Executive Organisation abbreviation

Description	The Executive Organisation abbreviation uniquely identifies the Monitoring Office that is responsible for doing Monitoring at that specific Monitoring Point.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 mixed case characters.

Examples	DWAF- IWQS -PRETORIA


Default Indicator

Description	The Default Indicator is checked to indicate that the selected record is the default record.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Active Indicator

Description	The Active Indicator is checked to indicate that the Operational Officer (Employee at the Executive office) is active.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Responsible Organisation ID

Description	The Responsible Organisation ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the organisation that is responsible for the Executive Organisation in the Monitoring Structure.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Managing Organisation ID

Description	The Managing Organisation ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the organisation   that is Managing the Responsible and Executive organisation in the Monitoring Structure.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

 Examples	10018


Responsible Organisation Name

Description	The Responsible Organisation Name is the organisation Responsible for the Executive Organisation in the Monitoring Structure.

Format(s)	Maximum 150 upper case characters.

Examples	DEPARTMENT OF WATER AFFAIRS - GAUTENG REGION – BOSKOP


Managing Organisation Name

Description	The Managing Organisation Name is Responsible for Managing the Executive and Responsible Organisation in the Monitoring Structure.

Format(s)	Maximum 150 upper case characters.

Examples	DEPARTMENT OF WATER AFFAIRS - GAUTENG REGION – BOSKOP


Monitoring Structure Maintenance button

Click on the Monitoring Structure Maintenance button to open the Liaison Entity to maintain the Monitoring Structure.


Relationship Qualifying ID

Description	The Relationship Qualifying ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify the combination of Executive, Responsible and Managing organisations in the Monitoring Structure. Monitoring Points are linked to the Relationship Qualifying ID.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	1027, 100342


Status Code

Description	The Status Code refers to the status of a layer at the various stages in a layer's life cycle.

Format(s)	1 Numeric

Examples	1 - (when a layer is created on all WMS databases and registered in the layers directory), but the geographical features are not yet mapped to the non-spatial features in WMS.

2 - (when work or generated layers contain geographical features that are linked to corresponding WMS geographical features. Or when the newly created generated, work layer or orientation layer has been registered in the layers directory)

3  - (when a new layer is implemented, it replaces the "outdated version" which becomes the "out of use" layer)


Status Name

Description        The Status Name refers to the name of the status code of a layer at the various stages in a layer's life cycle.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 mixed characters.

Examples	 Initiated (when a layer is created on all WMS databases and registered in the layers directory), but the geographical features are not yet mapped to the non-spatial features in WMS.

Implemented (when work or generated layers contain geographical features that are linked to corresponding WMS geographical features. Or when the newly created generated, work layer or orientation layer has been registered in the layers directory)

 Out of Use (when a new layer is implemented, it replaces the "outdated version" which becomes the "out of use" layer)


Expected Feedback To Date

Description	Expected Feedback To Date is the last date when feedback is expected from the responsible organisation.

Format(s)	yyyy-mm-dd

Examples	2003-10-01


Person or Organisation ID

Description	The Person or Organisation ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the interested person or organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Person ID

Description	The Person ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the interested person.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Person or Organisation Name

Description	The Person or Organisation Name uniquely identifies the interested person or organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 uppercase characters.

Examples	MAREE D MR


Person Name

Description	The Person Caption Name uniquely identifies the interested person.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 uppercase characters.

Examples	MAREE DAWIE MR


Employee Name

Description	The Employee Name identifies the concatenated name (surname, preferred name, initials and title) of the employee.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 mixed characters.

Examples	MAREE, DAWIE, N, MR


Media Version Date

Description	The Media Version Date refers to the date and time when the media item was last modified.

Format(s)	yyyy-mm-dd

Important	The version date cannot be changed for outgoing correspondence media or for media linked to objects. This date must be on or after the Media Creation Date.

Examples	2001-03-05


Related Media Reason

Description	The Related Media Reason provides a reason for the link or association between two media items.

Format(s)	Click on the Drop Down button, and select the required option.

Examples	Version, Attachment.


Not Sent Reason

Description	The Not Sent Reason provides a reason for not having sent outgoing correspondence to the interested party.

Format(s)	Click on the Drop Down button, and select the required option.

Examples	Remedial Measures implemented (Improved maintenance, improvement or expansion of works).


Not Sent Description

Description	The Not Sent Description provides a detailed explanation of the Not Sent Reason for not having sent outgoing correspondence to the interested party.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters.

Examples	An acceptable explanation for the non-compliance has already been received, therefore a compliance violation letter is unnecessary.


Reference in Multimedia

Description	The Reference provides information about the location of the multimedia item, and can contain a DWAF File number.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters.

Examples	A photograph spool number 31567 located in the Hydrology Library.


Media Creation Date

Description	The Media Creation Date is the date and time when the media item was created for the first time.

Format(s)	yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

Important	This date cannot be later than the Media Version Date.

Examples	2001-03-27 11:59:16 is the exact date and time when a photograph was taken.


Organisation Checkbox

Click on this checkbox to maintain/retrieve all records linked to an organisation.


Person Checkbox

Click on this checkbox to maintain/retrieve all records linked to a person.


Find by Media Detail button

Click on this button to search for a specific media by any detail other than ID number.


Find by Media ID button

Click on this button to search for a specific media with a media ID number.


Outgoing Radio button

Click on this button to maintain/retrieve outgoing correspondence media records.


Incoming Radio button

Click on this button to maintain/retrieve incoming correspondence media records.


View Media Object button

Click on this button to view the selected stored media item in read-only mode. In some cases the media item may require a specific Windows programme associated with it, to be opened e.g. MS Word. In this case, a View Image tab will appear. Once you have finished viewing the media item, click on the OK button on the bottom of the form, to open the previous form.


Auto Generated Checkbox

This checkbox is activated when a specific document has been generated by the WMS system.


Refresh Object on Scroll button

This button can be checked to view stored media records on the form. To scroll through the records at a faster pace, uncheck the button.


Eco Compartment DWA Number

Description	The Dwa Number is a standard Department of Water Affairs and Forestry code.

Format(s)	1 Character only.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	W


Monitoring Variable Type ID

Description   The Monitoring Variable Type ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify a specific Monitoring Variable Type record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	The ID number cannot be changed.

Examples	1


Monitoring Variable Type Name

Description	The Monitoring Variable Type name identifies the monitoring variable type or kind measured within the ecological compartment.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples	Sample_Status_Total-Water, Dissolved


Monitoring Variable Type Description

Description    The Monitoring Variable Type description defines the monitoring variable type or kind measured within the ecological compartment.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	Whole / full quantity of a substance in water.


Monitoring Variable Class ID

Description	The Monitoring Variable Class ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify a specific Monitoring Variable Class record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	The ID number cannot be changed.

Examples	1


Monitoring Variable Class Name

Description	The Monitoring Variable Class Name identifies the monitoring variable classified according to resource quality properties

Format(s)	Maximum 40 characters.

Examples	INORGANIC


Measuring Unit Name

Description	The Measuring Unit Name identifies the measuring unit used to define the measured value of a monitoring variable in terms of its unit and the conversion factors between like units.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples	Percentage.


Mantissa

Description	A Mantissa is a number that is multiplied with an Exponent of the base value10, to obtain a conversion factor.

Format(s)	Decimal. (9.99999)

Examples	3.4(mantissa) x 10 (base value)2 (exponent)


Exponent

Description	The Exponent is a number with a base value of 10 that is multiplied with a Mantissa to obtain a conversion factor. In WMS the base value number is always 10, while the exponent number varies.

Format(s)	Decimal (9.99999)

Examples	3.4(mantissa) x 10 (base value)2 (exponent)


Method Indicator

Description	The Method Indicator defines the way in which monitoring takes place. Monitoring Methods consist of the Observation method (measurements like temperature can only be taken in the field), Sample (measurements can only be done by taking a physical sample and performing laboratory analysis) and Questionnaire (conducting surveys for the purpose of gathering and capturing information). This is used for verification during the monitoring programme registration process.

Format(s)	Sample (S), Observation (O), Questionnaire (Q)

Important	If the Type is a Derived Variable, then the Method Indicator is always Derived.

Examples	Sample, Observation, Questionnaire


Parameters Button

Click on this button to view or enter parameters for multiple variables.


Variable Group ID

Description	The Variable Group ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify a specific variable group record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	The ID number cannot be changed.

Examples	1


Variable Group Name

Description	The Variable Group Name identifies the variable group used to speed up the entering process for frequently used variables in the design of monitoring programmes.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 characters.

Examples	IWQS MACRO GROUP 4 - HARDNESS


Variable Group Description

Description	The Variable Group Description describes the variable group used to speed up the entering process for frequently used variables in the design of monitoring programmes.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 characters.

Examples	IWQS MACRO GROUP 4 - HARDNESS


Query Variables Button

Click on this button to display all the variables linked to the group.


Multiple/Single Type

Description	The Multiple/Single Type Indicator displays a multiple or single status for Fundamental Variables. It is important to know whether a variable is single or multiple as multiple variables have many parameters linked to them, and therefore many results can also be expected. An example of a multiple monitoring variable is algae identification that contains a parameter list of algae genera, while examples of single monitoring variables are chloride and sulphur.

Format(s)	Multiple (M) or Single (S) Type.

Examples	Multiple, Single


Choice Input

Description	The Choice Input specifies the format for entering result values, and to verify the results.

•	Alpha - only alpha results expected, Numeric - only numeric results expected,

•	Both - Alpha and numeric results expected Either one - Alpha or Numeric results expected.

Format(s)	Alpha (A), Numeric (N), Both (B) or Either one (E)

Examples	Alpha, Numeric, Both or Either one


Max Total Value

Description	The Max Total Value is used for verification and specifies the maximum total value that parameter result totals must add up to when entering results.

Format(s)	Decimal.

Important	The field will only be highlighted if you selected Numeric, Both or Either one in the choice input field. The Result value cannot be greater that the maximum total value.

Examples	100.000


Check Weight Indicator

Description	The Check Weight indicates if weight must be checked during verification of entered results.

Format(s)	Click in the block if the statement is relevant.

Important	When this indicator is checked, the weight totals will be checked during the result registration verification process.

Examples


Parameter Choice

Description	The Parameter Choice indicates if all or some (partial) parameters must be entered, and is used for verification when results are entered. All indicates that results for all specified parameters must be entered during the results registration process. Partial indicates that only the found parameter's results must be entered during the results registration process.

Format(s)	All (A) or Partial (P)

Examples	All, partial


Valid Alpha Characters

Description	The Valid Alpha Characters defines the allowable characters for the Alpha, Both or Either One input choices, and is used for verification when alpha results are entered.

Format(s)	Maximum 20 alpha characters permitted in the result.

Important	The Valid Alpha Characters field will only be highlighted if Alpha, Both or Either One Choice Input fields are selected.

Examples	D or when more than one choice is possible a,b,c


History Button

Click on this button to display the record's history.


Anion/Cation Indicator

Description	The Anion/Cation Indicator differentiates between negatively and positively charged ions. Anion specifies negatively charged ions, and Cation specifies positively charged ions.

Format(s)	Anion (A), Cation (C), None (N)

Important	The Anion/Cation field will only be displayed if the new Type is a Single Type.

Examples	Anion, Cation or None.


Observation Indicator

Description	The Observation Indicator is checked to indicate that a specific analysis method is performed as a field observation.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Sample Indicator

Description	The Sample Indicator is checked to indicate that a specific analysis method is performed on a sample in a laboratory.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Result Detection Limit Type

Description	The Result Detection Limit Type distinguishes between the different ways of expressing or handling these detection limits. There are three different Detection Limit Types that exist:

•	A Fixed Detection Limit is set as a fixed value.

•	A Countstat (Counting Statistic) is used when counting statistics are required instead of a fixed value and is used for example when measuring radioactivity.

•	A Zero Detection Limit type's detection limit is always zero, and is used for example with algae identification.

Format(s)	Fixed (F), Countstat (C), Zero (Z)

Examples	Fixed, Countstat, Zero


Result Value Type

Description	The Result Value Type categorises result values occurring below the detection limit. When receiving results, all values below the detection limit are reported as either true value result types or detection limit result types.

•	A True Value is a measured result that is unprocessed e.g. 3.547

•	A Detection Limit value is a measured result that has been processed, and is reported as smaller than the detection limit e.g. <4 (4 is the detection limit).

Format(s)	True Value (T) or Detection Limit (D)

Examples	True Value or Detection Limit


Valid Decimal

Description	The Valid Decimal is the valid number of decimals that can be used to provide a result for the analysis method.

Format(s)	1 Numeric.

Important	This measurement expresses the sensitivity of settings for the analysis method set-up, and the measured results must be reported as such.

Examples	3 will be expressed as a number with three decimals e.g. 0.001 or 10.001


Relative Standard Deviation

Description	The Relative Standard Deviation is the calculated deviation of results determined to express the sensitivity of settings for the analysis method set-up, and the measured results must be reported as such.

Format(s)	Decimal

Examples	0,200


Grading

Description	Grading refers to the type of grade held by a specific laboratory as determined by the Department of Water Affairs and Forestry. The grading is measured on a scale of 0-9 with 9 being the worst grade and 0 being the best grade.

Format(s)	1 Numeric

Examples	2


Pay Indicator

Description	The Pay Indicator is checked to indicate that the Laboratory/Monitor is paid for analysis by the Department of Water Affairs and Forestry.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Cost/Tariff

Description	The Cost or Tariff is the amount paid for each analysis or for packaging and transportation.

Format(s)	Decimal

Examples	1.56


Contract Number

Description	The Contract Number is the reference to the contact between the Department of Water Affairs and Forestry and the Laboratory/Monitor.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	DA4674


Expiry Date

Description	The Expiry Date is the date on which the contract between the Department of Water Affairs and Forestry and the Laboratory/Monitor expires (d).

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	2001-01-17


Shelf Life

Description	The Shelf Life is the time period in hours that can elapse from when the sample is taken until the variable expires or is no longer fit for analysis.  A sample's shelf life can be extended with preservatives to ensure that when analysed, the constituents measured accurately reflect the condition of the sample when it was taken.

Format(s)	Numeric (Real number)

Examples	234


Lab Supply Container

Description	The Lab Supply Container indicates whether the container will be supplied by the laboratory.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Data Type

Description	Data Type indicates how the results will be received and determines the sample quality control that will be performed when receiving a sample. LIMS sample results will be received from the LIMS system at IWQS, while the Manual samples will be entered manually.

Format(s)	LIMS, Manual or External

LIMS (L) - For LIMS the physical samples are received on WMS and the sample information will be transferred to the Department of Water Affairs and Forestry laboratory computer system. The result will automatically be read by the system.

Manual (M) - For Manual, the physical samples are received on WMS, and after analysis the results will be entered into the WMS system by hand.

External (E) - For External, the sample will be analysed by an external organisation and the results electronically imported to the WMS. The physical sample is not involved, and sample quality control such as bottle type and preservative issues are not at stake.

Examples	LIMS


Tags ID

Description	The Tag ID is a system generated number used to identify a specific tag record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	The ID number cannot be changed.

Examples	1


Tags Description

Description	The Tag Description uniquely identifies sampling details and monitoring information for physical samples.

Format(s)	Maximum 50 uppercase characters.

Examples	DEFAULT TAG


Populate Variable Button

Press this button to add all the variables linked to the Laboratory-Sample Type-Container and Preservative combination. If a variable has more than one analysis method the first combination will be selected. If the variable for the laboratory/ sample type exists in another laboratory/ sample type combination, that variable will not be added to the list. If the default Analysis Method for any variable is not the required method for the specific Monitor- Laboratory-Sample Type combination, then it can be changed by selecting the analysis method and zooming to select the required analysis method in the Lookup Method-Container-Preservative form.

 Note: Only variables that have a Sample Type, Container, Preservative for Laboratory and Analysis Methods will be populated.


Process Name

Description	The Process Name defines the function used to perform the calculation method.

Format(s)	Maximum 8 characters.

Examples	ANCATBAL


Calculation Problems ID

Description	The Calculation Problems ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify a specific calculation problem record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	The ID number cannot be changed.

Examples	1


Calculation Problem Description

Description	The Calculation Problem Description explains the problem experienced during calculation.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 characters.

Examples	UNKNOWN VARIABLE ID


Calculation Problem Type

Description	The Calculation Problem Type explains the origin of the calculation problem.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 characters.

Examples	Base Data


Calculation Problem Solution

Description	The Calculation Problem Solution provides a solution to the calculation method problem.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 characters.

Examples	Each variable id in the input data string is compared with a list of required variables, and this variable is not in the list.


Analysis Method Button

Click on this button to view an analysis method. The Analysis Method Maintenance form will be open in query mode, the user may opt to add or modify the analysis method.


Template Characteristic Type

Description	A Template Characteristic Type gives meaning to questions. Template Characteristic Types consists of three different characteristics types: Environmental Characteristic Variable, Classified Characteristic, and Non-Classified Characteristic Parameter.

Format(s)	Environmental Characteristic Variable, Classified Characteristic, and Non-Classified Characteristic Parameter.

Examples	Environmental Characteristic Variable, Classified Characteristic, and Non-Classified Characteristic Parameter.


Environmental Characteristic Variable

Description	An Environmental Characteristic Variable is the child level of the question, and is therefore the question's main topic that is assessed in order to characterise a geographical feature.

Format(s)	Characters.

Important	The top (root) level of a question must always be an Environmental Characteristic Variable, however an Environmental Charactreistic Variable can also appear on 2nd and 3rd levels.

Examples	In the South African Scoring System (Environmental Survey Template) the characteristic 	"Invertebrate Stones In Current" is an example of an environmental characteristic variable.


Classified Characteristic

Description	A Classified Characteristic is a specific item within an Environmental Characteristic Variable that is obtained from a group. These items are pre-classified into groups with similar properties that have relevance to the Environmental Characteristic Variable.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	If Invertebrate is the Environmental Characteristic Variable, then Baetidae (an example of an invertebrate) is the classified characteristic.


Non-Classified Characteristic Parameter

Description	A Non-Classified Characteristic Parameter is an item that gives additional meaning to an environmental survey template question.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	1 type or just a value


Change Level button

The Change Level button is used to move the selected template characteristic up or down in the tree view. See Rules for Valid Level Changes?


Environmental Characteristic Variable Name

Description	The Environmental Characteristic Variable Name identifies the environmental characteristic variable.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	Invertebrate Stones In Current


Environmental Characteristic Variable Abbreviation

Description	The Environmental Characteristic Variable Abbreviation is a short description of the environmental characteristic variable.

Format(s)	Maximum 20 characters

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	ISIC


Date Created

Description	The Date Created is the date on which the calculation method record was created on the database.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	2001-10-12


Date Terminated

Description	The Date Terminated is the date on which the calculation method has or will cease to be used in WMS.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	9999-12-31


Tips on creating Survey Template questions

1.	First decide what kind of survey you will be performing, and how will the questions be answered. Answers are defined when Environmental Survey Methods are set-up. Note that category list answers like "0 to 500, 501 to 2500, 2501 to 7500" should not be included in the question.

2.	Decide how much information you require, the more detailed the information you need, the more children the levels will contain.

3.	The question must be understandable to the surveyor, and suitable for data dissemination and reporting purposes.

4.	A question can consist of only one level.

5.	When more than one interpretation can be done from one question, it is best to divide the question so that the individual levels can be selected and interpreted on their own.

6.	Environmental Characteristic Variables can be used on 2nd and 3rd levels.

7.	Non-Classified Characteristic Parameters cannot be interpreted on their own, but rather in context with the levels above it. (Consider using Environmental Characteristic Variables Types instead).

8.	When elements in a question have similar properties consider creating a classified structure.


Sampling Date From

Description	The Sampling Date From indicates the first date in a sampling period.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Important	This is a compulsory information field during sample registration.

Examples	  2001-10-12


Sampling Date To

Description	The Sampling Date To indicates the last date in a sampling period.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	  2001-10-12


Result QC End Date

Description	The Result Quality Control End Date is the last date that a result quality control is used.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	  2001-10-12


Result QC End Time

Description	The Result Quality Control End Time is the last time that a result quality control is used.

Format(s)	HH:MM:SS

Important	The system time is used as default.

Examples	  12:05:55


Result QC Start Date

Description	The Result Quality Control Start Date is the first date that a result quality control is used.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	  2001-10-12


Result QC Start Time

Description	The Result Quality Control Start Time is the first time that a result quality control is used.

Format(s)	HH:MM:SS

Important	The system time is used as default.

Examples	  12:05:55


Reanalysis button

Click on the Reanalysis button to mark a result for re-analysis.


Reason ID

Description	The Reason ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify a reason for a sample or result changing status.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	The ID number cannot be changed.

Examples	1


Reason Description

Description	The Reason Description provides an explanation for a sample or results change in status.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	  RIVER DRIED UP - SAMPLE NOT TAKEN


Reason Type

Description	The Reason Type provides a reason for a sample or results change in status.

Format(s)	Maximum 3 uppercase characters.

Important	The reason type always corresponds with the status

Examples	  ACT, REJ, ACC, REA


Receive Reanalysis button

Click on the Receive Reanalysis button to manually enter reanalysed values for a variable.


Priority

Description	Priority indicates the sequential order in which samples must be analysed on a 0-99 scale.

Format(s)	0-99 scale.

Examples	  4


LIMS Box No

Description	The LIMS Box Number is used to pack samples at IWQS. The Box number identifies the box in which a sample is packed at reception.

Format(s)	Alpha Numeric.

Important	This is a system generated number.

Examples	  HET2


LIMS Box Position

Description	The LIMS Box Position is used to pack samples at IWQS. The Box position identifies the position of a sample in a box.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Important	This is a system generated number, between 1 and 36.

Examples	  7


Min/Max Indicator

Description	The Min/Max Indicator shows the type of quality control test that has been performed, and whether the result is tested against minimum or maximum value.

Format(s)	MIN or MAX

Examples	  MIN or MAX


Modify button

Click on the Modify button to make changes to a record. E.g. the user can change the quality control value of a variable.


Packing List Number

Description	The Packing List number indicates the position of a sample in a box that is to be sent to a specific laboratory at IWQS for analysis. The packing list number is used to pack and check the samples in a box according to the packing list.

Format(s)	Maximum 6 numerics

Examples	  011105


Print Label button

Click on this button to manually print a label for a specific sample.


Registration Date From

Description	The Registration Date From indicates the first date in a registration period.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	  2001-10-12


Registration Date To

Description	The Registration Date To indicates the last date in a registration period.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	  2001-10-12


Print button
Report button

Click on this button to print a requested report. Note: in certain instances you will also be able to display the report.


Activate Sample button

Click on this button to activate a problem sample and select a reason for the decision to activate the sample.


Analysis Date From

Description	The Analysis Date From indicates the first date in an analysis period.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	  2001-10-12


Analysis Date To

Description	The Analysis Date To indicates the last date in an analysis period.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	  2001-10-12


Convert History button

Click on this button to display the conversion history for a specific measuring unit.


Calculation Method Type ID

Description	The Calculation Method Types ID is used to identify calculation method types. These types are used for the calculation of Group Quality Control, Derived Variables, and Environmental Characteristics.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	  1


Calculation Method Type Description

Description	The Calculation Method Type Description describes the calculation method type. These types are used for the calculation of Group Quality Control, Derived Variables, and Environmental Characteristics.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters.

Examples	Derived Variable


QC Method ID

Description	The QC Method ID uniquely identifies the method used to perform quality control.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	1


QC Description

Description	The QC Method Description uniquely describes the method used to perform quality control.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 uppercase characters.

Examples	RESULT VALUE LESS THAN ABS. MINIMUM


Result History button

Click on this button to view the history of analysis dates and results for a specific variable.


Change Date

Description	The Change Date indicates the date on which changes were made.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	  2001-10-12


ChangeTime

Description	The Change Time is the exact time that changes were made.

Format(s)	HH:MM:SS

Important	This is a system generated information field.

Examples	  12:05:55


Change Date and Time

Description	The Change Date and Time indicates the date and time on which changes were made.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS

Examples	  2001-10-12 12:05:55


Critical Error

Description	The Critical Error indicates if a result has failed a specific quality control. The critical error shows "Yes" if the result cannot be accepted, and "No" if the result can be accepted.

Format(s)	Yes/No

Examples	  Yes/No


Group Quality Control

Description	The Group Quality Control indicates if a specific quality control method is for a specific variable or a group of variables. The indicator shows "Yes" if the quality control method is for a group of variables, and "No" if the quality control is for a specific variable.

Format(s)	Yes/No

Examples	  Yes/No


Global Accept Results button

Click on this button to release results. This button is only active if no problems exist on a sample or its results.


Group QC's button

Click on this button to view the Group Quality Control results and the variables used in the Group QC tests.


Problem Sample Status
Problem Sample Status checkbox

Click on this checkbox to search for problem sample records.


Active Sample Status
Active Sample Status checkbox

Click on this checkbox to search for active sample records.


Rejected Sample Status
Rejected Sample Status checkbox

Click on this checkbox to search for rejected sample records.


Released Sample Status
Released Sample Status checkbox

Click on this checkbox to search for released sample records.


Resolved Sample Status checkbox

Click on this checkbox to search for resolved sample records.


Not Resolved Sample Status checkbox

Click on this checkbox to search for unresolved sample records.


All Sample Status checkbox

Click on this checkbox to search for all sample records.


Scheduled Type

Description	The Scheduled Type indicates either a scheduled sample, non-scheduled sample or Electronic.

Format(s)	Alpha characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	  Scheduled/Non-Scheduled/Electronic


Send to LIMS button

Click on this button to manually send specific analysis group information to the LIMS system.


Analysis Status

Description	The Analysis Status indicates the last status history of a specific sample. This status indicates where a sample is in the analysis process.

Format(s)	Mixed uppercase characters.

Examples	  REJECTED, RELEASED, ACTIVE, PROBLEM


Status History ID

Description	The Status History ID uniquely identifies the status that a result can have at a specific time.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	2000


Status History Description

Description	The Status History Description uniquely describes the status that a result can have at a specific time.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 uppercase characters.

Examples	RESULT ACTIVATED


View Problems button

Click on this button to view a result's problems.


Result Total QC's

Description	The Result Total QC's uniquely describes the total number of quality control tests that were done on a result.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	11


Result QC's Passed

Description	The Result QC's Passed uniquely describes the number of result quality control tests that were done on a result and passed.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	2


Sample Total QA's

Description	The Sample Total QA's uniquely describes the total number of quality analysis tests that were done on a sample.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	12


Sample QA's Passed

Description	The Sample QA's Passed uniquely describes the number of sample quality control tests that were done on a sample and passed.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	7


Fundamental/Derived Type

Description	The Fundamental/Derived Type indicates if the variable can be measured (fundamental),  if it is calculated from a group of variables (derived) or if it is used in Questionnaires (survey).

Format(s)	Fundamental or Derived or Survey

Examples	Fundamental or Derived or Survey


Frequency ID

Description	The Frequency ID uniquely identifies the frequencies between periodic event monitoring.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	13


Hours per Unit

Description	The Hours per Unit defines the amount of time in hours for each monitoring frequency period.

Format(s)	Numerics.

Examples	2000


Frequency Description

Description	The Frequency Description uniquely describes the time intervals between periodic event monitoring.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 uppercase characters.

Examples	HOURLY, DAILY


Result QC Value

Description	The Result QC Value is the minimum or maximum value that a numeric value can be tested against.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	4.000


Group QC Result

Description	The Group QC Result is the calculated value according to the group quality control methods.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	4.000


Group QC Value

Description	The Group QC Value is the minimum or maximum value that a group quality control result can be tested against.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	4.000


Monitoring Action ID

Description	The Monitoring Action ID uniquely identifies the type of monitoring task performed.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	13


Monitoring Action Name

Description	The Monitoring Action Name uniquely identifies the type of monitoring task performed.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	SUB SURFACE GRAB


Analysis Status Description

Description	The Analysis Status Description uniquely describes the current status of a sample in the analysis process.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 uppercase characters.

Examples	SAMPLE ACTIVATED


Liaison Entity Description and Id

Description   The Liaison Entity Description and Id is used to display information about organisations or persons. When the organisation is shown, it displays the concatenated Abbreviation of the Organisation with the Organisation Id.  When the person is shown, it displays the concatenated Person Name with the Liaison Entity Id.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 uppercase characters.

Examples	DEPT ENVIRONTAL AFFAIRS & TOURISM, 1000000028


Equipment ID

Description	The Equipment ID uniquely identifies the type of equipment used for monitoring.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	13


Equipment Description

Description	The Equipment Description uniquely describes the type of equipment used for monitoring.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 uppercase characters.

Examples	PUMP FOR BOREHOLE


Monitoring Action Document ID

Description	The Document ID uniquely identifies the document that specifies a monitoring action.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	13


Monitoring Action Document Name

Description	The Document Name uniquely describes the document that specifies a monitoring action.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 uppercase characters.

Examples	TR141 SAMPLE MONITORING


Transport Method Description

Description	The Transport Method Description uniquely describes transport methods used to deliver physical samples to a laboratory.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 uppercase characters.

Examples	COURIER


Frequency Specification ID

Description	The Frequency Specification ID uniquely identifies frequency period in which monitoring should be performed.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	13


Frequency Specification Name

Description	The Frequency Specification Name uniquely identifies the frequency period in which monitoring should be performed.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	MONTHLY


Frequency Specification Type

Description	The Frequency Specification Type uniquely describes the type of frequency period in which monitoring should be performed.

Format(s)	1 uppercase character.

Examples	V = Variable  P= Periodic


Packaging Method ID

Description	The Packaging Method ID uniquely identifies packaging methods used for transportation of physical samples to a laboratory.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	13


Packaging Method Description

Description	The Packaging Method Description uniquely describes packaging methods used for transportation of physical samples to a laboratory.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 uppercase characters.

Examples	CRATE


LIMS Analysis Method ID

Description	The LIMS Analysis Method ID uniquely identifies the process used to analyse a sample on the LIMS system.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	00274002


LIMS Analysis Method Name

Description	The LIMS Analysis Method Name uniquely identifies the process used to analyse a sample on the LIMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 upper case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field. This field must summarize the instrumentation techniques and procedures used to uniquely identify changes and conditions that can be attributed to differences in the monitoring variable's measured result.

Examples	ICP EMISSION SPECTROSCOPY 34000 SPECTRO, FILTER SAMPLE THROUGH 0.45UM MEMBRANE; ACIDIFY TO PH<2; MEASURE AT 311.071NM


Days

Description	Days uniquely identifies the period taken for a monitor to deliver a sample to a laboratory.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	14


Hours

Description	Hours uniquely identifies the period taken for a monitor to deliver a sample to a laboratory.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	8


Start Depth Indicator

Description	The Start Depth Indicator is selected to indicate that a start depth is specified for the monitoring action.

Format(s)	Fixed, No, Variable depth

Examples	Fixed, No, Variable depth


End Depth Indicator

Description	The End Depth Indicator is checked to indicate that an end depth is specified for the monitoring action.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Depth Interval Indicator

Description	The Depth Interval Indicator is checked to indicate that a depth interval is specified for the monitoring action.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Start Time Indicator

Description	The Start Time Indicator is checked to indicate that a start time is specified for the monitoring action.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


End Time Indicator

Description	The End Time Indicator is checked to indicate that an end time is specified for the monitoring action.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Time Interval Indicator

Description	The Time Interval Indicator is checked to indicate that a time interval is specified for the monitoring action.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Combined Period Indicator

Description	The Combined Period Indicator is checked to indicate that a combined period is specified for the monitoring action.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Start Time

Description	The Start Time indicates the starting time for a specific process.

Format(s)	HH:MM:SS

Examples	05:11:20


End Time

Description	The End Time indicates the finishing time for a specific process.

Format(s)	HH:MM:SS

Examples	17:11:20


Survey Method Name

Description	The Survey Method Name uniquely identifies the Environmental Survey Method. Environmental Survey Methods are used to perform surveys on geographical features.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Important	 When editing, take care not to change the meaning or uniqueness of the name.

Examples	South African Scoring System Version 4


Filter Feature Description

Description	The Filter Feature Description is used to identify a filter feature grouping. A unique set of environmental characteristics (questions) will be defined for filter feature groupings.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples	IDENTIFICATION OF EXOTIC FAUNA


Environmental Characteristic Name

Description	An Environmental Characteristic Name is derived from a predefined Template Characteristic. The name identifies parts of questions that are used to conduct surveys. A question is formulated by combining a maximum of three structure levels, with only the lowest level characteristics being answered when conducting surveys.

Format(s)	Maximum 18 characters.

Examples	Bank Vegetation for Active Channel (parent), Density (child), Reeds (child)

When the Environmental Characteristic has a lookup category defined as its property, the answer will be selected from a list: None - 0; sparse 1, patchy 2


Category Class

Description	The Category Class is used to identify category types that can be used for interpretation purposes or as a selection list for environmental characteristics. A category class is pre-defined as a class structure.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 mixed characters.

Examples	Bank Vegetation for Active Channel (parent), Density (child), Reeds (child)

The category lookup for the answer will consist of the following options: None - 0; sparse 1, patchy 2


Accept Category Items button

Click on this button to accept and validate the category items selected for a specific category class.

 TIP: Do not click on this button until you have defined ALL the required information for a category.

If a weight is specified for an item, it must be specified for all the class items of the category class. The range values may not have any gaps and may not overlap.


Category Items

Description	The Category Items is used to identify categories that can be used to interpret numeric or derived (calculated) environmental characteristics, or as a defined list to select a value form.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples	Bank Vegetation for Active Channel (parent), Density (child), Reeds (child)

The category items for the answer will be: None - 0; sparse 1, patchy 2


Range From

Description	The Range From is used to define the lowest value for a category item.

Format(s)	Decimal. Negative values are allowed.

Examples	2-10 (the Range From is 2)


Range To

Description	The Range To is used to define the highest value for a category item.

Format(s)	Decimal. Negative values are allowed.

Examples	2-10 (the Range To is 10)


Weight

Description	The Weight, also known as Score, is a numerical expression to signify the importance of a measured or observed item in relation to other items. Weight is usually used to calculate indexes.

Format(s)	Decimal. Only positive values are allowed.

Examples	50


Geographical Feature Type

Description	The Geographical Feature Types is used to define the main groupings of geographical features.

Format(s)	Radio Group.

Examples	Transfer Features


Monitoring Feature radio button

Click on this button to search for all monitoring features.


Management Area radio button

Click on this button to search for all management areas.


Water Quality Feature radio button

Click on this button to search for all water features.


Transfer Feature radio button

Click on this button to search for all transfer features.


Reach Zoning Purposes radio button

Click on this button to search for all reaches.


Clear Selection indicator

Click on this indicator to clear the selection.


Clear Filter button

Click on this button to clear the search filter criteria.


Apply Filter button

Click on this button to apply the search filter criteria.


Organisation radio button

Click on this radio button to filter search criteria for organisations.


Persons radio button

Click on this radio button to filter search criteria for persons.


All radio button

Click on this radio button to filter search criteria for organisations and persons.


Survey Feature Type

Description	The Survey Feature Type is used to define geographical feature types that the survey will be performed on.  For Specific (localised) survey methods the feature type that is defined will be for the particular filter feature e.g. A Specific Survey method can be conducted on any Monitoring Point (survey feature type) on the Apies River (filter feature criteria).

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Examples	Monitoring Points, Sector, Reaches


Filter Feature Type

Description	The Filter Feature Type is used to define feature types e.g. rivers, dams and water care works for the selected/filtered geographical type e.g. Management Area, Transfer Feature, Water Feature, and Reaches e.g. For the Apies River, the filter feature type will be Rivers. These feature types will indicate the type of location where the survey method will take place.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Management Area, Water Feature, Transfer Feature, Reaches


Global Indicator checkbox

Description	The Global Indicator checkbox is used to define Environmental Survey Methods as either global or specific methods. When the global indicator checkbox is used on a Find tab, it is used to filter global environmental survey method information. Global environmental survey methods are constructed on a national basis, and are not specific.

Format(s)	FIND TAB:

? 	The query will retrieve Global Environmental Survey Methods and Specific Environmental Survey Methods

Y	The query will only retrieve Global Environmental Survey Methods.

N	The query will only retrieve Specific Environmental Survey Methods that have a registration date but are not currently under construction.

The checkbox will automatically default to ?

MAINTAIN ENVIRONMENTAL SURVEY METHOD FORM:

Y	To define the Environmental Survey Method as a Global Environmental Survey Method.

N	To define the Environmental Survey Method as a Specific Environmental Survey Method.

The checkbox will automatically default to ?

Examples	?,Y,N


Global Indicator

Description	This indicator is checked to shows whether that an environmental method is global or specific.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Registration Date in Environmental Characteristics

Description	The Registration Date indicates the date on which the construction of a specific environmental survey method was completed. An environmental survey method without a registration date is still under construction.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-06-23


Construction checkbox

Description	The Construction checkbox is used to filter environmental survey methods under construction.

Format(s)	? 	The query will retrieve Environmental Survey Methods that are still under construction, and Environmental Survey Methods that have a registration date (are not currently under construction).

Y	The query will only retrieve Environmental Survey Methods that are still under construction.

N	The query will only retrieve Environmental Survey Methods that have a registration date (are not currently under construction).

The checkbox will automatically default to ?

Examples	?; Y; N


Construction Indicator

Description	This indicator is checked to show that an environmental survey method has been completed.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Accept Completed Method button

Click on this button to validate that a method conforms to all the criteria for its completion. If validations are completed, the method's construction indicator will be set to false and the method will receive the system generated date as the registration date, and the button's name changes to "maintain method".


Maintain Environmental Characteristics button

Click on this button to maintain environmental characteristics for a method.


View Method Validation Problems button

Click on this button to view all validation problems that may be encountered when creating an Environmental Survey Method. This will display the result of the last validation.


Method From Date

Description	The Method From Date is used to identify the date from which an environmental survey method is activated or used to conduct feature surveys.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2001-01-20


Geographical Feature Type for filter criteria

Description	The Geographical Feature Type identifies the class structure that the filter feature types must belong to when the survey method is specific.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Examples	Transfer Features


Historical Methods checkbox

Description	The Historical Methods checkbox is used to filter historical environmental survey methods information. This checkbox indicates whether an environmental survey method is part of historical information, i.e. it is registered on the system for the purpose of capturing historical information.

Format(s)	? 	The query will retrieve Historical and Non-Historical Environmental Survey Methods

Y	The query will only retrieve Historical Environmental Survey Methods.

N	The query will only retrieve Non-Historical Environmental Survey Methods.

The checkbox will automatically default to ?

Examples	?, Y, N


Historical Indicator

Description	The Historical Indicator indicates if the survey method is historical or not.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Method To Date

Description	The Environmental Survey Method To Date identifies the last day that an environmental survey method was or can be used on the system for scheduling. A subsequent environmental survey method's from date will be the day after it’s to date.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2001-01-12


Objective/Standard Reason

Description	The Objective/Standard Reason identifies the type of objective or standard to be complied with.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Examples	The Point Objective e.g. Water Supply or Point Standard e.g. Water Services Act (Act 108 of 1997)


Select Preceding Method button

Click on this button to select a previous method.


Problem Description for Environmental Characteristics

Description	The Problem Description explains the method validation problem that was encountered during method validation when creating an Environmental Survey Method

Format(s)	Characters

Examples	ESM must have at least one environmental characteristic


Numeric Value check box

Description	The Numeric Value is an environmental characteristic question answer that indicates that a numeric value answer is expected. If you check the checkbox, please enter a numeric value or calculate a value to obtain an answer.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Guideline radio button

Check the Guideline radio button to indicate that the From and To Range values are used as a guideline on the Questionnaire.


Validation radio button

Check the Validation radio button, to indicate that the From and To Range values are used for validation purposes when entering the feature survey results.


Decimal Digits

Description	The Decimal Digit is an environmental characteristic format that indicates the valid number of decimals to be used for the measurement of numeric answers.

Format(s)	Valid numeric values: 0-3

Important	This measurement expresses the sensitivity of the instruments used, and the measured results must be reported as such.

Examples	3 will be expressed as a number with three decimals e.g. 0.001 or 10.001


Calculated checkbox

Description	The Calculated checkbox indicates that the numeric answer is calculated (derived) by using the required (dependant) Environmental Characteristic values and weights.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Maintain Interpreted Category button

When the category class & category items are linked to a numeric answer, the Maintain Interpreted Category button can be clicked to view or maintain the category class and category items. These category items are used to interpret the result of a calculation method associated with the Environmental Characteristic.


Category Lookup checkbox

Description	The Category Lookup contains the possible answer to an environmental characteristic question that indicates that the answer must be selected from a list of a specific Category Class.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Compulsory checkbox

Description	The Compulsory checkbox is an environmental characteristic question format that indicates that it is compulsory to answer this environmental characteristic question. If checked, the Questionnaire or Release Data radio button must be selected.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Questionnaire radio button

The Questionnaire is a compulsory environmental characteristic format, that is expected to be answered during the feature survey, and it will be indicated as compulsory on the Questionnaire. When the answer for this question is not supplied, the data can still be released.


Release Data Radio button

The Release Data is a compulsory environmental characteristic format, expected to be answered during the feature survey. If unanswered, the associated data will not be released.


Description Checkbox

Description    The Description is an answer for an environmental characteristic question that indicates that a Name or Comment is expected as a result of the feature survey. If checked, then the required Name or Comment radio button must be selected.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Validate on Scroll checkbox

Description	Checking the Validate on Scroll Checkbox results in validation taking place before Scrolling off the record. You may use this functionality at any time to simplify work as well as to become acquainted with the validation rules. To complete a method on the Environmental Survey Method programme, press the Accept button. Any validation problems can be viewed by pressing the View Method Validation Problems button. These problems can be on the Environmental Survey Method or on the Environmental Characteristics Maintenance programme. Scrolling through items in the Environmental Characteristics Maintenance tree with the Validate on Scroll Checkbox checked validates the selected record. You will have the option to either move to the next selected record or stay on the current record with the validation problem.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Comment Radio Button

The Comment is an environmental characteristic question answer that indicates that a Description is expected as a result of the feature survey in a form of a comment.


Name Radio button

The Name is an environmental characteristic question answer that indicates that the Description expected as a result of the feature survey is in the form of a Name.


Multimedia Object checkbox

Description	The Multimedia Object is an environmental characteristic question answer that indicates that a multimedia object is expected as a result of the feature survey. e.g. documents, audio clips, video clips, and image files

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Display Sample button

Click on the Display Sample button to display the Sample Registered Productivity Report, and obtain a list of sample ids.


Display Result button

Click on the Display Result button to display the Result Registered Productivity Report, and obtain a list of sample ids.


Date checkbox

Description	The Date is an environmental characteristic question answer that indicates that a date value is expected as a result of the feature survey.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Coordinates checkbox

Description	The Coordinates is an environmental characteristic question answer that indicates that a Latitude, Longitude and Altitude are expected as result of the feature survey.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Yes/No checkbox

Description	The Yes/No is an environmental characteristic question answer that indicates that a Yes or No answer is expected as a result of the feature survey.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Constant Variable checkbox

Description	The Constant Variable is an environmental characteristic question format checkbox that indicates that the measured observation will remain the same e.g. height above sea level, and will not be supplied as a result for every feature survey.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Minimum Number of Characteristics to be answered

Description	The Minimum Number of Characteristics to be answered is used to define the least number of child level environmental characteristic questions that can be answered for a parent environmental characteristic record.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	3


Maximum Number of Characteristics to be answered

Description	The Maximum Number of Characteristics to be answered is used to define the highest number of child level environmental characteristic questions that can be answered for a parent environmental characteristic record.

 Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	9


Print option

Select the required report by clicking on the required print option radio button.


Amended calculated characteristic complete checkbox

Description	The Amended calculated characteristic complete checkbox is checked when an amended property is completed. The checkbox is automatically checked when all validations are successfully executed and no problems are found.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Accepted Calculated Characteristic button

Click on this button to approve and validate amended environmental characteristics.


High Level Parent

Description	The High Level Parent is the highest level in the hierarchical structure that defines a classified parameter.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 upper characters.

Examples	FAMILY


Parent

 Description	The Parent is the middle level in the hierarchical structure that defines a classified parameter.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Examples	Arachnida


Required Characteristic

Description	The environmental characteristics record required to perform a calculation.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters

Important	Numeric and Calculated records must have at least one required characteristic.

Examples	CCALU NON-CLASSIFIED PARAMETER 1


Active Methods Checkbox

Description	The Active Methods checkbox is used to filter active environmental survey method information.

Format(s)	? 	The query will retrieve environmental survey methods that are still under construction and Environmental Survey Methods that have a registration date (are not currently under construction).

Y 	The query will only retrieve active Environmental Survey Methods

N	The query will only retrieve inactive Environmental Survey Methods (methods that will not be used for scheduling)

The checkbox will automatically default to ?

Examples	?, Y, N


Preceeding Method
Preceding Method

Description	The Preceding Method identifies the environmental survey method used before the present environmental survey method.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Current Methods Listbox

Description	The Current Methods Listbox displays all the environmental survey methods relevant to the selected environmental survey template in the Maintain Environmental Survey Method form.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Unclassified Parameters ID

Description	The Unclassified Parameters ID is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies parameter items that do not belong to a formal classification structure.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	900000001


Unclassified Parameters Abbreviation

Description	The Unclassified Parameters Abbreviation is a shortened description of parameter items that do not belong to a formal classification structure.

Format(s)	Maximum 8 characters

Examples	NOFIND


Unclassified Parameters Name

Description	The Unclassified Parameters Name uniquely identifies parameter items that do not belong to a formal classification structure.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Examples	No algae genera found in sample


Unclassified Parameters Description

Description	The Unclassified Parameters Description uniquely describes unclassified parameters.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed characters.

Examples	None of the parameters for this monitoring variable were found in the sample


Derived Variable ID

Description	The Derived Variable ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify a variable that has been calculated from the measured values of one or more monitoring variables within a sample.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	The ID number cannot be changed.

Examples	1


Derived Variable Name

Description	The Derived Variable Name uniquely identifies a variable that has been calculated from the measured values of one or more monitoring variables within a sample.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 characters.

Examples	SODIUM ABSORPTION RATIO


Parameter Type ID

Description	The Parameter Type ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify a specific multiple monitoring variable parameter type.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	4437


Most Found Indicator

Description	The Most Found Indicator is used to indicate which multiple monitoring variable parameters are most frequently found in samples.

Format(s)	Yes/No Combo box

Important	Parameters that have the Most Found Indicator set to true will be used in Result sheet listings or receive results template displays.

Examples	YES/NO


Parameter Type Indicator

Description	The Parameter Type Indicator is used to indicate whether the parameter is classified or unclassified for the multiple monitoring variable.

Format(s)	Drop Down Button

Examples	Classified, Unclassified


Software Item Name

Description	The Software Item Name contains the physical name of a software item.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples	MonitoringPointQry.dll


Enable Date Range checkbox

Click on this checkbox to be able to enter date ranges.


Monitoring Action button

Click on this button to open the requested Monitoring Action record.


Derived Variable Abbreviation

Description	The Derived Variable Abbreviation is a shortened version of the Derived Variable Name. Derived Variables are calculated from the measured values of one or more monitoring variables within a sample.

Format(s)	Maximum 20 characters.

Examples	SAR, DMS


Transport Method ID

Description	The Transport Method ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify transport methods used to deliver physical samples to a laboratory.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	25


Transport Method Name

Description	The Transport Method Name uniquely identifies transport methods used to deliver physical samples to a laboratory.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples	DELIVERY BY HAND


Monitoring Action Instruction

Description	The Monitoring Action Instruction specifies the way in which a monitoring action is performed.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed characters.

Examples	Collect water from the top 20cm of the surface, avoid debris.


Multimedia ID

Description	The Multimedia ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify multimedia items.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	9000000031


Multimedia Photo ID

The Multimedia Photo ID is the ID of the main photo associated with the Geographical Feature.


Multimedia Map ID

The Multimedia Map ID is the ID of the main map image associated with

the Geographical Feature.


Software Item ID

Description	The Software Item ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies software items (e.g. forms, reports, etc)

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	51


Monitoring Point Group ID

Description	The Monitoring Point Group ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies monitoring point groups containing monitoring points that will be frequently used for different monitoring action/ frequency combinations in the design of a monitoring programme.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	1


Parameter Description

Description	The Parameter Description identifies a multiple monitoring variable parameter. Parameters can be classified or unclassified.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters

Examples	chlorococcaceae


History of Peripheral Information Changes Table Name

Description	The History of Peripheral Information Changes Table Name identifies the table in which data changes have been made.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters

Examples	Analmethod


History of Peripheral Information Changes Description

Description	The History of Peripheral Information Changes Description is used to identify edited records in a table.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters

Examples	Testing Single


History of Peripheral Information Changes Action Done

Description	The History of Peripheral Information Changes Action Done is used to identify the type of action performed on a record e.g. modify, delete, create.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 characters

Examples	Modify, Delete, Create


Monitoring Point Group Name

Description	The Monitoring Point Group Name is used to identify the monitoring point groups containing monitoring points that will be used for different monitoring action/ frequency combinations in the design of a monitoring programme.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 uppercase characters

Examples	VAAL RIVER CATCHMENT


Monitoring Point Group Description

Description	The Monitoring Point Group Description is used to explain why specific monitoring points are grouped together.

Format(s)	Maximum 240 uppercase characters

Examples	UPSTREAM FROM GROOTDRAAI DAM


Software Item Description

Description	The Software Item Description describes software items (e.g. forms, reports, formats, DLL’s, etc.) In case of forms, the software description will be the caption of the form. This is also the logical name of a software item.

Format(s)	Maximum 100 characters.

Important	The description must be unique per software type.

Examples	Monitoring Variable View


Interactive Class Type Filter

Description	The Interactive Class Type Filter filters class type records in the retrieved list.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Important	Enter a potion of the type you require in the field to display the required record in the type list.

Examples	B = Bio-region


Template Characteristic Abbreviation

Description	The Template Characteristic Abbreviation is a shortened version of the name that uniquely identifies an environmental template.

Format(s)	Maximum 20 mixed characters.

Important	 When graphs are printed, the abbreviation will be used on the graphs

Examples	SASS


Template Characteristic Name

Description	The Template Characteristic Name uniquely identifies an environmental template.

Format(s)	Mixed characters.

Examples	South African Scoring System


Template Characteristic Tree View

The Template Characteristic Tree View displays all the Template Characteristics for a selected environmental survey template.


Point Views Radio button

The Point Views Radio button provides selection criteria that can be checked to view specific monitoring points as follows:

•	Active Monitoring - check this radio button to view only active monitoring points

•	Monitoring Points in Programmes - check this radio button to view only Monitoring Points in programmes

•	All Monitoring Points - check this radio button to view all monitoring points

•	Monitoring Points with Monitors - check this radio button to view all monitoring points with monitors

•	Monitoring Points without Monitors - check this radio button to view all monitoring points without monitors


View Points button

Click on this button to view the monitoring points specified on the View Monitoring Points form.


Reconsolidate indicator

This indicator specifies if the monitoring point must be reconsolidated.  The indicator is checked if changes have been made in the monitoring programmes for samples at this monitoring point


Last Consolidation Date

Description	The Last Consolidation Date is the last date that a consolidation was done for the monitoring point.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2001-01-12


Monitoring Active Indicator

This indicator shows if there is active monitoring at the point.  The indicator will be checked if this point has samples that are scheduled to be taken in the future.


Programmes button

Click on this button to display all programmes at the selected monitoring point.


Programme Samples button

Click on this button to display all monitoring information for the specific monitoring programme.


Consolidation Samples button

Click this button to display active consolidated samples at the selected monitoring point


Monitors button

Click this button to display monitors that have been used in monitoring programmes at the selected monitoring point.


Laboratory button

Click this button to display laboratories that have been used in monitoring programmes to analyse samples from the selected monitoring point.


Print Selection button

Click this button to print the selected information.


Monitoring Programme ID

Description	The Monitoring Programme ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies a monitoring programme containing monitoring requirements.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	11


Monitoring Programme Abbreviation

Description	The Monitoring Programme Abbreviation is a shortened version of the Name that uniquely identifies a monitoring programme containing monitoring requirements.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 characters.

Examples	NWQMNI


Monitoring Programme Name

Description	The Monitoring Programme Name uniquely identifies a monitoring programme containing monitoring requirements.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	NATIONAL WATER QUALITY MONITORING NETWORK


Consolidation indicator

Description 	This indicator shows if an individual sample is consolidated or if all the samples in a monitoring programme are consolidated.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


View Detail button

Click on this button to view a sample's analysis requirement details.


Sample Analysis button

Click on this button to view sample analysis details.


View button

Click on this button to view the selected information.


Schedule Samples button

Click on this button to view the samples that are scheduled for monitoring.


Monitoring Schedule Print button

Click on this button to print a list of samples scheduled for monitoring.


Analysis Schedule Print button

Click on this button to print a list of samples and analyses required for the samples that are scheduled to be analysed.


Set Priority Button

Click on this button to change the sample's priority to the highest priority.


Cancel Button

Click on this button to cancel the current system process.


List Button

Click on this button to display a selection list of Data Sources that indicate where the Monitoring Points feature reference came from.


Unsure Button

Click on this button if you are unsure of the correctness of the information entered.


Correct Button

Click on this button if the information entered is correct.


Print Certification Indicator

Description	Check this indicator to print a certificate for the received sample.

Format(s)	Check Box

Examples	Yes/No


Next Sample Button

Click on this button to immediately receive the next sample.


Accept button

Click on this button to confirm that all the information is correct.


View Organization Address Button

Click on this Button to display the Organization Address View form.


Reject button

Click on this button to discard the information.


True/False Indicator

Description	Check the Indicator to True if the statement is correct, and to False if the statement is incorrect. In some instances a new value can be specified if the indicator is set to True.

Format(s)	Check Box

Examples	True/False


Total Weight

Description	The Total Weight is the combined total of all the weights for the received Parameters results.

Format(s)	Maximum 6 numerics.

Examples	66


Management Area Type

Description	The Management Area Type uniquely identifies a sub-type of a management area, for example a drainage area, or province.

Format(s)	Select a management area type by its description from the displayed list.

Examples	Secondary drainage region, Catchment management area, Province.


Management Area Name

Description	The Management Area Name uniquely identifies a management area.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples


Management Area ID

Description	The Management Area ID is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies a management area.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	A2, C21, Gauteng.


Management Area Code

Description	The Management Area Code is a short description given to a Geographical area.

Format(s)	Maximum 12 Characters

Important	Compulsory field, Uppercase

Examples	A2, C21, GAUTENG


System Datasource

Description	The System Datasource uniquely identifies the external system where a specific reference number of a feature originates

Format(s)	Select a System datasource by its description from the displayed list.

Examples	National water quality system, National groundwater database, Polmon.


Filter Features button

Click on the Filter Features button to open a form where filter criteria is specified.


Group Features button

Click on the Group Features button to open a form where grouping criteria for features can be specified.


Add Feature button

Click on this button to open a form to select an additional feature to be added to the selected features.


Initialize Selection button

Click on the Initialize Selection button to discard all current batches, groupings, added and filtered features of the current selected features. Reselection of the features will happen automatically using the same selection criteria. Re-selected features will be displayed according to default groupings.


Refresh Selection button

Click on the Refresh Selection button to refresh, groupings, added and filtered features of the current selected features. Reselection of the features will happen automatically using the same selection criteria. Re-selected features will be displayed according to default groupings.


# $ + K > @ Undo button

Click on the Undo button to undo the last saved set of changes to groups/filters made on the selection of features.


# $ + K > @ Redo button

Click on the Redo button to redo the previous changes.


# $ + K > @ Discard Group button

Click on the Discard Group button to remove a group of features that has been grouped together.


# $ + K > @ Create/View Batch button

Click on the Create/View Batch button to create or view a previously created batch.


# $ + K > @ Save button

Click on this button to save the current changes.


# $ + K > @ Selected checkbox

Click on this button to display selected features (Type = S)


# $ + K > @ Filtered checkbox

Click on this button to display features that have been filtered out (Type = F)


# $ + K > @ Discarded checkbox

Click on this button to display features that have been discarded from the selection. (Type = D)


# $ + K > @ Batched checkbox

Click on this button to view features included in a batch (Type = B)


# $ + K > @ Added Records checkbox

Click on this button to view features added to the selection (Type = A)


# $ + K > @ Management Area

Description	The name of the Management Area.

Format(s)	 Character

Examples	A, A21, Gauteng


# $ + K > @ Located on Type

Description	The Located on Type uniquely identifies the type of water feature that a monitoring point is located on.

Format(s)	Character

Examples	River, borehole, Pipeline.


# $ + K > @ Feature Type

Description	The Feature Type uniquely identifies a geographical feature type.

Format(s)	Character

Examples	Monitoring feature, Transfer feature, Water feature.


# $ + K > @ Latitude

Description	The location of a feature in terms of it’s position North or South of the equator on a map.

Format(s)	 Degrees, minutes and seconds

Examples	32° 15’ 16"


# $ + K > @ Longitude

Description	The location of a feature in terms of it’s position East or West of Greenwitch on a map.

Format(s)	 Degrees, minutes and seconds

Examples	24° 15’ 30"


# $ + K > @ Latitude/Longitude

Description	The location of a feature in terms of it’s position on a map.

Format(s)	 Degrees, minutes and seconds

Examples	24° 15’ 30"


# $ + K > @ Located on Feature

Description	The Located on Feature identifies the geographical feature that the monitoring point is located on.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	Orange, Bonaccord dam.


# $ + K > @ To be evaluated by Organisation

Description	The To be evaluated by Organisation field identifies the organisation that will evaluate the geographical features for consolidation.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	CSIR, Gauteng South.


# $ + K > @ To be evaluated by Person

Description	The To be evaluated by Person field identifies the person that will evaluate the geographical feature for consolidation.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	Dawie Maree, Kobus Myburgh


# $ + K > @ Maintain Batch Reason Description

Description	The Maintain Batch Reason Description provides a reason for the creation of the batch

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	Monitoring features with the same name located on the same dam


# $ + K > @ Access Rights Person

Description	The Access Rights Person uniquely identifies the person who has access rights to this specific feature consolidation run, and may change the feature selection for a batch.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	Dawie Maree, Geert Grobler, Bets Davies.


# $ + K > @ Select Existing Run button

Click on this button to open an enquiry form in order to select an existing feature consolidation run.


# $ + K > @ Modify Existing Selection button

Click on this button to further process the run using the "Modify feature selection" process.


# $ + K > @ Select Features button

Click on this button to enable you to select features to belong to a specific feature consolidation run.


# $ + K > @ Run Description

Description	The Run Description provides an explanation for the existence of the feature consolidation run.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed case characters.

Examples	To consolidate all the monitoring features in the A2 drainage region that are located on the same rivers.


# $ + K > @ Feature Dataset Cleanup radio button

Switching this button on will indicate that the focus of the consolidation run is to identify redundant features of all geographical types.


# $ + K > @ Monitoring Rationalization radio button

Switching this button on will indicate that the focus of the consolidation run is to rationalize features of geographical type Monitoring features only.


# $ + K > @ Prepared for organisation

Description	The Prepared for organisation uniquely identifies the organisation that requested this specific feature consolidation run.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	CSIR, Gauteng South, Rand water board.


# $ + K > @ Prepared for Person

Description	The Prepared for Person uniquely identifies the person that requested this specific feature consolidation run.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	Dawie Maree, Geert Grobler, Kobus Myburgh.


# $ + K > @ User Login

Description	The User Login identifies the person (user) performing an action.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 characters.

Examples	abem


# $ + K > @ Close Date

Description	The Close Date uniquely identifies the date on which the user was removed as the database user.

Format(s)	YY/MM/DD

Examples	00/10/27


# $ + K > @ Run ID radio button

Switching on this button will enable the user to find a Consolidation run by using only it’s unique id.


# $ + K > @ Access radio button

Switching on this button will enable the user to find a Consolidation run(s) by specifying persons that are defined as having access to the consolidation run(s).


# $ + K > @ Feature radio button

Switching on this button will enable the user to find a Consolidation run(s) by identifying consolidation runs where a specific feature is part of the selected list of features of a run.


# $ + K > @ Other radio button

Switching on this button will enable the user to find a Consolidation run by entering a set of criteria.


# $ + K > @ Run ID

Description	The Run ID is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies a consolidation run.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	1027, 100342


# $ + K > @ Access Rights

Description	The Access Rights field defines the users who have access to the specific Consolidation run.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	Thya Pather, Geert Grobler.


# $ + K > @ Run Status

Description	The Run Status

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	Features selected, Features batched.


# $ + K > @ Prepared By

Description	Prepared By uniquely identifies the person who prepared an existing run, or is creating a new run.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	Thya Pather, Dawie Maree.


# $ + K > @ Creation Begin Date

Description	The Creation Begin Date .is used to locate Consolidation runs created on and after the specified date.

Format(s)	ccyy-mm-dd

Examples	2002-03-26


# $ + K > @ Creation End Date

Description	The Creation End Date is used to locate Consolidation runs created on and before the specified date.

Format(s)	ccyy-mm-dd

Examples	2002-06-23


Parameter Group

Description	The Parameter Group uniquely identifies the group to which the parameter of the monitoring variable belongs.

Format(s)	Maximum 20 uppercase characters.

Examples	CYANOPHYTA


Pin Code

Description	The Pin Code is used to gain access to a system and matches the chosen organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 4 digits.

Examples	*****


New Pin Code Button

Click on this button to enter a new pin code.


Login Button

Click on the Login button to log into the system once you have entered the required access login criterion. The button will be disabled until a pin number has been entered in the field.


External Indicator

Description	The External Indicator is checked to indicate that an organisation is external (outside) DWAF.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Start Date

Description	The Start Date is the date on which the specified period begins.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


End Date

Description	The End Date is the date on which the specified period ends.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-10-30


Programme Variables Button

Click on this button to view all the required monitoring variables for the requested sample, and the monitoring programme in which they are registered.


Analysis Button

Click on this button to view all the required monitoring variables that have been scheduled for the requested sample.


Scheduled Analysis button

Click on this button to view all the required monitoring variables that have been scheduled for the requested sample.


Not Found button

If the information you require is not found, click on this button to enter your own description.


QC Date

Description	The QC Date is the date on which quality control was performed on the sample.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD.

Examples	1999-10-30


QC Time

Description	The QC Time is the time on which quality control was performed on the sample.

Format(s)	HH:MM.

Examples	18:45


Sample Status Date

Description	The Sample Status Date is the date on which the sample acquired the status.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD.

Examples	1999-10-30


Sample Status Time

Description	The Sample Status Time is the time on which the sample acquired the status.

Format(s)	HH:MM.

Examples	18:45


Replicated Samples button

Click on this button to display all the replications that have been received for the specific sample during the frequency period.


First Name(s)

Description	The First Name(s) is the name of a person.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Peter


Identity Number

Description	The Identity Number is a number allocated by the government that is used to uniquely identify a person.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	5801030342087


Language

Description	The Language is the preferred language spoken by the person.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	English


Addressee

Description	The Addressee is the position of the head of an organisation to which mail is addressed.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Director, Manager


Addressee ID

Description	The Addressee ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the position of the head of an organisation to which mail is addressed.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Mission Statement

Description	The Mission Statement is a statement of the organisation's purpose and intent.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Committed to providing pure water and sanitation.


Relation Structure Reason

Description	The Relation Structure Reason defines the function of organisations. The function of organisations and persons are associated in a hierarchical reporting structure in terms of ideas and responsibilities.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Forum Management, Managing Water


Relation Structure Qualifications

Description	The Relation Structure Qualifications defines the role and/or responsibility of a person or organisation within a hierarchical relation structure.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Incident Reporter, Site Manager


Relation Structure Owner

Description	The Relation Structure Owner is the organisation that is associated with or responsible for the specific relation structure.

Format(s)	Upper case characters.

Examples	DEPARTMENT OF WATER AFFAIRS AND FORESTRY


Relationship Explanation

Description	The Relationship Explanation provides a reason for the existence of the relationship.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	IWQS analyses samples for national resource quality assessments / IWQS is not a commercial laboratory


Spatial indicator

Description	The Spatial Indicator is checked to indicate that a feature is represented spatially on shape files.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Important	The value will be updated when a batch job is completed and feature is on applicable shape files.

Examples


Qualify Relationship

Description	The Qualify Relationship describes the person or organisation's role and responsibility within the hierarchical structure.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Chair Person, Environmental Coordinator


Number of samples scheduled

This is the number of samples that are/have been scheduled during the specified period.


Number of samples received

This is the number of samples that are/have been received during the specified period.


Number of Samples with problems

This is the number of samples that have failed the quality assurance process.


Number of Samples Released

Number of samples that have been analysed for the specified period and that have completed the quality assurance process.


Number of Samples Rejected

The number of samples rejected for the specified period


Number of Analyses

The number of samples analysed for the specific period.


Number of Sample Problems

The number of samples that failed a specific quality assurance method for the period specified.


Number of Results scheduled

Number of analysis results scheduled for the period specified


Number of Results Received

Number of analysis results received for the period specified


Number of Results with Problems

Number of analysis results with problems that failed the quality assurance process for the period specified


Number of Results Released

Number of analysis results released for the specified period that completed the quality assurance process.


Number of Results Rejected

Number of analysis results rejected for the period specified


Group QC Indicator

This indicator indicates if a Quality Control Method is for a single variable or a group of variables.

E.g. Yes = Quality Control

No  = No Quality Control


End QC Button

Click on this button to end a specific Quality Control Method as of the current system date.


Start/Modify Button

Click on this button to Start or Modify a specific Quality Control Method.


Unrelease Results Button

Click on this button to recall the analysis results of the selected sample from the database.


Results Button

Click on this button to view result information of all variables analysed for a specific sample.


Calculator Button

Click on this button to activate the Windows Calculator. After the calculation, close the calculator to return to Result Registration Validation.


Problem Statistics Button

Click on this button to view a detailed list of all problems that occurred in the specified period.


Activate Results Button

Click on this button to activate a variable's result value.


Reject Results Button

Click on this button to reject a variable's result value.


Reanalysis History Button

Click on this button to view the all result values previously analysed for a variable.


Result Status

Description	The Result Status refers to the present status of the result analysis of a variable in the quality assurance process.

Format(s)	Maximum 3 Uppercase characters

Examples	REA


History Graph Button

Click on this button to view a graph of the current result value for the variable in context with previously measured result values.


Release Problem Description

Description	The Release Problem Description explains the problem encountered during the result analysis releasing process of a sample.

Format(s)	Characters

Examples	Mon_feature_id must have a value


Corrective Action

Description	The Corrective Action is the steps that could be followed to resolve the problem encountered in the result analysis release process.

Format(s)	Characters

Examples	Please release the sample again.  If problem persists please log a call.


Multiple Variable Parameter Description

Description	The Multiple Variable Parameter Description identifies a parameter for a monitoring variable.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 uppercase characters/numerics.

Examples	CHLOROPHYTA - ACTINASTRUM


Time Created

Description	The Time Created is the time that a specific record was created.

Format(s)	HH:MM

Examples	10:16


Resolved Indicator

The resolved indicator indicates if a problem is resolved.


Samples in Box Button

Click on this button to view all the samples in the specified box.


Result Problem ID

Description	The Result Problems ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify a specific Result problem record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	1027, 100342


Sample Info Button

Click on this button to view the sample information of a sample in a sample box in a specific position.


Accept Result Button

Click on this button to accept the current result value for the variable as the correct value.


Earliest Date

Description	The Earliest Date is the earliest date that a scheduled sample can be taken.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2002-06-12


Latest Date

Description	The Latest Date is the last date that a scheduled sample can be taken.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2002-06-12


Sample Expected Date

Description	The Sample Expected Date is the date that a scheduled sample must be taken.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2002-06-12


Select button

Click on this button to select a specific record.


Selected Checkbox

Description	The Selected Checkbox is used to select or deselect layers. The selected layers (layers with a correction mark in the 'Selected' checkbox) will be the only layers that will be opened and displayed on GIS.

Format(s)	Check Box

Examples	Monitoring Point


Select All button

Click on this button to select all the records.


Unselect All button

Click on this button to deselect all the records.


Unselect One button

Click on this button to deselect one record.


Structure Reason checkbox

This checkbox is checked to indicate that the person or organisation is linked to a relationship structure.


Use Structure checkbox

This checkbox is checked to indicate that the relationship explanation is used in a relationship structure.


Times Used

The Times Used indicates the amount of times that a record has been used.


Result Type

Description	The Result Type indicates the type of result that is entered during results received.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Single, Multiple, Depth Profile, Time Series


Error Code

Description	The Error Code is a system generated number that identifies an error.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples


Error Description

Description	The Error Description uniquely identifies the type of error encountered.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples


Problem Date

Description	The Problem Date is the date that the problem was encountered.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2002-03-16


Problem Time

Description	The Problem Time is the time that the problem was encountered.

Format(s)	HH:MM

Examples	10:16


Stored Object Indicator

The Stored Object Indicator is checked if a multimedia image has been stored.


Media Reference Indicator

The Media Reference Indicator is checked if a multimedia reference exists.


Column Combo Box

The Column Combo Box contains a list of all the possible fields of a data set that can appear as columns in a grid linked to the data set.


Add Column button

The Add Column button is enabled when the selected item in the Column Combo Box displays a field that does not appear as a column in the grid. Click on the Add Column button to enter the Column Combo Box's selected item into the grid.


Remove Column Button

The Remove Column button is enabled when the selected item in the Column Combo Box displays a field that appears as a column in the grid. Click on the Remove Column button to remove the specific column with the Field Name from the grid.


Gazette Notice Number

Description	The Gazette Notice Number is a unique number allocated to every government gazette.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples


Gazette Notice Date

Description	The Gazette Notice Date is the date on which the specific government gazette was published.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2002-05-03


Gazette Indicator

The Gazette Indicator is checked to indicate that a specific government gazette is linked to a multimedia object.


Accredited Organisation ID

Description	The Accredited Organisation ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies an organisation with accredited analysis methods.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Accredited Organisation Abbreviation

Description	The Accredited Organisation Abbreviation identifies an organisation with accredited analysis methods.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters.

Important	Names can change e.g. the IWQS was previously called the Hydrological Research Institute.

Examples	ERWAT


Accredited Method Code

Description	The Accredited Method Code is a unique identification code used by a laboratory or monitor for an accredited method/observation/survey.

Format(s)	Maximum 20 upper case characters.

Examples	TAL-AUTO


Accredited Method Description

Description	The Accredited Method Description describes the specific method accredited by the accredited organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

 Examples	Tal Automated Dromophenol Blue


Accreditation button

Click on this button to open the Accreditation Maintenance form in order to maintain accreditation information needed for WMS analysis and survey methods. The Accreditation information will be displayed on the Accreditation Maintenance form as specified in the filter criteria.


Accreditation Body ID

Description	The Accreditation Body ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the organisation responsible for auditing the accredited organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10797


Accreditation Body Abbreviation

Description	The Accreditation Body Abbreviation identifies the organisation responsible for auditing the accredited organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters.

Examples	DWAF-IWQS-PRETORIA


View History button

Click on this button to open the Accreditation History form in order to view the history of an organisation's accredited methods.


Analysis Method Start Date

Description	The Analysis Method Start Date is the date on which the analysis method began.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2002-03-16


Analysis Method End Date

Description	The Analysis Method End Date is the date on which the analysis method ends.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2002-03-16


Accredited Expiry Date

Description	The Accredited Expiry Date is the date on which the accredited method expires, and also the date on which the WMS analysis method's accreditation expires.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2002-03-16


Accreditation Status ID

Description	The Accreditation Status ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies an accreditation status record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Period Start Date

Description	The Period Start Date is the date on which the period begins.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2002-03-16


Period End Date

Description	The Period End Date is the date on which the period ends.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2002-03-16


Accreditation Status

Description	The Accreditation Status is the status of an accreditation record during a specific period.

Format(s)	A, S

Examples	A = Active; S = Suspended


Days Outstanding Report Checkbox

Description	The Days Outstanding Report checkbox is checked to generate a report for outstanding samples.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Hit List - All Problems

Description	The Hit List - All Problems checkbox is checked to generate a report for results with all kinds of problems.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Hit List - Quality Control

Description	The Hit List - Quality Control checkbox is checked to generate a report for results with quality control problems.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Hit List - Verification

Description	The Hit List - Verification checkbox is checked to generate a report for results with verification problems.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Hit List - Illegal

Description	The Hit List - Illegal checkbox is checked to generate a report for illegal results.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


LIMS Transfer Error List Check Box

Description	The LIMS Transfer Error List checkbox is checked to generate a report for all LIMS transfer errors.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Period From

Description	The Period From Date is the date on which the report period begins. The sample date will be used to determine what samples must be included in the report.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2002-03-16


Period To

Description	The Period End Date is the date on which the period ends. The sample date will be used to determine what samples must be included in the report.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Examples	2002-03-16


Problem Detail Report Check Box

Description	The Problem Detail Report checkbox is checked to generate a detailed report for results/samples with problems.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Problem Hit List Report Check Box

Description	The Problem Hit List Report checkbox is checked to generate a summarised report for results/samples with problems.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Reanalysis Request Report Checkbox

Description	The Reanalysis Request Report checkbox is checked to generate a report of results that were sent for reanalysis.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Change Action

Description	The Change Action identifies the type of action used to alter a record.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Insert, Update, Delete


Change Cause

Description	The Change Cause identifies the reason for the changes to a record.

Format(s)       Maximum 1 character.

Examples	B-Business Event, E- Error Fix


Change Choice

Description	The Change Choice indicates whether the Organisation, Supervisor or Rank has changed.

Format(s)       Maximum 1 character.

Examples	S-Supervisor,  R- Rank


Non Standard Reason

Description	The Non Standard Reason identifies the reason for the existence of the non-standard variable as well as its history.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples


Non Standard Type

Description	The Non Standard Type indicates whether the variable is a standard variable or a non standard variable.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Non Standard Variable


OK button (standard)

Click on this button to close the form and to open the applicable form with the specified Filter Criteria.


Open button

Click on this button to open up the selected layers in the open layer selection form in the GIS environment.


Country Town Suburb ID

Description	The Country Town Suburb ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the combination country, town, or suburb.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10046


Country Name
Country

Description	The Country field identifies the name of a country (international border).

Format(s)	Maximum 60 upper case characters.

Examples	SOUTH AFRICA


Primary Place Name
Primary Place

Description	The Primary Place field identifies the name of a town and/or suburb, and is the larger geographical area wherein the secondary place is located e.g. Johannesburg is the Primary Place, and Sandton is the Secondary Place.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 upper case characters.

Examples	JOHANNESBURG


Secondary Place Name
Secondary Place

Description	The Secondary Place field identifies the name of a town and/or suburb that is the secondary location where mail is collected or delivered. Examples: Garsfontein X11 is a Secondary Place, and Garsfontein is a Primary Place.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 upper case characters.

Examples	GARSFONTEIN X11


Exchange Name

Description	The Exchange Name is the town or regional area name that is associated with the telephone exchange.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 uppercase characters.

Examples	JOHANNESBURG


Dialing Code

Description	The Dialing Code is a numeric code allocated to a town or regional area associated with an exchange for telephone dialling purposes.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numbers.

Examples	011


First Three Numbers

Description	The First Three Numbers are the first three numerics in a telephone number. These numbers are used to validate the telenumbers entered on the system.

Format(s)	Maximum 3 numbers.

Examples	376


Start Number

Description	The Start Numbers refers to the lowest number that the telephone numbers related to the dialling code will start at. These numbers are used to validate the telenumbers entered on the system.

Format(s)	Maximum 4 numbers.

Examples	0


End Number

Description	The End Number refers to the maximum number that the telephone numbers related to the dialling code will end at.  These numbers are used to validate the telenumbers entered on the system.

Format(s)	Maximum 4 numbers.

Examples	4999


Dialing Procedure Code

Description	The Dialing Procedure Code refers to type of dialling procedure used. Consult the telephone directory for the possible values and their description

Format(s)	Maximum 1 value.

Examples	X - Dial the exchange code, followed by the required telephone number

Y - Dial the exchange code and ask the operator for the number

Z - Dial the exchange code and ask the operator for the required exchange and number.

A - Service Calls

D - Maxi call

M - Expansion


High Level Type

Description	The High Level Type is a sub-classification of a Geographical Feature, Geographical Area, Monitoring Point or Flow Association

Format(s)	Radio Group or Drop-down list with applicable values.

Important	Geographical Features High Level types: Geographical Areas, Transfer Feature, Water Bodies, Rivers, Groundwater Features, Water Use Sites, Monitoring Points, Sectors or Reaches

Geographical Areas High Level types: Water Management Areas (WMA), DWAF Water Resource Officer, Sub-catchments or other areas.

Monitoring Point High Level Types: gives an indication whether the Monitoring Point is Located on a Transfer Feature, Located on a River, Located on a Groundwater Feature, Located on a Water Use Site, Located on a Water Body, a Meteorological Monitoring Point or a Monitoring Point not Located on a Feature.

Flow Association High Level Type: gives an indication whether the Monitoring Point of the Flow Association is Located on the Source, Destination or Transfer Feature of the Flow Association.

Examples	River, Groundwater Features


Geographical Feature Type

Description	The Geographical Feature Type identifies the type of a geographical feature.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples	Primary Drainage Region, Pipeline, Mine, Borehole, Monitoring Points, Reservoir/Dam


Drainage Region

Description	The Drainage Region, also known as the water catchment area or watershed, is a management area that defines a river or stream together with all its tributary surface streams.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Elandsfontein Catchment Area


Administration Area

Description	The Administration Area is a management area that has an administrative authority.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	 Province or Boundaries of South Africa


Logical Table ID

Description	The Logical Table ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the logical table. A logical table is a subset table that is used and has not been physically implemented on the database.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	1


Logical Table Name

Description	The Logical Table Name uniquely identifies a logical table. A logical table is a subset table that is used and has not been physically implemented on the database.

Format(s)	Maximum 18 lower case characters. The name must be unique.

Examples	logical


Logical Table Description

Description	The Logical Table Description uniquely defines a logical table. A logical table is a subset table that is used and has not been physically implemented on the database.

Format(s)	Mixed case characters.

Examples	Logical Table for Subset Table Maintain


Related Subset Indicator

The Related Subset Indicator is checked to indicate that the logical table is used in a subset, and unchecked to indicate that it the logical table is not used in a subset.


Postal Code Type

Description	The Postal Code Type indicates whether the postal code is a box, street, or private bag code.

Format(s)	Drop Down List.

Examples	Box, Street, Private Bag


Postal Code

Description	The Postal Code is the post box or street code of the town and/or suburb.

Format(s)	Maximum 20 characters.

Examples	0157


Business/Home indicator

Description	The Business/Home indicator indicates whether the address is home or business related.

Format(s)	Drop Down Box.

Important	An organisation may only have a business address, while a person can only have home related post and physical addresses.

Examples	Business; Home


Postal Code Not Found button

Click on this button if you have not found the required postal code on the system, and would like to create a new record.

Important: Please verify that a valid country, town or suburb combination does not exist before adding a new combination.


Feature Description

Description	The Feature Description describes the geographical feature.

Format(s)	Maximum 255, Mixed Characters.

Examples       AMERSFOORT SEWAGE EFFLUENT CANAL


SIC (Standard Industrial Class) Activities

Description	The SIC Activities is the Standard Industrial classification of activities that categorises activities according to their function.

Format(s)	Mixed Characters.

Examples	23 - MINING OF GOLD AND URANIUM ORE


Reason for Bi-Directional Transfer

Description	The Reason for Bi-Directional Transfer provides an explanation for the intermittent change of flow between source and destination.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples


Bi-Directional Indicator

The Bi-Directional Indicator indicates that a transfer feature's water flow can intermittently change to flow from the source to the destination, and then flow in the opposite direction, where the destination becomes the source, and the source becomes the destination.


Subdivided Area Indicator

This indicates that a specific water feature is an area that is sub-divided into components. E.g. African Gold Mining Limited is a specific water feature area of the type mines that is subdivided into components like sluice dams, mineshafts.


Component of an Area Indicator

This indicates that a component is part of a specific water feature that has been sub-divided E.g. African Gold Mining Limited is a specific water feature that is of the type mines that is subdivided into components like sluice dams, mine shafts.


Drainage Region Indicator

Click on this indicator to select all records that are management areas of the type drainage region.


Other Criteria radio button

Click on this button to search with other selection criteria.


River Order

Description	The River Order (also known as stream order) is a general way of describing the size of a river or stream. The smallest stream is known as a first order stream, first order streams join to become larger second order rivers which in turn join to become third order streams, and so on.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	2


Liaison Entity ID

Description	The Liaison Entity ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the interested person or organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Get River Order button

The Get River Order button is enabled when focus is on a river that is spatially represented, and the system is in edit mode. Click on this button, for the system to automatically enter the river's order as displayed in GIS Arcview.


Liaison Entity Name

Description	The Liaison Entity Name identifies the interested person or organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 uppercase characters.

Examples	MAREE D


Liaison Entity Abbreviation

Description	The Liaison Entity Abbreviation is the concatenated name of the Person or abbreviation of the Organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 uppercase characters.

Examples	MAREE D


Degree

Description	The Degree is a unit of latitude or longitude divided into 60 minutes that is used to define points on the earth's surface.  A Degree is also a point defined by units of latitude and/or longitude.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	34


Minutes

Description	Minutes is a unit of angular measurement. The angular length of the circumference of a circle is 360 degrees. Each degree is divided into 60 minutes, and each minute into 60 seconds

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	24


Seconds

Description	Seconds is a unit of angular measurement. The angular length of the circumference of a circle is 360 degrees. Each degree is divided into 60 minutes, and each minute into 60 seconds

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	38


Administrative Area Indicator

The Administrative Area Indicator is checked to indicate that the feature is an Administrative Area.


Related Variable ID

Description 	The Related Variable ID is a number that uniquely identifies a specific measured fundamental variable associated with a derived variable (calculated variables).

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Example 	84


Related Reason

Description	The Related Reason is the reason for the existence of the relationship between a derived variable and a fundamental variable. The Related Reason must define the validity and conditions of the qualifying relationship.

Format(s)	Maximum 240 upper case characters/numerics.

Example	DMS-Tot-Water(derived variable) is calculated from macro constituents. In general this calculation is sufficient for the substitution of measured TDS (DS-Tot-Water) when the sample predominantly contains macro constituents.


Transfer Feature is involved checkbox

The checkbox is checked to indicate that a Transfer Feature occurs between the source and destination features.


Change User Code

Description	The Change User Code identifies the person affecting changes to the system.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples	Anton Louw


Change User Login

Description	The Change User Login identifies the user that is logged in the system making changes to the records.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 characters.

Examples	123456


Change User Name

Description	The Change User Name identifies the name of the user who is currently making record changes in the system.

Format(s)	Maximum 20 characters.

Examples	Goodwill Lefenya


Change User Organization Id
Change User Organisation Id

Description	The Change User Organisation Id identifies the organisation that the user belongs to. The user is specified during organisational access control when logging into the system.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	2323233


Change User Organization Abreviation
Change User Organisation Abbreviation

Description	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation represents the organisation that the user belongs to. The user is specified during organisational access control when logging into the system.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples	DWAF-RQS


Change Organisation Abbreviation

Description	The Change Organisation Abbreviation is a shortened version of the organisation, responsible for affecting changes to the system.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters.

Examples	IWQS


New Relation Structure button

Click on this button to create a new relationship between a person and/or organisation.


Out of Use Indicator

This indicator is checked to indicate that the record is no longer in use.


LIMS Analysis Method button

The LIMS Analysis Method button is available on the IWQS network and is only enabled when the LIMS connection is active, and when the specific LIMS Analysis Method exists on the LIMS database.  You can click on this button to view the specific LIMS analysis method.


Laboratory Analysis Method History button

Click on this button to view the history of relationships between a laboratory and an analysis method.


Monitor Observation Method History button

Click on this button to view the history of relationships between monitors and an observation method.


Table ID

Description	The Table ID is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies the table.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	The Table ID may differ between databases e.g. between IWQS and Corpdev and the Test db.

Examples	1


Table Name

Description	The Table Name uniquely identifies the name of a physical database table.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 mixed characters

Examples	map_colour


Table Long Name

Description	The Table Long Name is a descriptive name of a physical database table.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed characters

Examples	Fill PatternMod


Table Purpose

Description	The Table Purpose provides a reason for the existence of the table on the database.

Format(s)	Maximum 250 mixed characters

Examples	The nodes of classification structure trees


Table Existence

Description	The Table Existence indicates that the table exists on either the WMS or GIS databases and is still in use on the database.

Format(s)	Maximum 3 characters.

Important	If the table is still in use, the field will indicate on which database the table exists.

Examples	WMS - This table exists on the WMS database

SDE - This table exists on the GIS database

No - This table no longer exists.


Column Name

Description	The Column Name uniquely identifies the name of a field on the physical database table.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 mixed characters

Examples	RAINFALL


Column Long Name

Description	The Column Long Name is a descriptive name for a column on a physical database table.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 mixed characters

Examples	RAINFALL ANNUAL


Column Description

Description	The Column Description explains the reason for the existence of the column on the database table.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed characters

Examples	RAINFALL  	Mean annual rainfall (mm per year)


Class Related Indicator

Description	The Class Related Indicator shows if there are class structures associated with the specific record's table column.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


Interpreted Indicator

Description	The Interpreted Indicator field is not yet functional.

Format(s)	This is a display only field.

Examples


Exist Indicator

Description	The Exist Indicator indicates whether the column currently exists on the physical database table.

Format(s)	1 character

Examples	1 = indicates that the column exists on either the WMS or GIS database

0 = indicates that the column no longer exists


SuperType Table

Description	The SuperType Table identifies the supertype tables that are associated with subtype tables (physical or logical). Subtype tables will inherit attributes, characteristics, and operations from the supertype table.

Format(s)	Maximum 18 mixed characters.

Examples	spatial_feature is the supertype table for monitoring_feature, water_feature, transfer_feature and management_area.


Related Super Type Table

Description	The Related SuperType Table identifies the related supertype tables that are associated with subtype tables (physical or logical). Subtype tables will inherit attributes, characteristics, and operations from the supertype table.

Format(s)	Maximum 18 mixed characters.

Examples	spatial_feature is the supertype table for monitoring_feature, water_feature, transfer_feature and management_area.


Subset Type

Description	The Subset Type indicates if the subtype table in the supertype subtype relationship will be a logical table or a physical database table.

Format(s)	Maximum 1 character.

Examples	Physical, Logical


Subset Table

Description	The Subset Table is associated with the supertype table and is either a logical or physical database table.

Format(s)	Maximum 18 mixed characters.

Examples	Spatial_feature is the supertype table for monitoring_feature, water_feature, transfer_feature, and management_area. An example of a logical subtype: address_tel_com is the supertype table and is associated with the logical subtype table cell, pager, telephone, and fax.


Db Subset Code

Description	The db Subset Code represents a specific subset type and is stored on the supertype table to indicate whether the record in the supertype table belongs to a certain kind of subset. This db subset code can be used hardcoded for certain business rule validations on the form.

Format(s)	Maximum 1 character.

Examples	Database subset codes are C - cellular phone, F - fax, P - pager, T - telephone; Spatial feature subset codes are M - monitoring feature, W - water feature, T - transfer feature, A - Management Area, and

R - Reach.


Subset Code Column

Description	The Subset Code Column indicates on which physical database column on the supertype table, the db subset code will be stored.

Format(s)	Maximum 18 mixed characters.

Examples	telecom_type on address_tel_com and database_type on spatial_feature


Populated Column

Description	The Populated Column identifies the column on the supertype that will contain class types belonging to the selected class structure or the selected class type.

Format(s)	This is a display only field.

Important	This field will be empty if a caption has been entered for the supertype subtype combination. These records are maintained on the Table Column Class Maintenance form.

Examples	institute_type_id


Populated Table

Description	The Populated Table identifies the table that will contain class types belonging to the selected class structure or the selected class type. The populated table will be the same as the supertype table.

Format(s)	This is a display-only field.

Important	This field will be empty if a caption was entered for the supertype subtype combination.

Examples	address_tel_com


Enter Location Name or a part thereof

Description	The Enter Location Name or a part thereof field is used to enter search criteria for the form. You can enter a value,  or a part thereof with an *.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples 	Pret*


Postal Code Area Selection Filter Criteria

Description	The Enter Location Name or a part thereof field or Postal Code Area Selection Filter Criteria is used to enter search criteria for the form. You can enter a value, or a part thereof with an *.  Any records that match the entered value with fields Postal Code, Suburb or Town will be retrieved.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples	Pret* ,  *idge


Organisation Not Found button

Click on this button to confirm that you have not found the required organisation record. The Organisation Maintenance form will open, and you will be able to enter a new organisation name.


Organisation History View Button

Click on this button to open the Organisation History View form.


Member History View Button

Click on this button to open the Member History View form.


Division/Subdivision

Description	A Division/Subdivision identifies the organisation's directorate or applicable division/subdivision.

Format(s)	Maximum 50 upper case characters.

Examples       PUMPING STATION, SALES AND MARKETING,

                        HYDROLOGY


Division/Subdivision Not Found button

Click on this button to confirm that you have not found the required division/subdivision record. The Organisation Maintenance form will open, and you will be able to enter a new division/subdivision.


Area Office

Description	An Area Office identifies the location that an organisation's office is situated in. For example Rand Water has two different area offices, one located in Johannesburg, and the other in Vereeniging.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters.

Examples	VEREENIGING


Area Office Not Found button

Click on this button to confirm that you have not found the required area office record. The Organisation Maintenance form will open, and you will be able to enter a new area office.


No Season Seasons Selection Indicator

Click on this indicator when all seasonal data needs to be included in the report selection criteria.


Summer Season Selection Indicator

Click on this indicator when only summer seasonal data needs to be included in the report selection criteria.


Winter Season Selection Indicator

Click on this indicator when only winter seasonal data needs to be included in the report selection criteria.


In Process

Description	In Process status field indicates the amount of samples that have an "in process" status for the specified period. In process indicates that the samples are still in the analysis process, and therefore results are not yet available.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	1


Rejected

Description	Rejected status field indicates the amount of samples that have a "rejected" status for the specified period. Rejected indicates that the samples were rejected during the analysis process, and therefore results are not available.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	1


Completed Samples

Description	The Completed Samples field indicates the amount of samples that have a "completed" status for the specified period. Completed indicates that the samples were completed during the analysis process, and therefore results are available.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	1


Sample Status Total

Description	The Sample Status Total field indicates the total amount of samples that were taken for the specified period, and includes all samples with a status of  "in process",  "rejected" or "completed" for the specified period.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	1


Sample Start Date

Description	Sample Start Date is the starting date in a period that indicates when the sampling started.  When there is no end date, the sample start date indicates the date on which sampling occurred.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	2002-01-17


Sample Start Time

Description	Sample Start Time is the starting time in a period that indicates when the sampling started.  When there is no end time, the sample start time indicates the time on which sampling occurred.

Format(s)	HH:MM

Examples	10:21


Time Interval of Results Indicator

This field indicates that sample observation information was gathered over a period with time intervals. Typically logger instruments are used to obtain information over time intervals. Frequency of time intervals measurements is always less than 12 hours.


Depth Profile Type of Results Indicator

This field indicates that sample observation information was gathered from depth intervals.


Single Type of Results Indicator

The Single Type of Result Indicator is used to select results for monitoring variables, where a sampling incident will only produce one result per monitoring variable. It is important to know whether a variable is single or multiple as multiple variables have many parameters linked to them, and therefore many results can also be expected. An example of a multiple monitoring variable is algae identification that contains a parameter list of algae genera, while examples of single monitoring variables are chloride and sulphur.


Multiple Type of Results Indicator

The Multiple Type of Result Indicator is used to select results for monitoring variables, where a sampling incident will produce more than one result depending on the number of parameters linked to a monitoring variable.


Latitude

Description	The Latitude is defined as the angular distance in degrees north or south of the equator. Provided in degrees, minutes, seconds (DMS) or decimal degrees (DD).

Format(s)	DMS or numeric.

Examples	24  25  12 (DMS) or 24.23567 (DD)


Longitude

Description	The Longitude is defined as the angular distance in degrees east or west of the Greenwich Prime Meridian. Provided in degrees, minutes, seconds (DMS) or decimal degrees (DD).

Format(s)	DMS or numeric.

Examples	26  30  15(DMS) or 26.25689 (DD)


Number of Elements Statistics Indicator

Description	The Number of Elements Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the number of samples for the selected dataset must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


Number of Elements Statistics

Description	The Number of Elements Statistics indicates the number of samples for the selected dataset.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	  5


Minimum Statistics Indicator

Description	The Minimum Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the minimum statistic for the selected dataset must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


Minimum Statistics

Description	The Minimum Statistics indicates the minimum statistic for the selected dataset.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	  5


5% Percentile Statistics Indicator

Description	The 5% Percentile Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the 5th percentile must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


5% Percentile Statistics

Description	The 5% Percentile Statistics indicates the 5th percentile calculated.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	 10


10% Percentile Statistics Indicator

Description	The 10% Percentile Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the 10th percentile must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


10% Percentile Statistics

Description	The 10% Percentile Statistics indicates the 10th percentile calculated.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	 10


25% Percentile Statistics Indicator

Description	The 25% Percentile Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the 25th percentile must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


25% Percentile Statistics

Description	The 25% Percentile Statistics indicates the 25th percentile calculated.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	 10


50% Percentile (Median) Statistics Indicator

Description	The 50% Percentile Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the 50th percentile or median must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


50% Percentile (Median) Statistics

Description	The 50% Percentile Statistics indicates the 50th percentile calculated.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	 10


Average (Mean) Statistics Indicator

Description	The Average (Mean) Percentile Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the average or mean of the selected dataset must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


Average(Mean) Statistics

Description	The Average (Mean) Statistics indicates the average or mean of the selected dataset.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	 10


75% Percentile Statistics Indicator

Description	The 75% Percentile Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the 75th percentile must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


75% Percentile Statistics

Description	The 75% Percentile Statistics indicates the 75th percentile calculated.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	 10


90% Percentile Statistics Indicator

Description	The 90% Percentile Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the 90th percentile must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


90% Percentile Statistics

Description	The 90% Percentile Statistics indicates the 90th percentile calculated.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	 15


95% Percentile Statistics Indicator

Description	The 95% Percentile Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the 95th percentile or median must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


95% Percentile Statistics

Description	The 95% Percentile Statistics indicates the 95th percentile calculated.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	 10


Range Button

Click on this button to perform a search of the defined search criteria. The Range function is used to locate database records that contain the information/data defined.


Maximum Statistics Indicator

Description	The Maximum Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the maximum statistic must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Button

Examples	 radio button


Maximum Statistics

Description	The Maximum Statistics indicates the maximum statistic calculated.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	 10


Lower 95% Confidence Limit (Median) Statistics Indicator

Description	The Lower 95% Confidence Limit (Median) Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the lower 95th confidence limit statistic must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


Lower 95% Confidence Limit (Median) Statistics

Description	The Lower 95% Confidence Limit (Median) Statistics indicates the lower 95th confidence limit statistic.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	 10


Upper 95% Confidence Limit (Median) Statistics Indicator

Description	The Upper 95% Confidence Limit (Median) Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the upper 95th confidence limit statistic must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


Upper 95% Confidence Limit (Median)

Description	The Upper 95% Confidence Limit (Median) Statistics indicates the upper 95th confidence limit statistic calculated.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	 10


Standard Deviation Statistics Indicator

Description	The Standard Deviation Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the standard deviation statistic must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


Standard Deviation Statistics

Description	The Standard Deviation Statistics indicates the standard deviation statistic calculated.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	  10


% Variation Coefficient Statistics Indicator

Description	The % Variation Coefficient Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the percentage variation coefficient statistic must be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


% Variation Coeficient Statistics

Description	The % Variation Coeficient Statistics indicates the percentage variation coefficient statistic calculated.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	  10


Geometric Mean Statistics Indicator

Description	The Geometric Mean Statistics Indicator is checked on to indicate that the geometric mean statistic should be calculated and provided in the output.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


Geometric Mean Statistics

Description	The Geometric Mean Statistics indicates the geometric mean statistic calculated.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	  10


Counting Statistic

Description	The Counting Statistic is used when counting statistics are required instead of a fixed value and is used for example when measuring radioactivity.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	  0.002


Quality Assurance Indicator

Description	The Quality Assurance Indicator is checked on to indicate that quality assurance has been performed.

Format(s)	Indicator

Examples


Samples Taken radio button

Description	The Samples Taken radio button is checked on to indicate that the system must provide the number of samples that have been taken at the selected monitoring points for certain criteria. The criteria are sampling date (from and to), sampling depth (from and to), season (no season, summer, winter) and source providing data with the numbering convention.

Format(s)	Button

Examples	 radio button


Variables Analysed radio button

Description	The Samples Taken radio button is checked on to indicate that the system must provide a list of variables that have been analyzed for the selected monitoring feature(s) for certain criteria. The criteria are sampling date (from and to), sampling depth (from and to), season (no season, summer, winter) Type of result (time series, depth profile, single, multiple) and source providing data with the numbering convention.

Format(s)	Button

Examples	 radio button


Selected Monitoring Points
Monitoring Points

Description	The Monitoring Points field provides a list of all monitoring points that have been selected.

Format(s)	Alphanumeric

Examples	  0612 - C1R002Q01 GROOTDRAAI DAM ON VAAL RIVER: NEAR DAM WALL


Selected Monitoring Variables

Description	The Selected Monitoring Variables field provides a list of all monitoring variables that have been selected.

Format(s)	Alphanumeric

Examples	  All, 118 - B-Tot-Solids


Available Samples

Description	After selecting a monitoring point and specifying the time period in the single sample menu, the field shows all the available samples.

Format(s)	Alphanumeric

Examples	  030032306 2003-02-18 10:00 AM


Rank ID

Description	The Rank ID uniquely identifies a person's rank or position in an organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics.

Examples	89


Unique Number

Description	A Unique Number field is necessary to identify different persons with the same Surname, Preferred   Name, Initials and Title. The user is allowed to enter his own unique number. Note: The numbers 0 and 99 are not allowed.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics.

Examples	1324


Rank Name

Description	The Rank Name uniquely identifies the name of a person's rank or position in an organisation

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples	Director General, Chairperson


Rank Required

Description	The Rank Required indicates whether the rank or position of the employees of the organisation should be specified or not.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Person/Organisation Status

Description	The Person/Organisation Status determines whether the person or organisation is still actively involved.

Format(s)	1 character

Examples	A - Active, O - Out of Use


Representation Type

Description	The Representation Type identifies the role of a person at an assembly.

Format(s)	Characters

Examples	Company, Assembly, Myself


References button

Click on this button to view all the available references for the selected variable.


Monitoring Variable Reference Abbreviation

Description	The Monitoring Variable Reference Abbreviation is a variable abbreviation according to naming conventions used by systems external to WMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples	ALGAL IDENTIFICATION


Monitoring Variable Reference Code

Description	The Monitoring Variable Reference Code is a unique number or code that provides a reference between a monitoring variable in WMS and a monitoring variable used by systems external to WMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 characters.

Examples	ALG ID-Susp-Water


Management Area Explanation

Description	The Management Area Explanation provides a detailed description of the management area.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed characters.

Examples	This area is the drainage area for the East Rand. Industry, urban development and mines have a major impact.


Variable Reference

Description	The Variable Reference provides a reference between a variable in WMS and an external data source. The external variable also indicates how the analysed variable is identified by the specific monitor.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 uppercase characters.

Examples	SE-ACID SOL


Analysis Method Reference
Analysis Method Reference Code

Description	The Analysis Method Reference Code provides a reference between an analysis method in WMS and an analysis method used by systems external to WMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 uppercase characters.

Examples	0034301


Default Measuring Unit

Description	The Default Measuring Unit indicates if the Measuring Unit is used as a default when results are entered for the relevant measuring unit.

Format(s)	Check Box

Examples


Orientation Layer History

 Description

The Orientation Layer History Maintenance form is used to arrange interpreted layer information belonging to the same geographical features, according to their used state. The Used State differentiates between layers that are presently in use, and therefore the information detail is most up to date, compared with the historical layers that were used in the past.

Steps

1.	Enter or select the group number from the Link group's spin button, and click on the Activate Link button, to move a layer to another group. (To unlink a layer, click on the record to highlight it, and press the Unlink button.)

2.	Click on the layer record that you would like to move, to highlight it.

3.	Click on the Up or Down Arrow buttons to make change the history chain.

4.	After moving the records in the history chain, the record on top of the list of each group will have a status of "Implemented" and all the other records in the list will have a status of "Out of Use". When a layer's status changes from "implemented" to "out of use", the layer's To Date will reflect the current system date.

5.	Click on the Update Hierarchy button to accept the new changes to the system.

Related System Topics


Work and Generated Layer History Maintenance

Description

The Work and Generated Layer History Maintenance form is used to arrange layers belonging to a geographical feature type according to their used state. The Used State differentiates between layers that are presently in use, and therefore the information detail is most up to date, compared with the historical layers that were used in the past. Layers with a status of "initiated", do not form part of the history chain.

Steps

1.	Click on the layer record that you would like to move, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the Up or Down Arrow buttons to change the history chain.

3.	Click on the Update Hierarchy button to store the proposed history chain changes.

 Note: After moving the records in the history chain, the record on top of the list will have a status of "Implemented" and all the other records in the list will have a status of "Out of Use". When a layer's status changes from "implemented" to "out of use", the layer's To Date will reflect the current system date.

Related System Topics


Employee Hierarchy

Description  	The Employee Hierarchy tree view displays the employee and its supervisor. The concatenated name of the person is displaying in the view. The Employee Hierarchy Selection form is only displaying the applicable employees to be selected as the supervisor of the focused employee.

 Format(s)	Maximum 150 uppercase characters.

 Examples	GETRUDE, SELEPE, MRS, SYSTEMS ENGINEER


Layer File checkbox

Check the Layer File checkbox to indicate that a .lyr file is stored on the database for the focused layer.


Save Layer File button

Click on the Save Layer File button to get the .lyr file on c\WMS DATA\LYR directory and save it on the database.  The saved .lyr file will then become the Standard Display Properties for the layer for ArcGIS users. When an existing .lyr file is saved on the database and the button is activated again, the current saved properties will be replaced by the new .lyr file from the defined path. If the layer file does not exist, you will get an error message. When this happens, first create the file and select it again.


ArcGIS button

Click on the ArcGIS button to open ArcGIS application for the focused layer table name. The .Lyr File on the WMS default Directory on your PC will be overwritten with the standard .lyr file from the database.


Update Hierarchy

Click on the Update Hierarchy button to update or create a preceding layer for an active (focused) layer.


Organisation Hierarchy

Description   The Organisation Hierarchy tree view displays the Organisations and their 'Parent' Organisation. The concatenated name of the Organisation is displaying in the view. The Organisation Hierarchy Selection form is only displaying the applicable Organisations to be selected as the 'parent' of the focused Organisation.

  Format(s)	Maximum 150 uppercase characters.

 Examples	CMC-SS DEPT- CAPE TOWN


View Organisation Hierarchy button

Click on this button to view the position of the organisation in the hierarchy.


Maintain Organisation Address button

Click on this button to modify an organisation's addresses.


Maintain Person Address button

Click on this button to modify a person's addresses.


Registered Names

Description  	The Registered Names Field indicates the names of the Person registered in an organisation

 Format(s)	Maximum 80 uppercase characters.

 Examples	HASIE, MMUTLANYANA, MOKOBATE


View Employee Hierarchy button

Click on this button to view the position of the employee in the hierarchy.


View  Employee History Button

Click on this Button to display the Employee History View form.


View Person History Button

Click on this Button to display the Person History View form.


View Person Member History Button
View  Member History Button

Click on this Button to display the Member History View  form.


Affected Start Date

Description	The Affected Start Date indicates the first date on which an affected period of results records is updated due to a change in accredited status.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


Affected End Date

Description	The Affected End Date indicates the last date on which an affected period of results records is updated due to a change in accredited status.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


Postal Code Area ID

Description	The Postal Code Area ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the post box or street code of the town and/or suburb.

Format(s)	Maximum 20 characters.

Examples	0157


Verify Indicator

Description	The Verify Indicator is checked to indicate that the postal code associated with a country, town and suburb has been verified for correctness by the central administrator.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Important	Only the central super user can check this indicator to true to confirm the postal code has been correctly verified.

Examples


Suburb

Description	The Suburb field identifies the name of a suburb.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 upper case characters.

Examples	Waterkloof Ridge


Town

Description	The Town field identifies the name of a town.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 upper case characters.

Examples	Pretoria


Country

Description	The Country field identifies the name of a country (international border).

Format(s)	Maximum 60 upper case characters.

Examples	SOUTH AFRICA


Title  ID

Description	The Title ID uniquely identifies the Title( e.g. Dr, Mr) of person.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647.

Examples	430


ID Type

Description   The ID Type identifies the type of personal identification.

Format(s)       Maximum 1 character.

Examples       P – Passport, Id - Id Document.


Language ID

Description	The Language ID uniquely identifies a preferred language spoken by the person.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	418


Company ID

Description	The Company Organisation ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies a company.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Company Abbreviation

Description	The Company Organisation Abbreviation is a shortened version of the Company Organisation Name. The Company Organisation Name is made up from a combination of the organisation name, division or sub-division and the area.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 mixed case characters.

Examples	DWAF-RQS-ROODEPLAAT DAM


Supervisor Caption Name

Description	The Supervisor Name identifies the concatenated name (surname, preferred name, initials and title) of the Supervisor (person) of this employee.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 mixed characters

Examples	LEFENYA, PONTSHO, O, PROF


Person Address button

Click on this button to modify or view the records on the Person Address Maintenance form.


Address ID

Description	The Address ID uniquely identifies an address.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics.

Examples	8912


Electronic Address ID

Description	The Address ID uniquely identifies an Electronic Address.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics.

Examples	8912


Post/Location Type

Description	The Post/Location Type indicates the different types of postal addresses.

Format(s)	Drop Down List.

Examples	Post Box, Private Bag


Bag Box Text

Description	The Bag Box Text displays the P O Box or Private Bag address details.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 upper case characters.

Examples	PRIVATE BAG X20792


Parcel indicator

Description	The Parcel Indicator is checked to indicate the address where parcels will be collected and delivered.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Correspondence Indicator

Description	The Correspondence Indicator is checked to indicate the address where correspondence will be sent.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Residential Indicator

Description	The Residential Indicator is checked indicates that the address is a residential address.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Billing indicator

Description	The Billing Indicator is checked to indicate the address where bills or accounts will be collected and delivered.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Telecommunication Address ID

Description	The Telecommunication Address ID uniquely identifies the telecommunication address.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics.

Examples	18970


Point Location  ID

Description	The Point Location ID uniquely identifies the latitude and longitude specified for the physical address.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics.

Examples	18970


Local Indicator

Description	The Local Indicator is checked to indicate whether the address is local or foreign.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Telecommunication Type

Description	The Telecommunication Type identifies the kind of telecommunication used to make a call.

Format(s)	Drop Down List.

Examples	Telephone; Fax; Pager; Cellphone


Switchboard/ Direct

Description	The Switchboard/Direct indicator identifies whether the call will be made directly to the recipient or via a switchboard.

Format(s)	Drop Down List

Examples	Direct; Switchboard


Telephone Number

Description	The Telephone Number identifies the number that must be dialed when calling by telephone, fax, pager or cellular phone.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 numbers.

Examples	015 663 7989


Telephone Extension

Description	The Telephone Extension identifies the additional telephone number that must be dialed or requested when calling.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Examples	X7089


Building/Area

Description	The Building/Area identifies the physical building or area of residence.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Examples	The Pinnacle or Kameeldrift-West


Place/Street

Description	The Place/Street identifies the physical address location and associated number.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Examples	1 Parkin Street ; or Plot 8


Organisation Parent ID

Description	The Organisation Parent ID uniquely identifies the parent of an organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics.

Examples	18970


Electronic Type
Electronic Address Type

Description	The Electronic Address Type identifies the different types of electronic address used.

Format(s)	Drop Down List.

Examples	email; IP; Web


Electronic Address Text

Description	The Electronic Address Text identifies the user domain, IP or Web electronic address used to contact a person or organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Examples	MaritzD@dwaf.gov.za


Cause of Change radio group button

Description	The Cause of Change radio group button signifies the reason for the date change in employee or member records. The reason can be either a Business Event or Error Fixed.

Format(s)	radio button

Examples	Business Event or Error Fixed.


Represented Organisation From Date

Description	The Represented Organisation From Date is the date on which the member's representation of the organisation becomes effective.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


Represented Organisation To Date

Description	The Represented Organisation To Date is the date on which the member's representation of the organisation becomes invalid.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD.

Examples	1999-10-30


Rank From Date

Description	The Rank From Date is the date on which the employee or member's rank becomes effective.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


Rank To Date

Description	The Rank To Date is the date on which the employee or member's rank becomes invalid.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD.

Examples	1999-10-30


Supervisor From Date

Description	The Supervisor From Date is the date on which the employee's supervisor role becomes effective.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


Supervisor To Date

Description	The Supervisor To Date is the date on which the employee's supervisor role becomes invalid.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD.

Examples	1999-10-30


Status From Date

Description	The Status From Date is the date on which there is a change in the employment status of the person with respect to the organisation. This applies both when a person joins or leaves an organisation.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


Status To Date

Description	The Status To Date is the date until which the employee is no longer part of the organisation.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD.

Examples	1999-10-30


Employee From Date

Description	The Employee From Date is the date on which the employee becomes part of the organisation.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


Employee To Date

Description	The Employee To Date is the date until which the employee is no longer part of the organisation.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD.

Examples	1999-10-30


Explanation for Owner in Relation Structure

Please report if this field is empty.


Explanation in Reporting Structure Relationship

Please report if this field is empty.


Explanation for Relationship Qualification

Please report if this field is empty.


Explanation for Stakeholder Relationship

Please report if this field is empty.


Office Room No

Description	The Office Room No identifies the employee's office number for use on mailing lists.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 characters

Examples	125


Associated Class Type

Description   Associated Class is short for a selection for classification type. Associated Class Types are divided into parent and child types and represent a hierarchy of Class Items in a Class Structure. The Associated Class Type form is used to group class items into class structures. For example, a borehole is an item in an associated class type that is represented in a class structure called Class Type. This Class type if for selection only, and can not be maintained.

Important      This field is centrally maintained; contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information.

Examples      Borehole


Assembly Organisation Id

Description	The Assembly Organisation ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies an assembly.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Assembly Organisation Abbreviation

Description	The Assembly Organisation Abbreviation is a shortened version of the Assembly Organisation Name. The Assembly Organisation Name is made up from a combination of the organisation name, division or sub-division and the area.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 mixed case characters.

Examples	VAAL FORUM


Organisation Status

Description	The Organisation Status indicates whether the Company of the Employee or an Assembly of a member is active or out of use.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Active, Out of use


Member Rank

Description	The Member Rank identifies a member's rank or position in an organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed case characters.

Examples	Director General, Chairperson


Member Status

Description	The Member Status indicates whether the member of an organisation is active or inactive.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Active, Out Of Use


Employee Status

Description	The Employee Status indicates whether the employee of a company is active or inactive.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	Active, Out Of Use


Represented Type

Description	The Represented Type indicates that a person represents himself, a company or an assembly.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	The person represents a company, The person represents an assembly


Represented Organisation Id

Description	The Represented Organisation ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the organisation that this person is representing.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Represented Organisation Name

Description	The Represented Organisation Name uniquely identifies an organisation that is represented by a person, assembly or company.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 mixed characters

Examples	DEPARTMENT OF WATER AFFAIRS


Represented Organisation Address button

Click on this button to modify a represented organisation's address details.


Supervisor Id

Description	The Supervisor ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies an employee's supervisor within an organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Supervisor Name

Description	The Supervisor Name identifies the concatenated name (surname, preferred name, initials and title) of the Supervisor (person) of this employee.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 mixed characters

Examples	LEFENYA, PONTSHO, O, PROF


Associated Organisation Address button

Click on this button to modify an associated organisation's address details.


Select an Existing Person button

Click on this button to select a person whose record exists on the WMS system.


Create a New Person button
Create a New Person or Update Person button

Click on this button to modify or create a new person record on the WMS system.

When modifying the Person records, the button’s name becomes Update Person.

When creating new Person records, the button’s name becomes Create New Person.


Sample Type, Container, Preservative Maintenance button

Click on this button to open the Sample Type, Container, Preservative Maintenance form.


Resource Status indicator

Description	The Resource Status Indicator is checked to indicate that there is no Water Use Site involved, but a River, Groundwater Feature or Water Body.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Water Use Site indicator

Description	The Water Use Site Indicator is checked to indicate that there is a Water Use Site involved.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Form Help button

Click on this button to open the form help for the current form.


Search Criteria for Layer Name

The Search Criteria for Layer Name field is used to Search for the Layer Names.


Monitoring Types

Description	The Monitoring Type is used to define the monitoring programme type.

Format(s)	Drop Down Button

Examples	Status, Auditing, Discharge


Adhoc Limit


Boundary Type


Import Format Description

Description	The Import Format Description explains the name and use of the format of the data to be imported from other sources providing data.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters.

Examples	Data from Geobase System, this data will be in Dbase 4 files.


Import Format ID

Description	The Import Format ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify the format of the data to be imported from other sources providing data.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	1


Import Format Name

Description	The Import Format Name identifies the format of the data to be imported from other sources providing data.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 upper case characters.

Examples	GEODATA1


Transfer Type

Description   The Transfer Type is used to identify the process path of imported data.

Format(s)	8 characters

Examples	External, Standard, Analyst, Logger


Single File Indicator

Description	The Single File Indicator is checked to indicate whether data is in a single file or in multiple files.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Fixed Number of Files Indicator

Description	The Fixed Number of Files Indicator is checked to indicate that a fixed number of files is expected.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Number of Files

Description	The Number of Files identifies the number of expected files for import.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	1


Specific Files Indicator

Description	The Specific Files Indicator is checked to indicate that there is a specific file list used.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Import Sample Reference

Description	The Import Sample Reference identifies the sample as it was received for electronic import from an analyst, source providing data or from WMS electronic template (file).

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters

Examples	1


Import Status

Description	The Import Status identifies the current status of a result on a sample that has been imported into the system.

Format(s)	Maximum 3 characters

Examples	INF (Information Transferred), IDU (ID’s updated), DEF (Default values used), PRO (Result Problem), COR (Result correct), IMP (Imported into WMS), REJ (Rejected)


Import Batch ID

Description	The Import Batch ID is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies the current batch of results that has been imported into the system.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	1


Next button

Click on this button to exit the form and go to the next form.


Directory Name

Description	The Directory Name uniquely identifies the path used to import data.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters

Examples	C:\Magic\WMS\Geodata


Graph Type radio group

Click on this radio group to select Graph Type for a  chosen Monitoring Point and Variables.


Point Objective radio button

Click on this radio button to filter for objective set at a chosen Monitoring Point.


Point Standard radio button

Click on this radio button to filter for standard set at a chosen Monitoring Point.


Adhoc Limit radio button

Click on this radio button to filter when other limits are set at a chosen Monitoring Point.


No Objective radio button

Click on this radio button to filter when no objectives are set at a chosen Monitoring Point.


Import Record ID

Description	The Import Record ID is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies a result that has been imported into the system.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	1


Back button

Click on this button to exit the form and return to the previous form.


Monitoring Program Related Indicator

Description	The Monitoring Program Related Indicator is checked to indicate that the data is monitoring program related.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Related Subset Table

Description	The Related Subset Table is associated with the Related Supertype Table and is either a logical or a physical Database Table. A Related Subset and Related Supertype Table are related to a Subset Table and Supertype Table for a specific Related Type Reason.

Format(s)	Maximum 18 mixed characters.

Examples	Supertype Table stakeholder and Subset Table feature are related to Related Supertype Table spatial_feature and Related Subset Tables mon_point, mon_sector, wq_feature, wq_management_area and wq_reach for Related Type Reason of Valid Stakeholder Feature Type.


Sample Info Transferred

Description	The Sample Info Transferred displays the number of samples transferred to the work import table.

Format(s)	Numeric

Important	This is a display-only field.

Examples	2


Result Info Transferred

Description	The Result Info Transferred displays the number of results transferred to the work import table.

Format(s)	Numeric

Important	This is a display-only field.

Examples	2


Result ID's Updated

Description	The Result ID’s Updated displays the number of result ID’s that have been updated.

Format(s)	Numeric

Important	This is a display-only field.

Examples	49


Results Defaults Used

Description	The Results Defaults Used displays the number of results where defaults were used to update ID’s.

Format(s)	Numeric

Important	This is a display-only field.

Examples	5


Results with Problems

Description	The Results with Problems displays the amount of results with problem ID’s.

Format(s)	Numeric

Important	This is a display-only field.

Examples	5


Register Button

Click on this button to register all the WMS physical samples.


Administrate Data button

Click on this button to administrate the imported data.


Import Data View button

Click on this button to view information on imported data.


Filter button

Click on the Filter button to enable filtering on all the specified parameters defined.


Numbering Convention Type Id

Description	The Numbering Convention Type ID is used to define the systematic method used to allocate numbers or codes to uniquely identify a feature.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples       2354


Batch Start Date

Description	The Batch Start Date is the date on which the specified batch period begins.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


Batch End Date

Description	The Batch End Date is the date on which the specified batch period ends.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


Selection Radio Button

Description	The Selection Radio button is used to select either (a) All records or (C) only current records.

Format(s)	1 character

Important	The value is by default set to "Current"

Examples	A – All records, C – Current records


Reference Choice

Description	The Reference Choice Radio button is used to indicate whether the selected id’s reference code is the current reference code, or an old (historical) code. Select either (C) Current Reference or (O) Old or Historical Reference codes.

Format(s)	1 character

Important	The value is by default set to "Current"

Examples	C – Current Reference, O Old/Historical Reference


Update button

Click on this button to update the current record’s information.


Less than

Description	The Less than is used to indicate if the result numerical value is less than the detection limit.

Format(s)	1 character

Important	This is a compulsory field.

Examples	"" (blank), <


Greater than

Description	The Greater than is used for numeric value of result and is used when the exact results are not available and an approximate value is entered.

Format(s)	1 character

Important	This is a compulsory field.

Examples	"" (blank), >


sample type name (for electronic import)

Description	The sample type name for electronic import identifies the data as it was received for electronic import from an analyst, source providing data or from WMS electronic template (file).

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples	Field Readings


Feature reference code

Description	The Feature reference code is a unique number or code that provides a reference between feature in WMS and feature used by systems external to WMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Important	The Feature Reference code was used for Old Identifiers of Monitoring Points, e.g Hydro numbers, hence this field will always be empty in all Monitoring Points Maintenance modules.

Examples	C121/00/R001


Preservative Reference Code

Description	The Preservative Reference Code is a unique number or code that provides a reference between a preservative in WMS and a preservative used by systems external to WMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	HCl2


Container Name (for electronic import)

Description	The Container Name for electronic import identifies the data as it was received for electronic import from an analyst, source providing data or from WMS electronic template (file).

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples	GLASS BOTTLE


Multiple Variable Parameter Reference Code

Description	The Multiple Variable Parameter Reference Code is a unique number or code that provides a reference between multiple monitoring variables in WMS and multiple monitoring variables used by systems external to WMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	ANABAENA


Analyst Entity Name (for electronic import)

Description	The Analyst Entity Name for electronic import identifies the data as it was received for electronic import from an analyst, source providing data or from WMS electronic template (file).

Format(s)	Maximum 150 characters.

Examples	RAND WATER


Measuring Unit Reference Code

Description	A Measuring Unit Reference Code is a unique number or code that provides a reference between a measuring unit in WMS and a measuring unit used by systems external to WMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples       mg/l, Ph-Unit


Used indicator

Description	The Used indicator is used to indicate that the reference code is used elsewhere in the system.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Current indicator

Description	The Current indicator is used to indicate that the reference code is the current code for the datasource, numbering convention and Geographical feature.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Layer Type ID

Description	The Layer Type ID uniquely identifies the ID for the selected High Level Layer type.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10797


End Reach Code

Description	The End Reach Code is used in conjunction with start reach code to assemble the unique name for the river. The reach code in the 1:500_000 river coverage is a unique ID attached to every reach. The reach code is based on the coding system used by the United States Geological Survey, to provide compatibility with certain mathematical models developed in the USA, included in BASINS.

The US code was modified to suit the South African conditions, by changing the first 8 characters to the 4-character code used in the South African quaternary drainage region hierarchical definition. Models using the USA format can easily convert the code back to the required format.

The format of the ten-digit South African reach code is:

Char 1-4: Quaternary drainage region in which most of the river reach lies

Char 5-6: Sequential number of the reaches in a quaternary drainage region, from 01 to 99

Char 7-10: Sequential number from 0001 to 9999 for use in the 1:50_000 coverage

Note: Char 7-10 = 0000 in the 1:500_000 coverage, meaning that the first 6 characters uniquely identify a reach.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 characters.

Examples	A23F030000


Start Reach Code

Description	The Start Reach Code is used in conjunction with end reach code to assemble the unique name for the river. The reach code in the 1:500_000 river coverage is a unique ID attached to every reach. The reach code is based on the coding system used by the United States Geological Survey, to provide compatibility with certain mathematical models developed in the USA, included in BASINS.

The US code was modified to suit the South African conditions, by changing the first 8 characters to the 4-character code used in the South African quaternary drainage region hierarchical definition. Models using the USA format can easily convert the code back to the required format.

The format of the ten-digit South African reach code is:

Char 1-4: Quaternary drainage region in which most of the river reach lies

Char 5-6: Sequential number of the reaches in a quaternary drainage region, from 01 to 99

Char 7-10: Sequential number from 0001 to 9999 for use in the 1:50_000 coverage

Note: Char 7-10 = 0000 in the 1:500_000 coverage, meaning that the first 6 characters uniquely identify a reach.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 characters.

Examples	   A23D010000


Calculation Method Reference Code

Description	A Calculation Method Reference Code provides a reference between calculation method in WMS and calculation method used by systems external to WMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples       Hardness


Monitoring Action Reference Code

Description	The Monitoring Action Reference Code is a unique number or code that provides a reference between monitoring action in WMS and monitoring action used by systems external to WMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	SERVICE GRAB


Organisation Reference Code

Description	The Organisation Reference Code is a unique number or code that provides a reference between an organisation in WMS and an organisation used by systems external to WMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	Water Lab


Preservative Dwa Code

Description	The Preservative Dwa Code is an internal abbreviated code used for a preservative .

Format(s)	Maximum 8 characters.

Examples	9


Role ID

Description	The Role ID is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies the role an employee or member has in a monitoring programme.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	1


Role Name

Description	The Role Name is the descriptive name of the role an employee or member has in a monitoring programme.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 uppercase characters.

Examples	Custodian, Interested Party, Officer in Charge


Program Related Information button

Click on this button to display monitoring program related information for the specific import WMS Sample variable.


Preservative button

Click on this button to update the preservative for the WMS sample.


Map Monitoring Points button

Click on this button to maintain the monitoring point mapping.


Map Monitoring Variables button

Click on this button to maintain the monitoring variable mapping.


Item ID

Description	The Item ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the class item for usage on different classification structure(s).

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10797


Type ID

Description	The Type ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the classification record of a specific classification structure(s).

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10797


Level ID

Description	The Level ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the valid levels (nodes) of the classification structure(s).

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10797


Standard Monitoring Variable ID

Description	The Standard Monitoring Variable ID is a unique monitoring variable id associated with the non standard monitoring variable.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10797


Maintenance button

Click on this button to open the Maintenance Decision Criteria form to select an applicable form to be maintained.


Survey Variable Parameter ID

Description	The Survey Variable Parameter ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the survey variable parameter record. It may belong to Level 1 or Level 2.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	100797


Parameter ID

Description	The Parameter ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify a specific classified or unclassified parameter item.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	4437


Parameter Name

Description	The Parameter Name displays the name of the classified or unclassified parameter. Parameter name may belong to Level 1 or Level 2.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters

Examples	No normal algae found in sample to report on


Parameter Abbreviation

Description	The Parameter Abbreviation is a shortened description of classified or unclassified parameter item.

Format(s)	Maximum 8 characters

Examples	NOFIND


Classified Parameter Level

Description	The Classified Parameter Level specifies the level on which a classified parameter belongs to in a survey monitoring variable.

Format(s)	Drop down button

Examples	None, First or Second


Survey Type

Description	The Survey Type is used to indicate whether the survey variable is a single survey variable or a multiple survey variable.

Format(s)	Drop Down Button

Examples	Single, Multiple


Change User Organisation Name

Description	The Change User Organisation Name represents the organisation that the user belongs to. The user is specified during organisational access control when logging into the system.

Format(s)	Maximum 150 characters.

Examples	NAT DEPT: Water Affairs & Forestry, Resource Quality Services, Pretoria


Add button

Click on this button to open the Add Decision Criteria form to select the applicable item to be added. After selecting an applicable record, another form will be opened to enable the user to add a new record in the WMS system.


Related Reason Maintenance button

Click on this button to maintain related reasons.


Related Software Item ID

Description 	The Related Software Item ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies software items that are related to each other (e.g. forms, reports, etc).

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Example 	84


Related Type Reason ID

Description	The Related Type Reason ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies a reason for the for the relationship between two items (related type reason)

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	51


User ID

Description	The User ID is a system generated number that uniquely identifies the person working on the system (WMS User).

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Component of Feature ID

Description 	The Component of Feature ID identifies a Water Body that forms part of another Water Body.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Example 	84


Component of Feature Name

Description 	The Component of Feature Name displays the name of a Water Body that forms part of another Water Body.

Format(s)	Maximum 100 characters.

Example 	VAAL DAM


Results Accreditation Status

Description	The Results Accreditation Status is the status of an accreditation record during a specific period.

Format(s)	A, S

Examples	Not Suspended; S = Suspended


Monitoring Action Specification Reference Code

Description	The Monitoring Action Specification Reference Code is a unique number or code that provides a reference between monitoring action specification in WMS and monitoring action specification used by systems external to WMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	SUB-SURFACE GRAB SAMPLE, TAP WATER SAMPLE


Altitude

Description	The Altitude is defined as the height or vertical elevation of an object above or below a given reference datum (for example, sea level)

Format(s)	Maximum 8 characters.

Examples	1280m


Latitude & Longitude Capture Method Code

Description	The Latitude & Longitude Capture Method Code is a unique code that identifies the capturing method used to obtain latitude and longitude values.

Format(s)	3 upper case characters.

Examples	GIS, MAP, GPS, HIS


Altitude Capture Method Code

Description	The Altitude Capture Method Code is a unique code that identifies the capturing method used to obtain altitude value.

Format(s)	3 upper case characters.

Examples	GIS, GPS, HIS


Projection Type Code

Description	The Projection Type Code is a code of the map where the groundwater feature co-ordinate is obtained from.

Format(s)	3 upper case characters.

Examples	WGS, CAP


Projection Method

Description	The Projection Method Description describes the projection type for the code of the map where the groundwater feature co-ordinate is obtained from.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples	WGS84, Clarke 1880


Latitude & Longitude Capture Method Description

Description	The Latitude & Longitude Capture Method Description is the description of the unique code describing the latitude and longitude capturing method.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples	The latitude and longitude values were obtained with a GPS reading.


Altitude Capture Method Description

Description	The Altitude Capture Method Description is the description of the unique code describing the altitude value capturing method.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples	The altitude values were obtained with a GPS reading.


Monitoring Action Specification button

Click on this button to open the requested Monitoring Action specification record.


Forum LE ID
Forum ID

Description	Forum ID uniquely identifies an organisation that is of the type Forum.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	2263


.csv Report button
Export button

Click on this button to generate a .csv file with all the information of the records retrieved according to the parameters received as input to this form.


High Level Water Use Site Type

Description	The High Level Water Use Site Type identifies the type of activity at the Water Use Site.

Format(s)	Radio Group

Examples	Solid Waste, Agricultural, Industrial, Urban, Mine, Water Care Works


File No

Description	The File No gives the user the option to store the file number used for the water use site

Format(s)	Maximum of 30 character

Examples	16/2/7/C21A/B292/X1


Site Type

Description	The Site Type indicates if Water Use Site is Main Site, Sub Site or a Compoment of a Site.

Format(s)	Maximum of 1 character

Examples	M,S, etc.


Yes button

Click on this button to agree with the question posed.


No button

Click on this button to disagree with the question posed.


User Close Date

Description	The User Close Date is the last date on which the person was allowed to login to WMS.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	2000-10-11


Site Full Name

Description	The Site Full Name is the full name of the Water Use Site consisting of the concatenated feature name of the Water Use Site and its parent(s).

Format(s)	Maximum of 300 characters

Examples	S-WALES-WISHAW COLL GAYNS


Factor

Description	The Factor is a number obtained after multiplying an exponent of the base value 10 with a Mantissa. In WMS the base value number is always 10, while the exponent number varies.

Factor = 3.4(mantissa) x 10 (base value)2 (exponent)

Format(s)	Decimal (9.99999)

Examples	34.5


Active Parameter Indicator

Description	The Active Parameter Indicator is checked to indicate that a parameter is active for survey monitoring variable.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Answer Type

Description	The Answer Type refers to the type of an answer that was associated with survey variable parameter ID.

Format(s)	Drop Down Button

Examples	Co-ordinates, DateTime, Lookup


Survey Variable Parameter

Description	The Survey Variable Parameter identifies the concatenated information (Survey Monitoring Variable Abbreviation & Level 1 & Level 2) of a survey variable parameter.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 mixed characters.

Examples	Habitat Slope Invertebrate


Derived Variable Sub Type

Description	The Derived Variable Sub Type is used to indicate the kind or type of variables that will be used to calculate a derived variable.

Format(s)	Drop Down Button

Examples	Single & Derived, Multiple, Survey


Custodian ID

Description	The Custodian ID is a number used to identify the internal or external organisation responsible for the data that is provided by a source.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	2263


Survey Method ID

Description	The Survey Method ID is a system generated number used to uniquely identify a survey method.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	1858859678


Preceding Method ID

Description	The Preceding Method ID uniquely identifies the survey method that was previously used. It can be associated with the new survey methods.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	56224


Preceding Method Name

Description	The Preceding Method Name identifies the survey method used before the present survey method.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 mixed characters.

Examples	South African Scoring System Version 4


Default Report Directory

Description	The Default Report Directory specifies the default directory path where the report will be saved.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters

Examples	REPORT/DIR:


Activate Method button

Click on this button to activate the survey method. Pressing this button will also control the begin and end dates of current and preceding survey method.


Populate Parameters button

Click on this button to populate survey variable parameters. These are the survey method parameters with the variables and parameters of the same variable type ID.


Questionnaire ID

Description	The Questionnaire ID is a system generated number used to uniquely identify the Questionnaire Template.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	1858859678


Questionnaire Name

Description	The Questionnaire Name uniquely identifies the Questionnaire Template.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 Uppercase characters.

Important	When editing, take care not to change the meaning or uniqueness of the name.

Examples	ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH SURVEY


Questionnaire Description

Description	The Questionnaire Description specifies the function of the Questionnaire Template.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed characters.

Examples	A biological index using macro invertebrate families to determine the ecological integrity of river systems.


Active Status

Description	The Active Status indicates whether the record is active or not.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Complete Indicator

Description	The Complete Indicator is used to indicate the status of the survey method parameters setup.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Create Date & Time

Description	The Create Date and Time indicates the date and time on which the record was created on the database.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS

Examples	  2001-10-12 12:05:55


Complete button

Click on this button to complete setting up the survey parameters for a survey method.


Create User Organisation ID

Description	The Create User Organisation ID identifies the Organisation ID of the Organisation the user specified during organisational access control when the record was created on the database.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	2323233


Create User Organisation Abbreviation

Description	The Create User Organisation Abbreviation represents the abbreviation of the Organisation the user logged on with for a work session on WMS Monitoring Management.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples	DWAF-RQS


WMS Method button

Click on this button to open the Accredited WMS Method sub- form in order to maintain the Accredited WMS methods.


Accredited WMS Method ID

Description	The Accredited WMS Method ID is a system generated sequence number that uniquely identify the accreditation WMS Method record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	The ID is automatically generated by the system.

Examples	108


Accreditation Status button

Click on this button to open the Accredited Status sub-form in order to maintain the accredited status for the focused analysis or survey method.


Survey Method button

Click on this button to view the focused survey method from the Survey Method Maintenance form. The Survey Method Maintenance form will be open in query mode, but the user may opt to add or modify the survey method.


Method Begin Date

Description	The Method Begin Date is used to identify the date on which an environmental survey method was/will be implemented for a monitor.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Important	May not be later than the survey method end date

Examples	2002-01-20


Method End Date

Description	The Method End Date is used to identify the date on which an environmental survey method was/will be terminated for a monitor.

Format(s)	CCYY-MM-DD

Important	The default value is 9999-12-31 and it may not be earlier than the survey method begin date.

Examples	2003-01-20


Feature Name & ID

Description 	The Name and Id of the Geographical Feature

Format(s)	Maximum of 60 alphanumeric characters

Examples 	228DD00221 GOLDMINE


High Level Layer Type

Description	The High Level Layer Type distinguishes between the different kind of layers that can be used for WMS Geographical data representation. Three different Layer types exist namely:

•	Work Layer (contain geographical features and are linked to non-spatial information in WMS) This layer contains all the geographical features and information necessary for water resource management.

•	Generated Layer (Layers contain geographical features as defined by the WMS and are created and maintained in the Water Resource Management sub-system) The geographical information contained in WMS Generated Layers is systematically generated from a source layer, and is  managed via the WMS Systems functions

Format(s)	Radio Group.

Examples	Work, Genareted


Greater than Indicator

Description	The Greater than Indicator is checked to indicate that the numerical results greater than the detection limit are allowed. The " > " sign is used to indicate ‘greater than’.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Monitoring Action Rule ID

Description	The Monitoring Action Rule ID is a system generated number used to identify a specific monitoring action rule.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	62


Monitoring Action Rule

Description	The Monitoring Action Rule describes the rule for conducting/performing a monitoring action.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed characters.

Examples	Take a field reading at variable depth. A Range may be specified for the time. The Start Date and Time must be recorded for the sample.


Combined Depth Indicator

Description	The Combined Depth Indicator is checked to indicate that the result for the sample will be a combined result (i.e. only one result per variable).

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Specifications button

Click on this button to maintain the monitoring action specifications for the focused monitoring action.


Monitor button

Click on this button to maintain the monitors that can perform the focused monitoring action.


Equipment button

Click on this button to maintain the equipment needed to perform the focused monitoring action.


Export button

Click on this button to export the monitoring programme samples to a text file.


Edit Analysis button

Click on this button to edit analysis on monitoring programme.


Close button

Click on this button to close the form or the active sub-form.


Terminate button

Click on this button to terminate the sample. The sample will cease to be used in WMS.


Restart button

Click on this button to restart a sample that was terminated.


Layer Type Name

Description 	The Layer Type Name displays the name of the selected Layer Type

Format(s)	Maximum of 60 characters

Examples 	Generated


Results Administration button

Click on this button to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes.


Verify Results button

Click on this button to verify results.


Additional Result Indicator

Description	The Additional Result Indicator is checked to indicate that the result was not a scheduled result.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Standard Measuring Unit ID

Description	The Standard Measuring Unit ID identifies the standard measuring unit used when results are being released.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647.

Examples	1


Standard Measuring Unit Abbreviation

Description	The Standard Measuring Unit Abbreviation identifies the measuring unit used to define the measured value of a monitoring variable in terms of its unit when results are being released.

Format(s)	Maximum 15 characters.

Important	The measuring unit that the result numerical value is reported in is converted to the measuring unit used when results are being released.

Examples	%


Multiple Variable Parameter Parent Name

Description	The Multiple Variable Parameter Parent Name identifies the parent of a multiple monitoring variable parameter as defined in the class-type structures.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples	chlorococcum


Parameter Code

Description	The Parameter Code is a descriptive code that describes a multiple monitoring variable parameter.

Format(s)	Maximum 8 characters.

Examples	chloroco


Multiple Results button

Click on this button to register the results for the parameters of a Multiple Variable on the Multiple Monitoring Variable Results Registration form.


Depth Profile Results button

Click on this button to register the results for the variables that were measured on specified depth interval (Profile).


Time Interval Results button

Click on this button to register the results for the variables that were measured on specified time interval (logger).


Sampling Time To

Description	The Sampling Time To indicates the last time in a sampling period.

Format(s)	HH:MM

Examples 	17:00


Sample Receive Date

Description	The Sample Receive Date is the date on which the sample or field measurement is received by the laboratory or monitor.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-06-01


Sample Receive Time

Description	The Sample Receive Time is the time on which the sample or field measurement is received by the laboratory or monitor.

Format(s)	HH:MM

Important	Time is indicated over a 24-hour period.

Examples	09:00


Result Receive Organisation ID

Description	The Result Receive Organisation ID is the Organisation ID of the person that first starts to receive a sample. It is used to ensure that the organisation that starts to enter results is kept responsible.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10797


Result Receive Organisation Name

Description	The Result Receive Organisation Name identifies an Organisation Name of the person that first starts to receive a sample. It is used to ensure that the organisation that starts to enter results is kept responsible.

Format(s)	Maximum 150 upper case characters.

Examples	DEPARTMENT OF WATER AFFAIRS - GAUTENG REGION – BOSKOP


Result Administration Organisation ID

Description	The Result Administration Organisation ID is the Organisation ID of the person that administrates results. It is used to ensure that the organisation that starts to admnistrate results is kept responsible.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Result Administration Organisation Name

Description	The Result Administration Organisation Name identifies an Organisation Name of the person that administrates results. It is used to ensure that the organisation that starts to admnistrate results is kept responsible.

Format(s)	Maximum 150 upper case characters.

Examples	DEPARTMENT OF WATER AFFAIRS - GAUTENG REGION – BOSKOP


Result ID

Description	The Result ID is a system generated number that identifies a result.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Important	The ID is automatically generated by the system.

Examples	122540


Reject All button

Click on this button to reject all the variable's result values.


Sample Register Organisation ID

Description	The Sample Register Organisation ID is the Organisation ID of the person that first starts to receive a sample. It is used to ensure that the organisation that receives a sample is kept responsible.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10725


Category Id

Description	The Category Id is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies an assessment category record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 5 6666 22222

Examples	123456


Assessment Type

Description	The Assessment Type identifies the type of a General Assessment Type.

Format(s)	Radio Group or Drop down

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	Use, Compliance or Risk


Category Name

Description	The Category Name identifies the Assessment Category.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 upper case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	34000 CATEGORY


Sub-Category Name

Description	The Sub-Category Name identifies the Assessment Category record.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 upper case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	34000 CATEGORY


Evaluation Classification ID

Description	The Evaluation Classification ID is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies an Evaluation Classification record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 5 6666 22222

Examples	123456


Single Range ID

Description	The Single Range ID is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies a Single Range record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 5 6666 22222

Examples	123456


Interpretation

Description	The Interpretation defines the interpretation that provides guidelines for deciding if the water supply to the community is safe.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 upper case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	No Effect, No Health Effects, Increasing Effects in Sensitive Groups, etc


Interpretation Explanation

Description	The Interpretation Explanation displays the comments for more detailed information about the interpretation, which cannot be stored in the interpretation field.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 upper case characters.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.


Lower Boundary

Description	The Lower Boundary defines the value or border that indicate the lower limit.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics

Examples	123456


Upper Boundary

Description	The Upper Boundary defines the value or border that indicate the upper limit

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics

Examples	123456


Multiple Range ID

Description	The Multiple Range ID is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies Multiple Range record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 5 6666 22222

Examples	123456


Survey Range ID

Description	The Survey Range ID is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies Survey Range record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 5 6666 22222

Examples	123456


High Level Code

Description	The High Level Code indicates which High Level Type of Water Use Site it is. Wether is a Solid Waste, Industrial, Mine, Agricultural, Urban or Water Care Works Site

Format(s)	Maximum 2 characters

Examples	S, I, A etc.


High Level Code Description

Description	The High Level Code Description identifies the High Level of the Water Use Site.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 upper case characters.

Examples	Solid Waste


GIS Browse button

This button enables the user to view a group of spatial records on the map. The button will always be disabled is there are no spatial records.


GIS View Maintain Button

This button enables the user to view a spatial record or maintain a non-spatial record on the map. The button will always be disabled is there are no spatial records


GIS Map Scale

The GIS Map Scale identifies the scale used when displaying the feature on the map.


Create Record Button

This button enable the user to open the Option Decision Criteria in order to display the possible Maintenance forms to be opened: for Main Site, Sub Site or Site Component


Employee Rank Type ID

Description	The Employee Rank Type ID is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies Employee Rank Type

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics

Examples	123456


Specification Start Time

Description	The Specification Start Time indicates the earliest time for monitoring action process to start.

Format(s)	HH:MM:SS

Examples	05:11:20


Specification End Time

Description	The Specification End Time indicates the latest time for a monitoring action process to end.

Format(s)	HH:MM:SS

Examples	17:11:20


Check Sample button

Click on this button to check if the sample information is correct.


Approve Sample button

Click on this button to approve the sample for scheduling.


Change Frequency button

Click on this button to change the frequency a sample must be taken.


Change Monitor button

Click on this button to change the monitor that must take the sample.


Change Laboratory button

Click on this button to change the laboratory that must analyse the sample.


View Error Log button

Click on this button to view the errors on the sample if the check failed.


LIMS Method Report button

Click on this button to print methods as defined in the LIMS for current sample.


Pick Sample button

Click on this button to select a monitoring programme sample.


Evaluation Name

Description	The Evaluation Name identifies the name describing an evaluation to determine the extent of water quality for usage at any assessment category.

Format(s)	Maximum of 120 characters

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	Ideal, Good, Marginal, Poor or Dangerous


Evaluation Colour

Description	The Evaluation Colour defines the colour the is linked to the class ranging from Ideal to Totally Unacceptable water quality.

Format(s)	Drop Down

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	Blue, Green, Yellow, Red or Purple


Evaluation Class

Description	The Evaluation Class defines the class of water quality to determine its suitability for usage.

Format(s)	Drop Down.

Important	This is a compulsory information field.

Examples	0, 1, 2  or A, B, C


General Assessment Category Filter Criteria

Description

The General Assessment Category Filter Criteria form is used to filter out the General Assessment Category Records for maintenance

Steps

Filter General Assessment Category Records:

1.	On the Assessment Type, click on the Use, Compliance or Risk option to filter out records associated with a selected type of General Assessment Category

2.	Enter the Category ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Assessment Category Selection form and select the required Category.

3.	The Category Name  of the Assessment Category will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Category ID.

4.	The Sub-Category Name of the Assessment Category will be automatically displayed.

 Note: the Back button will return to the previous form

5.	Click the Next button to open the General Assessment Maintenance form displaying the assessment category records according to the filter criteria

6.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics

Assessment Category Selection

General Assessment Maintenance


Lookup Type ID

Description	The Lookup Type ID is a system-generated number that uniquely identifies the lookup answer type of the Survey variable parameter.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 5 6666 22222

Examples	123456


River Name

Description	The River Name identifies the name describing River.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 upper case characters.

Examples	Vaal, Orange, ect.


Action

Description	The Action identifies the type of action used to alter a record.

Format(s)	Characters.

Examples	I, U, D ect.


QA Date

Description	QA Date is the last date on which a geographical feature record was Quality Assured.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Important	When the record is updated, the QA Date will be cleared. Only the Central Administrator may cause the QA date to be set to the system date through the front end. QA Date of a group of records may be set by Database Administrator on request from the Central Administrator.

Examples	2006-01-10


Check Indicator

Description	The Check Indicator is checked to indicate that the sample or monitoring programme data was checked and verified.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Approve Indicator

Description	The Approve Indicator is checked to indicate that the sample/programme was approved for monitoring.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Terminate Indicator

Description	The Terminate Indicator is checked to indicate that the sample/monitoring programme has been terminated and will no longer be scheduled.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Feature in Management Area

The Feature in Management Area holds information on the association of features with management areas, i.e. which features are located in which management areas. Is maintained with the aid of the mapping subsystem


Feature ID File

Feature ID File contains a list of Feature Ids


Monitoring Programme Description

Description	The Monitoring Programme Description describes the full details about the monitoring programme that could not be stored in the programme name.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 upper case characters.

Examples	LONG TERM MONITORING MOSTLY AT DEPARTMENTAL FLOW GAUGING STATIONS


Key Indicator

Description	The Key checkbox is checked to indicate that an organization owns a monitoring programme.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Sector

Description	The Sector describes the sector type that is linked to the dam and to identify the Water Use Sector, which is applicable to the relevant Water Use Number.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	COMMERCIAL


Resource Type

Description	The Resource Type describes the type of water resource receiving the discharged water.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	River or Stream, Dam, Estuary, Wetland, etc.


Resource Name

Description	The Resource Name is the name of the water resource receiving the wastewater discharge.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	DAMARA RIVER


Dam Name

Description	The Dam Name is the name or the description of the dam.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	GROUND DAME, MAHOKA, etc.


Scheme Name

Description	The Scheme Name is the name of the scheme.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	Albasini Dam, Amatole (Wriggle wade Dame), Berg River, etc.


Scheme Management Parameter

Description	The Scheme Management Parameter identifies the scheme management parameter and the scheme itself from which the authorised water use volume is to be obtained.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	DAM


Datum Type

Description	The Datum Type identifies the projection type of the point location or entered latitude and longitude.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Cape datum Clarke 1880 or WGS-84 datum HBH94


Registered Volume Start Date

Description	The Registered Volume Date is the effective start date from which the specific volume is valid.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	2006-02-08


Registered Volume

Description	The Registered Volume identifies the amount of the volume of water taken.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	10687


Volume Measuring Unit

Description	The Volume Measuring Unit identifies the measuring unit of the total volume or capacity of the water stored, i.e. cubic metres.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	CUBIC METRES


Interval Type

Description	The Interval Type identifies the time interval for which the volume applies: per year, per month or per day.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	PER YEAR


Abstraction Pattern Measuring Unit

Description	The Abstraction pattern measuring unit is the measuring unit of the monthly pattern.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	CUBIC METRES


Monthly Value

Description	The Monthly Value is the estimated water pattern value for the month.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	930


Taking Sequence Number

Description	The Taking Sequence Number is the sequence number of the irrigated field and crop information.

Format(s)	numeric

Examples	1015


Field Number

Description	The Field Number represent Field Number

Format(s)	Maximum 3 characters

Examples	3


Area

Description	Area is the value of the area afforested by each species in the plantation, i.e. hectares.

Format(s)	decimal (13.2)

Examples	10.1


Area Measuring Unit

Description	The Area Measuring Unit is the measuring unit of the value of the area afforested by each species in the plantation.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	HECTARES


Crop Name

Description	The Crop Name is the name of the crop being irrigated.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	PUMPKINS


Planting Date

Description	The Plating Date is the month and the day identifying the time of the year of which planting commences.

Format(s)	ddMMM

Examples	1 Jan


Growing Season

Description	The Growing Season identifies the time span of the growing season in days.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	SUMMER


Growing Season Measuring Unit

Description	The Growing Season Measuring Unit is the measuring unit of the growing season, i.e. days.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	DAYS


Rotatin Factor
Rotating Factor

Description	The Rotation Factor identifies the rotation factor

Format(s)	decimal (11,2)

Examples	12


Rotation Factor measiring unit
Rotation Factor Measuring Unit

Description	The Rotation Factor Measuring Unit is the measuring unit of the rotation factor, i.e.%

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	% or percentage


Irrigation System

Description	The Irrigation System identifies the type in irrigation system being used

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Flood, Furrow, Flood: border, Sprinkler: Dragline, Centre pivot, etc.


Waste / Clean water

Description	The Waste / Clean water indicates Iif the water stored is clean.

Format(s)	Maximum of 11 characters

Examples	WASTEWATER or CLEANWATER


Wastewater Storage Purposes

Description	The Wastewater Storage Purposes identifies the reason why the wastewater has been stored

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	AGRICULTURAL: IRRIGATION


Wastewater Storage Value

Description	The Wastewater Storage Value represent the waste value in cubic meters

Format(s)	decimal (11,2)

Examples	98


Wastewater Storage Measuring Unit

Description	The Wastewater Storage measuring unit is the measuring unit of the value of the storage of wastewater i.e. cubic metres

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	CUBIC METRES


Volume

Description	The Volume is the total volume or capacity of water stored in a dam.

Format(s)	decimal (11,2)

Important	This is a compulsory information field

Examples	4000


Measuring Type

Description	The Measuring Type identifies the measurement of the total volume or capacity of the water stored, i.e. estimated or calculated.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Estimated or Calculated


Aquatic Species Measures

Description	The Aquatic Species Measures indicates whether measures for movement of aquatic species have been taken or not.

Format(s)	Maximum of 3 characters

Examples	Yes or No


Water Type

Description	The Water Type indicates whether the dam is clean or not.

Format(s)	Maximum of 10 characters

Examples	RAW WATER OF WASTEWATER


In Stream Off Stream

Description	The In Stream Off Stream identifies whether the water is stored in the watercourse or the off channel storage.

Format(s)	Maximum of 11 characters

Examples	In-stream or Off-stream


Water Use Purposes

Description	The Water Use Purposes gives an indication if Clean Water and Waste Water Purposes are applicable to the Dam per Sector.

Format(s)	Maximum of 3 characters

Examples	Yes


Dam Completion Date

Description	The Dam Completion Date identifies the date of that the dam was completed.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1952-01-01


Basin Shape

Description	The Basin Shape identifies the shape of the dam‘s basin.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	ROUND


Basin Length

Description	The Basin Length identifies the length of the dam‘s basin.

Format(s)	decimal (11,2)

Examples	10.1


Basin Length Measuring Unit

Description	The Basin Length Measuring Unit identifies the length measuring unit of the dam‘s basin.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	METRES


Basin Width

Description	The Basin Width identifies the width of the dam‘s basin.

Format(s)	decimal (11,2)

Examples	500


Basin Width Measuring Unit

Description	The Basin Width MU identifies the width measuring unit of the dam‘s basin.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	10.1


Nearest City

Description	The Nearest City is the name of the nearest city or town.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Bloemfontein, Pretoria, Polokwane, etc


Contact Person Name

Description	The Contact Person Name is the name of the contact person.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Peter, John, Mary, etc.


Contact Person Surname

Description	The Contact Person Surname is the surname of the contact person.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Smith, Lombard, etc.


Impending Diverting

Description	The Impending Diverting identifies the nature of the activity.

Format(s)	Maximum of 9 upper case characters

Examples	IMPENDING or DIVERTING


Structure Name

Description	The Structure Name is the name of the structure.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Important	This is a compulsory information field

Examples	WEST BANK CANAL


Structure Height

Description	The Structure Height is the height of the structure.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Height Measuring Unit

Description	The Height Measuring Unit is the measuring unit of the height of the structure.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	METRES


Structure Width

Description	The Structure Width is the width of the structure.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Width Measuring Unit

Description	The Width Measuring Unit is the measuring unit of the width of the structure.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	METRES


Structure Length

Description	The Structure Length is the length of the structure.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11


Structure Length Measuring Unit

Description	The Length Measuring Unit is the measuring unit of the length of the structure.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	METRES


Number of Structures

Description	The Number of Structures identifies the number of structures in a property.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	6


Activity

Description	An Activity is the description of an activity.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	diversion through a pipe, diversion through a canal, impending structure, etc.


Other Activity

Description	The Other Activity is the description of an activity (Other Activity).

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	Warmbron Oord


Activity Start Date

Description	An Activity Start Date is the start date of an activity.

Format(s)	YYYY/MM/DD

Examples	2006/02/08


Flow Rate Before

Description	The Flow Rate Before is the flow rate before diversion or impedance.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Flow Rate Before Measuring Unit

Description	The Flow Rate Before Measuring Unit is the measuring unit of the flow rate before diversion or impedance i.e. cubic metres.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	CUBIC METRES per second


Mine Before Distance

Description	The Mine Before Distance is the distance of the mining-related activity from the original watercourse.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Before Distance Measuring Unit

Description	The Before Distance Measuring Unit is the measure unit of the distance of the mining-related activity from the original watercourse, i.e. metres.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	METRES


Mine After Distance

Description	The Mine After Distance is the distance of the mining-related activity from the watercourse after impedance or diversion.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	11


After Distance Measuring Unit

Description	An After Distance Measuring Unit is the measure unit of the distance of the mining-related activity from the watercourse after impedance or diversion, i.e. metres.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	METRES


Undermine Depth

Description	An Undermine Depth is the depth of undermining of watercourse.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11


Undermine Depth Measuring Unit

Description	The Undermine Depth Measuring Unit is the measure unit of the depth of undermining of watercourse, i.e. metres.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	METRES


Total Area

Description	The Total Area is the total SFRA area applicable to the Water Use record.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Total Area Measuring Unit

Description	The Total Area Measuring Unit is the measure unit of the SFRA area parameter value.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	HECTARES


Species

Description	The Species identifies the Species type description.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Eucalyptus, pine, wattle, poplar, etc


Species Start Date

Description	The Species Start Date is the start date the area was afforested by specific specie in the plantation.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	2006-02-08


Species End Date

Description	The Species End Date is the end date the area was afforested by specific specie in the plantation.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	2006-02-08


Wastewater Composition

Description	The Wastewater Composition identifies the wastewater that is composed

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Domestic wastewater


Industrial Percentage

Description	The Industrial Percentage is the percentage, by volume, generated by industrial activity.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	100


Total Irrigation Area

Description	The Total Irrigation Area is the Total area under waste or clean water irrigation.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Annual Water Volume

Description	Annual Water Volume is the total volume of waste or wastewater irrigated per year.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11200


Irrigation Pattern Measuring Unit

Description	The Irrigation Pattern Measuring Unit is the measure unit of the monthly pattern, i.e. cubic metres or % per month.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	CUBIC METRES


Wastewater Temperature

Description	The Wastewater Temperature is the approximate temperature after heated wastewater in being discharged.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Temperature Measuring Unit

Description	The Temperature Measuring Unit is the measure unit of the wastewater is discharged after being heated, give the approximate temp, i.e. degrees Celsius.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	DEGREES C


Annual Discharge Volume

Description	The Annual Discharge Volume is the total volume of wastewater discharged per year.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	1100


Resource Reliability

Description	The Resource Reliability is the reliability of water resource receiving the wastewater discharge, i.e. water always present, dry during certain seasons, frequently dry.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	WATER ALWAYS AVAILABLE


Nature of Waste

Description	The Nature of Waste is the Nature of waste to be disposed.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	domestic wastewater, industrial wastewater, industrial ash deposits, mine residue deposits, etc.


Households per tank

Description	The Households per tank is the average number of households per tank

Format(s)	numeric

Examples	11


Site Density

Description	The Site Density is the Density of disposal sites

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	112


Density Measuring Unit

Description	The Density Measuring Unit is the measuring unit used to measure the Density.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	PER HECTARE


On Site Disposal Households

Description	On Site Disposal Households is the Measure Unit of the density of disposal sites, i.e. hectares.

Format(s)	numeric

Examples	132


Mine Category

Description	The Mine Category is the Category of mine item id.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	102 (CATEGORY C)


Disposal System

Description	The Disposal System is the Type of system, Type of facility, Industrial ash deposits, or Mine residue disposal.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Wastewater pond, on-site disposal, evaporation dams, rock dumps, etc.


Other Disposal System

Description	The Other Disposal System is the Description if 'other' disposal.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	Evaporation dams


Size/Capacity

Description	The Size Capacity is the System capacity or size of the disposal methods.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Size Capacity Measuring Unit

Description	The Size capacity Measuring Unit is the Measure Unit of: - System capacity (cubic metre), - Size (ha).

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	system capacity (cubic metres), Size (hectares)


Annual Disposal

Description	The Annual Disposal is the Annual volume disposed.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	61


Annual Disposal Measuring Unit

Description	The Annual Disposal Measuring Unit is the Measure Unit Id of: Annual volume disposed (cubic metre), - Units (cubic metre/t).

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	CUBIC METRES


Alteration Name

Description	The Alteration Name is the name of alteration.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	BED


Alteration Type

Description	The Alteration Type is the Type of alteration.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	bed, bank or other


Alteration other Description

Description	The Alteration other Description is the Description if the type of alteration is other.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	BANK


Alteration Purpose

Description	The Alteration Purpose is the Purpose of the alteration.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	KANALISEER SATER OM VLOEDE OP LAND TE VOORKOM


Activity Type

Description	The Activity Type identifies the type of an activity

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	TEMPORARY OR PERMENANT


Alteration Start Date

Description	An Alteration Start Date is the start date of an alteration

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	2006-02-08


Alteration End Date

Description	An Alteration End Date is the end date of an alteration.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	2006-02-08


Water Removal Place

Description	The Water Removal Place is the Name of the place from which water is removed.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	VENETIA OPEN-PIT


Discharge Resource Type

Description	The Discharge Resource Type is the Type of water resource receiving the discharged water.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	river or stream, dam, estuary, wetland, etc


Other Resource Type

Description	The Other Resource Type is the Type of water resource receiving the discharged water (other description).

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	OOPGROEF MYN


Annual Removal Volume

Description	The Annual Removal Volume is the Total volume of underground water removed per year.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Annual Volume Measuring Unit

Description	The Annual Volume Measuring Unit is the Measure Unit of the total volume of underground water. removed per year, i.e. cubic metres

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	CUBIC METRES


Maximum Daily Volume

Description	The Maximum Daily Volume is the Maximum volume of underground water removed per day.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Daily Volume Measuring Unit

Description	The Daily Volume Measuring Unit is the Measure Unit of the maximum volume of underground water removed per day, i.e. cubic metres.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	CUBIC METRES


Water Discharge

Description	The Water Discharge indicates whether the water is discharged or not.

Format(s)	Maximum of 3 characters

Examples	YES or NO


Owner Trading Name

Description	The Owner Trading Name is the trading name of the company.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	SASOL


Owner Enterprise Type

Description	The Owner Enterprise Type is the type of Enterprise.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	COMPANY


Owner Province

Description	The Owner Province is the name of the Province if the property owner is a Province.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	LIMPOPO


Owner National Department

Description	The Owner National Department is the name of the Nat. Dept. if the property owner is a Nat. Dept.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	Department of Water Affairs and Forestry


Owner Water Service Provide

Description	The Owner Water Service Provide is the name of the Water Services Provider if the property owner is a Water Services Provider.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	DIKGATLONG MUNICIPALITY BARKLY WEST


Owner Water User Association

Description	The Owner Water User Association is name of the Water User Association if the property owner is a Water User Association.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	KALAHARI WEST WATER BOARD


Owner Type

Description	The Owner Type is the nature of the property owner.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Individual, Company, National Government, Provincial Government, Water Services Provider, Water User Association, etc.


Owner Name

Description	The Owner Name is the property owner’s name.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Important	Depending on the nature of the property owner this field will be populated as follows: 1. If the nature of the property owner is Individual, the Surname of the person will be stored in this field.2. If the nature of the property owner is Company, the Company name will be stored in this field

Examples	John


Cadastral Code

Description	The Cadastral Code is the Surveyor-General cadastral code for a surveyed property.

Format(s)	Maximum of 40 characters

Examples	TOLT 0000000000 150057


Title Deed Number

Description	The Title Deed Number is the Title deed number, issued by the deed office.

Format(s)	Maximum of 20 characters

Examples	T5055/1985


Title Deed Office

Description	The Title Deed Office Portion of Property.

Format(s)	Maximum of 40 characters

Examples	PRETORIA


Portion of Property

Description	The Portion of Property identifies the portion of the property.

Format(s)	Maximum of 40 characters

Examples	57


Property Number

Description	The Property Number is the property number.

Format(s)	Maximum of 20 characters

Important	If the property type is

farm, it represents the farm number

erf, it represents the erf number

holding, it represents the holding no

scheme, it represents the scheme no

Examples	103


Registration Division

Description	The Registration Division identifies the registration division if the property type is farm.

Format(s)	Maximum of 2 characters

Important	This field is necessary for the Surveyed section details. To save an application as complete either the admin name or the division code must be completed

Examples	LT, MS


Administrative District

Description	The Administrative District is the name of the administrative district.

Format(s)	Maximum of 40 characters

Important	This field is only applicable to the Surveyed Properties.

Examples	Vhembe District


Leader Name

Description	The Leader Name is the concatenated Surname and Initials of the leader of the village, community or tribal authority, divided by a space for the unsurveyed property.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Important	This field is only applicable to the Surveyed Properties.

Examples	GH Smith


Local Authority

Description	The Local Authority is the Magisterial District or Local Authority name.

Format(s)	Maximum of 40 characters

Important	This field is only applicable to the Surveyed Properties.

Examples	SIBASA


Property Name

Description	The Property Name is the Property name where the water use takes place.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Important	Description of the property name is as per the Deeds act if applicable

Examples	VERNETIA MS 103 PTN


Permit Number

Description	The Permit Number represents the permit number

Format(s)	Maximum of 40 characters

Examples	10000013


Drainage Region Code

Description	The Drainage Region Code is the Drainage Region code used by the users to identify Drainage Regions.

Format(s)	Maximum of 4 characters

Examples	A63E


District Municipality Name

Description	The District Municipality Name is the name of the municipality.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	Vhembe District Municipality


Scheduled Review Date

Description	The Scheduled Review Date is the scheduled review date for the licence.

Format(s)	YYYY/MM/DD

Examples	2006/02/08


Licence Status date

Description	The Licence Status date is the date on which the status of the licence changed.

Format(s)	YYYY/MM/DD

Examples	2006/02/08


Licence Status

Description	The Licence Status identifies the current state of the Licence.

Format(s)	Maximum of 40 characters

Examples	Licence not required, under assessment, approved, rejected, etc


Licence Number

Description	The Licence Number identifies a Licence Number.

Format(s)	Maximum of 20 characters

Important	This filed will only be populated if the licence indicator checkbox is checked

Examples	10002622/10


Responsible Licencing Authority Reference
Responsible Licensing Authority Reference

Description	The Responsible Licensing Authority Reference is the Reference of the Responsible Licensing Authority.

Format(s)	Maximum of 30 characters

Examples	KKF84749494


Responsible Licensing Authority Business Unit

Description	The Responsible Licensing Authority Business Unit is the Business Unit of the Responsible Licensing Authority.

Format(s)	Maximum of 30 characters

Examples


Validation Status

Description	The Validation Status identifies the validation and verification statuses.

Format(s)	Maximum of 30 characters

Examples	FINALISED


Transfer Type

Description	The Transfer Type indicates whether this Water Use Number is created in respect of a "transfer" or a "succession in title".

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	SUCCESSION IN TITLE


Water Use Status

Description	The Water Use Sates is the state of a Water Use Number.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Complete, Incomplete, Registered, Deleted, Cancelled or Closed


Water Management Area

Description	The Water Management Area identifies the management area value.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Important	This a compulsory field

Examples	LUVUVHU LETABA


Catchment Management Agency

Description	The Catchment Management Agency is the Catchment Management Agency Name.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	BREG CATCHMENT AGENCY


Regional Office

Description	The Regional Office is the representation of the regions

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	PRETORIA


Postal Address

Description	The Postal Address is the Postal Address of the Owner or Applicant.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	Posbus 69 Levubu


Customer Name

Description	The Customer name is the name of the individual, company, national department, provincial department, water user association or water services provider that is the customer.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	GH Smith


Physical Address

Description	The Physical Address is the Physical Address of the Owner or Applicant.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	FARM TZANEEN DISTRICT, LETABA


Customer Type

Description	The Customer Type is the  item id of the nature of the property owner

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Person, Company, National Government, Provincial Government, Water Services Provider, Water User Association, etc.


Office Hardcopy File No

Description	The Office Hardcopy File No is the file number that is for official use only.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	27/2/2/C21D/LT575/0


Register Status

Description	The Register Status is the current state of the Register.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Incomplete, Complete, Active, Inactive, Closed, Deleted and Cancelled


Office Name

Description	The Office Name is the name of the regional office to which the user is linked who last updated this record.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Limpopo Region


Form Name

Description	The Form Name is the unique identifier for input forms.

Format(s)	Maximum of 10 characters

Examples	DW760, DW761, etc.


Water Use Form No

Description	The Water Use Form No is the unique identifier for input forms.

Format(s)	numeric

Examples	3


Register Number

Description	The Register Number is the identification number allocated to a "person" (person include a natural person, a juristic person, and unincorporated body, an association, an organ of state), and where applicable, the property where water use occurs.

Format(s)	Maximum of 10 characters

Examples	27000049


Hazard Rating

Description	The Hazard Rating is the code of a hazard rating.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	H:H


Site Class

Description	The Site Class represent the classification types for waste disposal sites

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	GMB+


Operation End Date

Description	An Operation End Date identifies the end date of the waste disposal site.

Format(s)	YYYY/MM/DD

Examples	2006/02/08


Operation Start Date

Description	An Operation Start Date identifies the start date of the waste disposal site.

Format(s)	YYYY/MM/DD

Examples	2006/02/08


No of People Served

Description	The No of People Served is the number of people served by the waste disposal site.

Format(s)	numeric

Examples	15


Breadth after Rehabilitation Measuring Unit

Description	The Breadth after Rehabilitation Measuring Unit is the

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	METRES


Breadth after Rehabilitation

Description	The Breadth after Rehabilitation indicates the breadth of the waste disposal site

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Length after Rehabilitation Measuring Unit

Description	The Length after rehabilitation Measuring Unit is the

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	METRES


Length after Rehabilitation

Description	The Length after Rehabilitation indicates the length of the waste disposal site

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Height after rehabilitation Measuring Unit

Description	The Height after rehabilitation Measuring Unit is the

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	METRES


Height after rehabilitation

Description	The Height after rehabilitation field indicates the height or depth of the waste disposal site

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Commencement breadth mu

Description	The Commencement breadth Measuring Unit is the

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	METRES


Commencement Breadth

Description	The Commencement Breadth is the breadth of the waste disposal site

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Commencement Length mu

Description	The Commencement Length Measuring Unit is the

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	METRES


Commencement Length

Description	The Commencement Length is the length of the waste disposal site

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Commencement Height mu

Description	The Commencement Height Measuring Unit is the

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	METRES


Commencement Height

Description	The Commencement Height is the height or depth of the waste disposal site at commencement.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Waste Body Area

Description	The Waste Body Area is the size of the area (footprint) of the current waste body.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Lining

Description	The Lining indicates whether a waste disposal site is/will be lined or not.

Format(s)	Maximum of 7 characters

Examples	LINED or UNLINED


Total Tonnage Interval

Description	The Total Tonnage Interval identifies the interval period applicable to the total amount of waste disposed of at the site.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	1000


Total Tonnage mu

Description	The Total Tonnage mu is the measuring unit in which the distance to the edge of the nearest downstream surface water resource is measured not.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples


Total Tonnage

Description	The Total Tonnage is the total amount of waste disposed of at the site for an interval.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	1000


Maximum Tonnage Interval

Description	The Maximum Tonnage Interval identifies the interval period applicable to the maximum amount of waste disposed of at the site not.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	PER DAY


Maximum Tonnage mu

Description	The Maximum Tonnage mu is the measuring unit applicable to the maximum amount of waste disposed of at the site.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	TONS


Maximum Tonnage

Description	The Maximum Tonnage is the maximum amount of waste disposed of at the site for an interval.

Format(s)	Decimals

Examples	11,2


Site Name

Description	The Site Name is the name of the waste disposal site.

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples


No of People

Description	The No of People indicates the number of people.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	31


No of Craft

Description	The No of Craft indicates the number of crafts.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	11


Days per Year

Description	The Days per Year is the Frequency of Water Use activity, i.e. days per year or continuous.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	153


Water Resource

Description	The Water Resource is the Name of the water resource where recreation takes place.

Format(s)	Maximum of 3 characters

Examples	Jachtdrift, ONBEKEN


Water Stored

Description	The Water Stored indicates whether a waste disposal site is/will be lined or not.

Format(s)	Maximum of 3 characters

Examples	YES or NO


Water Disposed

Description	The Water Disposed indicates whether a waste disposal site is/will be lined or not.

Format(s)	Maximum of 7 characters

Examples	NO


Range ID

Description	The Range ID is a system generated number used to identify a seasonal range record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	2


Start Month

Description	The Start Month identifies the full name of the month that defines the beginning of the season for each monitoring frequency period.

Format(s)	Maximum 12 characters.

Examples	March


End Month

Description	The End Month identifies the full name of the month that defines the end of the season for each monitoring frequency period.

Format(s)	Maximum 12 characters.

Examples	December


Range Description

Description	The Range Description uniquely describes the specific range in which monitoring should take place.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	January to March Crops Harvesting


Weeks

Description	The Weeks is the calculated number of weeks as derived from the entered Hours Per Unit. E.g. Weeks = Hours Per Unit/168

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	2.00


Start Datum Type

Description	The Start Datum Type is the start projection type of the point location

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Cape datum Clarke 1880, WGS-84 datum HBH94, etc


End Datum Type

Description	The End Datum Type is the end projection type of the point location

Format(s)	Maximum of 90 characters

Examples	Cape datum Clarke 1880, WGS-84 datum HBH94, etc


Licence Expiry Date

Description	A Licence Expiry Date identifies the date on which the licenced Water Use Number will expire

Format(s)	YYYY/MM/DD

Examples	2006/02/08


Variable Frequency Instruction

Description	The Variable Frequency Instruction specifies the full instructions regarding the variable frequency in which monitoring should be performed.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed characters.

Examples	Twice weekly


Frequency Days
Days

Description	The Days is the calculated number of  days as derived from the entered Hours Per Unit. E.g. Days = Hours Per Unit/24

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples	14


Start Month

Description	The Start Month identifies the number of the month that defines the beginning of the season for each monitoring frequency period.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	3


End Month

Description	The End Month identifies the number of the month that defines the end of the season for each monitoring frequency period.

Format(s)	Numeric.

Examples	12


Programme Creator

Description	The Programme Creator identifies the person creating or modifying the Monitoring Programme on the system.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 upper case characters.

Examples	Martie Erasmus


Programme Reason

Description	The Programme Reason describes the purpose of the monitoring that would take place within the programme.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples


Detail Indicator

Description	The Detail Indicator is checked to indicate that the write programme details process for monitoring programme was executed.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Correct Indicator

Description	The Correct Indicator is checked to indicate that the monitoring programme passed the QC’s.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Termination Letter Indicator

Description	The Termination Letter Indicator is checked to indicate that the termination letter for monitoring programme exists.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Approved Date

Description	The Approved Date is the date on which the monitoring programme was approved.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	2006-02-06


First Consolidation Date

Description	The 1st Consolidation Date is the date on which the monitoring programme was first consolidated.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	2006-02-06


Terminate Reason

Description	The Terminate Reason provides the full details that forced the monitoring programme to be terminated.

Format(s)	Maximum 80 characters.

Examples	MONITORING COMPLETED


Programme Owner Organisation ID

Description	The Programme Owner Organisation ID uniquely identifies an organisation that owns the Monitoring Programme.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed characters.

Examples	10797


Programme Owner

Description	The Programme Owner identifies the abbreviation of the Organisation that owns the Monitoring Programme.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 upper case characters.

Examples	DWAF- IWQS -PRETORIA


Programme Custodian ID

Description	The Programme Custodian ID identifies the id of the employee responsible for the monitoring programme

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed characters.

Examples	1234567


Water Use Description

Description    The Water Use Description describes the Water Use Site and it consists of Customer Name, Property Name, WMA and Form Name.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters.

Examples	Customer:SASOL MINING (PTY) LTD, Property: SYFERFONTEIN, WMA: LUVUVHU, Form Name:DW758


Monitoring Office checkbox

Description	The Monitoring Office checkbox is checked to indicate that schedules for all monitoring offices should be printed.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Schedule checkbox

Description	The Schedule checkbox is checked to indicate that only a list of samples that are scheduled to be analysed should be printed.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Result Sheet checkbox

Description	The Result Sheet checkbox is checked to indicate that the sample results must be printed or a blank result sheet where you can manually enter results must be printed.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Custodian Name

Description	The Custodian Name identifies the concatenated name (surname, preferred name, initials and title) of the employee responsible for the monitoring programme.

Format(s)	Maximum 120 mixed characters.

Examples	MAREE, DAWIE, N, MR


Watercourse

Description	The Watercourse identifies the a specific translation for the name of the watercourse..

Format(s)	Maximum 90 characters.

Examples	KOEDOES RIVER


National Summary checkbox

Description	The National Summary checkbox is checked to indicate that a summary of the all monitoring points in a country must be printed.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Managerial Office Indicator

Description	The Managerial Office Indicator is checked to indicate that schedules for all Managerial offices should be printed.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Responsible Office Indicator

Description	The Responsible Office Indicator is checked to indicate that schedules for all Responsible offices should be printed.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Monitoring Feature Flow Indicator

Description	The Monitoring Feature Flow Indicator is checked to indicate that Monitoring Point is Flow Related

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Preserve Time

Description	The Preserve Time is the time it takes for a preservative to expire in a preserved sample.

Format(s)	HH:MM:SS

Examples	12:05:55


Database Type Description

Description	The Database Type Description display a specific Database Type Description from the History Table.

Important	This field will not be visible on the Form when the History Table of the Geographical Subset is implemented

Format(s)	Maximum 120 mixed characters


Description Name

Description	The Description Name is the descriptive part of the Feature Name in addition to the Farm Name and the Feature Reference part

Format(s)	Maximum 120 mixed characters.

Examples	KEVIN REF NAME


Kilometres

Description	The Kilometres is the estimated Km. of the radius to be used when filtering out points

Important	Range is 1.8. to 54

Format(s)	numeric.

Examples	2.4


Monitor Route ID

Description	The Monitor Route ID identifies Id of the Route taken by the Monitor at the Feature Programme.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 mixed characters.

Examples	07972435454754


Operational Office Abbreviation

Description	The Operational Office abbreviation is short description of the Operational Office

Format(s)	Maximum 20 characters

Examples


Operational Office Caption

Description	The Operational Office Caption is the concatenated name of the Operational Office

Format(s)	Maximum 20 characters

Examples


Responsible Office Abbreviation

Description	The Responsible Office Abbreviation is short description of the Responsible Office

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters

Examples	PTA


Responsible Office Caption

Description	The Responsible Office Caption is the concatenated name of the Responsible Office

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters

Examples	PRETORIA


Managing Office Abbreviation

Description	The Managing Office Abbreviation is short description of the Managing Office

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters

Examples


Managing Office Caption

Description	The Managing Office Caption is the concatenated name of the Managing Office

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters

Examples


Monitor Route Name

Description	The Monitor Route Name is the Name of the Route taken by the Monitor at the Feature

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters

Examples	Route1

 NB: This field can only be maintained in Monitoring Management.


Monitor Explanation

Description	The Monitor Explanation provides an explanation of the Monitor.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters

Examples


GIS View Button

Click on this button to display the monitoring point and the Operational Monitor's Physical Address on a map


Addressee Type ID

Description	The Addressee Type ID uniquely identifies the Company's Addressee Type.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10267


Institution From Date

Description	The Institution From Date is the date on which the Company was opened.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


Institution To Date

Description	The Institution To Date is the date on which the Company was closed.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20

.


Business Address Button


Composite Use Indicator

Description	The Composite Use Indicator is checked to indicate if the monnitoring variable is used in the calculation of a derived variable.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Programme Register Date

Description	The Programme Register Date is the date when the monitoring programme was first registered.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	1999-01-20


Trackbar

The Trackbar on the frame gives the user the opportunity to select the radius to be used when filtering out points.


Refresh object on scroll indicator

Description	The Refresh object on scroll indicator is checked to indicate if the Image of the picture should display or not.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Monitor Route Description

Description	The Monitor Route Description defines the the Route taken by the Monitor at the Feature.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters.

Examples


Flow Type Id

Description	The Flow Type Id uniquely identifies the Flow Type of the Monitoring Feature Classes.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10267


Flow Type Name

Description	The Flow Type Name identifies the flow fype of the Monitoring Feature.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples


Meteorological ID

Description	The Meteorological ID uniquely identifies the Meteorological Type from Metereological Measuring Classes.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10267


Meteorological Class Type Name

Description	The Meteorological Class Type Name identifies the type of Meteorological Measuring Class.

Format(s)	Maximum 255 characters.

Examples


Flow Association Type Description

Description	The Flow Association Type identifies the Flow Association of the Monitoring Feature.

Format(s)	Radiogroup button or Dropdown.

Examples	Discharge In , Supply To


Level Number

Description	The Level Code uniquely identifies the Catchment Management Numbering System Code for a point.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	25


Monitoring Feature Discharge Accident Indicator

Description	The Monitoring Feature Discharge Accident Indicator is checked to indicate that the Monitoring Point is not located on a Feature, not meteorological related, i.e. 'discharge accidents' next to a highway.

Important	this indicator checked when the High Level Type is 'Not Located on a Feature', otherwise it is unchecked

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Customer Type Radio Group

Description	The Customer Type Radio Group button displays the possible Customer Types and gives the user the option to select All Customer Types or specific one.

Important	this is a compulsory field

Format(s)	Radio Button

Examples	Individual or Company


Regional Office ID

Description	The Regional Office ID is used to uniquely define the representation of the regions.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	345677888


Catchment Management Agency Id

Description	The Catchment Management Agency Id is used to uniquely define the Catchment Management Agency.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	WEER67889


Monitoring Point Role Type

Description	The Monitoring Point Role Type is used to define the Monitoring Role type of the Monitoring point in the Flow Association.

Format(s)	Drop Down Button

Examples      	DW766-Point Source Discharge


Permit Date

Description	The Permit Date is the date that the permit was issued.

Format(s)	YYYY/MM/DD

Examples	1999/04/19


District Municipality Id

Description	The District Municipality Id is used to uniquely define the representation of the district municipalities.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	345677888


Licenced Indicator

Description	The Licenced Indicator is checked to indicate if the Water Use is Licenced or not.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Property Ownership

Description	The Property Ownership identifies type of ownership of the property.

Format(s)	Maximum of 255 characters

Examples	Owned by Applicant


Water Use Start Date

Description	The Water Use Start Date is the start date of the Water Use.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Examples	2001-10-12


Customer Trading Name

Description	The Customer Trading Name defines the trading name of the property owner.

Format(s)	Characters

Examples	Arivia.kom


Downstream Flow Association ID

Description	The Downstream Flow Feature ID uniquely identifies the Downstream Flow Association.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10267


Downstream Flow Association Name

Description	The Downstream Flow Association Name identifies the downstream impact by the Flow Association.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples


Transfer Feature ID

Description	The Transfer Feature ID is a system-generated number used to uniquely identify transfer features.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	25


Transfer Feature Name

Description	The Transfer Feature Name uniquely identifies transfer feature

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples


Monitoring Point Role in Flow Association

Description	The Monitoring Point Role in Flow Association describes the Monitoring Point Role in the Flow Association.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters

Examples	PSD


Level Code

Description	The Level Code uniquely identifies the Catchment Management Numbering System Code for a point.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	25


Flow Association Type

Description	The Flow Association Type uniquely identifies Flow Association Type Code of Flow Association.

Format(s)	Maximum 60 characters.

Examples        D1 , Af


Quaternary Drainage Region Feature Id

Description	The Quaternary Drainage Region Feature Id is an Id of the Quaternary Drainage Region where the point is located on.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	6356552353572395


Quaternary Drainage Region Feature Name

Description	The Quaternary Drainage Region Feature Name is the name of the Quaternary Drainage Region where the point is located on.

Format(s)	char(4)

Examples	DFR


WARMS Water Use

Description

Water Use form view all the Water Use data describing General Water Use Part 2 infomation

Pre-requisites:

None

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related Topics


WARMS Water User

Description

Water User form view all the Water Use data describing General Water Use Part 1 infomation

Pre-requisites:

None

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related Topics


Water Use Site ID

Description	The Water Use Site ID is a unique system generated number that identifies a Water Use Site.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of  2 147 483 647

Examples       100000023


Water Use Site Name


Monitoring Feature Discharge Accident Indicator

Description	The Monitoring Feature Discharge Accident Indicator indicates that the Monitoring Point is not located on a Feature, not meteorological related, i.e. 'discharge accidents' next to a highway

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples


Name Fields Form


Destination Feature Information

Description: 	The Destination Feature Tab is used to define or maintain the part of a Flow Association pertaining to the Destination Feature


Source Feature Information

Description:  	The Source Feature Tab is used to define or maintain the part of a Flow Association pertaining to the Source Feature.


Fundamental Variable Selection

Description

The Fundamental Variable Selection form is used to select a specific Fundamental Variable.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The form will be automatically displayed with the Flow Association records information

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

3.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

4.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Result Reason Code Selection

Description

The Result Reason Code Selection form is used to select a specific Result Reason Code

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The form will be automatically displayed with the Flow Association records information

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

3.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

4.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Associated Flow Point Id

Description	The Associated Flow Point Id is a system generated number that uniquely identifies an Associated Monitoring Point Id of the Flow Association.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of 2 147 483 647

Examples	10018


Associated Flow Point Name

Description	The Associated Flow Point Name identifies the name of the Associated Flow Monitoring Point in the Flow Association.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples


Liaison Entity Radiogroup

Click on this radio button to filter for Monitor or Laboratory entity at Monitoring Point.


Point Located on HLT

 Description	This Point Located on HLT gives an indication whether the associated Monitoring Point is located on the Source,Destination or Transfer  Features

 Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

 Examples	Source,Destination or Tranfer


Monitoring Types Code

Description	The Monitoring Type Code is used to indicate the type of monitoring programme.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples	 DS, RA,RS


Monitor Route Sequence

Description	The Monitor Route Sequence is the sequence that the Monitor will visits specified monitoring points on a route.

Format(s)	Number.

Examples	 20

 NB: This field can only be maintained in Monitoring Management.


Objective/Standard ID

Description	The Objective/Standard ID is the serial key uniquely identifying the objective or standard.a route.

Format(s)	Number.

Examples	 86871


Objective/Standard Description

Description

Format(s)

Examples


Objective/Standard Reason Radio Group

Description

Format(s)

Examples


Objective/Standard Reason Type

Description	The Objective/Standard Reason Type indicates the objective or standard type code.

Format(s)	Maximun 2 characters

Examples	 S, TR


Objective/Standard Type


Objective Boundary Type

Description	The Objective Boundary Type indicates the boundary (Upper or Lower) code of the standard or objective

Format(s)	Maximun 2 characters

Examples


Monitoring Variable Limit Value

Description	The Monitoring Variable Limit Value indicates the limit for a specific Monitoring Variable within an Objective/Standard of a specific Objective Boundary Typeobjective

Format(s)	Decimal Number

Examples	 11,3


Objective Boundary Type Description

Description	The Objective Boundary Type Description field indicates the boundary (upper or lower) of the objective or standard.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 characters.

Examples	 Lower or Upper


Add New
Add New (Button)

The Add New button enables the user to create a new standard if none exist.


Add Subsequent Button

Add Subsequent button enables the user to create a new standard and update the existing standard


Overwrite Existing (Button)

This button enables the user to overwrite the existing standard.


Populate Wizard Button


Objective Type Description
Objective/Standard Type Description


Previous Objective/Standard


Duplicate Variable Button

This button allows the user to select a record for the same variable (Current record) with a different analysis method to be done.A Selection form will display valid analysis methods to choose from and a record will be added to the Programme Analysis for the specific sample.


Radius

The Radius to be used when filtering out points in Minutes.


Estimated km

The Estimated Km. of the radius to be used when filtering out points.


Selection Checkbox


 Monitoring Management Overview

Description

The Monitoring Management sub-system is used to effectively and efficiently manage resource quality operational monitoring on a national basis.

Scope

The Monitoring Management sub-system deals with the following main modules:

•	Monitoring Programmes (used to register the requirements for recurring monitoring and associated information)

•	Sample and Results Registration (used to capture monitoring samples and results into the WMS system)

•	Sample and Results Administration (used to ensure the correct monitoring information is gathered through quality control)

•	Peripheral Information (used to create and maintain standard reference information for monitoring management)

Related System Topics

Monitoring Programmes

Sample and Results Registration

Sample and Results Administration

Peripheral Information


Peripheral Information Overview

Description

The Peripheral Information module is used to create and maintain reference information for the Monitoring Management sub-system. The Peripheral Information module deals with the following:

•	Defining the requirements of Monitoring Variables, and associated information necessary for monitoring;

•	Register and maintain all possible monitoring actions and monitoring frequencies;

•	Define all calculation methods used to derive certain monitoring variables or quality control methods;

•	Look up recorded changes to certain tables containing reference data.

Scope

The Peripheral Information module contains the following sub-modules:

•	Monitoring Variable

•	person or organisation

•	Monitoring Point

•	Monitoring Action and Frequency

•	Calculation Method

•	Additional Queries

Important

Certain information can only be updated centrally. If all necessary information is not entered, you will not be able to use the rest of the Monitoring Management Sub-System. All new information or changes are first submitted to an Operational User Group for agreement between WMS Stakeholders. Contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable

Monitor

Monitoring Point

Monitoring Action and Frequency

Calculation Method


Monitoring Variable Overview

Description

The Monitoring Variable sub-module defines Monitoring Variables, and the required information necessary for the measurement of variables.

The Monitoring Variable sub-module deals with the following:

•	Monitoring variables are defined according to their ecological compartment, type, class and unit of measurement.

•	Monitoring variables are also grouped according to certain characteristics e.g. macro constituents, or frequently analysed variables to determine fitness for drinking water purposes.

•	Defining the analysis methods used to determine monitoring variables as well as the laboratories/monitors that analyse variables according to specific methods and materials.

Scope

The monitoring variable sub-module contains the following high-level components:

•	Ecological Compartment

•	Monitoring Variable Type

•	Monitoring Variable Class

•	Measuring unit

•	Monitoring Variable

•	Variable Group

•	Analysis Type

•	Analysis Method

•	Capacity Process

•	Laboratory Process

•	Container

•	Preservative

•	Sample Type

•	Defaults for Programme Samples

•	Query Variable Type and Class

•	Query Variable per Variable Group

•	Query Variables contained within Derived Variable

•	Query Container and Preservative for Laboratory Analysis

•	Anion/Cation indicator report

•	Tags

Related System Topics

Ecological Compartment Maintenance

Monitoring Variable Type Maintenance

Monitoring Variable Class Maintenance

Measuring Unit Maintenance

Monitoring Variable Maintenance

Variable Group Maintenance

Analysis Method Maintenance

Container Maintenance

Preservative Maintenance

Sample Type Maintenance

Defaults for Programme Sample Maintenance

Variable per Type and Class

Variable per Variables Group View

Variables Contained in Derived Variable View

Container and Preservative for Laboratory Analysis View

Anion/Cation indicator report

Tag Maintenance


Ecological Compartment Maintenance

Description

The Ecological Compartment Maintenance form is used to define the sample substance or sample environment in which monitoring is performed e.g. water and inorganic solids.

Pre-requisites

 None.

Steps

Add an Ecological Compartment:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Ecological Compartment Name.

3.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit an Ecological Compartment:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete an Ecological Compartment:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Ecological Compartment record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

Measured variables are specific to each ecological compartment. This form is centrally maintained.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Overview

Monitoring Variable Type Maintenance

Monitoring Action Maintenance

Register Programme Design


Monitoring Variable Type Maintenance

Description

The Monitoring Variable Type Maintenance  form is used to define the difference between a type or kind of variable measured within the ecological compartment e.g. dissolved iron in water, or acid soluble iron in water.  A monitoring variable is always part of a variable type.

Pre-requisites

An Ecological Compartment must be specified in the Ecological Compartment Maintenance form.

Steps

Add a Monitoring Variable Type:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Type Name and tab.

3.	Enter a Monitoring Variable Type Description and tab.

4.	Enter the Eco Compartment ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Eco Compartment form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

5.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit a Monitoring Variable Type:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Monitoring Variable Type:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Monitoring Variable record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

This form is centrally maintained.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Overview

Ecological Compartment Maintenance

Monitoring Variable Maintenance


Monitoring Variable Class Maintenance

Description

The Monitoring Variable Class Maintenance form is used to classify monitoring variables according to resource quality properties e.g. chemical, physical, biological, bacteriological, or radio activity. A monitoring variable is always part of a variable class.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Monitoring Variable Class:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the the new Monitoring Variable Class Name and tab.

3.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit a Monitoring Variable Class:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Monitoring Variable Class:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Monitoring Variable record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

This form is centrally maintained.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Overview

Monitoring Variable Maintenance


Measuring Unit Maintenance

Description

The Measuring Unit Maintenance form is used to define the measured value of a monitoring variable in terms of its unit.  Conversion factors between like units (e.g. mg per litre and gram per litre) can be registered with a conversion factor of  mantissa X 10 to the power of exponent. As an example the conversion of 1 gram per litre to milligram per litre is: 1(value) X 1(mantissa) X 10 to the power of 3(exponent).  Thus one gram per litre = 1000 milligram per litre.  To convert 1 milligram per litre to gram per litre : 1 X 1X 10 to the power of  -3.  This measuring unit will be used during the results received and results released processes, as all released results will appear as a measured unit.

Pre-requisites

A conversion factor formula with a mantissa and exponent is needed.

Steps

Add a new Measuring Unit:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Measuring Unit Name and tab.

3.	Enter the Measuring Unit Abbreviation and tab.

4.	If no conversion is necessary, click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

5.	If there is a conversion to another unit, both units must be added in the Conversion Factors grid appearing on the bottom half of the Measuring Unit form, by clicking in the grid.

6.	Click on the [image] Create button.

7.	Enter the Measuring Unit ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

8.	Enter the Mantissa and tab.

9.	Enter the Exponent.

10.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit a Measuring Unit:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Measuring Unit:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Measuring Unit record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

This form is maintained centrally.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variables

Register Results


Measuring Unit Selection

Description

The Measuring Unit Selection form is used to search for and select a specific measuring unit.

Pre-requisites

The required measuring unit record must be setup in the Measuring Unit Maintenance form in Monitoring Management.

Steps

1.	Click on the required measuring unit record to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Variable Maintenance

Description

The Monitoring Variable Maintenance form is used to define and maintain monitoring variables, also known as determinants or constituents. Monitoring Variables can be divided into Derived and Fundamental Variables. A Fundamental type variable obtains its value through analysis of the sample while a derived variable obtains its value through calculation of one or more variable's results.

It is also possible to distinguish between multiple or single variable types (derived variables are always single variable types). It is important to know whether a variable is single or multiple as multiple variables have many parameters linked to them, and therefore many results can also be expected. An example of a multiple monitoring variable is algae identification that contains a parameter list of algae genera, while examples of single monitoring variables are chloride and sulphur.

Another characteristic of a monitoring variable is that it can either be a standard or a non-standard variable. A standard variable is determined according to specified standards while a non-standard variable is an equivalent to a standard variable but is recalculated to the standard variable. Example as standard variable, Phosphate is calculated as the element Phosphorous and not its ionic form, Phosphate. Therefore the variable Phosphate is viewed "Phosphate as Phosphorous" PO4 as P.

Pre-requisites

Variable Type, Eco Compartment, Measuring Unit and Monitoring Variable Class forms must contain the necessary information.

Steps

Add a new Monitoring Variable:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	Enter a Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and tab.

3.	Enter the new Monitoring Variable Name and tab.

4.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Type form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

The Eco Compartment is automatically populated with the Variable Type field. Tab to the Measuring Unit field.

5.	Enter the Measuring Unit ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

6.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Class ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Class form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

7.	Click on the Fundamental/Derived Type field [image] Drop Down button and select the Fundamental or Derived type variable.

8.	In the Non-Standard Type field, click on the drop down button and select either "Non Standard" if the variable is a non standard variable or "Standard" if the variable is a standard variable.

9.	In the Method Indicator field:

•	If you have selected the derived type variable, the Method indicator will automatically be set to derived.

•	If you have selected the fundamental type variable, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a sample, observation or both method indicator.

10.	If the new variable is a Fundamental Variable, the Multi/SingleType field will be displayed, click on the Multi/SingleType field [image] Drop Down button and select either a Multiple or Single Type.

11.	If the new Type is a Single Type, the Anion/Cation field will be displayed, click on the Anion/Cation field [image] Drop Down button and either Anion, Cation or None.

12.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

 Tip:This is the minimum information required to register a new monitoring variable. Depending on the variable type and single or multiple type status you can continue with the relevant process:

Multiple Type Fundamental Variable

When creating a new Multiple Type Fundamental variable three tabs are displayed in the bottom half of the form: Fundamental Variable, Variable Group and Result QC Method.

13.	Click on the Analysis Method button to create an analysis method for the monitoring variable. Close the Analysis Method form to return the new record to the Monitoring Variable form.

14.	In the Fundamental Variable form, click on Parameter Class ID field, either enter the Parameter Class ID, or click on the Zoom button and select the relevant record from the Lookup Parameter Class form, and tab.

15.	Click on the Choice Input field [image] Drop Down button and select the Alpha, Numeric, Both or Either one option and tab.

16.	If you selected Numeric, Both or Either one in the choice input field, the Max Total Value field will be highlighted, enter the value and tab.

17.	Click on the Parameter Choice field [image] Drop Down button and select the All or Partial and tab.

18.	If you selected Alpha in the Choice Input field, the Valid Alpha Characters field will be highlighted, enter the characters.

19.	Click on the Parameter button to enter parameters for the multiple monitoring variable.

20.	Click on the Variable Group Maintenance form tab.

21.	Enter the Variable Group ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup Variable Group form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab. If the variable belongs to more than one group you can create more Variable Groups by clicking the Create button, and entering the required information, Groups can also be deleted by clicking on the Delete button.

22.	Click on the External Reference tab to display any external references for the selected monitoring variable. You can also click on the References button to view additional references for the variable, if available.

Single Type Fundamental Variable

When creating a new Fundamental variable three tabs are displayed in the bottom half of the form: Fundamental Variable, Variable Group and Result QC Method.

13.	The Fundamental Variable tab contains the Multiple/Single Type and Anion/Cation Ind fields that have already been specified.

14.	Click on the Variable Group Maintenance form tab.

15.	Enter the Variable Group ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup Variable Group form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab. If the variable belongs to more than one group you can create more Variable Groups by clicking the Create button, and entering the required information, Groups can also be deleted by clicking on the Delete button.

Derived Variable

When creating a new Derived variable two tabs are displayed in the bottom half of the form: Derived Variable and Variable Group.

13.	Click in the Calculation Method ID field, enter the ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Calculation Method form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

14.	Click in the Variable ID field, enter the Variable ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup Monitoring Variable form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

15.	The Start Date is automatically defaulted to today’s date, either leave the date or re-enter a start date and tab.

16.	The End Date is automatically defaulted to 9999-12-31, either leave the date or enter an end date and tab.

17.	Enter the Mantissa.

18.	Enter the Exponent and tab.

19.	Click on the Variable Group Maintenance form tab.

20.	Enter the Variable Group ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup Variable Group form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab. If the variable belongs to more than one group you can create more Variable Groups by clicking the Create button, and entering the required information, Groups can also be deleted by clicking on the Delete button.

Non Standard Variable

When creating a new single fundamental variable that is a Non Standard variable, the Non Standard Variable tab will appear in the bottom half of the form.

13.	Click in the Linked Standard Variable field, and click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup Monitoring Variable form. Click on the standard variable record that you want to link to the new non standard variable and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

14.	In the Conversion Factor field, and enter the mantissa that will be used to convert the non standard variable to its linked standard variable.

15.	In the Exponent field, enter the exponent that will be used to convert the non standard variable to its linked standard variable.

Edit a Monitoring Variable:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Monitoring Variable Type:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Monitoring Variable record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

This form is centrally maintained. You cannot add, edit or delete a derived monitoring variable record when the derived variable id is being used on Release Results.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Overview

Monitoring Variable Type Maintenance

Ecological Compartment Maintenance

Measuring Unit Maintenance

Monitoring Variable Class Maintenance

Result QC Methods


Monitoring Variable Reference Selection

Description

The Monitoring Variable Reference Selection form is used to select a required reference monitoring variable as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

The external monitoring variable must exist.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Variable Group Maintenance

Description

The Variable Group Maintenance form is used to define variable groups for frequently used variables. Variables that are frequently used in the design of a monitoring programme can be grouped together to speed up the data capturing process. One variable group can consist of many monitoring variables and the same monitoring variable can be a member of different variable groups.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Variable Group:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the new Variable Group Name.

3.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit a Variable Group:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may modify the record and the Variable group id may not be modified.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Variable Group:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the Variable Group record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete option.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Maintain Variables in a Group:

1.	Click on the Variables for Variable Group Maintenance button to maintain the variables that belong to a Variable group.

 Tip: Click on the Print button to print a list of variable groups.

Important

This form is centrally maintained. Variables are linked to a group or groups in the Monitoring Variable form.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Group Maintenance


Analysis Method Filter Criteria

Description

The Analysis Method Filter Criteria form is used to enter or select search criteria, that is used to filter Analysis Method information. Historical information for an analysis method can also be accessed from this form.

 Pre-requisites

 Monitoring Variable must exist.

Steps

1.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

 Tip: To view the history of selected variables, click on the History button.

2.	Click on the Analysis Method button to open the Analysis Method form.

Important

The Print button can be clicked to obtain a printout of the selected monitoring variable's analysis method information.

Related System Topics

Analysis Method Maintenance

Monitoring Variable Maintenance


Analyst Method Maintenance Filter Criteria

Description

The Analyst Method Maintenance Filter Criteria form is used to enter or select search criteria, that is used to filter observation or laboratory analysis method information. Historical information for an analysis method can also be accessed from this form.

 Pre-requisites

 Monitoring Variable, Laboratory and Action Type must exist.

Steps

1.	Select the Action Type from the drop down button.

2.	Enter the Analyst ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Laboratory or Monitor Selection forms. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

3.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

4.	 Tip: To view the history of selected variables, click on the History button.

5.	Click on the Analysis Method button to open the Analysis Method form.

Important

The Print button can be clicked to obtain a printout of the selected monitoring variable's analysis method information.

Related System Topics

Analysis Method for Laboratory

Observation Method for Monitor


Analysis Method for Laboratory

Description

The Analysis Method for Laboratory form is used to define or maintain analysis method information used to analyse samples and/or field readings. The form is also used to define properties for the analysis methods as used by laboratories.

It is important to identify the analysis method in order to:

•	distinguish between trends in the time series data that result from changes in measurement procedures, and

•	differentiate between the different types of measured constituents to evaluate interferences that occur in specific measurement techniques.

The Analysis Method form also has a History button that can be clicked to view the history of the selected variables.

Pre-requisites

The Laboratory and Action Type must exist.

Steps

Add a new Analysis Method for a Laboratory:

This form will be displayed if the Action Type is "Sample". The Laboratory's details will be displayed.

1.	In the Analysis Method field, enter an Analysis Method ID, or click on the Zoom button to open the Analysis Method Selection form, and select the required record. The Variable Reference (the code indicates how the analysed variable is identified at the specific laboratory) will be displayed.

2.	In the Analysis Method Reference field, enter the Analysis Method Reference. This code indicates how the analysed variable is identified at the specific laboratory.  Note: If LIMS is active and the analysis method exists on the LIMS,  you can also Zoom to open the Analysis Method Reference Selection form, and select the required record.

3.	Click on the Result Value Type field [image] Drop Down button and select the True Value or Detection Limit option and tab.

4.	Click on the Result Detection Limit Type field [image] Drop Down button and select the Fixed, Countstat, or Zero option if the Result Value Type is "True Value" and tab. If the Result Value Type field is "Detection Limit", the Fixed is the only option.

5.	Enter the Detection Limit Value and tab. Tip: If the Result Value Type field is "Detection Limit", then the Detection Limit Value must be greater than 1.

6.	Check the Greater Than Allowed indicator, if applicable. This indicator is set to true if the reported results is "Greater Than" a value.

7.	Enter the Valid Decimal number and tab.

8.	Enter the Relative Standard Deviation number and tab.

9.	Enter the Start Date and tab.

10.	Enter the End Date and tab. The default date for ongoing methods is 9999-12-31.

11.	Enter the Measuring Unit ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Valid Measuring Unit Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

12.	The Default Measuring Unit Indicator.

Set this indicator to "True" when the results template should be updated with the measuring unit specified. If the indicator is set to "False", the results template will NOT be updated with any measuring unit. The data capturer must select the measuring unit for every result entered.

For Electrical Conductivity (EC) measurements, the Default Measuring Unit Indicator is usually set to "False" because the instrument unit (measuring range) can vary with every value measured. (e.g.: mS/m*; mS/cm; or uS/cm).

The Default Measuring Unit must not be confused with the Standard Measuring Unit (mS/m* for EC) that is used for reporting released results. (The Standard Measuring Unit has a red asterix, *, in the unit look-up table – Valid Measuring Units for Monitoring Variable Selection).

13.	Enter the Multimedia ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Multimedia Selection form, and select a record.

 Note: Step 14 – 18 is for future implementation. At this stage these fields are not populated.

14.	Enter the Grading number. A grading , 0-9, indicates the effectiveness of the Laboratory to execute an Sample Analysis method.  The best grading = 0, the worst =9.

15.	Click on the Pay Indicator if the monitor is paid for observations, and tab.

16.	Enter the observation Cost if relevant.

17.	Enter the Contract number if relevant.

18.	Enter the contract Expiry Date, if relevant.

19.	Tab to accept the new record.

20.	You also have the option of clicking on the Sample Type, Container, Preservative Maintenance button in order to maintain information in this form.

Edit an Analysis Method for a Laboratory:

 When editing or deleting a Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have edited or deleted by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit or deletion, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to proceed. The Laboratory can only be edited if no children records are linked to an analysis method.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete an Analysis Method:

 Deletion will only be possible if the record is not  being used in another form.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Analysis Method Maintenance Filter Criteria

Observation Method for Monitor

Sample Type, Container, Preservative Maintenance


Observation Method for Monitor

Description

The Observation Method for Monitor form is used to define or maintain analysis method information used to analyse samples and/or field readings. The form is also used to define properties for the analysis methods as used by monitors.

It is important to identify the analysis method in order to:

•	distinguish between trends in the time series data that result from changes in measurement procedures, and

•	differentiate between the different types of measured constituents to evaluate interferences that occur in specific measurement techniques.

The Analysis Method form also has a History button that can be clicked to view the history of the selected variables.

Pre-requisites

The Monitor and Action Type must exist.

Steps

Add a new Observation Method for Monitors:

This form will be displayed if the Action Type is "Observation". The Monitor's details will be displayed.

1.	In the Analysis Method field, enter an Analysis Method ID, or click on the Zoom button to open the Analysis Method Selection form, and select the required record.

2.	In the Variable Reference field, enter the Variable Reference. This code indicates how the analysed variable is identified at the specific laboratory.

3.	In the Analysis Method Reference field, enter the Analysis Method Reference This code indicates how the analysed variable is identified at the specific laboratory.  Note: If LIMS is active, you can also Zoom to open the Analysis Method Reference Selection form, and select the required record.

4.	Click on the Result Value Type field [image] Drop Down button and select the True Value or Detection Limit option and tab.

5.	Click on the Result Detection Limit Type field [image] Drop Down button and select the Fixed, Countstat, or Zero option if the Result Value Type is "True Value" and tab. If the Result Value Type field is "Detection Limit", the Fixed is the only option.

6.	Enter the Detection Limit Value and tab. Tip: If the Result Value Type field is "Detection Limit", then the Detection Limit Value must be greater than 1.

7.	Check the Greater Than Allowed indicator, if applicable. This indicator is set to true if the reported results is "Greater Than" a value.

8.	Enter the Valid Decimal number and tab.

9.	Enter the Relative Standard Deviation number and tab.

10.	Enter the Start Date and tab.

11.	Enter the End Date and tab. The default date for ongoing methods is 9999-12-31.

12.	Enter the Measuring Unit ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Valid Measuring Unit Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

13.	The Default Measuring Unit Indicator.

Set this indicator to "True" when the results template should be updated with the measuring unit specified. If the indicator is set to "False", the results template will NOT be updated with any measuring unit. The data capturer must select the measuring unit for every result entered.

For Electrical Conductivity (EC) measurements, the Default Measuring Unit Indicator is usually set to "False" because the instrument unit (measuring range) can vary with every value measured. (e.g.: mS/m*; mS/cm; or uS/cm).

The Default Measuring Unit must not be confused with the Standard Measuring Unit (mS/m* for EC) that is used for reporting released results. (The Standard Measuring Unit has a red asterix, *, in the unit look-up table – Valid Measuring Units for Monitoring Variable Selection).

14.	Enter the Multimedia ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Multimedia Selection form, and select a record.

 Note: Step 15 – 19 is for future implementation. At this stage these fields are not populated.

15.	Enter the Grading number. A grading , 0-9, indicates the effectiveness of the Laboratory to execute an Sample Analysis method.  The best grading = 0, the worst =9.

16.	Click on the Pay Indicator if the monitor is paid for observations, and tab.

17.	Enter the observation Cost if relevant.

18.	Enter the Contract number if relevant.

19.	Enter the contract Expiry Date, if relevant.

20.	Tab to accept the new record.

Edit an Observation Method for Monitors:

 When editing or deleting a Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have edited or deleted by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit or deletion, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to proceed. The Observation Method can only be edited if no children records are linked to an analysis method.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete an Analysis Method:

 Deletion will only be possible if the record is not  being used in another form.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Analysis Method Maintenance Filter Criteria

Analysis Method for Laboratory


Analysis Method Maintenance

Description

The Analysis Method Maintenance form is used to define or maintain analysis method information used to analyse samples and/or field readings. The form is also used to define properties for the analysis methods as used at laboratories or used by monitors.

It is important to identify the analysis method in order to:

•	distinguish between trends in the time series data that result from changes in measurement procedures, and

•	differentiate between the different types of measured constituents to evaluate interferences that occur in specific measurement techniques.

The Analysis Method form also has a History button that can be clicked to view the history of the selected variables.

Pre-requisites

The Monitoring Variable must exist.

Steps

Add a new Analysis Method to a Monitoring Variable:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	Enter the Analysis Method Description and tab.

3.	The Sample Indicator will be active if the Monitoring Variable Indicator is Sample or Both.

4.	The Observation Indicator will be active if the Monitoring Variable Method Indicator is "Observation" or "Both".

5.	Enter the Observation Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

6.	Check the Out of Use Indicator, if relevant.

7.	Click F10 to exit the form.

Edit an Analysis Method:

 When editing or deleting a Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have edited or deleted by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit or deletion, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to proceed. The Sample/Observation indicator can only be edited if no children records are linked to an analysis method.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Note: The Out of Use indicator can be checked to indicate that the specific analysis method combination is no longer in use. This is only relevant to Analysis Method for Laborartories.

4.	Edit the record as required.

5.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete an Analysis Method:

 Deletion will only be possible if the record is not  being used in another form. Analysis Method Laboratory Process records and Monitor Observation Method records cannot be deleted when the laboratory and analysis method combination is used in Released Results, Programme Detail or Non-Scheduled Samples forms. When editing or deleting a Change Cause message will appear on the screen, If you have edited or deleted by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit or deletion, click on the "Business Event" radio button,  and then press the continue button to proceed.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Maintenance

Analysis Method for Laboratories

Observation Method for Monitor


Analysis Method History

Description

The Analysis Method History form is used to view the history of an analysis method and its relationship with specific institutions such as a monitor or laboratory.

•	On the Analysis Method History form you can view of the analysis method history for a specific analysis method;

•	By clicking on the Laboratory Analysis Method History button, you can view the history of relationships between a laboratory and an analysis method; and

•	By clicking on the Monitor Observation Method History button, you can view the history of relationships between monitors and an observation method.

 Tip: To print information on the history of the analysis method, click on the Print button.

Steps

This is a display only form.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Maintenance

Analysis Method Maintenance


Sample Type, Container, Preservative Maintenance

Description

The Sample Type, Container, Preservative Maintenance form is used to maintain the detail regarding the valid container and preservatives to be used by a laboratory for a specific analysis method.

Pre-requisites

The laboratory, analysis method, and monitoring variable must exist.

Steps

Add a new Sample Type, Container, Preservative combination:

1.	Enter the Sample Type ID or Zoom from this field and select a sample type from the Sample Type Selection  form.

2.	Enter the Container ID or Zoom from this field and select a sample type from the Container Selection  form.

3.	Enter the Preservative ID or Zoom from this field and select a sample type from the Preservative Selection  form.

4.	Enter the Shelf Life of the sample indicating the lifespan of the preservative.

5.	Check the Lab Supply Container Indicator if relevant.

6.	Check the Out of Use Indicator if relevant.

7.	Click on the up/down arrow to accept the new record.

Edit a new Sample Type, Container, Preservative combination:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a new Sample Type, Container, Preservative combination:

 Deletion will only be possible if the record is not  being used in another form.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Analysis Method for Laboratory


Container Maintenance

Description

The Container Maintenance form is used to define and maintain container or sample holder information, used for physical samples.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Container:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the new Container Name and tab.

3.	Enter the Container Description.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit a Container:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Container:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Container record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

This form is centrally maintained.

Related System Topics

Analysis Method Maintenance

Edit Programme Samples

Defaults for Programme Sample Maintenance


Preservative Maintenance

Description

The Preservative Maintenance form is used to define and maintain preservative information, used for sample preservation. The Preservative is the substance or method used to extend the shelf life of a sample, so that when analysed the constituents measured are still a true representation of when the sample was taken.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Preservative:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the new Preservative Name and tab.

3.	Enter an Abbreviation for the preservative.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit a Preservative:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Preservative:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Preservative record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

This form is centrally maintained.

Related System Topics

Analysis Method Maintenance

Edit Programme Samples

Defaults for Programmes Sample Maintenance


Sample Type Maintenance

Description

The Sample Type Maintenance form is used to define and maintain sample types. This information is used to identify the type of sample to be taken, and is used during programme administration, sample scheduling, and tag printing process.

Pre-requisites

Action Type must exist.

Steps

Add a new Sample Type:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Sample Type Name and tab.

3.	Click on the Action Type field [image] Drop Down button and select Sample or Observation and tab.

4.	Click on the Data Type field [image] Drop Down button and select either LIMS, Manual or External and tab.

5.	Click on the Multiple/Single Type field [image] Drop Down button and select either Multiple or Single and tab.

6.	Enter the Tag ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Tags form, click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the information, and tab.

7.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit a Sample Type:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Sample Type:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Sample Type record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Action Type

Data Type

Tag Maintenance


Tag Maintenance

Description

The Tags Maintenance form is used to define the different tags that can be printed and attached to a physical sample by the monitor.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Tag:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Tag Description and tab.

3.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit a Tag record:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Tag:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Tag record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

No Tags can be printed for Observation Type Samples. This form is centrally maintained by Sample Reception at the Institute for Water Quality Studies.

Related System Topics

Sample Type Maintenance


Defaults for Programme Sample Maintenance

Description

The Defaults for Programme Samples form is used to define and maintain the default for programme samples. For each Monitor/Monitoring Variable combination, the Default Sample Type, Laboratory, Container, Preservative and Analysis Method is created. This data is used to "Write Detail" for a monitoring programme after a "Design" has been compiled, and assists the programme administrator by accelerating the setting up of operational information for monitoring programmes.

Pre-requisites

•	The Sample Type, Container and Preservative must exist for a Laboratory in the Analysis Method form for all the Monitoring Variables of a sample type.

•	The Default Transport and Packaging from a Monitor to Laboratory must exist.

Steps

Add new Defaults for Programme Samples:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	In the Laboratory field, click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup Mon- Lab- Sample Type form. Click on the required combination record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

3.	Tab to the Preservative ID field. Click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup Laboratory-Sample Type form. Click on the required container-preservative combination record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record.

4.	Click on the Populate Variable button to write all the Monitoring Variables and their analysis methods for the Monitor, Sample Type, Laboratory, Container, and Preservative combination.

It is unnecessary to accept the new record.

Edit Defaults for Programme Samples:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete Defaults for Programme Samples:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Defaults for Programme record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

A Monitoring Variable that is linked to a Monitor can only be linked once to a Sample Type.

Related System Topics

Preservative Maintenance

Container Maintenance


Variables per Variable Type and Variable Class Filter Criteria

Description

The Variables per Variable Type and Variable Class Filter Criteria form allows you to view monitoring variables according to the Variable Type or Class, or any valid combination of Variable Type and Class.

Pre-requisites

The required monitoring variable type and class must be linked on the monitoring variable form.

Steps

1.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Lookup Monitoring Variable Type form. Click on the required Variable record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

2.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Class ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Lookup Monitoring Variable Class form. Click on the required Variable record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

3.	Click on the Query Variables button to view the information.

 If no query criterion are entered, the first derived variable record will be displayed.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Type Maintenance

Monitoring Variable Class Maintenance

Monitoring Variable Maintenance


Variables per Variable Type and Variable Class View

Description

The Variables per Variable Type and Variable Class View form allows you to view monitoring variables according to the Variable Type or Class, or any valid combination of Variable Type and Class.

Steps

This is a display-only form, and you will need to enter filter criteria on the Variables per Variable Type and Class Filter Criteria form.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Type Maintenance

Monitoring Variable Class Maintenance

Monitoring Variable Maintenance


Variables per Variable Group Filter Criteria

Description

The Variables per Variable Group Filter Criteria form is used to view the monitoring variables included in a variable group.

Pre-requisites

The required Variable Group must be linked to each variable in the Monitoring Variable form.

Steps

1.	Enter the Variable Group ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Lookup Variable form. Click on the required Variable record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

2.	Click on the Query Variables button to view the information.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Maintenance


Variables per Variable Group View

Description

The Variables per Variable Group View form is used to view the monitoring variables included in a variable group.

Steps

This is a display-only form, and you will need to enter filter criteria on the Variables per Variable Group Filter Criteria form.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Maintenance


Variables contained in Derived Variable Filter Criteria

Description

The Variables contained in Derived Variable Filter Criteria form is used to view the monitoring variables that are used to calculate a derived variable.

Pre-requisites

The required Derived Variable must be linked in the monitoring variable form.

Steps

1.	Enter the Derived Variable ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Lookup Derived Variable form. Click on the required Variable record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

2.	Click on the Query Variables button to view the information.

 Tip: If no query criteria are entered, the first derived variable record will be displayed.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Maintenance


Variables Contained in Derived Variables View

Description

The Variables Contained in Derived Variables View form is used to view the monitoring variables that are used to calculate a derived variable.

Steps

This is a display-only form, and you will need to enter filter criteria on the Variables Contained in Derived Variables Filter Criteria form.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Maintenance


Container and Preservative for Laboratory Analysis Filter Criteria

Description

The Container and Preservative for Laboratory Analysis Filter Criteria form is used to view Containers and Preservatives in relation to the recorded Monitoring Variable, Analysis Method, Laboratory and Sample Type.

Pre-requisites

The required Container and Preservative for laboratory analysis must be linked on the analysis method form.

Steps

 Tip: If no fields are entered in the query form, the display will show all active Laboratory, Sample Type, Preservative and Analysis Method combinations. By entering one or more fields, the display will be filtered to that of the selected combination.

1.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Lookup Monitoring Variable form. Click on the required Variable record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

2.	Enter the Analysis Method ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Lookup Analysis Method form. Click on the required Variable record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record

3.	Enter the Laboratory ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Lookup Laboratory form. Click on the required Variable record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record

4.	Enter the Sample Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Lookup Sample Type form. Click on the required Variable record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record

5.	Enter the Preservative ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Lookup Preservative form. Click on the required Variable record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record

6.	Enter the Container ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Lookup Container form. Click on the required Variable record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record

7.	Click on the Query button to activate the display.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Maintenance

Analysis Method Maintenance

Sample Type Maintenance

Preservative Maintenance

Container Maintenance


Container and Preservative for Laboratory Analysis View

Description

The Container and Preservative for Laboratory Analysis View form is used to view Containers and Preservatives in relation to the recorded Monitoring Variable, Analysis Method, Laboratory and Sample Type.

Steps

This is a display-only form, and you will need to enter filter criteria on the Container and Preservative for Laboratory Analysis Filter Criteria form.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Maintenance

Analysis Method Maintenance

Sample Type Maintenance

Preservative Maintenance

Container Maintenance


Anion Cation Indicator Report

Description

The Anion/Cation indicator report allows you to print a list of Monitoring Variables and Anion/Cation indicator allocated to each monitoring variable.

Pre-requisites

The Monitoring Variable record must exist.

Steps

1.	This is an automatic report writer, a confirmation message will be displayed, asking whether you would like to start the execution of the report. Click on the Yes option.  A report will be printed containing all Monitoring Variable ID's, Abbreviation and the Anion/Cation choice.

Important

The report can be redirected to a file.


Monitor Overview

Description

The Monitor module is used to define the elements required for the monitoring process including ways in which samples will be packed and transported.

Scope

The Monitor module deals with the following sub modules:

•	Packaging Method

•	Transport Method

•	Default Transport and Packaging from Monitor to Laboratory

Related System Topics

Packaging Method Maintenance

Transport Method Maintenance

Defaults for Programme Sample Maintenance


Packaging Method Maintenance

Description

The Packaging Method Maintenance form is used to define all the packaging methods used for transportation of physical samples to a laboratory.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Packaging Method:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	In the Description field, enter a description for the packaging method and tab to accept the new record.

The Packaging Method ID will be automatically generated by the system.

Edit a Packaging Method:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Packaging Method:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Packaging Method record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

Related System Topics

Transport Method Maintenance

Defaults for Programme Sample Maintenance


Transport Method Maintenance

Description

The Transport Method Maintenance form is used to define all the transport methods used to deliver physical samples to a laboratory.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Transport Method:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	In the Description field, enter a description for the transport method and tab to accept the new record.

The Transport Method ID will be automatically generated by the system.

Edit a new Transport Method:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a new Transport Method:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Transport Method record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

Related System Topics

Packaging Method Maintenance

Defaults for Programme Sample Maintenance


Transport and Packaging from Monitor to Laboratory Maintenance

Description

The Transport and Packaging from Monitor to Laboratory Maintenance form is used to specify the sample packaging and transport method from a monitor to a laboratory for each sample type. It also specifies the expected time for the delivery of the sample and makes provision for the entering transportation costs. The Default is created to speed up the programme administration process and registering non-programme sample process.

Pre-requisites

•	The Monitor must exist.

•	The Laboratory must exist.

•	The Sample Type must be registered.

•	The Packaging Method must exist.

•	The Transport Method must exist.

Steps

Add a new Transport and Packaging from Monitor to Laboratory:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Monitor ID number or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Lookup Monitor form. Click on the required monitor record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

3.	Tab to the Laboratory ID field and enter a Laboratory ID number or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Lookup Laboratory form. Click on the required laboratory record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

4.	Tab to the Sample Type ID field and enter a Sample Type ID number or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Sample Type form. Click on the required sample type record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

5.	Tab to the Hours or Days field and enter the expected number of hours or days that it will take for a sample to reach the laboratory after sampling has been done.

6.	Tab to the Tariff field and enter the sample transportation cost, if required.

7.	Tab to the Transport Method field and enter a Transport Method ID number or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Transport Method form. Click on the required record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

8.	Tab to the Packaging Method field and enter a Packaging Method ID number or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Packaging Method form. Click on the required record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

9.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Modify a Transport and Packaging from Monitor to Laboratory:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Transport and Packaging from Monitor to Laboratory:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Transport Method record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

Important

The Transport and Packaging from Monitor to Laboratory must be complete and accurate to speed up the setting up of operational requirements for monitoring programmes.

Related System Topics

Packaging Method Maintenance

Transport Method Maintenance

person or organisation

Register Non Programme Samples

Edit Programme Samples

Edit Programme Details


Monitoring Point Overview

Description

When the link between the WMS Resource Management module is complete this Monitoring Point module will assist in defining monitoring points and associated information necessary for the monitoring process.

Scope

The Monitoring Management sub-system deals with the following main modules:

•	Monitoring Point in Group Maintenance

•	Monitoring Point in Monitoring Point Group Maintenance

Related System Topics

Monitoring Point Group Maintenance

Monitoring Point in Monitoring Point Group Maintenance


Monitoring Point Group Maintenance

Description

The Monitoring Point in Group Maintenance form is used to create a monitoring points group containing monitoring points that will be frequently used for different monitoring action/ frequency combinations in the design of a monitoring programme.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Monitoring Point in Group:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	In the Name field, enter a name for the monitoring point group and tab.

3.	In the Description field, enter a description for the monitoring point group and tab to accept the new record.

4.	The Monitoring Point Group ID will be automatically generated by the system.

Edit a Monitoring Point Group:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Monitoring Point Group:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Monitoring Point Group record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

Important

A group must only be created if the same combination of monitoring points will be frequently used in the design of (a) monitoring programme(s).

Related System Topics

Monitoring Point Overview

Register Programme Design


Monitoring Point in  Monitoring Point Group Maintenance

 Description

The Monitoring Point in Monitoring Point Group Maintenance form is used to link a Monitoring Point to a Monitoring Point Group. The Grouped Monitoring Point is used to assist you in defining monitoring points for a monitoring programme when the same group of points need to be entered more than once.

Pre-requisites

•	The Monitoring Points must be registered.

•	The Monitoring Point Group must exist.

Steps

Add a new Monitoring Point in Group:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	In the Monitoring Point field, enter the Monitoring Point ID number or click on the Zoom button, to open the Monitoring Point form. Click on the required record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

3.	In the Group field, enter the Monitoring Point Group ID number or click on the Zoom button, to open the Monitoring Point Group form. Click on the required record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

4.	Tab to accept the new record.

This process can be repeated to add more monitoring points to a group.

Edit a Monitoring Point in Group:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Monitoring Point in Group:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Monitoring Point Group record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

 Tip: Range on a group to view all the points in the group.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Point Overview

Register Programme Design


Monitoring Action and Frequency Overview

Description

The Monitoring Action and Frequency module is used to define the elements required for the monitoring process including ways in which monitoring is executed and time schedules.

Scope

The Monitoring Action and Frequency module deals with the following sub modules:

•	Ecological Compartment

•	Monitoring Action

•	Equipment

•	Frequency

•	Frequency Specification

Related System Topics

Ecological Compartment Maintenance

Monitoring Action Maintenance

Monitoring Equipment Maintenance

Frequency Maintenance

Frequency Specification Maintenance


Monitoring Action Maintenance Filter Criteria

Description

The Monitoring Action Maintenance Filter Criteria form is used to enter filter criteria in order to view information on a specific monitoring action.

Steps

1.	Enter the Monitoring Action ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Monitoring Action Selection form. Click on the required monitoring action record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

2.	The Monitoring Action Name will be automatically displayed

3.	Enter the Sample Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Sample Type Selection form. Click on the required monitoring action record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

4.	The Sample Type Name will be automatically

5.	Enter the Multimedia ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Multimedia Selection form. Click on the required monitoring action record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

6.	The Multimedia Content Description will be automatically displayed

7.	Enter the Monitoring Action Rule ID or click on the [image] Zoom button, to open the Monitoring Action Rule Selection form. Click on the required monitoring action record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record.

8.	The Monitoring Action Rule will be automatically displayed

9.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Action Maintenance form. If no search criterion is entered, and the Monitoring Action button is clicked, all monitoring actions will be displayed.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Action Maintenance

Monitoring Action Selection

Sample Type Selection

Multimedia Selection

Monitoring Action Rule Selection


Monitoring Action Maintenance

Description

The Monitoring Action Maintenance form is used to define a list of monitoring actions to be executed, as well as the instruction to obtain the sample, equipment and monitor that can be used for monitoring.

Pre-requisites

•	The Ecological Compartment must be registered.

•	The Equipment must be registered.

•	The Sample Type must be registered.

•	The Monitor must be registered.

Steps

Add a new Monitoring Action:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	In the Monitoring Action field, enter the Monitoring Action Name and tab.

3.	In the Instruction field, enter the Instructions that indicate how the monitoring action should be carried out, and tab.

4.	In the Monitoring Action Rule field, press F5 or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Rule Selection form and [image] Select the Monitoring Action Rule with the required information.   NB: In the Monitoring Action Rule Selection form, the user will be required to fill in the indicators to verify the monitoring action rule selected. The user must select the Monitoring Action Rule, then select the relevant values (e.g. Start Depth, End Depth, Start Date Time, End Date Time, Depth Interval, Combined Depth, Time Interval or Combined Depth fields) that correspond to the chosen rule. The user may only continue with the addition of the Monitoring Action after the successful verification of the rule.

5.	In the LIMS Code field, enter the LIMS Code and tab. This is the code used by departmental laboratory information system.

6.	In the Multimedia ID field, enter the document's Multimedia ID that defines the monitoring action (if the document is registered) or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Multimedia Selection form and [image] Select the required record.

7.	Tab to accept the new record. The Monitoring Action ID will be automatically created. You can click Exit button to close the form or continue with steps below.

 TIP: Above steps shows the minimum information required to register a Monitoring Action, however to be able to successfully specify the monitoring action in the monitoring programme, you will need to register Monitoring Action Specifications, Equipment, and Monitor information, by clicking the Next button.

8.	When the Next button is clicked, the Monitoring Action Specification Maintenance form will be opened.

Add a Monitoring Action Specification to a Monitoring Action record:

In the Monitoring Action Specification form you can enter instructions for a specific Monitoring Action that will appear on the Monitoring Schedule Report.  NB: The monitoring Action Specification is used in monitoring programmes and schedules and must be unique.

9.	Click on the [image] Create Records button (If the form is not already in create mode).

10.	Enter a Monitoring Action Specification Name in the field, and tab. This name must be unique.

11.	If required, enter the necessary information into Start Depth, End Depth, Depth Interval, Start Time, End Time and Time Interval fields.

12.	To accept the newly created record, press the Tab key until the Monitoring Specification ID is created

13.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Action Equipment Maintenance form.

Add Equipment to a Monitoring Action record:

In the Equipment form you can specify the equipment required for the specific monitoring action, and list the sample types that will be obtained.

14.	Click on the [image] Create Records button (If the form is not already in create mode).

15.	Enter an Equipment ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Equipment Selection form. Click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return the information, and tab.

16.	Enter a Sample Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form. Click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return the information.

17.	Press the Tab key to accept the newly created recprd

18.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Action Monitor Maintenance form.

Add a Monitor to a Monitoring Action record:

In the Monitor form you can specify monitors that are qualified and equipped to perform the specific monitoring action.

19.	Click on the [image] Create Records button (If the form is not already in create mode).

20.	Enter a Monitor ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form. Click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return the information, and tab.

21.	Enter a Cost per monitoring action, if required, and tab.

22.	Click on the Pay Indicator to indicate if the monitor is paid for the action, and tab.

23.	Enter a Contract Number if required, and tab

24.	Enter an Expiry Date if required.

25.	Tab to accept the new record.

 Edit a Monitoring Action:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row to accept the record.

Delete a Monitoring Action:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Monitoring Action record to be deleted, to highlight it. The form must be in Modify mode.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Action and Frequency Overview

Monitoring Action Specification Maintenance

Monitoring Action Equipment Maintenance

Monitoring Action Monitor Maintenance

Monitoring Action Rule Selection

Multimedia Selection

Monitoring Equipment Selection

Sample Type Selection

Monitor Selection


Monitoring Action Specification View

Description

The Monitoring Action Specification View form is used to view a list of monitoring actions to be executed, as well as the instruction to obtain the sample, equipment and monitor that can be used for monitoring.

Steps

This is a display-only form.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Action Maintenance


Monitoring Equipment Maintenance

Description

The Monitoring Equipment Maintenance form is used to define kinds of equipment used for monitoring.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Monitoring Equipment record:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	In the Description field, enter the name or description of the equipment and tab to accept the new record.

The Equipment ID will be automatically generated by the system.

Edit an Monitoring Equipment record:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete an Monitoring Equipment record:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Equipment record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Action and Frequency Overview


Frequency Maintenance

Description

The Frequency Maintenance form is used to define frequencies in terms of the lapse in time between periodic event monitoring.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Frequency record:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	In the Hours per Unit field, enter the frequency time and tab.  Note: The minimum hours required for the hours per unit is 24 hours and this field must be multiples of 24. e.g. 24, 48, 72 etc.

3.	In the Description field, enter a description of the frequency and tab to accept the new record. The Frequency ID will be automatically generated by the system

4.	Tab to accept the newly created record

Edit a Frequency record:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Frequency record:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Equipment record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

Important

To simplify the scheduling of monitoring all months were scheduled with 4 weeks and a year with 48 weeks.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Action and Frequency Overview


Frequency Specification Maintenance

Description

The Frequency Specification Maintenance form contains a list of instructions regarding the frequency in which monitoring should be performed.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Frequency Specification:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

 The Frequency Specification ID will be automatically generated and displayed by the system

2.	Enter the Frequency Specification Name and tab.

3.	In the Frequency Specification Type field, click on the [image] Drop Down button to select either Variable or Period to indicate a variable recurrence frequency or a fixed period frequency. Tab.

Periodic Frequency Specification Maintenance:

4.	An ID field will open on the right hand side of the form. Enter the Frequency ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Frequency form. Click on the required frequency record, and press the [image] Select button to return the record. Tab

Variable Frequency Specification Maintenance:

5.	Enter Full Variable Frequency Instruction

6.	Tab to accept the new record.

Edit a Frequency Specification:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Frequency Specification:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form. Deletion of the Period Frequency Specification or the Variable Frequency Specification will only be possible when the parent record (frequency specification) is not used in the Programme Detail or Consolidation Action forms.

1.	Click on the Frequency Specification record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Action and Frequency Overview


Calculation Method Overview

Description

The Calculation Method module is used to define calculation methods used for the calculation of Group Quality Control, Derived Variables, and Environmental Characteristics, and is also used to define problems experienced during the execution of calculations.

Scope

The Calculation Method module deals with the following sub modules:

•	Calculation Method Types

•	Documents

•	Calculation Method

•	Calculation Problems

Related System Topics

Calculation Method Maintenance

Calculation Problems Maintenance


Calculation Method Type View

Description

The Calculation Method Type View form is used to view calculation method types. These types are used for the calculation of Group Quality Control, Derived Variables, and Environmental Characteristics.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Click on the required Calculation Method type record to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Select button

Related System Topics

Calculation Method Overview

Calculation Method Maintenance


Calculation Method Maintenance

Description

The Calculation Method Maintenance form is used to define calculation methods for the following calculation method types:

•	Derived Variables - obtain their value through the calculation of more than one variable's results.

•	Group Quality Control - obtain their value through the calculation of a group of variable's results, and then used in the quality control of a sample.

•	Environmental Characteristics - obtain their value through the calculation of more than one environmental characteristic's results.

Pre-requisites

The Calculation Method Types must already exist in class types.

Steps

Add a Calculation Method:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

The Calculation Method ID will be automatically generated by the system.

2.	In the Calculation Method Description field, enter the description and tab.

3.	In the Process Name field, enter the name of the process and tab.

4.	In the Calculation Method Types field, either enter the ID number, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Calculation Method Type form. Click on the required record, and press the [image] Select button to return the information and tab.

5.	In the Document field, either enter the Multimedia Document ID number, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Multimedia Lookup form. Click on the required record, and press the [image] Select button to return the information.

Edit a Calculation Method:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Calculation Method:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Equipment record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Calculation Method Overview


Calculation Problems Maintenance

Description

The Calculation Problems Maintenance form is used to define problems experienced during the execution of the calculation.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a Calculation Problem:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	The Calculation Problem ID will be automatically generated by the system.

3.	In the Calculation Problem Description field, enter the description and tab.

4.	In the Calculation Problem Type field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select either Base Value, Monitoring Variable or Programme option and tab.

5.	In the Solution field, either the solution for the calculation problem.

6.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit a Calculation Problem:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Calculation Problem:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button. A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Calculation Method Overview

Calculation Method Maintenance


Records in Tables Count

Description

The Records in Tables Count form is used to view the number of records contained in the specific database tables.

Pre-requisites

Changes must have been made in Peripheral Information for records to be displayed.

Important

This is a view only table, and changes cannot be made.


Parameter Class List Maintenance

Description

The Parameter Class List Maintenance form is used to select valid class structures to be used when specifying parameters for multiple monitoring variables. Multiple variables have many parameters linked to them, and therefore many results can also be expected. An example of a multiple monitoring variable is algae identification that contains a parameter list of algae genera.

Pre-requisites

The relevant Class Structure must exist in the Class Structure form in Water Resource Management.

Steps

Add a Parameter Class:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	In the Parameter Class ID field, click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Class Structure Select form. Click on the required record to highlight it, and click on the [image] Select button to return the information.

3.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Delete a Parameter Class:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button. A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Class Structure Level Maintenance

Monitoring Variable Maintenance


Parameters Class Type Selection

Description

The Parameters Class Type Selection form is used to search for and select a parameter class type.

Steps

1.	Click on the required Parameter Class Type record to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Unclassified Parameters Selection

Description

The Unclassified Parameters Selection form is used to search for and select items that do not belong in a formal classification structure. These unclassified parameters are used to define parameters for a multiple monitoring variable.

Steps

1.	Click on the required Unclassified Parameter record to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Unclassified Parameter Maintenance

Description

The Unclassified Parameter Maintenance form is used to define items that do not belong in a formal classification structure. These unclassified parameters are used to define parameters for a multiple monitoring variable.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add an Unclassified Parameter:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	The cursor will automatically move to the Unclassified Parameter Abbreviation field, enter an abbreviation and tab.

3.	In the Unclassified Parameter Name field, enter a name, and tab.

4.	In the Description field, enter a description.

5.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit An Unclassified Parameter:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete an Unclassified Parameter:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button. A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Maintenance


Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Maintenance

Description

The Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Maintenance form is used to define all parameters for a specific multiple monitoring variable.

Pre-requisites

•	The relevant Class Types must exist in the Class Types form.

•	The relevant Monitoring Variables must exist in the Monitoring Variable Maintenance form.

•	The relevant Unclassified Parameters must exist in the Unclassified Parameter Maintenance form.

•	The Classified Parameters must exist in the Class Types form, and be linked in the Multiple Monitoring Variables Parameters form.

Steps

Add a Parameter:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	The cursor will automatically move to the Parameter Type field, click on the [image] drop down button and select either a classified or unclassified option, and tab.

3.	If you have selected a Classified Parameter, in the Parameter Type ID field, enter an ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to select the required record in the Select Classified Parameters form, and tab.

4.	If you have selected an Unclassified Parameter, in the Parameter Type ID field, enter an ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to select the required record in the Lookup Unclassified Parameters form, and tab.

5.	The Abbreviation and Name fields will automatically be displayed.

6.	In the Most Found field, click on the [image] drop down button and select either Yes or No option.

7.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit a Parameter:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Parameter:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button. A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Unclassified Parameter Maintenance

Parameter Class List Maintenance


Select Classified Parameters

Description

The Select Classified Parameters form is used to select one or more multiple monitoring variable parameters.

Pre-requisites

The relevant Class Types must exist.

Steps

Select Classified Parameters:

All records for the Class specified in the Monitoring Variables form will automatically appear in the list, however to refine your search you can click on the Level and/or Parent drop down buttons, select the required options, and click on the Range button.

1.	Select the required Parameter type record(s) in the left grid of the form, by scrolling through the list. Remember that only the blue (unselected) records can be selected.

2.	Press the [image] Promote button to add the parameter type to the request list.

3.	To remove class types from the request list, press the [image] Demote button.

4.	Once you have promoted all the required type records to the request list, click on the right grid of the form in the request list,  and press the click on the OK button to return the selected parameter types to the previous form.

Related System Topics

Parameter Class List Maintenance


Lookup Unclassified Parameters

Description

The Lookup Unclassified Parameters form is used to select unclassified parameters that are used to define parameters for a multiple monitoring variable.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return the selected information to the previous form.

Related System Topics

Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Maintenance


Monitoring Point Monitoring Information Filter Criteria

Description

The Monitoring Point Monitoring Information Filter Criteria form is used to select monitoring programme related filter criteria as used in monitoring programmes to view monitoring point information.

Steps

You can only select ONE of the selection criteria below to view monitoring point information.

1.	To enter consolidated Date Ranges, click on the Last Consolidated Date checkbox, and enter a Last Consolidated Date From and Last Consolidated Date To.

2.	Click on the required Point Views radio button Note: The required option's radio button must be checked, as certain filter criteria options only become active and available for selection once the specific points view radio button has been checked.

3.	Enter a Monitor ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup Monitor form and select a record.

4.	Enter a Laboratory ID,  or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup Laboratory form and select a record.

5.	Enter a Sample Type ID,  or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup Sample Type form and select a record.

6.	Click on the required Point Views radio button.

7.	Once the selection criteria has been specified, click on the View Points button.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Point Group Maintenance

Monitoring Point in Monitoring Point Group Maintenance


Organisational Login

Description

The Organisational Login form is used to select an organisation (organisation) and enter a pin code for the selected organisation in order to obtain access to the Water Management System. This access will only permit you to work on the records for the organisation that you logged in as.

 TIP:

The central access control officer is responsible for granting all organisational access to the Water Management System. If you cannot log into the system, kindly contact your Central Access Control Officer or your System Administrator.

Steps

1.	After the normal Magic/Delphi application login, this Organisational Login form will appear.

2.	Enter the Organisational ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form and select the required organisation and tab.

3.	Enter the Pin Code in the field.

4.	Click on the Login button to log onto the WMS Monitoring Management System.

Related System Topics

 Organisational Access setup


Organisational Access setup

Description

The Organisational Access setup form is used to create organisations (organisation) records, pin codes and access control periods in order to implement monitoring management access control.

 TIP:

From the menu, this form is only accessible to the Central and Local Access control officers. The Local Administrator can edit the pin codes, while the Central Administrator will control an organisation's access by registration, or terminating access by editing the Begin and End Dates.

After changes have been made the Administrator will then inform all specific organisational users of the changes.

Steps

Add a new Organisational Access setup:

 Note: Only central access control officers can add new records.

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Enter the Organisational ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup organisation form and select the required organisation. Tab.

3.	A Pin Code is automatically provided.

4.	If the organisation is external to the Department of Water Affairs, click in the External indicator.

5.	Enter the required access Begin Date and End Date.

6.	Press F10 to accept the changes.

7.	The Local Access Control Administrator of the created organisation should be provided with the new pincode.

Edit Organisational Access Setup:

1.	Click on the record to be edited, and click on the Edit button.

2.	Edit the organisation's pin code, organisation's internal/external status, and/or end date as required.   Note: Only the local administrator can edit the pin code, while the central access control officers can edit the status and dates.

3.	If you have logged on as a local administrator, the New Pin Code button will be available for editing at the bottom of the form. Click on the New Pin Code button to allocate a new Pin Code for your organisation.

4.	Press F10 to accept the changes.

Related System Topics

 Organisational Login


Accreditation Maintenance

Description

The Accreditation Maintenance form is used to maintain all accreditation information needed for WMS analysis and survey methods. The Accreditation Maintenance form contains three sub-forms:

•	Accredited Method sub-form - used to view and maintain accredited methods.

•	Accredited WMS Method sub-form - used to view and maintain the WMS analysis methods and survey methods that are linked to an accredited method.

•	Accreditation Status sub-form - used to view and maintain the accreditation periods of an accredited WMS analysis method and survey methods. The Accreditation Status can be either active or suspended; when the status is active all results with analysis dates within this period can be allocated an "accredited" status, however when the status is suspended, no results can be allocated a status of accredited.

Steps

Accreditation Maintenance sub-form:

 TIP:

External users will only be allowed to query, edit and delete records belonging to their own organisation.

Internal (DWAF) users will only be allowed to edit and delete their own organisation's records, however they will be able to query on and view records belonging to all organisations.

Add a new Accredited Method:

 Note: You can only add a new accreditation method to your own organisation.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button. An Accredited Method sub-form displays in Create mode.

2.	The Accredited Organisation fields will be populated with the organisation the user selected at logon and may not change.

3.	Enter the new Accredited Method Code, and tab

4.	Enter the new Accredited Method Description, and tab.

5.	Enter a valid Accreditation Body ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form and select the required organisation from a list of all active organisations.

6.	The Accredited Body Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Accredited Body ID.

7.	Tab to accept the new record.

Edit an Accreditation Method:

1.	Click on the record to be edited, and click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Edit the accredited method as required.  Note: Only the Accreditation body and the Accreditation Method Description may be changed.

3.	Tab to accept the record changes, a Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have edited a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete an Accreditation Method:

Deletion will only be possible if no Accredited WMS Method is linked to the Accreditation Method, therefore all status records for all the Accredited WMS Methods belonging to the Accredited Method you want to delete need to be deleted first. You will only be allowed to delete records belonging to your own organisation.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it, and click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button. A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

3.	A Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have deleted a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid deletion, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept deletion of the record.

Accredited WMS Method sub-form:

Add a new Accredited WMS Method:

 Note: You can only add a new Accredited WMS Method to your own organisation.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button to add a new accredited WMS Method to the focussed Accredited Method. An Accredited WMS Method sub-form displays in Create mode.

2.	Click on the Action Type [image] Drop Down button, and select Sample, Observation or Survey.

3.	If Action Type selected is Sample or Observation then:

•	Enter the Analysis Method ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analysis Method Selection form and select the required analysis method.

•	The Analysis Method Description, Monitoring Variable ID & Monitoring Variable Abbreviation for the selected Analysis Method will be displayed.

4.	If Action Type is Survey then:

•	Enter the Survey Method ID to be linked to an organisation’s accredited method or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Survey Method Selection form and select the required method.

•	The Survey Method Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Survey Method ID.

•	Enter the Person ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open either Employee Selection form or the Member Selection form depending on the Organisation type.

•	The Surname, First Names & Initials of the person who is accredited in the accredited organisation will be automatically displayed.

5.	Enter the Accredited Expiry Date.  Note: No Accreditation status can be defined for periods later than this date and this date may not be later than the end date of the WMS Analysis Method or Survey Method for the specific laboratory or monitor.

6.	Tab to accept the new record.

7.	The new Accredited WMS Method ID will be automatically updated/created by the system.

Edit an Accredited WMS Method:

 Note: Accredited Expiry Date is the only field that may be modified. You may only modify the record of your own organisation.

1.	Click on the record to be edited, and click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Edit the Accredited Expiry Date field, as this is the only field that may be updated.  Note: If modifying the Expiry date has an effect on the accredited results, a message will be displayed. If you still want the record to be modified, click on the ‘OK’ button to modify the record and update the affected results. Else click on the "Cancel" button to cancel the modification of the record.

3.	Tab to accept the record changes, a Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have edited a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete an Accredited WMS Method:

Deletion will only be possible if no Accredited WMS Method is linked to the Accreditation Method, therefore all status records for all the Accredited WMS Methods belonging to the Accredited Method you want to delete need to be deleted first. You will only be allowed to delete records belonging to your own organisation.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it, and click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button. A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

3.	A Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have deleted a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid deletion, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept deletion of the record.

Accredited Status sub-form:

 TIP:

External users will only be allowed to query, edit and delete records belonging to their own organisation.

Internal (DWAF) users will only be allowed to edit and delete their own organisation’s records, however they will be able to query on and view records belonging to all organisations.

Steps

Add Accredited Status:

 Note: You can only add your own organisations records. You can only add two types of accreditation status records, a new record with a different status to the last status record created, and with a later period begin date. A new record with a different status to the last status record created, and with an earlier period begin date.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button to add accredited status to the focussed Accredited WMS Method. An Accredited Status sub-form displays in Create mode.

2.	Enter the new Period Begin Date, and tab. The begin date of the new record must be earlier than the Accredited expiry date.

3.	The Period End Date will be automatically displayed.

4.	Click on the Period Status [image] Drop Down button, and select Active or Suspended status.

5.	Tab to accept the new status.

Edit Accredited Status:

 Note: Only one status record may be modified at a time.

1.	Click on the record to be edited, and click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Edit the Period Begin Date field.   Note: If the modification of the Period Begin Date has an effect on accredited results, a warning message will be displayed. Click on the OK button to approve the change or Cancel the modification

3.	Tab to accept the record changes, a Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have edited a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete Accredited Status:

Deletion will only be possible if no Accredited WMS Method is linked to the Accreditation Status.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it, and click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.  Note: If the delete action will affect the accredited results, a warning message will be displayed. Click on the OK button to delete the record and updates will be made to the affected results, else Cancel the deletion.

3.	A Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have deleted a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid deletion, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept deletion of the record.

Related System Topics

Accreditation Registration Filter Criteria

Organisation Selection

Analysis Method Selection

Survey Method Selection

Member Selection

Employee Selection


Accredited Method Filter Criteria

Description

The Accredited Method Filter Criteria form is used to filter accreditation information for maintenance or history viewing purposes.

Steps

Filter Accreditation Information:

 Note: The Accredited Organisation ID & Accredited Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated with the organization the user selected at logon but the user may change it.

1.	Enter the Accredited Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form and select the required organisation if the organisation is an internal organisation.

2.	The Accredited Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Accredited Organisation ID.

3.	Enter the Accredited Method Code or click on the Zoom button to open the Accreditation Method Selection form and select the required method.

4.	The Accredited Method Description for the accredited method code will be automatically displayed.

5.	Enter the Accredited Body ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form and select the required method.

6.	The Accredited Body Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Accredited Body ID.

7.	You now have three options:

•	Click on the Accreditation button to open the Accreditation Maintenance form with accreditation information displayed as specified in the filter criteria;

•	Click on the History button to open the Accreditation History form to view the history;

•	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics

Accreditation Maintenance

Analyst Selection

Accreditation Method Selection

Organisation Selection


Related Derived Variable Maintenance

Description

The Related Derived Variable Maintenance form is used to define and maintain related variables. Derived variables (calculated variables) are associated with their equivalent measured fundamental variables.

Pre-requisites

The derived variable and fundamental variable must exist.

Steps

Add a new Related Derived Variable:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter a Derived Variable ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Derived  Monitoring Variable Selection form, and click on the required Derived Variable record then click on the [image] Select button.   Tips:You cannot relate variables in the following instances: when a derived variable has already been related to another fundamental variable, when a variable has been used in the calculation of a derived variable, and Non-Standard Variables cannot be related to fundamental variables.

3.	Enter a Related Variable ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Fundamental Variables Selection form, and click on the required Fundamental Variable record then click on the [image] Select button.

4.	In the Related Reson field, enter a reason for the relationship between the two variables.

5.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit a Related Derived Variable record:

A relationship between two variables cannot be edited, you will need to delete the relationship, and then recreate the new relationship.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Edit the record (only the Related Reason field can be edited).

3.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Related Derived Variable:

1.	Click on the Related Variable record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

This form is centrally maintained.

Related System Topics


Analyst Selection

Description

The Analyst Selection form will be used to select an Analyst, Monitor or Laboratory.

Depending on your action type (sample or observation), either the Laboratory Selection form (action type = sample) or Monitor Selection (action type = observation) will open.

When no action type is selected the Analyst Selection form which will display a combination of Laboratories and Monitors will open.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button to return the selected record information to the previous form.

Related System Topics

Transport And Packaging From Monitor To Laboratory Maintenance

Edit Programme Samples

Edit Programme Analysis

Register Programme Sample

Sample Administration

Result Administration

Sample Problem Reports

Analysis Problem Reports

Process Time Analysis Report

Sampling Audit Report

Monitoring Schedule Report

Observation Analysis Schedule  Report

Laboratory Analysis Schedule  Report

View Monitoring Point Monitoring Information

View Container And Preservative For Laboratory Analysis

View Non-Programme Sample

Analyst Method Maintenance

Sample Problem Reports

Export Monitoring Variable per Laboratory

Export Monitoring Variable per Monitor


Analysis Method Reference Filter Criteria

Description:

The Analysis Method Reference Filter Criteria Wizard form is used to filter out reference analysis methods as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the System Datasource Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Source Providing Data Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Source Providing Data ID.

3.	Enter the Analysis Method ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Analysis Method Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Analysis Method Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Analysis Method ID.

5.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Organisation Abbreviation and the Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

7.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Change User Organisation ID.

9.	Click on the Next button to open the Analysis Method Reference Maintenance form with the records for the specified filter criteria.

10.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Analysis Method Reference Maintenance

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

   Analysis Method Selection


Analysis Method Reference Maintenance

Description

The Analysis Method Reference Maintenance form is used to maintain reference analysis methods used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Analysis Method Reference:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Source Providing Data Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Source Providing Data Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Source Providing ID.

4.	Enter the Analysis Method Reference Code and tab.

5.	Enter the Analysis Method ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Analysis Method Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

6.	The Analysis Method Description field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Analysis Method ID.

7.	 Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the   Login Organisation Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

8.	The Data Owner Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

9.	Check the Current indicator, if relevant.

10.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Edit an Analysis Method Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete an Analysis Method:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may delete the record only if the used-indicator is unchecked.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Analysis Method Selection


Analysis Method Reference Selection

Description

The Analysis Method Reference Selection form is used to select a required reference analysis method as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

The external analysis method must exist.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Calculation Method Reference Selection

Description

The Calculation Method Reference Selection form is used to select a required reference calculation method as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

The external calculation method must exist.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Calculation Method Reference Filter Criteria

Description:

The Calculation Method Reference Filter Criteria Wizard form is used to filter out reference calculation methods as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the System Datasource Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Source Providing Data Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Source Providing Data ID.

3.	Enter the Calculation Method ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Calculation Method Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Calculation Method Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Calculation Method ID.

5.	Enter the Data OwnerOrganisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Organisation Abbreviation and the Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

7.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Change User Organisation ID.

9.	Click on the Next button to open the Calculation Method Reference Maintenance form with the records for the specified filter criteria.

10.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Calculation Method Reference Maintenance

Login Organisation Selection

System Datasource Selection

Calculation Method Selection


Calculation Method Reference Maintenance

Description

The Calculation Method Reference Maintenance form is used to maintain reference calculation methods used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Calculation Method Reference:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Source Providing Data Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Source Providing Data Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Source Providing ID.

4.	Enter the Calculation Method Reference Code and tab.

5.	Enter the Calculation Method ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Calculation Method Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

6.	The Calculation Method Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Calculation Method ID.

7.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the   Login Organisation Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

8.	The Data Owner Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

9.	Check the Current indicator, if relevant.

10.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Edit an Calculation Method Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete an Calculation Method:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may delete the record only if the used-indicator is unchecked.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Calculation Method Selection


Measuring Unit Reference Filter Criteria

Description:

The Measuring Unit Reference Filter Criteria Wizard form is used to filter out reference measuring units as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the System Datasource Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Source Providing Data Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Source Providing Data ID.

3.	Enter the Measuring Unit ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Measuring Unit Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Measuring Unit ID.

5.	Enter the Data OwnerOrganisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Organisation Abbreviation and the Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

7.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Change User Organisation ID.

9.	Click on the Next button to open the Measuring Unit Reference Maintenance form with the records for the specified filter criteria.

10.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Measuring Unit Reference Maintenance

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Measuring Unit Selection


Measuring Unit Reference Maintenance

Description

The Measuring Unit Reference Maintenance form is used to maintain reference measuring units used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Measuring Unit Reference:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Source Providing Data Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Source Providing Data Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Source Providing ID.

4.	Enter the Measuring Unit Reference Code and tab.

5.	Enter the Measuring Unit ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

6.	The Measuring Unit Abbreviation and the Measuring Unit Name fields  will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Measuring Unit ID.

7.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the   Login Organisation Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

8.	The Data Owner Name  will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

9.	Check the Current indicator, if relevant.

10.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Edit a Measuring Unit Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a Measuring Unit Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may delete the record only if the used-indicator is unchecked.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Measuring Unit Selection


Measuring Unit Reference Selection

Description

The Measuring Unit Reference Selection form is used to select a required reference measuring unit as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

The external measuring unit must exist.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Variable Reference Filter Criteria

Description:

The Monitoring Variable Reference Filter Criteria Wizard form is used to filter out reference monitoring variables as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the System Datasource Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Source Providing Data Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Source Providing Data ID.

3.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Monitoring Variable Abbreviation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Variable ID.

5.	Enter the Data OwnerOrganisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Organisation Abbreviation and the Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

7.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Change User Organisation ID.

9.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Variable Reference Maintenance form with the records for the specified filter criteria.

10.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Monitoring Variable Reference Maintenance

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Monitoring Variable Selection


Monitoring Variable Reference Maintenance

Description

The Monitoring Variable Reference Maintenance form is used to maintain reference monitoring variables used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Monitoring Variable Reference:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Source Providing Data Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Source Providing Data Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Source Providing ID.

4.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Reference Code and tab.

5.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

6.	The Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and the Monitoring Variable Name field will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID.

7.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the   Login Organisation Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

8.	The Data Owner Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

9.	Check the Current indicator, if relevant.

10.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Edit Monitoring Variable Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete Monitoring Variable Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may delete the record only if the used-indicator is unchecked.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection .

   Monitoring Variable Selection


Monitoring Action Reference Filter Criteria

Description:

The Monitoring Action Reference Filter Criteria Wizard form is used to filter out reference monitoring actions as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the System Datasource Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Source Providing Data Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Source Providing Data ID.

3.	Enter the Monitoring Action ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Monitoring Action Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Action ID.

5.	Enter the Data OwnerOrganisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Organisation Abbreviation and the Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

7.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Change User Organisation ID.

9.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Action Reference Maintenance form with the records for the specified filter criteria.

10.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Monitoring Action Reference Maintenance

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Monitoring Action Selection


Monitoring Action Reference Maintenance

Description

The Monitoring Action Reference Maintenance form is used to maintain reference monitoring actions used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Monitoring Action Reference:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Source Providing Data Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Source Providing Data Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Source Providing ID.

4.	Enter the Monitoring Action Reference Code and tab.

5.	Enter the Monitoring Action ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

6.	The Monitoring Action Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Action ID.

7.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the   Login Organisation Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

8.	The Data Owner Name will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

9.	Check the Current indicator, if relevant.

10.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Edit Monitoring Action Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete Monitoring Action Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may delete the record only if the used-indicator is unchecked.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Monitoring Action Selection


Monitoring Action Reference Selection

Description

The Monitoring Action Reference Selection form is used to select a required reference monitoring action as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

The reference monitoring action must exist.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Multiple Variable Parameter Reference Filter Criteria

Description:

The Multiple Variable Parameter Reference Filter Criteria Wizard form is used to filter out multiple monitoring variable parameters as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the System Datasource Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Source Providing Data Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Source Providing Data ID.

3.	Enter the Multiple Variable Parameter ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Multiple Monitoring Parameter Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Multiple Variable Parameter Abbreviation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multiple Variable Parameter ID.

5.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Organisation Abbreviation and the Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

7.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Change User Organisation ID.

9.	Click on the Next button to open the Multiple Variable Parameter Reference Maintenance form with the records for the specified filter criteria.

10.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Multiple Variable Parameter Reference Maintenance

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Multiple Monitoring Parameter Selection


Multiple Variable Parameter Reference Maintenance

Description

The Multiple Variable Parameter Reference Maintenance form is used to maintain reference multiple monitoring variable parameters used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Reference:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Source Providing Data Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Source Providing Data Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Source Providing ID.

4.	Enter the Measuring Unit Reference Code and tab.

5.	Enter the Multiple Variable Parameter ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Multiple Monitoring Parameter Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Multiple Variable Parameter Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multiple Variable Parameter ID.

7.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the   Login Organisation Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

8.	The Data Owner Name  will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

9.	Check the Current indicator, if relevant.

10.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Edit a Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may delete the record only if the used-indicator is unchecked.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Multiple Monitoring Parameter Selection


Multiple Variable Parameter Reference Selection

Description

The Multiple Variable Parameter Reference Selection form is used to select a required reference multiple monitoring variable parameter as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

The reference multiple monitoring variable parameter must exist.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Preservative Reference Filter Criteria

Description:

The Preservative Reference Filter Criteria Wizard form is used to filter out reference preservatives as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the System Datasource Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Source Providing Data Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Source Providing Data ID.

3.	Enter the Preservative ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Preservative Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Preservative Abbreviation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Preservative ID.

5.	Enter the Data OwnerOrganisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Organisation Abbreviation and the Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

7.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Change User Organisation ID.

9.	Click on the Next button to open the Preservative Reference Maintenance form with the records for the specified filter criteria.

10.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Preservative Reference Maintenance

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Preservative Selection


Preservative Reference Maintenance

Description

The Preservative Reference Maintenance form is used to maintain reference preservatives used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Preservative Reference:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Source Providing Data Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Source Providing Data Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Source Providing ID.

4.	Enter the Preservative Reference Code and tab.

5.	Enter the Preservative ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Preservative Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

6.	The Preservative Name and the Preservative Abbreviation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Preservative ID.

7.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the   Login Organisation Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

8.	The Data Owner Name  will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

9.	Check the Current indicator, if relevant.

10.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Edit a Preservative Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a Preservative Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may delete the record only if the used-indicator is unchecked.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Preservative Selection


Preservative Reference Selection

Description

The Preservative Reference Selection form is used to select a required reference preservative as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

The reference preservative must exist.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Preservative Selection

Description

The Preservative Selection form is used to select a preservative for sample preservation. The Preservative is the substance or method used to extend the shelf life of a sample, so that when analysed the constituents measured are still a true representation of when the sample was taken.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


System Datasource Selection

Description

The System Datasource Selection form is used to select a record of sources from which data is imported or can be obtained.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Variable Reference with Measuring Unit Reference Maintenance

Description

The Variable Reference with Measuring Unit Reference Maintenance form is used to maintain monitoring variable references mapped to measuring unit references for an import data format.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a Monitoring Variable Reference with a Measuring Unit Reference:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Import Format ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Format Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Import Format Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Import Format ID.

4.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Reference Code or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Reference Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

5.	Enter the Measuring Unit Reference Code or click on the Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit Reference Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

6.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Edit Monitoring Variable Reference with a Measuring Unit Reference:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete Monitoring Variable Reference with a Measuring Unit Reference:

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Format Selection

Monitoring Variable Reference Selection

Measuring Unit Reference Selection


Liaison Entity Reference Filter Criteria
Organisation Reference Filter Criteria

Description:

The Organisation Reference Filter Criteria Wizard form is used to filter out reference organisations as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the System Datasource Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Source Providing Data Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Source Providing Data ID.

3.	Enter the Institution ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Organisation Abbreviation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Institution ID.

5.	Enter the Data OwnerOrganisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Organisation Abbreviation and the Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

7.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Change User Organisation ID.

9.	Click on the Next button to open the OrganisationReference Maintenance form with the records for the specified filter criteria.

10.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Organisation Reference Maintenance

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Analyst Selection


Liaison Entity Reference Maintenance
Organisation Reference Maintenance

Description

The Organisation Reference Maintenance form is used to maintain reference organisations used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Organisation Reference:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Source Providing Data Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Source Providing Data Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Source Providing ID.

4.	Enter the Organisation Reference Code and tab.

5.	Enter the Institution ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Analyst Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Organisation Abbreviation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Institution ID.

7.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the   Login Organisation Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

8.	The Data Owner Name  will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

9.	Check the Current indicator, if relevant.

10.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Edit Organisation Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete Organisation Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may delete the record only if the used-indicator is unchecked.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Analyst Selection


Liaison Entity Reference Selection
Organisation Reference Selection

Description

The Organisation Reference Selection form is used to select a required reference organisation as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

The reference organisation must exist.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Multiple Variable Parameter Selection

Description

The Multiple Variable Parameter Selection form is used to select a parameter belonging to a specific multiple monitoring variable.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Variable Group Selection

Description

The Variable Group Selection form is used to select a monitoring variable group name for frequently used variables. One variable group can consist of many monitoring variables.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Related Variable Filter Criteria

Description:

The Related Variable Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for related variable records, to be used on Related Variable Maintenance.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Derived Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Derived Variable Abbreviation and the Derived Variable Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Derived Variable ID.

3.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and the Monitoring Variable Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID.

5.	Click on the Next button to open the Related Variable Selection form.

6.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

7.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Note: Steps 4-6 applies only when the form is opened in Wizard mode.

Related System Topics:

Related Variable Selection

Monitoring Variable Selection


Related Variable Selection

Description:

The Related Variable Selection form allows you to select a monitoring variable that is related/associated with a derived variable (calculated variable).

Steps:

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

5.	Click on the Next button to go to the Monitoring Variable View form.

6.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

 Note: Steps 4-6 applies only when the form is opened in Wizard mode, when the form is opened in normal selection mode, the Select button will be applicable for the selection of a record.

Related System Topics:

Monitoring Variable View


Related Variable Maintenance

Description

The Related Variable Maintenance form is used to maintain monitoring variables that are related/associated with derived variables (calculated variables).

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Related Variable:

{ [image] Note: Only the current data owner of the record may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Derived Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Derived Variable Name and the Derived Variable Abbreviation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Derived Variable ID.

4.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

5.	The Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and the Monitoring Variable Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID.

6.	Enter the Related Reason for the relationship.

7.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Edit a Related Variable:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a Related Variable:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Selection


Analysis Method Selection

Description

The Analysis Method Selection form is used to select a process/method used to analyse a sample.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Action Selection

Description

The Monitoring Action Selection form is used to select the type of monitoring performed.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

3.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Action Specification Reference Selection

Description

The Monitoring Action Specification Reference Selection form is used to select a required reference monitoring action specification as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

The reference monitoring action specification must exist.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Action Specification Reference Filter Criteria

Description:

The Monitoring Action Specification Reference Filter Criteria form is used to filter out reference monitoring action specification as used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the System Datasource Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Source Providing Data Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Source Providing Data ID.

3.	Enter the Monitoring Action Specification ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Specification Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Monitoring Action Specification Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Action Specification ID.

5.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Data Owner Organisation Name will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

7.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically populated as it is linked to Change User Organisation ID.

9.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Action Specification Reference Maintenance form with the records for the specified filter criteria.

10.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Monitoring Action Specification Reference Maintenance

System Datasource Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Monitoring Action Specification Selection


Monitoring Action Specification Reference Maintenance

Description

The Monitoring Action Specification Reference Maintenance form is used to maintain reference monitoring action specifications used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Monitoring Action Specification Reference:

 Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation ID is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner Organisation ID, Login Organisation ID, Data Owner Organisation Name, Change User Organisation ID, Change User Organisation Abbreviation, Change User Name will automatically be populated.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Source Providing Data Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Source Providing Data Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Source Providing ID.

4.	Enter the Monitoring Action Specification Reference Code and tab.

5.	Enter the Monitoring Action Specification ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Action Specification Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

6.	The Monitoring Action Specification Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Action Specification ID.

7.	In the Date/Time field, the date and time on which the reference was created will be automatically displayed.

8.	Check the Current indicator, if relevant.

9.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Edit Monitoring Action Specification Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete Monitoring Action Specification Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may delete the record only if the used-indicator is unchecked.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

System Datasource Selection

Monitoring Action Specification Selection


Survey Method Monitoring Filter Criteria

Description

The Survey Method Monitoring Filter Criteria form is used to filter survey method monitor information for maintenance or history viewing purposes.

Steps

Filter Survey Method Monitor Information:

1.	Enter the Analyst ID, or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Monitor Name and the Monitor Abbreviation fields will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Monitor ID.

3.	Enter the Survey Method ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Survey Method Selection form make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Survey Method Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Survey Method ID.

5.	You now have four options:

•	Click on the Survey Method button to open the Survey Method for Monitor Maintenance form with survey method monitors information displayed as specified in the filter criteria, from where the survey method monitors are maintained;

•	Click on the History button to open the Survey Monitor History form to view the history of the survey method monitor;

•	Click on the Print button to provide a standard system list of survey method monitor as specified in the filter criteria;

•	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics

Monitor Selection

Survey Method Selection

Survey Method for Monitor Maintenance

Survey Monitor History


Survey Method for Monitor Maintenance

Description

The Survey Method for Monitor Maintenance form is used to maintain the detail information regarding the valid Monitor and Survey Method combinations.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Survey Method for Monitor:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	Enter the Survey Method ID for the monitoring variable to be linked to an organisation’s accredited method or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Survey Method Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Survey Method Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Survey Method ID.

4.	Enter the Begin Date, and tab. Note: Default Value is 999-12-31

5.	Enter the End Date, and tab.

6.	Enter the Contract Number, and tab.

7.	Enter the Contract Expiry Date, and tab.

8.	Enter the Survey Grading for the survey method record, and tab.

9.	Check the Pay Indicator [image] Checkbox, if a survey analysis cost is paid to a Monitor.

10.	Enter the Survey Cost for a survey for the monitor, and tab.

11.	Tab to accept the new record.

Edit Survey Method for Monitor:

 Note: The user may modify the survey method for monitor record only if it not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the record to be edited, and click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Edit the record as required.

3.	Tab to accept the record changes, a Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have edited a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete Survey Method for Monitor:

 Note: The user may delete the survey method for monitor record only if it not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it, and click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

4.	A Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have deleted a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid deletion, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept deletion of the record.

Related System Topics

Survey Method Selection


Feature Type for Questionnaire Template Filter Criteria

Description

The Feature Type for Questionnaire Template Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for Feature Types for Questionnaire Template. This filter criteria form enables the user to search for feature types (e.g. dams, rivers, springs etc.) that are linked to a specific Questionnaire Template so that the user can know which Questionnaire Template is to be used for which Feature Type when conducting a survey

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Enter the Questionnaire ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Questionnaire Template Selection form, select the applicable record and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Questionnaire Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Questionnaire ID.

3.	Enter the Geographical Feature Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associate Classes Type Selection form, select the applicable record and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID

 Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Maintain Decision Criteria Wizard form.

 Note: The Exit button will close the Feature Type Questionnaire Template Filter Criteria form and return to the main menu

 Note: The Next button will close the Feature Type for Questionnaire Template Filter Criteria form and open the either the Questionnaire Template Maintenance Wizard form or Feature Type for Questionnaire Template Maintenance Wizard form depending on the menu it was called from.

5.	Click the exit button to close the form.

Related System Topics:

Questionnaire Template Selection

Associated Classes Type Selection

Questionnaire Template Maintenance

Feature Type for Questionnaire Template Maintenance


Feature Type for Questionnaire Template Maintenance

Description:

The Feature Type for Questionnaire Template Maintenance form is used to assign the geographical feature types to a questionnaire template.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Geographical Feature Types to a Questionnaire Template:

1.	Click on the  [image] Create Records button.

2.	Enter the Questionnaire ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Questionnaire Template Selection form, select the applicable record and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection

3.	The Questionnaire Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Questionnaire Template ID

4.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associate Classes Type Selection form, select the applicable record and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection

5.	The Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID.

 Note: The Back button will close the form and return to either the Feature Type for Questionnaire Template Filter Criteria form or the Questionnaire Template Maintenance Wizard form, depending on the menu it was called from.

6.	Tab to accept the new record.

7.	Click the exit button to close the form

Edit Feature Type for Questionnaire Template:

 Note: The user may modify the survey method for monitor record only if it not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete Feature Type for Questionnaire Template:

 Note: The user may delete the survey method for monitor record only if it not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Questionnaire Template Selection

Associated Class Type Selection


Monitoring Action Rule Selection

Description

The Monitoring Action Rule Selection form is used to select and verify a required Monitoring Action Rule.

 Note: The form is used merely for selection and NOT Verification of the rule when it is called from Monitoring Action Filter Criteria, and it is however used for both selection AND verification of the rule when the Monitoring Action record is being created or modified.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Click on the required Monitoring Action Rule to highlight the selection.

Step 2 applies only when creating or modifying the record.

2.	Check the relevant indicators that correspond with the monitoring action rule selected. E.g. End Depth, Start Date Time, End Date Time, Depth Interval, etc. (If relevant)

3.	Click on the Select button to return the selected record. Note: For the verification of the rule, if the checked indicators do not correspond with the selected monitoring action rule, an error message will be displayed.

4.	The Exit button will exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Action Specification Maintenance

Description

The Monitoring Action Specification Maintenance form is used to maintain monitoring action specifications for a specific Monitoring Action that will appear on the Monitoring Schedule Report. The Monitoring Action Specification is used in monitoring programmes and schedules.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Monitoring Action Specification:

 Note: Only the central administrator may insert the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button (If the form is not already in create mode).

2.	Enter a Monitoring Action Specification Name in the field, and tab. This name must be unique.

3.	If required, enter the necessary information into Start Depth, End Depth, Depth Interval, Start Time, End Time and Time Interval fields.

4.	Click on the [image] Next Row/Exit button to accept the new record

Edit a Monitoring Action Specification:

 Note: Only the central administrator may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required. The Monitoring Action Specification Name must be unique.

4.	Click on the [image] Next row to accept the record.

Delete a Monitoring Specification:

Deletion will only be possible if Monitoring Action specification record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Monitoring Action record to be deleted, to highlight it. The form must be in Modify mode.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics


Accredited WMS Method

Description

The Accredited WMS Method sub-form is used to view and maintain the WMS analysis methods and survey methods that are linked to an accredited method.

Steps

Add a new Accredited WMS Method:

 Note: You can only add a new Accredited WMS Method to your own organisation.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button to add a new accredited WMS Method to the focussed Accredited Method. An Accredited WMS Method sub-form displays in Create mode.

2.	Click on the Action Type [image] Drop Down button, and select Sample, Observation or Survey.

3.	If Action Type selected is Sample or Observation then:

•	Enter the Analysis Method ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Analysis Method Selection form and select the required analysis method.

•	The Analysis Method Description, Monitoring Variable ID & Monitoring Variable Abbreviation for the selected Analysis Method will be displayed.

4.	If Action Type is Survey then:

•	Enter the Survey Method ID to be linked to an organisation’s accredited method or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Survey Method Selection form and select the required method.

•	The Survey Method Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Survey Method ID.

•	Enter the Person ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open either Employee Selection form or the Member Selection form depending on the Organisation type.

•	The Surname, First Names & Initials of the person who is accredited in the accredited organisation will be automatically displayed.

5.	Enter the Accredited Expiry Date.  Note: No Accreditation status can be defined for periods later than this date and this date may not be later than the end date of the WMS Analysis Method or Survey Method for the specific laboratory or monitor.

6.	Tab to accept the new record.

7.	The new Accredited WMS Method ID will be automatically updated/created by the system.

Edit an Accredited WMS Method:

 Note: Accredited Expiry Date is the only field that may be modified. You may only modify the record of your own organisation.

1.	Click on the record to be edited, and click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Edit the Accredited Expiry Date field, as this is the only field that may be updated.  Note: If modifying the Expiry date has an effect on the accredited results, a message will be displayed. If you still want the record to be modified, click on the ‘OK’ button to modify the record and update the affected results. Else click on the "Cancel" button to cancel the modification of the record.

3.	Tab to accept the record changes, a Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have edited a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete an Accredited WMS Method:

Deletion will only be possible if no Accredited WMS Method is linked to the Accreditation Method, therefore all status records for all the Accredited WMS Methods belonging to the Accredited Method you want to delete need to be deleted first. You will only be allowed to delete records belonging to your own organisation.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it, and click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button. A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

3.	A Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have deleted a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid deletion, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept deletion of the record.

Related System Topics

Analysis Method Selection

Survey Method Selection

Employee Selection

Member Selection


Sample Type Selection

Description

The Sample Type Selection form is used to select a specific sample type record.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The form will be automatically displayed with the sample type records’ information.

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

3.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

4.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Variable Type Selection

Description

The Monitoring Variable Type Selection form is used to select a specific type of monitoring variable measured within the ecological compartment.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The form will be automatically displayed with the monitoring variable type records’ information.

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

3.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

4.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Equipment Maintenance

Description

The Equipment Maintenance form is used to define kinds of equipment required for the specific monitoring action.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Equipment record:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	In the Equipment ID field, enter the Equipment ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Equipment Selection form. Click the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the information, and tab.

3.	In the Sample Type ID field, enter the Sample Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form. Click the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the information, and tab.

4.	Click on the [image] Next Row/Exit button to accept the new record.

Edit an Equipment record:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete an Equipment record:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Equipment record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion

Related System Topics

Sample Type Selection

Monitoring Equipment Selection


Monitoring Equipment Selection

Description

The Monitoring Equipment Selection form is used to select specific equipment used for monitoring.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The form will be automatically displayed with the Equipment records information.

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

3.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

4.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitor Cost per Action Maintenance

Description

The Monitor Cost per Action Maintenance form is used to specify monitors that are qualified and equipped to perform the specific monitoring action.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Monitor record:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	In the Monitor ID field, enter the Monitor ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Selection form. Click the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the information, and tab.

3.	Enter the Cost per monitoring action and tab.

4.	Click on the Pay Indicator to indicate if the monitor is paid for the action, and tab.

5.	Enter the Contract Number, and tab.

6.	Enter the Expiry Date and tab.

7.	Click on the [image] Next Row/Exit button to accept the new record.

Edit a Monitor record:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Monitor record:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Equipment record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion

Related System Topics

Monitor Selection


History of Peripheral Information Changes

Description

The History of Peripheral Information Changes form is used to view the recorded changes made to certain tables containing reference data.

Steps

This is a display only form.

Related System Topics


Container Selection

Description

The Container Selection form is used to select container records.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

5.	The form will be automatically displayed with the Container records information

6.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

7.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

8.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Transport Method Selection

Description

The Transport Method Selection form is used to select transport method records.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

9.	The form will be automatically displayed with the transport method records information

10.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

11.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

12.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


General Guidelines Survey Range History Selection


Season Range Maintenance

Description

The Season Range Maintenance form is used to maintain a range of months that defines a special season in which the monitoring should be performed.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Season Range:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may insert/add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	In the start month field, enter the number of the start month and tab. The full name of the month that corresponds to the numeric start month will be automatically displayed.

3.	In the end month field, enter the number of the end month and tab. The full name of the month that corresponds to the numeric end month will be automatically displayed.

4.	In the Range Description field, enter the description of the frequency season range.

5.	Tab to accept the newly created record.

The Range ID will be automatically created.

Edit the Season Range record:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete the Season Range record:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the Season Range record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics


Frequency Selection

Description

The Frequency Selection form is used to select frequencies in terms of the lapse in time between periodic event monitoring.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

13.	The form will be automatically displayed with the Frequency records information

14.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

15.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

16.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


EcoCompartment Selection

Description

The EcoCompartment Selection form is used to select sample substance or sample environment in which monitoring is performed.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

bmc qustion2.bmp} Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The form will be automatically displayed with the EcoCompartment records information

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

3.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

4.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Frequency Specification Selection

Description

The Frequency Specification Selection form is used to select frequency specifications in terms of the lapse in time between periodic event monitoring.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

bmc qustion2.bmp} Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The form will be automatically displayed with the Frequency Specification records information

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

3.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

4.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitor Selection

Description

The Monitor Selection form is used to select monitor elements required for the monitoring process including ways in which samples will be packed and transported.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

5.	The form will be automatically displayed with the Monitor records information

6.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

7.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

8.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Laboratory Selection

Description

The Laboratory Selection form is used to select laboratory records.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

bmc qustion2.bmp} Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The form will be automatically displayed with the Laboratory records information

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

3.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

4.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Point Filter Criteria Wizard

Description

The Monitoring Point Filter Criteria form enables the user to specify all the Foreign Key descriptive fields of monitoring feature

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Select High Level Monitoring Point Type of the Monitoring Point.

2.	Enter the Geographical Feature Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, select a Geographical Feature Type to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

3.	The Feature Type field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Geographical Feature Type ID

4.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Geographical Feature Selection form, select a Geographical Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

5.	The Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Feature ID

6.	Enter the Located Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Geographical Feature Selection form, select a Located Feature to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

7.	The Located Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Located Feature ID

8.	Enter the Flow Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, select a the Flow Measuring Structure Type to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

9.	The Flow Type Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Flow Type ID

10.	Enter the Meteorological Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, select a the Meteorological Measuring Type to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

11.	The Meteorological Class Type Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Meteorological Type ID.

12.	Enter the Quaternary Drainage Region Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Geographical Area Selection form, select a Quaternary Drainage Region to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

13.	The Quaternary Drainage Region Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Quaternary Drainage Region Feature ID.

14.	Enter the Data Owner Organization ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Login Organization Selection form, select a the Data Owner to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

15.	The Data Owner Organization Abbreviation and Data Owner Organization Caption Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organization ID.

 Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Monitoring Point Decision Criteria.

 Note: The Exit button will close the form and return to the main menu.

16.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Point Maintenance form with records for the specified Filter criteria.

17.	Select the Exit button to close the form and return to the main menu

Related System Topics

Geographical Feature Selection

Associated Classes - Type Selection

Geographical Area Selection

Login Organization Selection


Monitoring Point History Filter Criteria

Description

The Monitoring Point History Filter Criteria form displays the descriptive info of the associated Foreign Key on Monitoring Point History Filter Criteria Form

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Select High Level Monitoring Point Type of the Monitoring Point.

2.	Latitude will be automatically populated with the Latitude for Point Related Feature

3.	Latitude DegMinSec will be automatically populated with the Latitude for the Point Related Feature in Degrees, Minutes and Seconds

4.	Longitude will be automatically populated with the Longitude for Point Related Feature

5.	Longitude DegMinSec will be automatically populated with the Longitude for the Point Related Feature in Degrees, Minutes and Seconds

6.	Move Trackbar to select the radius when filtering out points.

 Note: When it is moved it automatically update the Decimals, Minutes and Estimated km.

7.	Decimal, Minutes, Estimated km. will be automatically populated when moving Trackbar.

8.	Enter the Geographical Feature Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, select a Geographical Feature Type to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

9.	The Feature Type field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Geographical Feature Type ID

10.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Geographical Feature Selection form, select a Geographical Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

11.	The Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Feature ID

12.	Enter the Located Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Geographical Feature Selection form, select a Located Feature to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

13.	The Located Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Located Feature ID

14.	Enter the Flow Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, select a the Flow Measuring Structure Type to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

15.	The Flow Type Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Flow Type ID

16.	Enter the Meteorological Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, select a the Meteorological Measuring Type to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

17.	The Meteorological Class Type Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Meteorological Type ID.

18.	Enter the Quaternary Drainage Region Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Geographical Area Selection form, select a Quaternary Drainage Region to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

19.	The Quaternary Drainage Region Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Quaternary Drainage Region Feature ID.

20.	Enter the Data Owner Organization ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Login Organization Selection form, select a the Data Owner to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

21.	The Data Owner Organization Abbreviation and Data Owner Organization Caption Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organization ID.

22.	Enter the Change User Login or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the User Selection form, select a User to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

23.	The Change User Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Change User Login.

24.	Enter the Change User Organization ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Login Organization Selection form, select an Organization to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

25.	The Organization Abbreviation and Organisation Caption Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Change User Organization ID.

 Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Monitoring Point Decision Criteria.

 Note: The Exit button will close the form and return to the main menu.

 Note: The GIS Select button gives the user the option to display the point on a Map and to return the Quaternary Drainage Region, Latitude and Longitude where the point is Located on.

26.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Point History View form with records for the specified Filter criteria.

27.	Select the Exit button to close the form and return to the main menu

Related System Topics

Geographical Feature Selection

Associated Classes - Type Selection

Geographical Area Selection

Login Organization Selection

Monitoring Point Maintenance

User Selection

Login Organization Selection


Monitoring Point Reference Filter Criteria

Description

The Monitoring Point Reference Filter Criteria form enables the user to display all Foreign Key fields’ descriptive fields

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Select High Level Geographical Feature Type to filter the records associated with a specific type of Geographical Feature.

2.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Geographical Feature Selection form, select a the Geographical Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

3.	The Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Feature ID.

4.	Enter the System Datasource ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the System Datasource Selection form, select a System Datasource to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

5.	The System Datasource Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the     System Datasource ID.

6.	Enter the Numbering Conversion Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open    the Associate Class Type Selection form, select a the Type ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

7.	The Numbering Conversion field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Numbering Conversion Type ID.

8.	Enter the Data Owner Organization ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Login Organization Selection form, select a the Data Owner ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

9.	The Data Owner Organization Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Data Owner ID.

10.	Enter the Change User Organization ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Login Organization Selection form, select an Organization to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

11.	The Change User Organization field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Change User Organization ID.

 Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Monitoring Point Decision Criteria.

 Note: The Exit button will close the form and return to the Main Menu.

12.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Point Reference Maintenance form with records for the specified Filter criteria

13.	Select the Exit button to close the form and return to the main menu

Related System Topics

Geographical Feature Selection

System Datasource Selection

Associated Classes - Type Selection

Login Organization Selection

Monitoring Point Reference Maintenance


Monitoring Point History View

Description

The Monitoring Point View form is used to view Monitoring Points from the History Table

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Point History Selection

Description

The Monitoring Point History Selection form is used to select Monitoring Points from the History Table

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The form will be automatically displayed with the monitoring point records’ information.

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

3.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

4.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Point in Geographical Area Filter Criteria

Description

The Monitoring Point in Geographical Area Filter Criteria form enables the user to select a specific Geographical Area &/or specific Geographical Feature

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

1.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Geographical Feature Selection form, select a the Geographical Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

2.	The Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Feature ID.

3.	Select High Level Geographical Area Type to filter the records associated with a specific type of Geographical Feature.

4.	Enter the Management Area Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the      Geographical Area Selection form, select a the Geographical Area ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

5.	The Geographical Area Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Management Area Feature ID.

 Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Monitoring Point Decision Criteria.

 Note: The Exit button will close the form and return to the Main Menu.

6.	Click on the Next button to open the Geographical Area View form with records for the specified Filter criteria

7.	Select the Exit button to close the form and return to the main menu

Related System Topics

Geographical Feature Selection

Geographical Area Selection


Monitoring Point Reference View Wizard

Description

The Monitoring Point Reference View Wizard form is used to view Feature References

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related System Topics


Convention for entering feature stakeholders and related items

These rules apply to simplify the names for both data typists and users of WMS.

1	Do not use full stops and spaces in abbreviations, for example T.L.C. OR T L C

2	Do not use full stops anywhere, not even at the end of a name

3	For standardisation and to ease of ranging on subjects everything must, as far as possible, be translated into English

Rioolwerke of R/W	      -	Sewage Works

Vaste Afval/Stortterein   -	Solid Waste

Exception on rule:  if the "subject" is known only in Afrikaans or any other language.

4	No spaces before and after hyphen.  Use the hyphen just as according to the following example: African Breweries-Wadeville (to indicate a City/Suburb/Town)                 – see 17

5	A word like Vanderbijl Park will be written loose (in English)

6	Do not use the brackets for PTY or LTD

7	Do not use the: (colon)

8	Do not use abbreviations in the Name of an Institution except for:

PTY	-	proprietary

LTD	-	limited

GM	-	gold mine

PROD	-	product(s)

CHEM	-	chemicals

CO	-	company

SA	-	South Africa

CO-OP	-	Co-operation

CORP	-	Corporation

TLC	-	Local Council

MC	-	Metropolitan Council

Or for an institution that is known by the abbreviation of the full name, e.g. KWV, ESKOM, and ISCOR

9	If in doubt, don’t

10	The Abbreviation of each Institution must be unique.  The abbreviation is used in Monitoring Management.  Create an Abbreviation that will enable other users to identify the specific Institution.

11	Before adding an Institution or Person, please make sure that the record does not exist in another form(at).  E.g. KWV might be entered as PAARL-KWV    Tip: search on *KWV* This last example, PAARL-KWV, should be KWV-PAARL.  A search on KWV* will then turn up all the KWV’s.

E.g, KWV-PAARL; KWV-ROBERTSON; KWV-VREDENDAL; etc.

12	PLEASE check the spelling before accepting.  If spelling of a name or abbreviation is incorrect, the name will be difficult to turn up in a search.  If you discover an obvious error, please inform a senior user to contact the "owner" for rectification.

13	Addresses should be written in UPPER CASE (CAPITAL LETTERS).  Most of the addresses have been entered in the format:

P O BOX 123 or PRIVATE BAG X1234

Note:  The town and postal code does not form part of the Address.  The town or city and the postal code is entered in the Area field.

14	Dialling codes Should be created as follows: in the Area field the Type* is "Service Area"; in the Name* field the "name of the service area" in full, e.g. POTCHEFSTROOM.  In the Area Code field the Area Code Type* is Dialling Code and the Area Code* is selected from a look up list.

15	Cellphone numbers: 082 and 083 are considered as dialling codes and can be retrieved by entering the provider name like VODACOM or MTN in the lookup field.

16	Exceptions to 5:   Mission statements and monitoring point descriptions can be in sentence case.

MONITORING POINTS

1	The Name* of a monitoring point should have a unique description to identify it from other points that have the "same" co-ordinates but have different properties, e.g. a borehole right next to a monitoring point in a canal.  Although both will be on the same property, each must have a unique name.  Remember that other parties must be able to identify the point from the name.

2	Try not to duplicate monitoring points.  Use existing monitoring points as far as possible.

3	Do not duplicate the features (water bodies, rivers, etc.).

4	Do not use a backslash "\", pipe "|" or hard return (the Enter button) in a monitoring point name.  Any one of these characters in a monitoring point name stops the data retrieval process.  The forward slash "/" can be used, e.g. S/W or D/S.


How to Search for Records on WMS

There are different ways of searching for records on WMS. Below are some of the ways in which you can search for specific records on the system.

Use Wild Card (*) to Search for Records:

The "wild card"  (*) can be used in many ways to simplify the search, eg. The wild card can also be used at the beginning or in the name if the user is uncertain about characters in a name, a search for " VAN DER MERWE" can be done by entering  *V*D*MER*.The wild card (*) will also retrieve records and a blank (empty) filter records where records of the specific value are not specified database.

Filter:

1.	Add or Select additional filter criteria on the fields applicable on the filter criteria part of the form.

2.	Click on the Filter button to apply the filter criteria on the retrieved records.

3.	In the specific alphanumeric field, enter the value or a portion of the value followed by the wildcard (*). E.g. " VAN DER MERWE" can be done by entering  *V*D*MER*.

Range:

1.	In the specific field, enter the value or a portion of the value followed by the wildcard (*).

2.	Click on the Range button or Ctrl R.value followed by *.

3.	Press Enter to apply the Range on the retrieved records.

4.	To clear the Range criteria, press Esc or Backspace.

Sort:

1.	Focus the cursor on a specific field.

2.	Click on the Sort option or Ctrl S.

3.	Records will be sorted according to values in a specific field.

Locate:

1.	Focus the cursor on a name/number field.

2.	Type in the name/number of a record that you are looking for.

3.	The cursor will focus on the requested record.

4.	If the exact match could not be found, the cursor focuses on the nearest record according to the entered value.

Important:

Related System Topics:


Welcome to WMS GIS!

Description

The Water Management System GIS sub-system is used to geographically display water resource information, in order to assist you in interpreting and determining the quality and status of water resources. Water resource information that can be obtained and viewed via this system includes the geographical location and representation of water features, as well as the orientation and context of a water feature in relation to other water features.

To provide additional customised functionality for the integration of the geographical aspects of water resource features and water resource information, the WMS GIS sub-system also makes use of Arcview GIS, a tool that enables you to visualise, explore, query and analyse data geographically. WMS Geographical information is stored in the database as Layers, and these layers provide a means to distribute geographical information for sharing to all users of the WMS.

Scope

The Water Management System GIS sub-system deals with the following sections:

•	WMS Functions (used to obtain geographical and water resource information for display purposes)

•	WMS Maintain (used to maintain all the geographical information)

Related System Topics

WMS Functions Overview

WMS Maintain


WMS Functions Overview

Description

The WMS Functions section is used to provide a list of functionality, specifically customised for the Water Management System (WMS), to display geographical and water resource information.

Scope

The WMS Functions section contains the following functions:

•	Open WMS Layers (used to make a selection of required layers, and view layer information)

Related System Topics

Open Layer Selection


Open Layer Selection

Description

The Open Layer Selection form is used to search for and select layers, in order to open and display the layer information in the GIS. Layers, also known as coverages and shapefiles are a grouping of similar types of geographical features that can be identified by SDE layer table name, scale, layer type and used state. Layer information that can be viewed from this selection form include Layer Permissions, Tracking History, and Preceding Layers. When opening a primary layer, you have the option of selecting one or more background layers that can be simultaneously opened with the primary layer. Background layers contain information that adds value to the information on display.

Layer Types

Three different Layer types exist namely:

•	WMS Work Layer (contain geographical features as defined by the WMS )

•	WMS Orientation Layer ( contain interpreted data that has been obtained from external organisations that contribute to the WMS information, but will never become an integrated part of WMS)

•	WMS Generated Layer ( Layers contain geographical features as defined by the WMS  and are managed in the Water Resource Management sub-system)

Pre-requisites

The relevant layer must be available on all operational servers, and must have been registered in the Maintain Layers Directory, by the WMS SDE central administrator.

Steps

Search for a Layer:

By default, all the layers with their layer types will be displayed in the master grid. You can search for a specific Layer in one of the following ways:

Search by All radio button:

Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this search.

•	Check the All [image] radio button, to display all the layers in the master grid.

Search by WMS Work Layer radio button:

Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this search.

•	Check the WMS Work Layer [image] radio button, to display all the work layers in the master grid.

Search by WMS Generated Layer radio button:

Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this search.

•	Check the WMS Generated Layer [image] radio button, to display all the WMS Generated layers in the master grid.  You can focus on any layer in the master grid to obtain the source background layer in the detail grid at the bottom of the form.

Search by WMS Orientation Layer radio button:

Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this search.

•	Check the WMS Orientation Layer [image] radio button, to display all the WMS Orientation layers in the master grid.

Search by Layer Name:

Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this search.

•	Check the required layer [image] radio button

•	Enter the layer name, or a portion of the name in upper case with a * and click on the [image] Range button.

 To view the Current layers check the "Only Current Layer" checkbox before clicking on the Range button, to view all the Layers, uncheck the checkbox.

Open a Layer:

1.	First perform a search for the layer. See Search for a Layer.

2.	Click on the [image] Open button to open the selected layer(s).

3.	The Background Layer Selection form will automatically be opened if a WMS Work or Generated Layer radio button was selected. Select one or more background layers to be opened with the focussed layer(s).

View Layer Permissions:

1.	Click on the [image] Layer Permissions button to display the system permissions that are available for the user currently logged into the system, as well as for the focussed layer.

View Tracking History:

1.	Click on the [image] Tracking History button to display a specific layer's tracking history, user-defined description, disclaimer and copyright information.

View Preceding Layers:

1.	Click on the [image] Preceding Layers button to differentiate and view a layer that is presently in use, compared with its historical layers that were used in the past, and its more recent layers containing newer information.

Important

Shape files can still be used, however they are not a part of the shared information contained within the WMS system, and therefore cannot be accessed from this menu option. To open Shape files, go to the Theme Menu option on the Arcview toolbar.

The layer must have an ‘Implemented’ or ‘Out of Use’ status to be listed.

Related System Topics

Background Layers Selection


Background Layers Selection

 Description

The Background Layers Selection form is used to select one or more background layers to be opened and displayed on the GIS, with the selected layer.

Steps

1.	All background layers will by default be selected.

2.	Uncheck the [image] checkbox on the focused background layer to deselect the layer.

3.	Click on the OK button to open the background layers in the GIS.

Related System Topics

Open Layer Selection


Tracking History and Description

 Description

The Tracking History and Description form is used to view a specific layer's tracking history, user defined description, disclaimer and copyright information.

Steps

 Note: The form automatically displays the user defined layer name, scale, recorded history, description, disclaimer, and copyright information.

1.	Click on the OK button to exit the form and return to the Open Layer Selection form.

Related System Topics

Open Layer Selection


Preceding Layer View

Description

The Preceding Layer View form is used to differentiate between, and view a layer that is presently in use, compared with its historical layers that were used in the past, and its more recent layers containing newer information.

Steps

This is a display only form.

Related System Topics

Open Layer Selection


Layer Permission

Description

The Layer Permission View form is used to view the authorisation that you have been granted on a specific layer.

Steps

The form automatically displays the user's name, layer name, scale, and a list of all the valid permissions.

1.	Click on the Attribute Permissions button to open the Attribute Permissions form and view the permissions that have been granted for each specific attribute on the SDE layer table.

2.	Click on the OK button to exit the form and return to the Open Layer Selection form.

Related System Topics

Open Layer Selection

Attribute Permissions


Attribute Permissions View

Description

The Attribute Permissions View form is used to view  the authorisation that you have been granted on the different fields of a specific layer contained in the SDE layer table.

Steps

The form automatically displays the user's name, layer name, scale, and a list of all the valid permissions per SDE Layer table field attributes.

1.	Click on the OK button to exit the form and return to the View Layer Permission form.

Related System Topics

Layer Permission

Open Layer Selection


Layer Table Selection

Description

The Layer Table Selection form is used to select a layer table from the WMS GIS database that is not yet registered  in the layers directory table.  A layer table is a coverage or shapefile that has been quality assured by the Business Information Directorate and has been implemented as a table in the GIS database, or it is an empty table created by the database administrator for WMS. These empty tables will be used for the generation of layers e.g. monitoring point or ground water surface link feature layers.

Pre-requisite

The layer table must exist on all WMS operational servers.

Steps

Select a Layer Table:

1.	Scroll down the list until you have found the required record.

2.	To select the record, either double-click on the required record, or click on the [image] Select button.

Related System Topics


Layer Directory Maintenance

Description

The Layer Directory Maintenance form is used to register new layers and maintain layer information, in order to make the information in the Geographical Information System (GIS), available to all WMS users. Background Layers that serve as a backdrop to the selected (front) layer information can also be maintained. For certain WMS generated layers (e.g. reach or sectors), the source layer e.g. river or transfer feature layer must also be specified.

Layer Types

Three different Layer types exist namely:

•	Work Layer (contain geographical features and are linked to non-spatial information in WMS)

•	Orientation Layer ( contain data that has been obtained from other sources that contribute to the WMS information, but will never become an integrated part of WMS)

•	Generated Layer ( Layers contain geographical features as defined by the WMS and automatically generated as layers and are created and maintained in the Water Resource Management sub-system)

Pre-requisites

A new layer must have been copied to all WMS GIS databases that are in operation.

Steps

Add a new layer record:

1.	On the Layer Directory tab, click on the [image] Create button.

2.	In the Layer Table Name field, click on the  [image] Zoom button or F5, and select a name from the list, and tab.

3.	In the Layer Name field, enter a user defined Layer Name, and tab.

4.	In the Scale field, click on the drop down button, and select a scale from the list, and tab.

5.	In the Layer Type field, click on the drop-down button, and select a Layer Type from the list, and tab.

6.	In the Layer Description field, enter a Layer Description, and tab.

7.	In the Tracking History field, enter the tracking history of the layer, and tab.

8.	In the Disclaimer Information field, enter the layer's disclaimer information, and tab.

9.	In the Copyright Information field, enter the layer's copyright information.

10.	If the layer type is a Work layer or Generated layer, click on the  [image] Zoom button or F5 and select a Geographical Layer Type.

11.	Click on another record or tab out of a newly created record to accept the record.

- 	If you register an orientation layer, and other older orientation layers with the same name already exist, the Orientation Layer History Maintenance form will open and you have the option to select the newly created layer's preceding layer, by linking it to the same group in a specific order on view.

-	If you register a work or generated layer with an "implemented" status, and other older work or generated layers with the same geographical type already exist, the Work and Generated Layer History Maintain form will open and you have the option to select another preceding layer. The previously implemented layer will by default be the preceding layer.

-	When registering a new reach or sector generated layer, click in the source layer grid, and click on the [image] Create button. The Layer Directory Selection form will open; select the required work layer record.  Note: Only River or Transfer Layers with the same scale and status of Implemented or Out Of Use are applicable for selection.

Add a Background Layer:

1.	On the Background Layer tab, click on the [image] Create button to open the Layer Directory Selection form.

2.	Click on the record to be selected to highlight it, and click on the [image] Select button.

Edit a layer record and a background layer:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the [image] Modify button, or Ctrl M.

2.	Edit the record as required. When changing the scale of a work layer that was selected as a source layer, both scales will change accordingly. You will not be able to edit a record that has a status of "out of use", nor edit the geographical layer type of an implemented layer.

3.	Click on another record to accept the changed information.

Delete a layer record:

The layer information is maintained by a GIS administrator.  No records can be deleted at this stage, as the SDE Layer exists on all operational Regional and Central WMS Servers.

Delete a background layer:

1.	Click on the background layer to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Press F3 to delete a record.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Layer Directory Selection

Layer Table Selection

Associated Classes Type Selection

Work and Generated Layer History Maintenance

Orientation Layer History Maintenance


Work and Generated Layer History Maintain

Description

The Work and Generated Layer History Maintenance form is used to arrange layers belonging to the same geographical features according to their historical succession. Only layers with the same Geographical Type can be linked. Layers with a status of ‘Initiated’, do not form part of the history chain.

Steps

1.	Click on the layer record that you would like to move, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the Up or Down Arrow buttons to change the history chain.

3.	Click on the Update Hierarchy button to store the proposed history chain changes.

4.	After moving the records in the history chain, the record on top of the list will have a status of "Implemented" and all the other records in the list will have a status of "Out of Use". When a layer's status changes from "implemented" to "out of use", the layer's To Date will reflect the current system date.

Related System Topics

Layer Directory Maintenance


Orientation Layer History Maintain

Description

The Orientation Layer History Maintenance form is used to arrange interpreted layer information belonging to the same geographical features according to their historical succession.

Steps

1.	Enter or select the group number from the Link group's spin button, and click on the Activate Link button, to move a layer to another group. (To unlink a layer, click on the record to highlight it, and press the Unlink button.) Put the same type of orientation layers in the same group. No Validation will take place.

2.	Click on the layer record that you would like to move, to highlight it.

3.	Click on the Up or Down Arrow buttons to make changes to the history chain.

 Note: After moving the records in the history chain, the record on top of the list of each group will have a status of "Implemented" and all the other records in the list will have a status of "Out of Use". When a layer's status changes from "implemented" to "out of use", the layer's To Date will reflect the current system date.

4.	Click on the Update Hierarchy button to accept the new changes to the system.

Related System Topics

Layer Directory Maintenance


Associated Classes - Type Selection

Description

The Associated Classes - Type Selection form is used to select types according to different classifications.

Pre-requisites

Valid related subset types must be associated with the applicable functionality in system administration (Subset Table), to dynamically limit the selectable drop down list of applicable classification structures.

Steps

1.	Click on the [image] drop down button, and select the required class structure from the list.

2.	The relevant class types will automatically be displayed in the hierarchical tree view, with its description and level name.

3.	Click on the required class type record, and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection to the previous form.

Related System Topics

 Layer Directory Maintenance

Organisation and Person Functional Structure Maintenance

Multimedia Library Maintenance


Layer Directory Selection

Description

The Layer Directory Selection form is used to select a source layer for a generated layer. Only River and Transfer Feature layers may be selected as source layers. This form is also used to select background layers opened and displayed on the GIS. Only layers with an  ‘Implemented’ or ‘Out of Use’’ status will be available for selection.

Steps

Select a Layer Directory:

1.	To filter record enter the Layer name or the Layer Table Name and select the filter button

2.	Scroll down the list until you have found the required record.

3.	To select the record, either double-click on the required record, or click on the [image] Select button.

Important

When a source layer is used for a generated layer with a specific content, it cannot be used again for another generated layer with the same content.

Related System Topics

Layer Directory Maintenance


All layers radio button

Click on this button to display all the layers.


Work Layers radio button

Click on this button to display all the work layers in the master grid.


Generated Layers radio button

Click on this button to display all the WMS generated layers in the master grid.


Orientation Layers radio button

Click on this button to display all the WMS orientation layers in the master grid.


Report button

Click on this button to display a list of applicable reports to choose from the Report Decision Criteria form.


Report options radio button

Click on a specific radio button to select the required report option.


Organisation Address Report

This option is used to generate a Word document containing all the Organisation Addresses. Only Active organisations will be listed. When this report option is selected from Employee or Member, for a specific organisation, only the address records for the specific organisation will be displayed on the report.


Organisation Correspondence Address

This option is used to export a .csv document containing correspondence address information. Only Active organisations, postal and physical correspondence address information will be listed. When this report option is chosen from Employee or Member for a specific Organisation, only the correspondence address with Employees and Members for the specific Organisation will be exported.

This Organisation Correspondence Export Address option can also be chosen from the Liaison Entity Functional Structure for a specific Relationship Reason, e.g. Laboratory Analysis. Correspondence Addresses for all Active Organisations in the Functional Structure will be exported.

This option can be used for Mail Merge functionality.


Employee Address Report radio button

Click on this button to generate a word document containing all the Employees at a company and their address information. Only Active employees will be listed.


Employee .csv export radio button

Click on this button to generate a .csv document containing Employee information.


Electronic Address Export

This option is used to generate a .csv document containing Electronic Address information for all Maintenance Organisations when chosen from Organisation or all Persons chosen from Person Maintenance.


Telecommunications Address Export

This option is used to generate a .csv document containing Telecommunications Address information for all Maintenance Organisations when chosen from Organisation or all Persons chosen from Person Maintenance.


Postal Address Export

This option is used to generate a .csv document containing Postal Address information for all Maintenance Organisations when chosen from Organisation or all Persons chosen from Person Maintenance.


Physical Address Export

This option is used to generate a .csv document containing Physical Address information for all Maintenance Organisations when chosen from Organisation or all Persons chosen from Person Maintenance.


Electronic History Address List

This option is used to generate a .csv document containing Electronic Address history information for a specific Organisation or Person when Electronic Address History is opened from Person or Organisation information on Address Maintenance, or for a specific address when Electronic History Address view is opened from the Electronic Address Maintenance form.


Person List

This option is used to generate a .csv document containing Person information.


Employee List

This option is used to generate a .csv document containing Employee information.


Member List

This option is used to generate a .csv document containing Member information.


Employee Business Address Report

This option is used to generate a Word document containing Employee Business Address information.


Member Business Address Report

This option is used to generate a Word document containing Member Business Address information.


Telecommunication History Address List

This option is used to generate a .csv document containing Telecommunication Address history information for a specific Organisation or Person when Telecommunication Address History is opened from Person or Organisation information on Address Maintenance, or for a specific address when Telecommunication History Address view is opened from the Telecommunication Address Maintenance form.


Postal History Address List

This option is used to generate a .csv document containing Postal Address history information for a specific Organisation or Person when Postal Address History is opened from Person or Organisation information on Address Maintenance, or for a specific address when Postal History Address view is opened from the Postal Address Maintenance form.


Physical History Address List radio button

This option is used to generate a .csv document containing Physical Address history information for a specific Organisation or Person when Physical Address History is opened from Person or Organisation information on Address Maintenance, or for a specific address when Physical History Address view is opened from the Physical Address Maintenance form.


Print Report button

Click on this button to generate the selected report.


Organisation List

This option is used to generate a .csv document containing organisation information.


Only Active Layers checkbox

Description	The Only Active Layers checkbox is used to view only active layers. Uncheck this checkbox to view all the layers (currently and previously) used.

Format(s)	Checkbox

Examples	Monitoring Point


Source Layer

A Source layer serves as input to generate certain layers. Source Layers are Work Layers that have been used to produce Generated Layers. The geographical features on Source Layers are linked to the non-spatial information in WMS.


Layer Permissions button

Click on this button to display the system permissions that are available for the user currently logged into the system, for the focused layer. The permissions of the focused layer will be displayed.


Tracking History button

Click on this button to display a specific layer's tracking history, user-defined description, disclaimer and copyright information. The permissions of the focused layer will be displayed.


Preceding Layers button

Click on this button to differentiate and view a layer that is presently in use, compared with its historical layers that were used in the past, and its more recent layers containing newer information. You will also be able to view or maintain the entire history chain of layers.


Preceding Layer Name

Description	The Preceding Layer Name uniquely identifies the layer that was previously used.

Format(s)	Mixed Characters

Examples	SDE STD VIEW


Used State

Description	The Used State differentiates between layers that are presently in use, and therefore the information detail is most up to date, compared with the historical layers that were used in the past.

Format(s)	Mixed Characters

Examples	Current, Historical


Background Layer

Background Layer defines a list of layers that serves as a backdrop to the selected (front) layer. Any layer, Orientation, Work or Generated layers are possible background layer candidates.


Geographical Layer Types

Geographical Layer Types represent the type of geographical features that can be found in a specific Work or Generated layer.


Layers Directory

The Layers Directory contains a reference list of layers that can be used for WMS Spatial/Geo Graphical data representation. The list contains current and previous (historically) used layers.  Initiated layers that should be mapped to WMS features, but do not have a feature mapped to the non-spatial WMS will also be visible in this directory.


Layer Name in GIS

Description	The Layer Name identifies the geographical layer.

Format(s)	Maximum 40 uppercase characters

Examples	Monitoring Points


Layer ID in GIS

Description	The Layer ID uniquely identifies the geographical layer when it is registered in WMS.

Format(s)	Maximum 11 Numeric

Examples	900000077


Scale in GIS

Description	Scale is the representation of the layer's geographical features in relation to reality.

Format(s)	15 Characters

Examples	1:50 000


Layer Type in GIS

Description	Layer Type distinguishes between the different kinds of layers that can be used for WMS Geographical data representation. Three different Layer types exist namely:

•	Work Layer (contain geographical features and are linked to non-spatial information in WMS) This layer contains all the geographical features and information necessary for water resource management.

•	Orientation Layer (contain interpreted data that has been obtained from other sources that contribute to the WMS information, but will never become an integrated part of WMS) Orientation Layers have GIS features that are not linked to WMS feature ID's. These layers are only used for orientation on GIS, e.g. Towns 250, Roads 500, Dams 250, and therefore updated coverage is obtained from Geomatics.

•	Generated Layer (Layers contain geographical features as defined by the WMS and are created and maintained in the Water Resource Management sub-system) The geographical information contained in WMS Generated Layers is systematically generated from a source layer, and is managed via the WMS Systems functions.

Format(s)	W - Work

G - Generated

O - Orientation

Examples	W, G, or O


Layer Type

Description	Layer Type distinguishes between the different kinds of layers that can be used for WMS Geographical data representation. Three different Layer types exist namely:

•	Work Layer (contain geographical features and are linked to non-spatial information in WMS) This layer contains all the geographical features and information necessary for water resource management.

•	Orientation Layer (contain interpreted data that has been obtained from other sources that contribute to the WMS information, but will never become an integrated part of WMS) Orientation Layers have GIS features that are not linked to WMS feature ID's. These layers are only used for orientation on GIS, e.g. Towns 250, Roads 500, Dams 250, and therefore updated coverage is obtained from Geomatics.

•	Generated Layer (Layers contain geographical features as defined by the WMS and are created and maintained in the Water Resource Management sub-system) The geographical information contained in WMS Generated Layers is systematically generated from a source layer, and is managed via the WMS Systems functions.

Format(s)	  Mixed Case Characters maximum 15.

Examples	  Work, Generated, Orientation


Tracking History

Description	The Tracking History provides historical information about all the users or organizations who contributed to the layer information.

Format(s)	Mixed case characters.

Examples	1988 - Water Research Commission report number 118/1/88 (MC Dent, RE Schulze, GR Angus: Crop Water Requirements, deficits and water yield for irrigation planning in Southern Africa)

1989 - Water Research Commission report number 109/1/89 (MC Dent, SD Lynch, RE Schulze, AW Seed, HMM Wills: Mapping Mean Annual and other rainfall statistics over Southern Africa)

1994 - Updated zone boundaries obtained from CCWR.

1995 - Zone Rainfall and Temperature Characteristics obtained from CCWR and combined with zone boundaries to form a polygon coverage (Michael Silberbauer, IWQS)


Layer Description in GIS

Description	The Layer Description contains a description of the information contained within a specific layer.

Format(s)	Mixed case characters.

Examples	The boundaries of the climate zones were painstakingly estimated using an underlay of topography and a plot of the mean annual precipitation of all long-term rainfall stations. Care was taken to make the zones as small as possible in mountainous terrain. However, one of the major criteria was that each zone should contain a good long-term daily rainfall station. For this reason some of the smaller zones in mountainous areas have a wide range of altitudes and mean annual rainfall values. The zones in Lesotho are an example of this shortcoming.


Disclaimer

Description	The Disclaimer contains a statement by the layer owner in terms of their legal responsibility for data supplied.

Format(s)	Mixed case characters.

Examples	Neither the Department of Environmental Affairs and Tourism, the University of Pretoria nor is LAB accepts any legal responsibility, direct or indirect, resulting from the use of ENPATdata or the users Reference manual for any purpose whatsoever. The information contained in ENPAT has been collected as accurately as possible with due regard to the information capture scale, but occasional errors may surface and will be corrected as part of a continuing update programme. Warranty of ENPAT data by the Department will be limited to replacement of faulty computer media or documentation.


Copyright Information

Description	The Copyright Information identifies any legal constraints or warnings related to information.

Format(s)	Mixed case characters.

Examples	Copyright message: COPYRIGHT 1997 Government of the Republic of South Africa. All rights reserved.

Copyright warning: All rights are reserved by the Government of the Republic of South Africa in its Department of Environmental Affairs and Tourism. No part of ENPAT may be reproduced except for own use and for backup purposes. Enpat may not be sold or given away to anyone for any purpose whatsoever without prior consent from the Department. The Department will not hesitate to prosecute offenders in this regard, particularly in cases where ENPAT is misused for financial gain. No baseline data that has been used for the production of ENPAT may be used for any other purpose whatsoever. Such data must be acquired from the original sources if needed.


From Date in GIS

Description	The From Date is a system-generated date that indicates the first day a layer was registered on WMS.

Format(s)	yyyy-mm-dd

Important	This date is always before the To Date.

Examples	2001-10-10


To Date in GIS

Description	The To Date indicates the latest date that a current layer was actively used. The To Date helps to identify which specific layer is most current, and therefore contains the most up-to-date information. When a layer is superseded by another layer, the To Date is automatically updated by the current system date.

Format(s)	yyyy-mm-dd

Important	This date is always after the From Date. When a layer is not superseded, the To Date will have a default value of 9999-12-31.

Examples	2001-10-10


User Name in GIS

Description	The User Name identifies the person who is currently logged into the system.

Format(s)	Characters

Examples	wmsuser, jan niemand


Permission Name

Description	The Permission Name identifies the possible permissions for the user currently logged into the WMS and GIS functionality.

Format(s)	Maximum 30 uppercase characters

Examples	ADD, UPDATE, DELETE, READ, LINK/UNLINK, COPY


Layer Table Name

Description	The Layer Table Name identifies the SDE layer table found on the GIS Informix database.

Format(s)	Maximum 18 characters.

Examples           Example: Rivers_wms, Reach_wms


Link Group

Description	The Link Group identifies the correct historical succession of a layer within a group of layers containing the same geographical features.

Format(s)	Numeric

Examples           1


Activate Link button

Click on this button to link the active (focused) layer in the correct historical succession within the group of displayed layers.


Unlink button

Click on this button to unlink the active (focused) layer from the layers grouped in historical succession.


Geographical Type

Description	The Geographical Type is a grouping of geographical feature types.

Format(s)	Drop Down list containing class structures associated with work or generated layers.

Important	When linking Water Features or Transfer Features only one layer can be linked to a branch of the Geographical Layer table hierarchy. When linking Management Areas or Monitoring Features, the layers will be linked to the leaf or child level types to prevent overlapping of areas. For reaches where the Zoning Purpose hierarchy represents summarised levels, a layer per level in the hierarchy is expected. You can select any level of Reach zoning purpose values.

Examples	Valid Geographical Class values will be setup using the system administration functions. Subset types associated with work and generated layers.


Layer Status

Description	The Layer Status refers to the status of a layer at the various stages in a layer's life cycle.

Format(s)

Examples	Phase 1 - Initiated (when a layer is created on all WMS databases and registered in the layers directory), but the geographical features are not yet mapped to the non-spatial features in WMS.

Phase 2 - Implemented (when work or generated layers contain geographical features that are linked to corresponding WMS geographical features. Or when the newly created generated, work layer or orientation layer has been registered in the layers directory)

Phase 3 - Out of Use (when a new layer is implemented, it replaces the "outdated version" which becomes the "out of use" layer)


GIS Select Lat/Long button

Click on this button to open GIS and select the required latitude and longitude coordinates from a map.


Up Arrow

Click on this arrow to move the record up in order to change the status and order in which records appear in the history chain.


Down Arrow

Click on this arrow to move the record down in order to change the status and order in which records appear in the history chain.


Scale ID

Description	The Scale ID uniquely identifies Id of the scale.

Format(s)	Maximum 11 Numeric

Examples	900000077


Sample and Result Administration Overview

Description

The Sample and Result Administration module is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring, sample registration, results registration and analysis processes.

Scope

The Sample and Result Administration module deals with the following sub-modules:

•	Sample Administration (to enforce quality assurance on samples information)

•	Result Administration (to enforce quality assurance on analysis results)

•	LIMS Administration (to manage information transferred between LIMS and WMS)

•	Administrative Reports (used for managing quality assurance of sample information and analysis results)

Related System Topics

Sample Administration Overview

Result Administration Overview

LIMS Administration Overview

Administrative Reports Overview


Sample Administration Overview

Description

The Sample Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process and sample registration process. Where problem samples occur the sample administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the sample for analysis.

Scope

The Sample Administration form contains tabs that only appear when relevant to the selected sample and or variable. The following tabs are available:

•	Find tab (used to enter selection criteria to obtain sample information)

•	Registered Samples tab (provides a list of sample records that have met the requirements of the criteria selected in the Find tab)

•	Information tab (displays detailed information regarding a specific sample)

•	Programmes tab (provides a list of all monitoring programmes that have requested a specific sample)

•	Variables tab (provides a list of all the variables contained within a sample that are scheduled for analysis)

•	History tab (provides information on the status history of the sample)

•	Results tab (displays the monitoring results for samples)

•	Problem tab (lists all problems experienced with a sample)

Related System Topics

Sample Administration - Find tab

Sample Administration - Registered Samples tab

Sample Administration - Information tab

Sample Administration - Programmes tab

Sample Administration - Variables tab

Sample Administration - History tab

Sample Administration - Results tab

Sample Administration - Problem tab


Sample Administration - FIND tab

Description

The Sample Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process and sample registration process. Where problem samples occur the sample administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the sample for analysis.

The Find tab is used to enter selection criteria to obtain sample information.

Steps

Search for Sample Information:

1.	Enter the required search criteria information. You can search by entering one or more field criteria to refine the search in any of the following ways:

Date Ranges

•	Enter a Sampling Date From and Sampling Date To.

•	Enter the Registration Date From and Registration Date To.

Sample Status

•	Click on the relevant Sample Status checkbox (es) (Problem, Active, Rejected, and Released).

Selection Criteria

•	Enter a Sample ID Number.

•	Enter a Consolidation ID.

•	Enter an Analyst Sample Reference Number.

•	Enter a Sample Type ID.

•	Enter a Monitoring Point ID.

•	Enter a Laboratory ID.

•	Enter a Monitor ID.

2.	Once you have entered the search criteria, click on the Registered Samples tab to select the required record from the list.

Related System Topics

Sample Administration - Registered Samples tab

Sample Administration - Information tab

Sample Administration - Programmes tab

Sample Administration - Variables tab

Sample Administration - History tab

Sample Administration - Results tab

Sample Administration - Problem tab


Sample Administration - REGISTERED SAMPLES tab

Description

The Sample Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process and sample registration process. Where problem samples occur the sample administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the sample for analysis.

The Registered Samples tab provides a list of sample records that have met the requirements of the criteria selected in the Find tab.

Steps

Tabs relevant to the specific sample will be displayed.

1.	Scroll through the records in the list, and click on the required sample record to highlight it.

2.	If required, click on the Print Result Sheet button to print results.  If no sample results are available, a sheet-input form will also be printed to manually record results during analysis.

3.	If required, click on the Print Label button, if a sample label needs to be reprinted.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Sample Administration - Find tab

Sample Administration - Information tab

Sample Administration - Programmes tab

Sample Administration - Variables tab

Sample Administration - History tab

Sample Administration - Results tab

Sample Administration - Problem tab


Sample Administration - INFORMATION tab

Description

The Sample Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process and sample registration process. Where problem samples occur the sample administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the sample for analysis.

The Information tab provides detailed information regarding a specific sample.

How to deal with problem samples:

1.	Activate the Sample by clicking on the Activate button. This will open the Activate Sample form. Enter the ID number or click on the Zoom button Click on the required reason, and click on the select button.

2.	Reject the Sample by clicking on the Reject Sample button. This will open the Reject Sample form. Click on the required reason, and click on the select button.

3.	If it is a replicated sample. Click on the Replicated Sample button to view the original sample information. Then either activate or reject the replicated sample by clicking on the Reject or Activate button.

4.	If sample information is incorrect you can edit the following field information: Sample Begin Depth, Depth Interval, End Depth, End Date, End Time and Time Interval. Effect the changes, then press the Activate Button.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Sample Administration - Find tab

Sample Administration - Registered Samples tab

Sample Administration - Programmes tab

Sample Administration - Variables tab

Sample Administration - History tab

Sample Administration - Results tab

Sample Administration - Problem tab


Sample Administration - PROGRAMMES tab

Description

The Sample Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process and sample registration process. Where problem samples occur the sample administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the sample for analysis.

The Programmes tab provides a list of all monitoring programmes that have requested a specific sample.

Steps

1.	Click on the Programme Samples button to view the specific programme.

2.	From the View Programme Samples form, more detail is available on schedules etc.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Sample Administration - Find tab

Sample Administration - Registered Samples tab

Sample Administration - Information tab

Sample Administration - Variables tab

Sample Administration - History tab

Sample Administration - Results tab

Sample Administration - Problem tab


Sample Administration - VARIABLES tab

Description

The Sample Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process and sample registration process. Where problem samples occur the sample administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the sample for analysis.

The Variables tab provides a list of all the variables contained within a sample that are scheduled for analysis.

Steps

1.	Click on the Programme Variable button to display detail information for the specific programme for a specific variable.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Sample Administration - Find tab

Sample Administration - Registered Samples tab

Sample Administration - Information tab

Sample Administration - Programmes tab

Sample Administration - History tab

Sample Administration - Results tab

Sample Administration - Problem tab


Sample Administration - HISTORY tab

Description

The Sample Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process and sample registration process. Where problem samples occur the sample administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the sample for analysis.

The History tab provides information on the status history of the sample.

Steps

This is a display only tab.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Sample Administration - Find tab

Sample Administration - Registered Samples tab

Sample Administration - Information tab

Sample Administration - Programmes tab

Sample Administration - Variables tab

Sample Administration - Results tab

Sample Administration - Problem tab


Sample Administration - RESULTS tab

Description

The Sample Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process and sample registration process. Where problem samples occur the sample administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the sample for analysis.

Where applicable, the Results tab displays the monitoring results for samples.

Steps

1.	To view Group Quality Control tests, click on the Group QC button to view all tests performed on a specific variable.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Sample Administration - Find tab

Sample Administration - Registered Samples tab

Sample Administration - Information tab

Sample Administration - Programmes tab

Sample Administration - Variables tab

Sample Administration - History tab

Sample Administration - Problem tab


Sample Administration - PROBLEM tab

Description

The Sample Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process and sample registration process. Where problem samples occur the sample administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the sample for analysis.

The Problem tab identifies problems experienced with a sample.

Steps

1.	View the sample's problem.

2.	Open the information tab and make the decision to either reject or activate the sample.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Sample Administration - Find tab

Sample Administration - Registered Samples tab

Sample Administration - Information tab

Sample Administration - Programmes tab

Sample Administration - Variables tab

Sample Administration - History tab

Sample Administration - Results tab


Sample Status Change Reason Maintenance

Description

The Sample Status Change Reason Maintenance form is used as part of the sample problem resolution process. Once a sample with a problem has been resolved, the Sample Reasons form is used to provide an explanation for the decision.

Steps

Add a Sample Status Change Reason:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter a Description.

3.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit a Sample Status Change Reason:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Sample Status Change Reason:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form e.g. Sample Status History.

1.	Click on the Sample Reason record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

Related System Topics

Sample Administration Overview


Lookup Sample Reasons

Description

The Lookup Sample Reasons form is used as part of the sample problem resolution process. Once a sample with a problem has been resolved, the Lookup Sample Reasons form is used to select an explanation for the decision.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record, and click on the Select button to return the selected information to the previous form.

Related System Topics

Sample Administration Overview


Result Administration Overview

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

Scope

The Result Administration form contains tabs that only appear when relevant to the selected sample and or variable. The following tabs are available:

•	Find tab (used to enter selection criteria to obtain sample information)

•	Samples tab (provides a list of sample records that have met the requirements of the criteria selected in the Find tab)

•	Information tab (displays detailed information regarding a specific sample)

•	Not Received tab (provides a list of all a sample's monitoring variables that do not have results)

•	Illegal Results tab (provides a list of all results containing invalid information)

•	Reject Not Received tab (displays all Not Received results that have been rejected)

•	History tab (displays the status history for results)

•	Rejected Illegal tab (displays illegal results for a specific sample that have been rejected)

•	Verification Problems (displays all problems that can occur with a variable)

•	Results (displays all variable results within a specific sample)

•	Group QC's (displays the results of quality control tests performed)

•	QC Problems (displays all variables that failed QC tests)

•	Release Problems (displays reasons for results not being released)

•	Derived Calculation Problems (displays Calculation Problems during the calculation of the derived variables of a sample)

•	Q C Calculation Problems (displays Calculation Problems during the calculation of the Group QC’s of a sample)

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Verification Problems

Result Administration - Results

Result Administration - Group QC's

Result Administration - QC Problems

Result Administration - Release Problems

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - FIND tab

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Find tab is used to enter selection criteria to obtain sample information.

Steps

Search for Sample Information:

1.	Enter the required search criteria information. You can search by entering one or more field criteria to refine the search in any of the following ways:

Date Ranges

•	Enter a Sampling Date From and Sampling Date To.

•	Enter the Registration Date From and Registration Date To.

Sample Status

•	Click on the relevant Sample Status checkbox (es) (Problem, Active, Rejected, and Released).

Selection Criteria

•	Enter a Sample ID Number.

•	Enter a Consolidation ID.

•	Enter an Analyst Sample Reference Number.

•	Enter a Sample Type ID.

•	Enter a Monitoring Point ID.

•	Enter a Laboratory ID.

•	Enter a Monitor ID.

2.	Once you have entered the search criteria, click on the Samples tab to select the required record from the list.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Verification Problems

Result Administration - Results

Result Administration - Group QC's

Result Administration - QC Problems

Result Administration - Release Problems

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - SAMPLES tab

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Samples tab provides a list of sample records that have met the requirements of the criteria selected in the Find tab.

Steps

Tabs relevant to the specific sample will be displayed.

1.	Scroll through the records in the list, and click on the required sample record to highlight it.

2.	If required, click on the Print Result Sheet button to print available sample results.

3.	If problems results have been resolved, or there are no problem results, the Global Accept Results button will be active. Clicking on the button will release results to the database.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Verification Problems

Result Administration - Results

Result Administration - Group QC's

Result Administration - QC Problems

Result Administration - Release Problems

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - INFORMATION tab

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Information tab provides detailed information regarding a specific sample.

Steps

This is a display only tab.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Verification Problems

Result Administration - Results

Result Administration - Group QC's

Result Administration - QC Problems

Result Administration - Release Problems

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - NOT RECEIVED tab

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Not Received tab provides a list of all a sample's monitoring variables that do not have results.

Steps

All the Monitoring variable records that do not have results are displayed. All Not Received records have to be dealt with before you can continue with the process. There are 3 options available to resolve Not Received variables:

1.	Reject all the variables by clicking on the Reject All button.

2.	Reject a single monitoring variable by clicking on the required record, and clicking on the Reject button.

3.	Enter results for some or all the monitoring variables, and when finished click on the Last Result button.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Verification Problems Tab

Result Administration - Results tab

Result Administration - Group QC's tab

Result Administration - QC Problems tab

Result Administration - Release Problems tab

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - ILLEGAL RESULTS tab

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Illegal Results tab provides a list of all results containing invalid information.

Steps

1.	View the Problem Description at the bottom of the form.

•	Either correct the information in the Peripheral Information module.

•	OR Reject each Monitoring variable result record individually by clicking on the Reject Result button.

2.	Once the information has been corrected, the system automatically runs a quality control and verification process.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Verification Problems Tab

Result Administration - Results Tab

Result Administration - Group QC's Tab

Result Administration - QC Problems Tab

Result Administration - Release Problems Tab

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - REJECT NOT RECEIVED tab

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Reject Not Received tab displays all the variables with not received results that have been rejected.

Steps

This is a display only tab.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Verification Problems Tab

Result Administration - Results Tab

Result Administration - Group QC's Tab

Result Administration - QC Problems Tab

Result Administration - Release Problems tab

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - HISTORY tab

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The History tab displays the status history of results.

Steps

    This is a display only form.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Verification Problems tab

Result Administration - Results tab

Result Administration - Group QC's tab

Result Administration - QC Problems tab

Result Administration - Release Problems tab

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - REJECTED ILLEGAL tab

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Rejected Illegal tab displays all the illegal results for a specific sample that have been rejected.

Steps

This is a display only form.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Verification Problems Tab

Result Administration - Results Tab

Result Administration - Group QC's Tab

Result Administration - QC Problems Tab

Result Administration - Release Problems Tab

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Derived Calculation Problems tab displays Calculation Problems during the calculation of the derived variables of a sample

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Results Tab

Result Administration - Group QC's Tab

Result Administration - QC Problems Tab

Result Administration - Release Problems Tab

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - Quality Control Calculation Problems

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Quality Control Calculation Problems tab displays Calculation Problems during the calculation of the Group QC’s of a sample.

Steps

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Results Tab

Result Administration - Group QC's Tab

Result Administration - QC Problems Tab

Result Administration - Release Problems Tab

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems


Result Administration - VERIFICATION PROBLEMS tab

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Verification Problems tab displays all the problems that can occur with a variable.

Steps

1.	Click on the View Problems button to view variable problems.

•	Either activate a result by clicking on the Activate button. The Result Reason form will automatically be displayed. Click on the relevant Result Activation Reason, and click on the Select button.

•	OR Reject the result by clicking on the Reject button. The Result Reason form will automatically be displayed. Click on the relevant Result Reject Reason, and click on the Select button.

2.	Once the information has been corrected, the system automatically runs a quality control and verification process.

3.	Some verification problems are automatically activated when clicking on the affected variable.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Results Tab

Result Administration - Group QC's Tab

Result Administration - QC Problems Tab

Result Administration - Release Problems Tab

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - RESULTS tab

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Results tab displays all variable results within a specific sample.

Steps

1.	Use the scroll bar to scroll up and down to view variable problems. You can follow any of the following steps to resolve problems:

•	Send results for Reanalysis by clicking on the Reanalysis button. The Reason for Status Change form will open, click on the [image] Zoom button to select a reason from the Lookup Reanalyse Reason Codes form.

OR

•	Accept a value by providing a Reason. Click on the Accept button to open the Reason for Status Change form. Click on the [image] Zoom button to select a reason from the Lookup Result Reason form.

OR

•	Reject a result by clicking on the Reject button. The Reason for Status Change form will open, click on the [image] Zoom button to select a reason from the Lookup Result Reason form.

OR

•	View result problems by clicking on the View Problems button.

•	View Reanalysis history by clicking on the Re-analysis History button.

•	View Result History by clicking on the Result History button.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Verification Problems Tab

Result Administration - Group QC's Tab

Result Administration - QC Problems Tab

Result Administration - Release Problems Tab

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - GROUP QC's tab

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Group Quality Control tab is used to display quality control results and the group of variables contained or used in the tests.

Steps

This is a display only form.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Verification Problems Tab

Result Administration - Results Tab

Result Administration - QC Problems Tab

Result Administration - Release Problems Tab

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - QC PROBLEMS tab

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Quality Control Problems tab displays variables and results that have failed the Quality Control tests.

Steps

1.	Use the scroll bar to scroll up and down to view variable problems. You can follow any of the following steps to resolve problems:

•	Enter reanalysis values by clicking the Receive Reanalysis button. The Receive Reanalysis Value form will automatically be displayed. Enter a Reanalysis Date, Result Numerical Value, Detection Limit and click on the Accept Value button.

OR

•	Accept a value by providing a Reason. Click on the Accept button to open the Reason for Status Change form. Click on the [image] Zoom button to select a reason from the Lookup Result Reason form.

OR

•	Reject a result by clicking on the Reject button. The Reason for Status Change form will open, click on the [image] Zoom button to select a reason from the Lookup Result Reason form.

OR

•	View result problems by clicking on the View Problems button.

OR

•	View re-analysis history by clicking on the Re-analysis History button.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Verification Problems Tab

Result Administration - Results Tab

Result Administration - Group QC's Tab

Result Administration - Release Problems Tab

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Administration - RELEASE PROBLEMS tab

Description

The Result Administration form is used to enforce quality assurance on the monitoring process, results registration and analysis processes. Where problem results do occur the result administrator takes the decision to either reject or activate the requested analysis result.

The Release Problems tab displays variables and results not released by clicking on the Global Accept button.

Steps

This is a display only form.

Important

Once you have performed a search for a sample, you can click on any of the available tabs to display information relevant to the sample.

Related System Topics

Result Administration - Find Tab

Result Administration - Samples Tab

Result Administration - Information Tab

Result Administration - Not Received Tab

Result Administration - Illegal Results Tab

Result Administration - Reject Not Received Tab

Result Administration - History Tab

Result Administration - Rejected Illegal Tab

Result Administration - Verification Problems Tab

Result Administration - Results Tab

Result Administration - Group QC's Tab

Result Administration - Release Problems Tab

Result Administration - Derived Calculation Problems

Result Administration - QC Calculation Problems


Result Quality Control Method Maintenance

Description

The Result Quality Control Method Maintenance form is used to maintain the quality control methods for performing quality assurance on the analysed value of a result. Quality control can be performed on a single result value or a group of variables.

Steps

Add a QC Method:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button or press F4 to insert a new line.

2.	Enter a Result QC Method Description and tab.

3.	In the Min/Max field, click on the [image] Drop Down button and select either a minimum or maximum, and tab.

4.	In the Result Quality Control Group Indicator, click on the [image] Drop Down button and select either a yes or no and tab.  Note: if the indicator shows yes then quality control method is for group of variables, and no then the quality control is for a specific variable

5.	In the Critical Error Indicator click on the [image] Drop Down button and select either a yes or no and tab.  Note: if the indicator shows yes the result cannot be accepted, and no the result can be accepted

6.	Result Quality Control Method ID will be automatically displayed, as it is a system-generated serial number.  Note: Result Quality Control Method ID will only be generated once the record has been created

 Note:  the Maintenance button will close the Result Quality Control Method Maintenance form and open the Maintain Decision Criteria Wizard where the Single, Survey and Multiple Variable Result QC are maintained

 Note: The History button will close the Result Quality Control Method Maintenance form and open the Display Result Quality Control form

 Note: The View button will close the Result Quality Control Method Maintenance form and open the View Decision Criteria for Result QC Method View form from where the result Quality Control method for variable are viewed

 Note: The Exit button will close the Result Quality Control Method Maintenance form and return to the main menu

 Note: The Next button to close the Result Quality Control Method Maintenance form and open the Monitoring Variable View (displaying all variable details for the Result quality Control (e.g. Variable Type, Monitoring Variable Class and the Fundamental Composite Type)) or the Result QC Calc Method M form depending on whether the Result Quality Control Group Indicator is Yes or No

Modify a Result QC Method:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Modify a Value:

1.	Click on the Modify button on the lower right on the form.

2.	A form will appear, enter a New Value in the field, and click on the Modify button to effect the change.

Delete a QC Method:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the QC Method record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable View

Result QC Calc Method M


Result Status Change Reason Maintenance

Description

The Result Status Change Reason Maintenance form is used as part of the result problem resolution process. Once a sample result with a problem has been resolved, the Result Reason form is used to provide an explanation for the decision.

Pre-Requisites

The LIMS connection must be active in order to perform any of the add, edit or delete steps.

Steps

Add a Result Status Change Reason:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter a Reason Description and tab.

3.	Click on the Next row button to accept the new record.

Edit a Result Status Change Reason:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Result Status Change Reason:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form e.g. Result Status History.

1.	Click on the Result Reason record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

Related System Topics


Lookup Result Reason

Description

The Lookup Result Reason form is used as part of the result problem resolution process. Once a sample result with a problem has been resolved, the Lookup Result Reason form is used to select an explanation for the decision.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record, and click on the Select button to return the selected information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Analysis Group View

Description

The Analysis Group form is a lookup form used to view analysis groups and the variables associated with the groups. This form is also used to send new groups to LIMS (Departmental Laboratory Information Management System) that were not automatically sent.

Steps

This is a display-only form.

Important

Send to LIMS button - send new groups to LIMS.

Related System Topics

Query LIMS Analysis Methods


LIMS Administration Overview

Description

The LIMS (Departmental Laboratory Information Management System) is used to perform the administrative functions for the transfer of information between WMS and the LIMS system.

Scope

The LIMS Administration high-level component deals with the following functions:

•	Sample Transfer Error Report

•	Get Results from LIMS

•	Generate Force Accept Number

•	Re-Analysis Rejection Reasons

•	LIMS Transfer Error List

•	Sample Box and Position Query

•	Display LIMS Connection Status

•	Query LIMS Analysis Methods

Related System Topics

Sample Transfer Error Report

Get Results from LIMS

Generate Force Accept Number

LIMS Transfer Error List

Sample Box and Position Query

Display LIMS Connection Status

Query LIMS Analysis Methods


Sample Transfer Error Report

Description

The Sample Transfer Error Report form is used to obtain a report of errors occurring during the transfer of sample information to LIMS in a specific period.

Steps

1.	Enter dates for the period in which samples were transferred to the LIMS system.

Important

Related System Topics

Analysis Groups

LIMS Transfer Error List


Get Results from LIMS

Description

The Get Results from LIMS menu option is a manual function used to obtain sample results from LIMS. Usually a batch programme runs transferring the information, however when problems with the batch programme arise, the results need to be manually obtained with this function.

Steps

1.	Display LIMS connection status.

2.	If the connection exists, click on the Get Results from LIMS button.

Important

Running this programme manually may impact on the speed of the WMS system.

Related System Topics

Display LIMS connection status


Query LIMS Analysis Methods

Description

The Query LIMS Analysis Methods is a lookup form used to view the analysis method associations between LIMS and WMS.

Steps

1.	This is a display only form.

2.	Click on the View WMS only button to only view WMS information.

Related System Topics


Generate Force Accept Number

Description

The Generate Force Accept Number is used to obtain a force accept number to verify a packing list containing missing samples.

Steps

1.	Click on the OK button.

Important

This function can only be performed by authorised personnel.

Related System Topics


LIMS Transfer Error List

Description

The LIMS Transfer Error List is used as part of the LIMS transfer error resolution and provides an explanation for the errors experienced.

Steps

Add a Transfer Error:

1.	Enter a description.

Edit a Transfer Error:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Transfer Error:

Deletion will only be possible if the record is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the Result Reason record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

Related System Topics

Sample Transfer Error Report


Sample Box and Position Query

Description

The Sample Box and Position Query is used to view sample identification numbers and sample information during the worksheet packing process.

Steps

1.	Enter the Sample Box Number (receive box number) in uppercase, and tab.

2.	Enter the Position Number.

Related System Topics


Display LIMS Connection Status

Description

The Display LIMS Connection Status form is used to verify the LIMS connection status to determine that the connection between the LIMS and WMS programmes is active.

Steps

This is a display only form.

Important

If either of the fields displays a "False" status, the connection does not exist.

Related System Topics


Number of Samples Registered Filter Criteria

Description

The Number of Samples Registered Filter Criteria form is used to view the amount of samples scheduled, received, with problems, released and rejected for a specific time period.

Steps

1.	Enter an Analysis Date From and tab.

2.	Enter an Analysis Date To.

3.	Click on the View button to display and/or print the report.

4.	Displaying problem statistics is optional.

Related System Topics


Number of Results Registered Filter Criteria

Description

The Number of Results Registered Filter Criteria form is used to view the amount of analysis scheduled, received, with problems, released and rejected for a specific time period.

Steps

1.	Enter an Analysis Date From and tab.

2.	Enter an Analysis Date To.

3.	Click on the View button.

Related System Topics


Released Results Audit Difference

Description

The Released Results Audit Difference is used to validate that the number of results with a release status corresponds with the number of actual results released. If there is a difference during this audit, the specific samples will be identified. These samples need to be unreleased and re-released using the Results Administrative forms.

Steps

This is a display only form.

Important

Only the Central Results Administrator can perform this function.

Related System Topics


Comparison between Registered and Released Results Filter Criteria

Description

The Comparison between Registered and Released Results Filter Criteria form is used to verify that the relevant analysis information and sample's result values has been correctly released. If there is a difference in analysis information, the sample needs to be unreleased, then use the Results Administration forms to release the sample.

Steps

1.	Enter the Sample ID Number.

2.	Click on the View button.

3.	To unrelease results, click on the Unrelease button.

Important

Only the Central Results Administrator can perform this function.

Related System Topics


Administrative Reports Overview

Description

The Administrative Reports Overview module is used to print administration reports regarding sample and result administration.

Scope

The Administrative Reports sub-module deals with the following sub-modules:

•	Sample Registration Productivity Report for users Filter Criteria

•	Analysis Registration Productivity Report for Analyst Filter Criteria

•	Analysis Productivity Trend Report Filter Criteria

•	Process Time Analysis Report

•	Sample Problem Reports

•	Analysis Problem Reports

Related System Topics

Sample Productivity Report

Analysis Registration Productivity Report for Analyst Filter Criteria

Analysis Productivity Trend Report Filter Criteria

Process Time Analysis Report

Sample Problem Reports

Analysis Problem Report


Analysis Registration Productivity Report for Analyst Filter Criteria

Description

The Analysis Registration Productivity Report for Analyst Filter Criteria provides information on the amount of WMS results that were analysed and released by a laboratory or monitor, within a specific time period.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Enter a Date From and tab (YYYY-MM-DD).

2.	Enter a Date To and tab (YYYY-MM-DD).

3.	Click on the Print or Display Samples button to obtain the required report.

Important

The information displayed is subject to the correct interpretation of the report.

Related System Topics

Administrative Reports Overview


Analysis Productivity Trend Report Filter Criteria

Description

The Analysis Productivity Trend Report Filter Criteria is used to obtain a summarisation report of the progress of samples with regard to the analysis status. The kind of information that can be obtained is:

•	Sample registered in period

•	Sample analyses completed in period

•	Sample analyses outstanding

•	As well as factors influencing productivity

Steps

1.	Enter an Analyst ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Laboratory Lookup form, and select the required Analyst record.

2.	Enter a Date From and tab (YYYY-MM).

3.	Enter a Date To and tab (YYYY-MM).

4.	Click on the Print button to obtain the required report.

Related System Topics

Administrative Reports Overview


Process Time Analysis Report

Description

The Process Time Analysis Report is used to obtain a summarisation of the time taken to process a sample from sample collection to releasing of results. The time period for each step in the analysis process is displayed.

Steps

Print a Process Time Analysis Report:

1.	Enter a Date From and a Date To, and tab.

2.	Enter a Sample Type ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup Sample Type form, and select a record by clicking on the record, and clicking on the Select button, then tab.

3.	Enter a Laboratory ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Lookup Laboratory form, and select a record by clicking on the record, and clicking on the Select button, then tab.

4.	Click on either the Detail or Summary Report button to select the kind of report you require.

5.	Click on the Print button.

Related System Topics

Administrative Reports Overview


Sample Problem Reports Filter Criteria

Description

The Sample Problem Reports Filter Criteria form is used to obtain a detailed report on sample problems found during sample registration.

Steps

1.	Enter criteria for the report you require: Please note that not all the fields will be active at all times.

Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this report. You can obtain a Sample Problem Report in one of the following ways:

Date Ranges

•	Enter a Sampling Date From and Sampling Date To.

•	Enter the Registration Date From and Registration Date To.

Sample Status

•	Click on the relevant Sample Status button (Problem, Active, Rejected, and Released.

Selection Criteria

•	Enter a Sample ID Number.

•	Enter a Consolidation ID.

•	Enter a Sample Type ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button and select the required record.

•	Enter a Laboratory ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button and select the required record.

•	Enter a Monitor ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button and select the required record.

2.	Once your report selection criteria has been chosen, click on the Print Report button.

Related System Topics

Administrative Reports Overview


Analysis Problem Report Filter Criteria

Description

The Analysis Problem Report Filter Criteria form is used to obtain a detailed report on all problem results as specified in the search criteria.

Steps

1.	Enter criteria for the report you require.

Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this report. You can obtain a result problem report in one of the following ways:

Date Ranges

•	Enter a Sampling Date From and Sampling Date To.

•	Enter a Sample Completed date range.

Sample Status

•	Click on the relevant Sample Status button (Problem, Active, Rejected, and Released).

Selection Criteria

•	Enter a Sample ID Number.

•	Enter a Sample Type ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button and select the required record.

•	Enter an Analyst ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button and select the required record.

•	Enter a Laboratory ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button and select the required record.

•	Enter a Monitor ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button and select the required record.

2.	Once your report selection criteria has been chosen, click on the Print Report button.

Related System Topics

Administrative Reports Overview


How to deal with problem samples

I	Sample type 12: Macro-IWQS

Possible problems:

1.	Group QC failure (ANCAT and Calculated EC vs Measured EC)

2.	Nitrogen check

3.	Phosphate check

4.	Result exceeds QC maximum

5.	Result below QC minimum

6.	Result exceeds Absolute maximum

7.	Result below Absolute minimum

8.	Verification problems such as

•	Preservative expired

•	Analysis date not entered

•	Duplicate variable results

9.	Results not received

10.	Illegal results

Possible solutions:

All results failing any QC procedure, are marked for re-analysis and sent to the LIMS. On the LIMS, these re-analysis requests can be accepted and the sample re-analysed, or rejected with a reason.

1.	Currently no policy in this regard has been formulated, so no results are rejected because of Group QC failure. However, in some instances the laboratory rejects re-analysis requests and so endorses results failing Group QC’s, where after these results are released to the database, with accept reason "LABORATORY ENDORSED VALUE". If the results have a history, the Results Administrator compares the results in the history, and if the comparison is good, the results are released.

2.	KJEL N result is rejected with reason " REJECTED DUE TO RESULTS QC PROBLEMS".

3.	TP result is rejected with reason "REJECTED DUE TO RESULTS QC PROBLEMS".

4.	Result is accepted if endorsed by laboratory, and released to the database.

5.	If results pass group QC’s, those below QC minimum is accepted with reason "VALUE APPROVED BY LABORATORY QC MEASURES", and released to the database.

6.	Result is accepted if endorsed by laboratory, and released to the database.

7.	Consult with laboratory.

8.	*Activate result by automatic activation

*Enter date if known, or activate result with reason "ANALYSIS DATE NOT RECEIVED"

*Reject the not wanted result and activate the other by automatic activation

9.	Reject variables for which there are no results.

10.	Investigate the reason for the result being marked illegal, and correct the cause of the problem, or reject the result.

II	Sample type 339: Organic Carbon

Possible problems:

1.	Verification problems (preservative expired)\

2.	Result exceeds QC maximum

3.	Result below QC minimum

4.	Result exceeds Absolute maximum

5.	Result below Absolute minimum

Possible solutions:

1.	Accept results

2.	Result is accepted if endorsed by laboratory, and released to the database

3.	Result is accepted if endorsed by laboratory, and released to the database

4.	Result is accepted if endorsed by laboratory, and released to the database.

5.	Consult with laboratory

III	Sample type 303:Trace-IWQS

Possible problems:

1.	Verification problems

•	Analysis date not entered

•	Duplicate variable results

2.	Result exceeds QC maximum

3.	Result below QC minimum

4.	Result exceeds Absolute maximum

5.	Result below Absolute minimum

6.	Illegal results

7.	Results not received.

Possible solutions:

1.	If the analysis date is known, it can be entered. If the date is not known, the result is activated with reason "Analysis date not received".

If the variable has duplicate results, the incorrect result is rejected and the correct one accepted.

2.	Accept or reject result with reason.

3.	Accept or reject result with reason

4.	Consult with laboratory.

5.	Consult with laboratory

6.	Investigate the reason for the result being marked illegal, and correct the cause of the problem, or reject the result.

7.	Reject results not received.

IV	Sample type 333: COD

Possible problems:

1.	Verification problems

2.	Result exceeds QC maximum

3.	Result below QC minimum

4.	Result exceeds Absolute maximum

5.	Result below Absolute minimum

6.	Illegal results

Possible solutions:

1.	If the analysis date is known, it can be entered. If the date is not known, the result is activated with reason "Analysis date not received".

If the variable has duplicate results, the incorrect result is rejected and the correct one accepted.

2.	Accept or reject result with reason.

3.	Accept or reject result with reason

4.	Consult with laboratory.

5.	Consult with laboratory

6.	Investigate the reason for the result being marked illegal, and correct the cause of the problem, or reject the result.

V	Sample type 343: Algal ID-Lab preparation and 87: Algal ID-Field preparation

Possible problems:

1.	Illegal results

2.	Results not received.

3.	Verification problems

Preservative expired

Possible solutions:

1.	Investigate the reason for the result being marked illegal, and correct the cause of the problem, or reject the result.

2.	Results not received.

3.	Activate.

VI	Sample type 338: Microbiol. Field analysis-IWQS

Possible problems:

1.	Illegal results

2.	Results not received.

3.	Verification problems

Preservative expired

Possible solutions:

1.	Investigate the reason for the result being marked illegal, and correct the cause of the problem, or reject the result.

2.	Results not received.

3.	Activate.

VII	Sample type 91: Hydrobiological-Field preparation and 344: Hydrobiological-IWQS Lab preparation

Possible problems:

1.	Illegal results

2.	Results not received.

3.	Verification problems

Preservative expired

Possible solutions:

1.	Investigate the reason for the result being marked illegal, and correct the cause of the problem, or reject the result.

2.	Results not received.

3.	Activate.

VIII	Sample type 81: Microbiological-IWQS

Possible problems:

1.	Illegal results

2.	Results not received.

3.	Verification problems

Preservative expired

Possible solutions:

1.	Investigate the reason for the result being marked illegal, and correct the cause of the problem, or reject the result.

2.	Results not received.

3.	Activate.

IX	Sample type 324: Turbidity-IWQS

Possible problems:

1.	Verification problems (preservative expired)\

2.	Result exceeds QC maximum

3.	Result below QC minimum

4.	Result exceeds Absolute maximum

5.	Result below Absolute minimum

Possible solutions:

1.	Accept result if analysis was done within 2 months of sampling date

2.	Accept or reject result with reason.

3.	Accept or reject result with reason

4.	Consult with laboratory.

5.	Consult with laboratory

Sample type 341:	 Suspended solids-Field prep. and 345: Suspended solids-IWQS Lab prep.

Possible problems:

1.	Verification problems (preservative expired)\

2.	Result exceeds QC maximum

3.	Result below QC minimum

4.	Result exceeds Absolute maximum

5.	Result below Absolute minimum

Possible solutions:

1.	Accept result if analysis was done within 2 months of sampling date

2.	Accept or reject result with reason.

3.	Accept or reject result with reason

4.	Consult with laboratory.

5.	Consult with laboratory


Result QC Variable View

Description

The Result QC Variable View form is used to view the Monitoring Variables linked to the Result QC Method ID or the Result QC Methods linked to the Monitoring Variable ID depending on whether it was called from the Monitoring Variable View form or Result QC Method Maintenance form respectively

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable View

Result QC Method Maintenance


Result QC Variable Maintenance

Description

The Result QC Variable Maintenance form is used to maintain Result QC for Variables. This is an abstract form for the Result QC Variable Maintenance form of the Single, Multiple and Survey Variable Result QC Maintenance form.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The Result QC Method Id, Result QC Method Description, Monitoring Variable Id, Monitoring Variable Abbreviation, Monitoring Variable Name, start date, start time, end date, end time, User Login and User server will be automatically be displayed

2.	Enter the Minimum or Maximum value that a numeric value can be tested against

3.	Click the Modify QC button to start or Modify the Quality Control Method as of the current system date, one of the two pop up screens will open depending on whether the variable had value or not prompting the user to enter the new value

4.	Enter the Min/Max value then click on the [image] modify button

5.	Click the End QC button to end a specific Quality Control Method as of the current system date

 Note: The History button will open the Result Quality Control History View form to display the history of the record in focus

 Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Monitoring Variable view form

6.	Click Exit to close the form and return to the main menu.

How to Modify or Start a Quality Control Method

1.	Click the [image] Modify button to start or Modify the Single Quality Control Method as of the current system date; one of the two pop up screens will open depending on whether the variable had value or not prompting the user to enter the new value

2.	Enter the Min/Max value then click on the [image] Modify or the Start button

Edit Result QC Variable:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete Result QC Variable:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record may delete the record only if the used-indicator is unchecked.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Single Variable Result QC Maintenance form

Multiple Variable Result QC Maintenance form

Survey Variable Result QC Maintenance form


Single Variable Result QC Maintenance

Description

The Single Variable Result QC Maintenance form is used to maintain Result QC for Single Variables. This form does not have any additional fields to the abstract from (Result QC Method Maintenance from)

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The Result Quality Method Id, Result Quality Method Description, Monitoring Variable Id, Monitoring Variable Abbreviation, Monitoring Variable Name, start date, start time, end date, end time, User server and User Login will be automatically be displayed

2.	Enter the Minimum or Maximum value that a numeric value can be tested against

3.	Click the Modify QC button to start or modify the Single Quality Control Method as of the current system date.

4.	Click the End QC button to end a specific Quality Control Method as of the current system date

5.	Click Exit to close the form and return to the main menu.

Related System Topics

Result QC Variable Maintenance


Multiple Variable Result QC Maintenance

Description

The Multiple Variable Result QC Maintenance form is used to maintain Result QC for Multiple Variables.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The Result Quality Method Id, Result Quality Method Description, Monitoring Variable Id, Monitoring Variable Abbreviation, Monitoring Variable Name, start date, start time, end date, end time, User server and User Login will be automatically be displayed

2.	Enter the Minimum or Maximum value that a numeric value can be tested against

3.	Enter the Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Selection form, select the applicable record then click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Multi Monitoring Variable Parameter Name will be automatically displayed as is linked to the Multi Monitoring Variable Parameter ID

5.	Click the Modify QC button to start or modify the Multiple Quality Control Method as of the current system date.

6.	Click the End QC button to end a specific Quality Control Method as of the current system date

7.	Click Exit to close the form and return to the main menu.

Related System Topics

Result QC Variable Maintenance


Survey Variable Result QC Maintenance

Description

The Survey Variable Result QC Maintenance form is used to maintain Result Qc for Survey Variables

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The Result Quality Method Id, Result Quality Method Description, Monitoring Variable Id, Monitoring Variable Abbreviation, Monitoring Variable Name, start date, start time, end date, end time, User server and User Login will be automatically be displayed

2.	Enter the Minimum or Maximum value that a numeric value can be tested against

3.	Enter the Survey Variable Parameter ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Survey Variable Parameter Selection form, select the applicable record then click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Level1 Survey Parameter Name and Level2 Survey Parameter Name will be automatically displayed as is linked to the Survey Variable Parameter ID

5.	Click the Modify QC button to start or modify the Survey Quality Control Method as of the current system date.

6.	Click the End QC button to end a specific Quality Control Method as of the current system date

7.	Click Exit to close the form and return to the main menu

Related System Topics

Result QC Variable Maintenance


Water Network Management Overview

Description

The aim of water resource management is to achieve the sustainable use of water, protection for the quality of water resources is necessary to ensure sustainability of the nation's water resources in the interests of all water users. The Water Network Management defines all the geographical features and the human factors necessary to achieve the given objectives.

Scope

The Water Network Management sub-system deals with the following components:

•	Water Network Management (defines and classifies the water source and destination features in order to establish water quality and quantity usage for the management of water resources)

•	Stakeholders Management (defines the role of institutions and persons in relation to water resource management, as well as their influence on geographical features)

•	Feature Consolidation (to consolidate all types of geographical features (monitoring features, water features, reaches and management areas) for the purpose of data cleanup or monitoring network (only monitoring points) rationalisation) This functionality is not yet available.

Related System Topics

Water Network Overview


Water Network Overview

Description

The Water Network defines and classifies the water source and destination features in order to establish water quality and quantity usage for the management of water resources.

Scope

The Water Network module deals with the following components:

•	Water Features (to define water use sites and water resource features in order to measure the quality and quantity of water for usage, define the properties of geographical features as well as to determine the status of water resources in terms of resource quality objectives.)

•	Transfer Features (to define transfer features in order to determine the directional flow of water between a source and a destination feature.)

•	Usage/Impact/Flow Association (to define the directional flow between water features in order to identify the source, destination, and transfer features)

Important

Related System Topics

Water Features Maintenance

Transfer Features Maintenance

Usage/ Impact/ Flow Association


Water Features Maintenance

Description

The Water Features Maintenance form is used to define water use sites and water resource features in order to measure the quality and quantity of water for usage, define the properties of geographical features as well as to determine the status of water resources in terms of resource quality objectives.

Pre-requisites

Steps

    Search for a Water Feature record:

You can search for a water feature record in one of the following ways:

Search by Feature ID:

•	Click on the Find on Feature ID radio button, enter the Feature ID, and tab then click on the [image] Range button.

Search by Other Criteria:

This search can be refined by entering or selecting multiple field criteria.

•	Click on the Find on Other Criteria radio button, enter search criteria information or a portion of the information with * for one or more of the fields: Management Area Type, Management Area Name, Management Area Code, Management Area ID, High Level Type, Feature Name, DWA Number, Type is a compulsory information field, and SIC Activities.

•	You can also click on the Management Area ID drop down button to open the Management Area form, and select a record, High Level Type drop down button, and select the required type from the list, Type drop down button, and select the required Water Quality Feature Type from the list, SIC activities drop down button, and select the required activity from the list.

•	If your system is linked to Arcview Gis, you also have the option of clicking on the Select Drainage Region button to open Arcview and select the required Management Area.

•	Once you have entered your search criteria, click on the [image] Range button.

 Tip: To clear the search criteria, and select or enter new search criteria, click on the Clear Parameters checkbox.

Add a Water Feature record:

1.	First do a Search for the Water Feature record on the Find tab, if the record does not yet exist, click on the Maintenance tab.

2.	Click on the [image] Create button to add a new record.

3.	In the High Level Type field, enter the name of the High Level Type, or click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a type by clicking on the required option in the list.

4.	In the Type field, enter the name of the Water Quality Feature Type, or click on the [image] Zoom button, and select a record by clicking on the required option in the Class Type form.

5.	In the Name field, enter the Name for the new  water feature.

6.	If the water feature is already spatially represented in Arcview GIS, check the Spatial Indicator checkbox.

7.	In the Feature Description field, enter description for the record and tab.

8.	In the DWAF code field, enter a code, if relevant.

9.	The Component of a Water Feature is automatically displayed, and cannot be added.

10.	If the water feature is already spatially represented in Arcview GIS, you can click on the Get River Order button, to obtain the water feature's river order.

11.	If the water feature is linked to feature reference codes, click on the Water Feature Reference Codes maintenance button to open the Feature Reference Code Maintenance form, and add the feature reference codes information.

12.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

Edit a Water Feature record:

A record can only be edited if it is not being linked or used elsewhere.

1.	First do a Search for the Water Feature record.

2.	Click on the [image] Modify button to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Edit the record.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new information.

Delete a Water Feature record:

A record can only be deleted if it is not being linked or used elsewhere. Also, ground water point records cannot be deleted when the parent record, or grandparent record is being referenced.

1.	Click on the Water Feature record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click F3 or select Delete form the edit main menu, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record, click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics


Transfer Features Maintenance

Description

The Transfer Feature Maintenance form is used to define transfer features in order to determine the directional flow of water between a source and a destination feature. This information is used when determining the water balance and origin of pollution.

Transfer Features are man-made objects like pipes, canals and trenches that are used to convey water (including water containing waste) from one feature (source) to another (destination), for example from a site to a river, or between a site and another site, or between a river and another river. Water can be transferred in either one, or two directions (bi-directional).

Pre-requisites

Steps

Search for a Transfer Feature:

1.	On the Filter Criteria area, enter the Transfer Feature Name and/or Code, or part thereof with an asterisks (*).

2.	Click on the Filter button to filter out the records according to the specified filter criteria.

(For More on How to Search for a record, please refer How to Search for records on WMS)

Add a Transfer Feature:

1.	The Transfer Feature ID will be automatically generated by the system.

2.	Enter the Transfer Feature Name.

3.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Class – Type Selection form.

4.	The Transfer Feature Type will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Transfer Feature Type ID.

5.	Enter the Transfer Feature Code.

6.	Enter the Description for the Transfer Feature.

7.	Click on the Bi-Directional Flow checkbox to indicate whether the Transfer Feature is bi-directional or not.

8.	Enter the Bi-Directional Flow Reason to indicate why a transfer feature is bi-directional.

9.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open a Login Organisation Selection form, make a selection and click on the Select button to return your selection. Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner for the Transfer Feature will automatically be created with the Login Organisation ID, but you may change it.

10.	The Data Owner Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

11.	On the QA Date field, the last date on which the record was Quality Assured will be automatically displayed.

12.	Click on the QA button to indicate that the Transfer Feature’s information is Quality Assured on WMS. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

13.	On the Close Date field, set the Transfer Feature record ‘Out of Use’ for WMS usage. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

14.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

15.	Click on the Report button to generate a .csv file with all the information of the records retrieved according to the parameters received as input to this form.

16.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Edit a Transfer Feature record:

Note: Data Owners for the different Transfer Features will be implemented to prevent non Data Owners from editing other Organisations’ Transfer Feature information. Only the Data Owner may edit its Transfer Feature record.

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the Modify button.

Note: If you want to assign the new Data Owner to edit the record, enter the Data Owner Organisation ID, or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	Edit the record as required.

3.	Click on another record to accept the newly modified record.

 Note: The focused record’s Photo Media ID is edited on the Photo Tab and the Map Media ID is edited on the Map Tab

1.	Click on the applicable Photo or Map Tab to enter the Media Id of the Feature’s Photo or Map or Zoom from the Media Id to open the Multimedia Library Maintenance form make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection

2.	Click on the Accept button to accept the changes

 Note: A linked Photo or Map image can be viewed on the form by checking the Refresh Object on scroll checkbox. A linked Photo or map image can be viewed in an Editor by clicking on the View Media Object button.

Delete a Transfer Feature record:

A record can only be deleted if it is not being linked or used elsewhere.

 Note: Data Owners for the different Transfer Features will be implemented to prevent non Data Owners from deleting other Organisations’ Transfer Feature information. Only the Data Owner may delete its Transfer Feature record.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click F3 or select Delete form the edit main menu

3.	A confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record.

4.	Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Associated Classes - Types Selection

Login Organisation Selection


Usage/Impact/Flow Association

Description

The Usage/Impact Flow Association form is used to define the directional flow between water features in order to identify the source, destination, and transfer features. This information is used when determining the usage, impact and flow of the water.

 Pre-requisites

A Source Feature and Destination Feature must exist, and if appropriate, the Transfer Feature must also already exist.

Steps

Get the flow association- The combination of from feature, to feature and transfer feature can be chosen, this can be used to create a flow association record on the non-spatial side.

Browse flow associations – Display more than one flow association on a map. A flow association is displayed as a combination of a source feature, a destination feature, the involved transfer feature and the direction of flow. A specific flow association combination can be selected to pass back to the non- spatial side.

Show flow association – Display the combination of source feature, destination feature, transfer feature used as well as direction of flow in a flow association between two water features, such as a site and a river.

Search for a Usage/Impact/Flow Association record:

This search can be refined by entering or selecting multiple field criteria, you can search for a usage/impact/flow association record in one of the following ways:

Search by Management Area:

•	Enter search criteria information or a portion of the information with a * for one or more of the fields: Management Area Code, Management Area ID or click on the Management Area ID drop down button to open the Management Area form and select the required record.

Search by Source Feature:

•	Enter search criteria information or a portion of the information with a * for one or more of the fields, or click on the drop down button to select the required record: Feature Type, Feature Name, and Feature ID.

Search by Destination Feature:

•	Enter search criteria information or a portion of the information with a * for one or more of the fields, or click on the drop down button to select the required record: Feature Type, Feature Name, and Feature ID.

Search by Flow Association:

•	Enter a Flow Association Name, or click on the drop down button and select the required record.

Search by Transfer Feature:

•	Enter search criteria information or a portion of the information with a * for one or more of the fields, or click on the drop down button to select the required record: Feature Type, Feature Name, and Feature ID.

1.	Once you have entered your search criteria, click on the Range button.

Add a Usage/Impact/Flow Association record:

1.	First do a Search for the feature record on the Find tab, if the record does not yet exist, click on the Maintenance tab.

2.	Click on the [image] Create button to add a new record.

3.	In the Source Type field, enter the name of the Source Type, or click on the [image] Zoom button, and select a record by clicking on the required option in the Class Type form.

4.	In the Source Feature Name field, enter the name for the new flow association.

5.	A Source ID will be automatically generated by the system.

6.	If the feature is already spatially represented in Arcview GIS, check the spatial indicator checkbox.

7.	In the Destination Type field, enter the name of the Destination Type, or click on the [image] Zoom button, and select a record by clicking on the required option in the Class Type form.

8.	In the Destination Name field, enter the name of the Destination Name, or click on the [image] Zoom button, and select a record by clicking on the required option in the Class Type form.

9.	In the Destination ID field, enter the Destination ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button, and select a record by clicking on the required option in the Class Type form.

10.	If the feature is already spatially represented in Arcview GIS, check the Spatial Indicator checkbox.

11.	In the Flow Association Type field, enter the Type, or click on the [image] Zoom button, and select a record by clicking on the required option in the Class Type form.

12.	 If a Transfer Feature is involved, check the "A Transfer Feature is involved" checkbox, and continue, if not, click on the [image] Accept button to Accept the new record.

13.	In the Type field, enter the name of the Type, or click on the [image] Zoom button, and select a record by clicking on the required option in the Class Type form.

14.	In the Name field, enter the name of the Name, or click on the [image] Zoom button, and select a record by clicking on the required option in the Class Type form.

15.	In the Flow Association Description field, enter a description for the flow association.

16.	In the Feature ID field, enter the Feature ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button, and select a record by clicking on the required option in the Class Type form.

17.	If the feature is already spatially represented in Arcview GIS, check the Spatial Indicator checkbox.

18.	Click on the [image] Accept button to Accept the new record.

Edit a Usage/Impact/Flow Association record:

A record can only be edited if it is not being linked or used elsewhere on the system.

1.	First do a Search for a Feature record.

2.	Click on the [image] Modify button to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new information.

Delete a Usage/ Impact/ Flow Association record:

A record can only be deleted if it is not being linked or used elsewhere on the system.

1.	Click on the Feature record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click F3 or select Delete form the edit main menu, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record, click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics


Employee History View

Description:

The  Employee History View form is used to show all historical changes made to the Employee’s record. When the form is opened by clicking the History button on the Person or Organisation’s Information, all the employee history records for the specific focused Organisation or Person are displayed. When the form is opened by clicking on the History button on the Employee Maintenance grid, the Employee History records for the specific employee are displayed.

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Note:  You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button to generate a .csv document containing Employee History information for the specific employee, organisation or person.

Related System Topics

Organisation Maintenance

Person Maintenance


Electronic Address History View

Description:

The Electronic Address History View form is used to show all historical  changes made to the Electronic Address records. When the form is opened by clicking the History button on the top section of the Person or Organisation’s Information, all the Electronic Address history records, including all deleted records are displayed. When the form is opened from  Electronic Address Maintenance grid, all the  Electronic Address history records for the specific focused Electronic Address are displayed.

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button to generate a .csv document containing Electronic Address History information for the specific Person or Organisation and Address.

Related System Topics

Organisation Address Maintenance

Person Address Maintenance


User to Analyst Functional Relationship Decision Criteria

Description

The User to Analyst functional relationship decision criteria form is used to state the functional relationship for the Analyst role as Managing office or Responsible office. This selection is used during Analyst Method Maintenance.

Steps

1.	Click on either the Managing or Responsible radio button.

2.	Click on the Ok button to accept your selection.

Related System Topics

Analyst Method Maintenance Filter Criteria


Telecommunication Address History View

Description

The Telecommunication Address History View form is used to show all historical changes made to the Telecommunication Address records. When the form is opened by clicking the History button on the top section of the Person or Organisation’s information, all the Telecommunications Address history records, including all deleted records are displayed. When the form is opened from Telecommunication Address Maintenance grid, all the telecommunication address history records for the specific focused Telecommunication Address are displayed.

Steps

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button to generate a .csv document containing Telecommunication Address History information for the specific Person or Organisation and Address.

Related System Topics

Organisation Address Maintenance

Person Address Maintenance


Post Box Private Bag Address History View

Description:

The Post Box Private Bag Address History View form is used to show all historical changes made to the Post Box Private Bag Address records. When the form is opened by clicking on the History button on the top section of the Person or Organisation’s Information, all the Post Box Private Bag Address history records, including all deleted records are displayed. When the form is opened from Postal Address Maintenance grid, all the Post Box Private bag Address history records for the specific focused Postal Address are displayed.

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button to generate a .csv document containing Postal Address History information for the specific Person or Organisation and Address.

Related System Topics

Organisation Address Maintenance

Person Address Maintenance


Physical Address History View

Description:

The Physical Address History View form is used to show all historical changes made to the Physical Address records. When the form is opened by clicking the History button on the top section of the Person or Organisation’s Information, all the Physical Address History records, including all deleted records are displayed. When the form is opened from Physical Address Maintenance grid, the physical address history records for the specific focused Physical Address are displayed.

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button to generate a .csv document containing Physical Address History information for the specific Person or Organisation and Address.

Related System Topics

Organisation Address Maintenance

Person Address Maintenance


Organisation History View

Description:

The  Organisation History View form is used to show all historical  changes made to the Organisation’s record. When the form is opened from Organisation Maintenance  grid,  all the Organisation history records for the specific focused Organisation are displayed.

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button to generate a .csv document containing Organisation History information for the specific organisation.

Related System Topics

Organisation Maintenance


Member History View

Description:

The  Member History View form is used to show all historical changes made to the Member records. When the form is opened by clicking the History button of the Person or Organisation’s Information, all the Member history records, including all deleted records are displayed. When the form is opened from Member Maintenance grid, all  the member history records for the specifically focused Member are displayed. When the form is opened by clicking on the History button on the Member Maintenance grid, the Member History records for the specific employee are displayed

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button to generate a .csv document containing Member History information for the specific member, organisation or person.

Related System Topics

Organisation Maintenance

Person Maintenance


Person History View

Description:

The  Person History View form is used to show all historical  changes made to the Person’s record. When the form is opened from Person Maintenance  grid, all the person history records for the specific focused Person are displayed, excluding the deleted records.

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button to generate a .csv document containing Person History information for the specific person.

Related System Topics

Person Maintenance


Report Decision Criteria

Description:

The Report Decision Criteria form is used to specify different reports/exports in order to generate report information. The reports that can be generated are: Electronic Address Export, Organisation Address Report,  Organisation Correspondence Address Export, Organisation List, Physical Address Export, Postal Address Export ,Telecommunication Address Export, Person List, Employee List, Member List, Employee Business Address Report, and Member Business Address Report.

Steps:

1.	Select the report to be generated by clicking on the applicable radio button.

2.	Click on the Report button to generate the report.

3.	Click on the Exit button to return to the calling form.

Related System Topics

Organisation Address Maintenance

Person Address Maintenance

Person Maintenance

Organisation Maintenance


Monitor at Monitoring Point Maintenance

Description:

The Monitor at Monitoring Point Maintenance form is used to link Monitors to a specific Monitoring Point, and specify each monitor’s visit frequency. A Default Monitor is indicated.

 Note: Only the Active Employees can be selected to do the Monitoring.

Steps:

Link a Monitor to a specific Monitoring Point:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button to add a new record.

2.	In the Executive Organisation field, press F2 or Zoom button to open the Monitor in Functional Structure Selection form, click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

 Note: The Executive Id, From Date and To Date are automatically populated by the system. The From and To dates can only be changed within default ranges.

3.	In the Visit Frequency field, click on the [image] Zoom button, and select a record by clicking on the required option in the Monitor Visit Frequency Selection form.

4.	In the Operational Officer field, press F2 or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection. Note: Only active employees are selectable.

5.	If required, enter an explanation, to describe why the executive office is a monitor at this monitoring point, and tab.

6.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

 Note: You can check the default indicator to indicate which executive organisation is the default organisation that should be used when generating monitoring programmes.

Edit a link to a Monitor for a specific Monitoring Point:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button to enable you to edit a record.

2.	In the Executive Organisation field, press F2 or Zoom button to open the Monitor in Functional Structure Selection form, only Executive Organisations with different Responsible or Managing Organisations will be displayed to select from. Click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

 Note: The Executive Id, From Date and To Date are automatically populated by the system. The From and To dates can only be changed within default ranges. The applicable Responsible and Managing organisations  for the selected Executive organisation will be displayed at the bottom of the form.

3.	In the Visit Frequency field, click on the [image] Zoom button, and select a record by clicking on the required option in the Monitor Visit Frequency Selection form.

4.	In the Operational Officer field, press F2 or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, click on the required record, and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection. Note: Only active employees are selectable.

5.	If required, enter an explanation, to describe why the executive office is a monitor at this monitoring point, and tab.

 Note: You have the option to edit the Monitoring Structure.

6.	If required, click on the Monitoring Structure Maintenance button to open the Organisation and Person Functional Structure Maintenance form to maintain the Monitoring Structure.

7.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new information.

 Note: When the To Date or the Frequency changes, and Monitoring Point and Executive Organisation were used on Programme Detail, a record will be created on Monitoring Programme change.

Delete a link to a Monitor for a specific Monitoring Point:

 Note: You cannot delete a record because it might already be used in Monitoring Management.

Important:

The same Executive Organisation may not be scheduled to do monitoring at the same point for different Responsible and/or Managing Organisations.

Related System Topics:

Monitor in Functional Structure Selection

Monitor Visit Frequency Selection

Employee Selection

Monitoring Point Maintenance


Monitor in Functional Structure Selection

Description:

The Monitor in Functional Structure Selection form is used to select an executive Monitor created in the Functional Monitoring Structure.

Steps:

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.

Related System Topics:

Monitor at Monitoring Point Maintenance


Address Report Filter Criteria

Description:

The Address Report Filter Criteria form is used to specify filter criteria for the Organisation Business address report.

Steps:

1.	Click on a checkbox on a Primary Selection area to select one or more type of addresses, or click on the Select All button to select all options. If you want to change the selection, click on the Deselect All button to cancel the selection on all the options.

2.	If you select  Physical Address and/or Postal Address, the options on the Secondary Selection area will be activated. You can select all the options by clicking on the Select All button, and click on the Deselect All button to cancel the selection, or only select some options.

3.	Click on the Print button to generate a report containing a list of Organisation Addresses.

Related System Topics:

Report Decision criteria


Monitoring Point Maintenance Wizard

Description

The Monitoring Point Maintenance Wizard is used to maintain Monitoring Points

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

1.	Click on the [image] Create button to add a new record.

2.	An empty line displays to allow the addition of a new record.

 Note: The Feature ID will be automatically generated by the system when the record is successfully created

3.	Click checkbox to select Geographical Feature Type on the form.

4.	Enter the Farm Name where the monitoring point is located.

5.	Enter the Reference Name to define the feature reference.

6.	Enter the Description Name to define the monitoring points name.

7.	Enter the Feature Name to define the Feature name

8.	Enter the Geographical Area Type ID  or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, select the applicable record and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

9.	The Geographical Area Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Geographical Area Type ID.

10.	Enter the Feature Description of spatial pressure indication.

11.	Check the Spatial Indicator checkbox to indicate that the feature is currently presented on a shapefile

12.	To change the Located on Feature ID, enter the Feature or click on the [image] Zoom button to open Geographical Feature Selection form, select the Located Feature where monitoring point is located, and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

13.	The Located on Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Geographical Area Type ID.

14.	Enter the Flow Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, select a the Flow Type to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

15.	The Flow Type Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Flow Type ID

16.	Enter the Meteorological Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, select a Meteorological Measuring Type to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

17.	The Meteorological Type field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Meteorological Type ID.

18.	Enter the Quaternary Drainage Region Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Geographical Area Selection form, select a Quaternary Drainage Region to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

19.	The Quaternary Drainage Region Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Quaternary Drainage Feature.

20.	To change the Data Owner Organisation, enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open a Login Organisation Selection form, select the applicable record, and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.  Note: Only active organisations with passwords are available for selection.

21.	The Data Owner Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

22.	Enter the Altitude for the Point Related Feature

23.	Last Consolidated Date is automatically populated with the last date of when monitoring feature was included in a consolidation run.

24.	The Latitude Longitude Capture Method Code will be automatically displayed form the drop down menu

25.	Select the Latitude Longitude Capture Method form the drop down menu

26.	The Altitude Capture Method Code will be automatically displayed form the drop down menu

27.	Select Altitude Capture Method form the drop down menu

28.	The QA Date field will by default be empty when creating the record. Click on the QA button to indicate that the Geographical Area’s information is Quality Assured on WMS and populates the QA date file with the system date.  Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator

29.	The Projection Type Code will be automatically displayed

30.	Select the Projection Type from the drop down menu

31.	The Close Date will by default be empty when creating the record. Click on the Close button to indicate that the Geographical Area is no longer active for WMS usage.  Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator. If any other user has logged in the button will be disabled.

32.	Tab to accept the newly created record.

 Note: Maintain button open a Decision Form display a list of applicable programs that can be maintained for this Geographical Feature.

 Note: the Back button will return to the previous Filter Criteria or Selection form.

 Note: the Report button will open a Report Option Decision Form with a list of applicable reports that can be run for the Geographical feature to make a selection.

 Note: the GIS Browse button display a group of spatial records on a map.

 Note: the GIS View/Maintain button display spatial record or maintain a non-spatial record on a map.

 Note: the GIS Map Scale (Drop Down) enables the user to select the scale to be used when displaying the feature on the map.

 Note: The Close button allows the Central Administrator to indicate that the Geographical Feature is no longer an active Geographical Feature for WMS usage ( [image] Note: this button is only enabled when you have logged in as an Administrator, if any other user has logged in the button will be disabled)

33.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu

 Note: The focused record’s Photo Media ID is edited on the Photo Tab and the Map Media ID is edited on the Map Tab

1.	Click on the applicable Photo or Map Tab to enter the Media Id of the Feature’s Photo or Map or Zoom from the Media Id to open the Multimedia Library Maintenance form make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection

2.	Click on the Accept button to accept the changes

 Note: A linked Photo or Map image can be viewed on the form by checking the Refresh Object on scroll checkbox. A linked Photo or map image can be viewed in an Editor by clicking on the View Media Object button.

Related System Topics:

Associated Classes - Type Selection

Geographical Feature Selection

Geographical Area Selection

Login Organisation Selection


River Maintenance

Description

The River Maintenance form is used to maintain river records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

(For More on How to Search for a record, please refer How to Search for records on WMS)

Add a River:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	The Feature ID will be automatically generated by the system.

3.	Enter the Start Reach Code of the River.

4.	Enter the End Reach Code of the River.

5.	Enter the Feature Name.

6.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Class – Type Selection form. . Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

7.	The Feature Type will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID.

8.	Enter the Feature description.

9.	The Data Owner Organisation ID will be automatically displayed. To change the id enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open a Login Organisation Selection form, make a selection and click on the Select button to return your selection. Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner for the River will automatically be created with the Login Organisation ID, but you may change it.

10.	The Data Owner Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

11.	In the QA Date field, the last date on which the record was Quality Assured will be automatically displayed.

12.	Click on the QA button to indicate that the River information is Quality Assured on WMS. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator. This button is only enabled when you are in a Modify State

13.	In the Close Date field, set the River record ‘Out of Use’ for WMS usage. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

14.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

15.	Click on the Report button to generate a .csv file with all the information of the records retrieved according to the parameters received as input to this form.

16.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Edit a River record:

 Note: Only the Data Owner may modify the River record.

Note: If you want to assign the new Data Owner to edit the record, enter the Data Owner Organisation ID, or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

 Note: The focused record’s Photo Media ID is edited on the Photo Tab and the Map Media ID is edited on the Map Tab

1.	Click on the applicable Photo or Map Tab to enter the Media Id of the Feature’s Photo or Map or Zoom from the Media Id to open the Multimedia Library Maintenance form make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection

2.	Click on the Accept button to accept the changes

 Note: A linked Photo or Map image can be viewed on the form by checking the Refresh Object on scroll checkbox. A linked Photo or map image can be viewed in an Editor by clicking on the View Media Object button.

Delete a River record:

 Note: Only the data owner may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click F3 or select Delete form the edit main menu.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Associated Classes - Types Selection

Login Organisation Selection


River Selection / View

Description:

The River Selection form allows you to select or view a specific River.

Steps:

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics:


River Filter Criteria

Description:

The River Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for river records.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Class – Type Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

2.	The Feature Type will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID

3.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the River Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID

5.	The Data Owner Organisation ID will be automatically displayed. To change the id enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open a Login Organisation Selection form, make a selection and click on the Select button to return your selection. Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner for the River will automatically be created with the Login Organisation ID, but you may change it.

6.	The Data Owner Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

7.	Enter the Multimedia Map ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Multimedia Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection. Note: This is for Future Implementation.

8.	The Multimedia Map Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia Map ID.

9.	Enter the Multimedia Map Photo ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Multimedia Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection. Note: This is for Future Implementation.

10.	The Multimedia Map Photo will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia Map Photo ID

11.	Click on the Next button to open the River Maintenance form.

12.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

13.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Multimedia Selection Note: This is for Future Implementation

Login Organisation Selection

Associated Classes - Type Selection

River Selection


River History Selection / View

Description:

The River History Selection form allows you to select a specific River history record.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Next button to go to the River Maintenance form.

5.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

6.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

Note: Steps 4 & 5 applies only when the form is opened in Wizard mode, when the form is opened in normal selection mode, the Select button will be applicable for the selection of a record.

Related System Topics:


River History Filter Criteria

Description:

The River History Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for the River History records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the River History Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID.

3.	The Data Owner Organisation ID will be automatically displayed. To change the id enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open a Login Organisation Selection form, make a selection and click on the Select button to return your selection. Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner for the River will automatically be created with the Login Organisation ID, but you may change it.

4.	The Data Owner Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

5.	Enter the Change User Login or click on the Zoom button to open the User Selection form, and click on the Select button to return the selection.

6.	The Change User Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Change User Login.

7.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, and click on the Select button to return the selection.

8.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation and the Change User Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Change User Organisation ID.

9.	Click on the Next button to open the River History View form.

10.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

11.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

River History Selection

Login Organisation Selection

User Selection


Water Body Decision Criteria
Water Body Decision Criteria-

Description:

The Water Body Decision Criteria form enables you to choose a filter criteria option to filter out Water Bodies from an applicable list.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Select an option by clicking on the applicable radio button.

2.	Click on the Next button to close the form and open the selected form.

3.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Water Body Filter Criteria

Water Body History Filter Criteria

Water Body in Geographical Area Filter Criteria


Water Body Filter Criteria

Description:

The Water Body Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for Water Body records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Class – Type Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

2.	The Feature Type will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID

3.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the River History Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID

5.	Enter the Feature description.

6.	Click on the Spatial to indicate that a feature is represented spatially on shape files

7.	Enter the Component of Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Water Body Hierarchy Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Component of Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Component of Feature ID.

9.	The Data Owner Organisation ID will be automatically displayed. To change the id enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open a Login Organisation Selection form, make a selection and click on the Select button to return your selection. Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner for the River will automatically be created with the Login Organisation ID, but you may change it.

10.	The Data Owner Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

11.	Enter the Multimedia Map ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Multimedia Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection. Note: This is for Future Implementation.

12.	The Multimedia Map Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia Map ID.

13.	Enter the Multimedia Map Photo ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Multimedia Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection. Note: This is for Future Implementation.

14.	The Multimedia Map Photo  will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia Map Photo ID.

15.	Click on the Next button to open the Water Body Maintenance form with the specified filter criteria.

16.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

17.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Water Body Selection

Associated Classes - Type Selection

Water Body Hierarchy Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Multimedia Selection (Future implementation)


Water Body Selection

Description:

The Water Body Selection form allows you to select a specific Water Body.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

The out of use records (i.e. records no longer in use) will be displayed in dimmed grey.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics:


Water Body History Filter Criteria

Description:

The Water Body History Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for the Water Body History records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Class – Type Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

2.	The Feature Type will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID

3.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Water Body History Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID

5.	Enter the Feature description.

6.	Click on the Spatial to indicate that a feature is represented spatially on shape files

7.	Enter the Component of Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Water Body Hierarchy Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Component of Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Component of Feature ID.

9.	The Data Owner Organisation ID will be automatically displayed. To change the id enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open a Login Organisation Selection form, make a selection and click on the Select button to return your selection. Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner for the River will automatically be created with the Login Organisation ID, but you may change it.

10.	The Data Owner Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

12.	Enter the Change User Login or click on the Zoom button to open the User Selection form, and click on the Select button to return the selection.

13.	The Change User Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Change User Login.

14.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, and click on the Select button to return the selection.

11.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation and the Change User Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Change User Organisation ID.

12.	Click on the Next button to open the Water Body History Selection form with the specified Filter criteria.

13.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

14.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Water Body History Selection

Login Organisation Selection

User Selection


Water Body History Selection

Description:

The Water Body History Selection form allows you to select a specific Water Body history record.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

5.	Click on the Next button to go to the Water Body Maintenance form.

6.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

Note: Steps 5-6 applies only when the form is opened in Wizard mode, when the form is opened in normal selection mode, the Select button will be available for the selection of a record. In Wizard mode, the Next button will only be enabled when a record is focused and when the Feature ID has a value.

Related System Topics:


Water Body Maintenance

Description

The Water Body Maintenance form is used to maintain Water Bodies in order to manage resource quality and to achieve the sustainable use of water. Beneficial use of a Water Body may include agricultural use, domestic use, industrial use, etc. A single Water Body may support different uses.

A Water Body can simply be defined as a container of water or carrier of water, both natural and man-made.  The different types of Water Bodies are Dam/Reservoir, Ocean, Pan and Wetland. Rivers are excluded.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a Water Body:

Note:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	The Feature ID will be automatically generated by the system.

3.	Enter the Feature Name.

4.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Class – Type Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

5.	The Feature Type will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID.

6.	Enter the Feature description.

7.	Click on the Spatial to indicate that a feature is represented spatially on shape files

8.	Enter the Component of Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Water Body Hierarchy Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

9.	The Component of Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Component of Feature ID.

10.	The Data Owner Organisation ID will be automatically displayed. To change the id enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open a Login Organisation Selection form, make a selection and click on the Select button to return your selection. Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner for the River will automatically be created with the Login Organisation ID, but you may change it.

11.	The Data Owner Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

12.	In the QA Date field, the last date on which the record was Quality Assured will be automatically displayed.

13.	Click on the QA button to indicate that the River information is Quality Assured on WMS. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator. This button is only enabled when you are in a Modify State

14.	In the Close Date field, set the River record ‘Out of Use’ for WMS usage. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

15.	Click on the Close button to set the Water Body record ‘Out of Use’ for WMS usage. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

16.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

17.	Click on the Report button to generate a .csv file with all the information of the records retrieved according to the parameters received as input to this form.

18.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Edit a Water Body record:

 Note: The update of the record, will only be possible when not linked anywhere else in the system. Only the data owner may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

 Note: Editing any field value will result in the QA Date field being cleared if it has a value.

 Note: The focused record’s Photo Media ID is edited on the Photo Tab and the Map Media ID is edited on the Map Tab

1.	Click on the applicable Photo or Map Tab to enter the Media Id of the Feature’s Photo or Map or Zoom from the Media Id to open the Multimedia Library Maintenance form make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection

2.	Click on the Accept button to accept the changes

 Note: A linked Photo or Map image can be viewed on the form by checking the Refresh Object on scroll checkbox. A linked Photo or map image can be viewed in an Editor by clicking on the View Media Object button.

Delete a Water Body record:

 Note: Only the Data Owner may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system and no links exist.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click F3 or select Delete form the edit main menu.

3.	A message will be displayed to prompt you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Associated Classes - Types Selection

Login Organisation Selection


Water Body Hierarchy Selection

Description:

The Water Body Hierarchy Selection form allows you to select a specific Water Body that this Water Body is a Component (part) of or to view the hierarchical structure of Water Bodies.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Records not available for selection will be dimmed grey.

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

3.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics:


Groundwater Feature Filter Criteria Wizard

Description:

The Groundwater Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for Groundwater records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

 Note: It is not compulsory to specify the filter criteria in any of these fields; a user can click on the Next button without specifying the filter criteria. The Groundwater Maintenance form will open with all the information.

1.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID

3.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Groundwater Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID.

5.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

7.	Click on the Next button to open the Groundwater Maintenance form with the specified filter criteria.

8.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

9.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Groundwater Selection

Associated Classes - Type Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Multimedia Selection (Future implementation)


Groundwater Selection

Description:

The Groundwater Selection form allows you to select a specific groundwater record.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

The out of use records (i.e. records no longer in use) will be displayed in dimmed grey.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics:


Groundwater History Filter Criteria

Description:

The Groundwater History Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for the Groundwater Feature History records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID

3.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Groundwater Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID.

5.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

7.	Enter the Change User Login or click on the Zoom button to open the User Selection form, and click on the Select button to return the selection.

8.	The Change User Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Change User Login.

9.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, and click on the Select button to return the selection.

10.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation and the Change User Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Change User Organisation ID.

11.	Click on the Next button to open the Groundwater History Selection form with the specified Filter criteria.

12.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

13.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Groundwater History Selection

Login Organisation Selection

User Selection

Associated Classes - Type Selection


Groundwater Feature Maintenance

Description

The Groundwater Feature Maintenance form is used to maintain the ground water geographical features in order to manage resource quality. Groundwater is the water found beneath the surface of the earth that often supplies springs and wells. Where groundwater occurs in significant quantity, it can be used as a water supply. The types of groundwater are Boreholes and Springs/Eye.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add Groundwater Feature:

Note:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Groundwater Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

3.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID

4.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

5.	The Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID

6.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection. .  Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation ID is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner for the Groundwater will automatically be populated with the Login Organisation ID, but you may change it.

7.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

8.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

9.	Click on the Report button to generate a .csv file with all the information of the records retrieved according to the parameters received as input to this form.

10.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

How to capture coordinates for a groundwater feature

Steps to follow if the user knows what the coordinates for the point are:

1.	Enter the Point Latitude

2.	Enter the Point Longitude

3.	Enter Altitude for the Point Related Feature.

4.	Select a Latitude Longitude Capture Method form the drop down menu

5.	The Latitude Longitude Capture Method Code will be automatically displayed

6.	Select a Altitude Capture Method form the drop down menu

7.	The Altitude Capture Method Code will be automatically displayed

8.	Select a Projection Type form the drop down menu

9.	The Projection Type code will be automatically displayed

10.	Tab to accept the newly created record

Edit a Groundwater record:

 Note: The update of the record will only be possible when not linked anywhere else in the system. Only the data owner may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	In the QA Date field, the last date on which the record was Quality Assured will be automatically displayed.

3.	In the Close Date field, the date on which the Groundwater record was set to ‘Out of Use’ for WMS usage will be automatically displayed.

4.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

5.	Edit the field as required.  Note: Editing any field value will result in the QA Date field being cleared if it has a value. The QA & Close buttons will be disabled.

6.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

7.	Focus back on the edited record. bmc qustion2.bmp} Note: The QA and Close buttons will now be enabled.

8.	Click on the QA button to indicate that the Groundwater information is Quality Assured on WMS on that date. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

9.	Click on the Close button to set the Groundwater record ‘Out of Use’ for WMS usage when the close date does not have a value. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

 Note: The focused record’s Photo Media ID is edited on the Photo Tab and the Map Media ID is edited on the Map Tab

3.	Click on the applicable Photo or Map Tab to enter the Media Id of the Feature’s Photo or Map or Zoom from the Media Id to open the Multimedia Library Maintenance form make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection

4.	Click on the Accept button to accept the changes

 Note: A linked Photo or Map image can be viewed on the form by checking the Refresh Object on scroll checkbox. A linked Photo or map image can be viewed in an Editor by clicking on the View Media Object button.

Delete a Groundwater record:

 Note: Only the Data Owner may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system and no links exist.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click F3 or select Delete form the edit main menu.

3.	A message will be displayed to prompt you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Associated Classes - Types Selection

Login Organisation Selection


Groundwater History Selection / View Wizard

Description:

The Groundwater History Selection form allows you to select a specific Groundwater history record OR View the filtered records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

SELECTION

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

5.	Click on the Next button to go to the Groundwater Maintenance form.

6.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

Note: Steps 5-6 applies only when the form is opened in Wizard mode, when the form is opened in normal selection mode, the Select button will be available for the selection of a record. In Wizard mode, the Next button will only be enabled when a record is focused and when the Feature ID has a value.

VIEWING

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related System Topics:


Quaternary Drainage Region Selection

Description:

The Quaternary Drainage Region Selection form allows you to select the Quaternary Drainage Region to be used as a default.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a quaternary Drainage Region Code.

2.	Check the Select checkbox to indicate that the quaternary drainage region selected must be used as the default quaternary drainage region.

3.	Click on the Next button open the MapControl form.

4.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

5.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

Related System Topics:


Water Use Site Filter Criteria

Description:

The Water Use Site Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for Water Use Site records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	On the High Level Water Use Site Type, click on the Solid Waste, Agricultural, Industrial, Urban, Mine or Water Care Works option to filter out records associated with a selected type of Water Use Site.

2.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

3.	The Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID

4.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Groundwater Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

5.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID.

6.	Enter the Legally Responsible Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

7.	The Legally Responsible Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Legally Responsible Organisation ID..

8.	Enter the Employee ID of the Contact Person at the Legally Responsible Organisation or click on the Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

9.	The Name of the Contact Person at the Legally Responsible Organisation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Employee ID.

10.	Enter the Regional Office Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

11.	The Regional Office Organisation Abbreviation and the Regional Office Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Regional Office Organisation ID.

12.	Enter the Site Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

13.	The Site Owner Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Site Owner Organisation ID.

14.	Enter the Management Authority Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

15.	The Management Authority Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Management Authority Organisation ID.

16.	Enter the Main Site Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Water Use Site Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.  Note: Only active Water Use Sites records are selectable.

17.	The Main Site  Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Main Site Feature ID.

18.	Enter the Sub Site Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Water Use Site Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.  Note: Only active Water Use Sites records are selectable.

19.	The Sub Site Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Sub Site Feature ID

20.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

21.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

22.	Click on the Next button to open the Water Use Site View form with the specified filter criteria.

23.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

24.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Water Use Site Selection

Water Use Site View

Associated Classes - Type Selection

Organisation Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Multimedia Selection (Future implementation)


Water Use Site Selection

Description:

The Water Use Site Selection form allows you to search and select an applicable Water Use Site record.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

The out of use records (i.e. records no longer in use) will be displayed in dimmed grey.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics:


Water Use Site History Filter Criteria

Description:

The Water Use Site History Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for Water Use Site history records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	In the Feature Type field, click on the [image] Drop Down button and select the Type of Water Use Site option and tab.

2.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Groundwater Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

3.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID.

4.	Enter the Legally Responsible Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

5.	The Legally Responsible Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Legally Responsible Organisation ID..

6.	Enter the Employee ID of the Contact Person at the Legally Responsible Organisation or click on the Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

7.	The Name of the Contact Person at the Legally Responsible Organisation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Employee ID.

8.	Enter the Regional Office Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

9.	The Regional Office Organisation Abbreviation and the Regional Office Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Regional Office Organisation ID.

10.	Enter the Employee ID of the Regional Officer or click on the Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

11.	The Regional Officer Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Employee ID.

12.	Enter the Site Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

13.	The Site Owner Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Site Owner Organisation ID.

14.	Enter the Management Authority Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

15.	The Management Authority Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Management Authority Organisation ID.

16.	Enter the Feature ID of the Main Site or click on the Zoom button to open the Groundwater Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

17.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID of the Main Site.

18.	Enter the Feature ID of the Sub Site or click on the Zoom button to open the Groundwater Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

19.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID of the Sub Site.

20.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

21.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

22.	Enter the Change User Login or click on the Zoom button to open the User Selection form, and click on the Select button to return the selection.

23.	The Change User Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Change User Login.

24.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, and click on the Select button to return the selection.

25.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation and the Change User Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Change User Organisation ID.

26.	Click on the Next button to open the Water Use Site View form with the specified filter criteria.

27.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

28.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Water Use Site Selection

Water Use Site View

Organisation Selection

Login Organisation Selection

User Selection


Water Use Site History Selection / View

Description:

The Water Use Site History Selection form allows you to select a specific Water Use Site history record.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Next button to go to the Water Use Main Site Maintenance form.

5.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

6.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

Note: Steps 5-6 applies only when the form is opened in Wizard mode, when the form is opened in normal selection mode, the Select button will be available for the selection of a record. In Wizard mode, the Next button will only be enabled when a record is focused and when the Feature ID has a value.

Related System Topics:


Water Use Main Site Maintenance

Description

The Water Use Main Site Maintenance form is used to maintain the water use main site records in order to manage resource quality. The types of Water Use Site are Solid Waste, Agricultural, Industrial, Urban, Water Care Works and Mine. e.g. The Industrial Water Use Site is the use of industrial water within the boundaries of the industrial facility owned or operated by the producer. The producer/owner of property might release or dispose waste into or adjacent to any water in the country that might cause pollution of water in the country. Such information is needed for monitoring to ensure water quality.

The Water Use Main Site is divided into different Sub-sites and the sub-sites are sub-divided into components.  e.g. African Gold Mining Limited is a specific water feature area of the type mines that is subdivided into components like sluice dams, mineshafts.

The User may opt to open the Water Use Main Site Maintenance form from the Water Use View form to maintain the focused record on this form or may activate select to insert a record by activating the Create Records button.  A Decision Criteria list will be displayed to allow the user to insert the Main Site record.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add Water Use Main Site Feature:

 Note: The Water Use Main Site is the highest level in the hierarchical structure that defines water use sites hence the Site Owner, Management Authority, Legally Responsible Organisation and Contact Person information is mandatory for this Water Use Main Site Feature.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	The Feature ID will be automatically generated by the system.

3.	Enter the Feature Name.

 Note: When starting to enter the Feature Name, the Water Use Site Name Selection form will be automatically displayed with all the possible valid feature names that already exist. If the Feature name does not exist, click on the Not Found button then the feature name field on the Water Use Main Site form will then be enabled in order to enter the Feature Name. If the Feature name exists, press the Exit button to return to the Water Use Main Site form, then cancel or continue to modify the rest of the data.

4.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

5.	The Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID.

6.	Enter the File No and tab.

7.	Enter the Feature Description to describe the feature in detail and tab.

8.	Enter the Legally Responsible Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

9.	The Legally Responsible Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Legally Responsible Organisation ID.

10.	Enter the Employee ID of the Contact Person at the Legally Responsible Organisation or click on the Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

11.	The Name of the Contact Person at the Legally Responsible Organisation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Employee ID.

12.	Enter the Regional Office Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

13.	The Regional Office Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Regional Office Organisation ID.

14.	Enter the Employee ID of the Regional Officer or click on the Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

15.	The Regional Officer Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Employee ID.

16.	Enter the Site Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

17.	The Site Owner Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Site Owner Organisation ID.

18.	Enter the Management Authority Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

19.	The Management Authority Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Management Authority Organisation ID.

20.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open a Login Organisation Selection form, make a selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.  Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation ID is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner for the Water Use Main Site will automatically be populated with the Login Organisation ID, but you may change it.

21.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

22.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

23.	Click on the Report button to open the Report Option Decision Criteria form.

24.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Edit a Water Use Main Site record:

 Note: The update of the record will only be possible when not linked anywhere else in the system. Only the data owner may modify the record. When the water use main site information is modified, all the water use sub site and associated water use site component information will be updated automatically with the modified water use main site information.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	In the QA Date field, the last date on which the record was Quality Assured will be automatically displayed.

3.	In the Close Date field, the date on which the Water Use Main Site record was set to ‘Out of Use’ for WMS usage will be automatically displayed.

4.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

5.	Edit the field as required.  Note: Editing any field value will result in the QA Date field being cleared if it has a value. The QA & Close buttons will be disabled.

6.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

7.	Focus back on the edited record. bmc qustion2.bmp} Note: The QA and Close buttons will now be enabled.

8.	Click on the QA button to indicate that the Water Use Site information is Quality Assured on WMS on that date. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

9.	Click on the Close button to set the Water Use Main Site record ‘Out of Use’ for WMS usage when the close date does not have a value.  Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

 Note: The focused record’s Photo Media ID is edited on the Photo Tab and the Map Media ID is edited on the Map Tab

1.	Click on the applicable Photo or Map Tab to enter the Media Id of the Feature’s Photo or Map or Zoom from the Media Id to open the Multimedia Library Maintenance form make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection

2.	Click on the Accept button to accept the changes

 Note: A linked Photo or Map image can be viewed on the form by checking the Refresh Object on scroll checkbox. A linked Photo or map image can be viewed in an Editor by clicking on the View Media Object button.

Delete a Water Use Main Site record:

 Note: Only the Data Owner may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system and no links exist.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click F3 or select Delete form the edit main menu.

3.	A message will be displayed to prompt you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Water Use Site Name Selection

Associated Classes - Types Selection

Organisation Selection

Employee Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Option Decision Criteria


Water Use Sub Site Maintenance

Description

The Water Use Sub Site Maintenance form is used to maintain the water use sub site records in order to manage resource quality. The Water Use Sub Site is sub-divided into components.  E.g. African Gold Mining Limited is a specific water feature area of the type mines that is subdivided into components like sluice dams, mineshafts.

The User may opt to open the Water Use Sub Site Maintenance form from the Water Use View form to maintain the focused record on this form or may activate select to insert a record by activating the Create Records button.  A Decision Criteria list will be displayed to allow the user to insert the Sub Site record.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add Water Use Sub Site Feature:

 Note: When inserting a water use sub site record, the values of Site Owner, Management Authority, Legally Responsible Organisation and Contact Person of the Water Use Main Site will be used to populate the same fields of the Water Use Sub Site by default, but these may be changed but not cleared. These values belong to the parent of this water use site.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Main Site Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Water Use Site Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.  Note: Only active Water Use Sites records are selectable.

3.	The Main Site Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Main Site Feature ID.

4.	The Sub Site Feature ID will be automatically generated by the system.

5.	Enter the Sub Site Feature Name.

 Note: When starting to enter the Feature Name, the Water Use Site Name Selection form will be automatically displayed with all the possible valid feature names that already exist. If the Feature name does not exist, click on the Not Found button then the feature name field on the Water Use Sub Site form will then be enabled in order to enter the Feature Name. If the Feature name exists, press the Exit button to return to the Water Use Sub Site form, then cancel or continue to modify the rest of the data.

6.	Enter the Full Water Use Site Name. I.e. The concatenation between Main Site Feature Name & Sub Site Feature Name.

7.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes - Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID.

9.	Enter the File No and tab.

10.	Enter the Feature Description to describe the feature in detail and tab.

 Note:  Steps 11 to 18 are optional since these fields are by default populated with the  Water Use Main Site information. They may not be cleared but changed as follows:

11.	Enter the Legally Responsible Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

12.	The Legally Responsible Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Legally Responsible Organisation ID.

13.	Enter the Employee ID of the Contact Person at the Legally Responsible Organisation or click on the Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

14.	The Name of the Contact Person at the Legally Responsible Organisation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Employee ID.

15.	Enter the Site Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

16.	The Site Owner Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Site Owner Organisation ID.

17.	Enter the Management Authority Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

18.	The Management Authority Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Management Authority Organisation ID.

19.	Enter the Organisation ID  or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

20.	The Regional Office Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Regional Office Organisation ID.

21.	Enter the Employee ID of the Regional Officer or click on the Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

22.	The Regional Officer Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Employee ID.

23.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open a Login Organisation Selection form, make a selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

 Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation ID is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner for the Water Use Main Site will automatically be populated with the Login Organisation ID, but you may change it.

24.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

25.	Click on the Accept button to accept the new record.

26.	Click on the Report button to generate a .csv file with all the information of the records retrieved according to the parameters received as input to this form.

27.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Edit a Water Use Sub Site record:

 Note: The update of the record will only be possible when not linked anywhere else in the system. Only the data owner may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	In the QA Date field, the last date on which the record was Quality Assured will be automatically displayed.

3.	In the Close Date field, the date on which the Water Use Main Site record was set to ‘Out of Use’ for WMS usage will be automatically displayed.

4.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

5.	Edit the field as required.

  Note: Editing any field value will result in the QA Date field being cleared if it has a value. The QA & Close buttons will be disabled.

6.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

7.	Focus back on the edited record. bmc qustion2.bmp} Note: The QA and Close buttons will now be enabled.

8.	Click on the QA button to indicate that the Water Use Site information is Quality Assured on WMS on that date. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

9.	Click on the Close button to set the Water Use Sub Site record ‘Out of Use’ for WMS usage when the close date does not have a value. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

 Note: The focused record’s Photo Media ID is edited on the Photo Tab and the Map Media ID is edited on the Map Tab

5.	Click on the applicable Photo or Map Tab to enter the Media Id of the Feature’s Photo or Map or Zoom from the Media Id to open the Multimedia Library Maintenance form make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection

6.	Click on the Accept button to accept the changes

 Note: A linked Photo or Map image can be viewed on the form by checking the Refresh Object on scroll checkbox. A linked Photo or map image can be viewed in an Editor by clicking on the View Media Object button.

Delete a Water Use Sub Site record:

 Note: Only the Data Owner may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system and no links exist.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click F3 or select Delete form the edit main menu.

3.	A message will be displayed to prompt you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Water Use Site Name Selection

Associated Classes - Types Selection

Organisation Selection

Employee Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Option Decision Criteria


Water Use Site Component Maintenance

Description

The Water Use Site Component Maintenance form is used to maintain the water use site component records in order to manage water quality feature. The Water Use Site Component contains the information of a Water Use Site that forms part of another Water Use Site. This is the last level of the hierarchical structure of the Water Use Site Feature.

The User may opt to open the Water Use Site Component Maintenance form from the Water Use View form to maintain the focused record on this form or may activate select to insert a record by activating the Create Records button.  A Decision Criteria list will be displayed to allow the user to insert the Site Component record.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add Water Use Site Component Feature:

 Note: When inserting a water use sub site record, the values of Site Owner, Management Authority, Legally Responsible Organisation and Contact Person of the Water Use Main Site will be used to populate the same fields of the Water Use Site Component  by default, but these may be changed but not cleared. These values belong to the parent of this water use site.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Main Site Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Water Use Site Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.  Note: Only active Water Use Sites records are selectable.

3.	The Main Site Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Main Site Feature ID.

4.	Enter the Sub Site Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Water Use Site Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.  Note: Only active Water Use Sites records are selectable.

5.	The Sub Site Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Sub Site Feature ID.

6.	The Site Component Feature ID will be automatically generated by the system.

7.	Enter the Site Component Feature Name.

 Note: When starting to enter the Feature Name, the Water Use Site Name Selection form will be automatically displayed with all the possible valid feature names that already exist. If the Feature name does not exist, click on the Not Found button then the feature name field on the Water Use Site Component form will then be enabled in order to enter the Feature Name. If the Feature name exists, press the Exit button to return to the Water Use Site Component form, then cancel or continue to modify the rest of the data.

8.	The Full Water Use Site Name will be automatically displayed. I.e. The concatenation between Main Site Feature Name, Sub Site Feature Name & Site Component Feature Name.

9.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

10.	The Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID.

11.	Enter the File No and tab.

12.	Enter the Feature Description to describe the feature in detail and tab.

 Note:  Steps 13 to 20 are optional since these fields are by default populated with the  Water Use Main Site information. They may not be cleared but changed as follows:

13.	Enter the Legally Responsible Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

14.	The Legally Responsible Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Legally Responsible Organisation ID.

15.	Enter the Employee ID of the Contact Person at the Legally Responsible Organisation or click on the Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

16.	The Name of the Contact Person at the Legally Responsible Organisation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Employee ID.

17.	Enter the Site Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

18.	The Site Owner Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Site Owner Organisation ID.

19.	Enter the Management Authority Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

20.	The Management Authority Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Management Authority Organisation ID.

21.	Enter the Regional Office Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

22.	The Regional Office Organisation Abbreviation field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Regional Office Organisation ID.

23.	Enter the Employee ID of the Regional Officer or click on the Zoom button to open the Employee Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

24.	The Regional Officer Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Employee ID.

25.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open a Login Organisation Selection form, make a selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.  Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation ID is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner for the Water Use Main Site will automatically be populated with the Login Organisation ID, but you may change it.

26.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

27.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

28.	Click on the Report button to open the Report Option Decision Criteria form.

29.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Edit a Water Use Site Component record:

 Note: The update of the record will only be possible when not linked anywhere else in the system. Only the data owner may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	In the QA Date field, the last date on which the record was Quality Assured will be automatically displayed.

3.	In the Close Date field, the date on which the Water Use Site Component record was set to ‘Out of Use’ for WMS usage will be automatically displayed.

4.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

5.	Edit the field as required.  Note: Editing any field value will result in the QA Date field being cleared if it has a value. The QA & Close buttons will be disabled.

6.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

7.	Focus back on the edited record. bmc qustion2.bmp} Note: The QA and Close buttons will now be enabled.

8.	Click on the QA button to indicate that the Water Use Site information is Quality Assured on WMS on that date. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

9.	Click on the Close button to set the Water Use Site Component record ‘Out of Use’ for WMS usage when the close date does not have a value. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

 Note: The focused record’s Photo Media ID is edited on the Photo Tab and the Map Media ID is edited on the Map Tab

1.	Click on the applicable Photo or Map Tab to enter the Media Id of the Feature’s Photo or Map or Zoom from the Media Id to open the Multimedia Library Maintenance form make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection

2.	Click on the Accept button to accept the changes

 Note: A linked Photo or Map image can be viewed on the form by checking the Refresh Object on scroll checkbox. A linked Photo or map image can be viewed in an Editor by clicking on the View Media Object button.

Delete a Water Use Site Component record:

 Note: Only the Data Owner may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system and no links exist.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click F3 or select Delete form the edit main menu.

3.	A message will be displayed to prompt you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Water Use Site Name Selection

Associated Classes - Types Selection

Organisation Selection

Employee Selection

Login Organisation Selection Option Decision Criteria


Water Use Site View Wizard

Description:

The Water Use Site View Wizard form is used to view Water Use Site records. It also allows the user to select to open the Water Use Main Site Maintenance, Water Use Sub Site Maintenance or Water Use Site Component Maintenance form to maintain the focused record or may activate select to insert a record by activating the Create Records button.  A Decision Criteria list is displayed where the user must select if he wants to insert a Main, Sub Site or Site Component record.

Note: The ‘out of use’ records are in dimmed grey.

Steps:

This is a view form but the Maintenance or Selection options are available on the form.

Related System Topics

Water Use Main Site Maintenance

Water Use Sub Site Maintenance

Water Use Site Component Maintenance

Option Decision Criteria


Water Use Site Name Selection

Description

The Water Use Site Name Selection form is used to select a Feature Name for a Water Use Site. This minimises the possibility of record duplication during the creation of new Water Use Site records.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button to return the selected record information to the previous form.

3.	If the record does not appear in the list, click on the Not found button to close the form, and enter the required information in the Water Use Main Site Maintenance, Water Use Sub Site Maintenance or Water Use Site Component Maintenance form.

Related System Topics

Water Use Main Site Maintenance

Water Use Sub Site Maintenance

Water Use Site Component Maintenance


Scale Selection

Description

The Scale Selection form is used to select one of the map scales that are available in the system

Steps

1.	Enter the Scale then click on the filter button to filter records according to the defined AlphaNumeric Criterium value for the field scale

2.	The Scale Id will be automatically displayed

3.	The Scale will be automatically displayed

4.	Select the applicable record and click the [image] Select button to return the selection

Related System Topics


Layer Directory Filter Criteria

Description:

The Layer Directory Filter Criteria form is part of Layer Directory Filter Criteria form (future development) and Layer Directory Selection form containing all the foreign keys of layer directory. This part will be re-used for all Layers Directory Filter Criteria and Layers Directory Selection forms.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	On the High Level Layer Type, click on the Work, Generated or the None option to filter out records associated with a selected Layer Type

2.	Enter the Layer Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associated Class Type Selection form, select the applicable record and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection

3.	Enter the Source Layer ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Layer Directory Selection form, select the applicable record and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection

4.	Enter the Superceded Layer ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Layer Directory Selection form, select the applicable record and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection

5.	The Scale Id will be automatically populated

Related System Topics:

Associated Class Type Selection

Layer Directory Selection


Water Use Site Water Use Maintenance
Water Use Site Water Use Maintenance Wizard

Description:

The Water Use Site Water Use Maintenance form is used to link WMS Water Use Site to a WARMS Water Use.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information. Records cannot be modified.

Add a new Water Use Site Water Use record:

 Note: Only the central Administrator or Data Owner may add a Water Use Site Water Use record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	An empty row will be opened at the bottom left side of the maintenance form.

3.	Enter the Geographical Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Water Use Site Selection form, select a WMS Water Use Site to be used and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

4.	Enter the Register Number or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the WARMS Water Use Site Selection form, select a Register Number and Form Number to be used as a filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

5.	Tab to accept the newly created record

 Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Filter Criteria form, the Exit button will close the form and return to the main menu and the Maintenance button will open the Option Decision Criteria where the user can select to maintain or view the parent or children records for the selected record.

Delete a Water Use Site Water Use record:

 Note: Only the Data Owner may delete its Water Use Site Water Use record and the Central Administrator may delete any record.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button to enable the [image] Delete button.

3.	Click on the [image] Delete button.  Note: When records are referenced elsewhere in the system, the delete option will be disabled.

4.	A confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record.

5.	Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Water Use Site Selection

WARMS Water Use Site Selection


WARMS Water Use Selection

Description:

The WARMS Water Use Selection form is used to select a WARMS Water Use record.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics:


Water Use View Wizard

Description:

The Water Use View form is used to view WARMS Water Use record.

 Note: Each Water Use record is linked to a form displaying WARMS specific data for the Water Use subset

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Report button to go to the Report Option Decision form for the user to display a list of application .

5.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

6.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

Related System Topics:


Monitoring Feature Filter Criteria


Monitor at Feature Filter Criteria

Description

The Monitor at Feature Filter Criteria form enables the user to filter out records for maintenance of monito at feature records

Pre-requisites:

None

Steps:

1.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID

3.	Enter the Visit Frequency ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitor Visit Frequency Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection

4.	The Visit Frequency Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Visit Frequency ID

5.	Enter the Responsible Office ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

6	The Responsible Office Caption and the Responsible Office Abbreviation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Responsible Office ID.

7.	Enter the Managing Office ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection

8.	The Managing Office Caption and the Managing Office Abbreviation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Responsible Office ID.

9.	Enter the Operational Office ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection

10.	The Operational Office Caption and the Operational Office Abbreviation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Responsible Office ID.

11.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

12.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

13.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitor at Point Maintenance Wizard form with records for the specified Filter criteria

 Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Monitoring Point Decision Criteria.

 Note: The Exit button will close the form and return to the Main Menu

14.	Select the Exit button to close the form and return to the main menu

Related System Topics

Associated Class Type Selection

Monitor Visit Frequency Selection

Organisation Selection

Login Organisation Selection

.


Monitor at Feature Maintenance

Description

The Monitor at Feature Maintenance form enables the user to maintain Monitor at Feature records

Pre-requisites:

None

Steps:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button to add a new record.

2.	An empty line displays to allow the addition of a new record.

3.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Geographical Feature Selection form, select a Geographical Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

4.	The Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Feature ID

5.	Enter the Operational Organisation ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, select a Monitor Operational Organisation ID to be    used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

6.	The Operational Office Abbreviation and Operational Office Name field will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Monitor Operational Organisation ID.

7.	Monitor Route Name of the Monitor at Feature will be populated by default.\

8.	Enter the Monitor Explanation of the Feature.

9.	Select the Monitoring Type Description form the drop down menu.

10.	The Monitoring Type Code will be automatically displayed form the drop down menu

11.	Enter the Frequency ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Visit Frequency Selection form, select a Frequency ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

12.	The Frequency Description field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Frequency ID.

13.	Enter the Operational From date to define the date from the Office become operational as the Monitor.

14.	Enter the Operational To date to define the end date that the Office was operational as the Monitor.

15.	Click checkbox to select Default Indicator on the form.

16.	Monitor Route Sequence of the Monitor at Feature will be populated by default.

17.	The Database Type field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Feature ID.

18.	The Database Type Description field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Feature ID.

19.	The High Level Code field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Feature ID.

20.	The High Level Code Description field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the High Level Code.

21.	Enter the Managing Office ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, select a Managing Office ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

22.	The Managing Office Name and Managing Office Abbreviation field will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Managing Office ID.

23.	Enter the Responsible Office ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, select a Responsible Organisation ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

24.	The Responsible Office Name and Responsible Office Abbreviation field will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Responsible Office ID.

25.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, select a Data Owner Organisation ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

26.	The Data Owner Organisation Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Calling Form.

Note: Maintain button open an Option Decision Criteria where you can select to maintain the parent or children records for the record that is selected.

Note: the Report button will open a Report Option Decision Criteria for the Reports available for Monitor at Feature Maintenance Form.

Note: The GIS View enables the user to view Monitoring Point and Operational Monitors’ address on a map.

Note: The Exit button will close the form and return to the main menu.

Note: The GIS Map Scale (Drop Down) enables the user to select the scale to be used when displaying the feature on the map.

27.	Tab to accept the record.

Related System Topics

Geographical Feature Selection

Organisation Selection

Visit Frequency Selection

Login Organisation Selection


Monitor at Feature Selection

Description

The Monitor at Feature Selection form allows the user to select a Monitor at a Geographical Feature

Pre-requisites:

None

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The form will be automatically displayed with the Monitor records information

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

3.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

4.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitor Route Selection

Description

The Monitor Route Selection form allows the user to select the Route taken by the Monitor at at the Feature

Pre-requisites:

None

Steps:


Monitor Route Maintenance

Description

The Monitor Route Maintenance form allows the user to select the Route taken by the Monitor at at the Feature

Pre-requisites:

None

Steps:


Visit Frequency Selection

Description:

The Visit Frequency Selection form is used to select a monitor visit frequency.

Steps:

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Organisation Filter Criteria


View Photo and Map Multimedia

Description

The View Photo and Map Multimedia form view an identifying photo and map linked to a Geographical Feature on the Maintenance form for the Geographical Feature

This form consist of two tabs:

Photo

This form view an identifying photo linked to a Geographical Feature on the Maintenance form for the Geographical Feature

Map

This form view an identifying map linked to a Geographical Feature on the Maintenance form for the Geographical Feature.

Pre-requisites:

None

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

 Note: The Refresh object on scroll indicator indicates if the Image of the picture should display or not

 Note: The View Media Object button enables the user to view, edit or print the image in an editor

Related Topics

Photo

Map


Photo

Description

Photo form view an identifying photo linked to a Geographical Feature on the Maintenance form for the Geographical Feature

Pre-requisites:

None

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related Topics

View Photo and Map Multimedia


Map

Description

Map form view an identifying map linked to a Geographical Feature on the Maintenance form for the Geographical Feature

Pre-requisites:

None

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related Topics

View Photo and Map Multimedia


Water User Filter Criteria

Description:

The Water User Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for Water User records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	On the Customer Type radio group, click one of the customer type option to filter out records associated with a selected type of Customer Type.

2.	Enter the Region Office ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Regional Office Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

3.	The Regional Office Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Region Office ID

4.	Enter the Water Management Area ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Water Management Area Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

5.	The Water Management Area Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Water Management Area ID.

6.	Enter the Catchment Management Agency ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Catchment Management Agency Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

7.	The Catchment Management Agency Name field will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Catchment Management Agency ID.

8.	Click on the Next button to open the Water Use View form with the specified filter criteria.

9.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

10.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Regional Office Selection

Water Management Area Selection

Catchment Management Agency Selection


Monitoring Point in Geographical Area View

Description

The Monitoring Point in Geographical Area View form is used to view Monitoring Points in Geographical Area

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related System Topics


Flow Association Filter Criteria

Description

The Flow Association Filter Criteria form enables the user to define filter criteria for Flow Association records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Click on the Flow Association Filter Criteria radio button, then click the Next button.

2.	This will open the Flow Association Filter Criteria Wizard.

3.	Select the Flow Association Type from the Flow Association Type Radiogroup.

4.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes - Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

5.	The Feature Type Name will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Feature Type ID.

6.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Flow Association Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

7.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID.

8.	Enter the Monitoring Point ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Point Selection form, select a Monitoring Point ID to be used as filter and click on the Select button to return the selection.

9.	The Monitoring Point Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Monitoring Point ID.

10.	Enter the Source Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Geographical Feature Selection form, select a Source Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the Select button to return the selection.

11.	The Source Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Source Feature ID.

12.	Enter the Destination Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Geographical Feature Selection form, select a Destination Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the Select button to return the selection.

13.	The   Destination Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Destination Feature ID.

14.	Enter the Transfer Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Transfer Feature Selection form, select a Transfer Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the Select button to return the selection.

15.	The Transfer Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Transfer Feature ID

16.	Enter the Downstream Flow Association ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Flow Association Selection form, select a Downstream Flow Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the Select button to return the selection.

17.	The Downstream Flow Association Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Downstream Flow Feature ID.

18.	Enter the Associated Flow Point ID or click on the  Zoom button to open the Monitoring Point Selection form, select a Associated Flow Point ID to be used as filter and click on the  Select button to return the selection.

19.	The Associated Flow Point Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Associated Flow Point ID.

20.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection

21.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

22.	Click on the Next button to open the Flow Association Maintenance Form with records for the specified Filter criteria.

 Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Decision Criteria form.

Note: The Exit button will close the form and return to the main menu.

Note: the Report button will open a Report Option Decision Form with a list of applicable reports that can be run for the Flow Association Filter Criteria to make a selection.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Point Selection

Geographical Feature Selection

Transfer Feature Selection

Flow Association Selection


Flow Association Selection

Description

The Flow Association Selection form is used to select a specific Flow Association.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

5.	The form will be automatically displayed with the Flow Association records information

6.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

7.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

8.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Flow Association Maintenance

Description

The Flow Association Maintenance form is used to define or maintain Flow Associations.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

1.	Click on the [image] Create button to add a new record.

2.	An empty line displays to allow the addition of a new record

3.	Select Flow Association Type from the Flow Association Type Dropdown.

4.	Flow Association Type will be automatically populated as it is linked to Flow Association Type Dropdown.

5.	Select Source Database Type from the Source Database Type Dropdown.

6.	Source Database Type description will be automatically populated as it is linked to Source Database Type Dropdown.

7.	Enter the Source Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Geographical Feature Selection form, select the Source Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

8.	The Source Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Source Feature ID.

9.	Select Destination Database Type from the Destination Database Type Dropdown.

10.	Destination Database Type description will be automatically populated as it is linked to Destination Database Type Dropdown.

11.	Enter the Destination Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Geographical Feature Selection form, select a Destination Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

12.	The Destination Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Destination Feature ID.

13.	Enter the Transfer Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Transfer Feature Selection form, select a Transfer Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

14.	The Transfer Feature Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Transfer Feature ID

15.	Select Monitoring High Level Type from the Monitoring High Level Dropdown.

16.	Point High Level Type will be automatically populated as it is linked to Monitoring High Level Dropdown.

17.	Enter the Monitoring Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Point Selection form, select a Monitoring Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

18.	The Monitoring Point Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Monitoring Feature ID.

19.	Select Monitoring Point Role Type from the Monitoring Role Type Dropdown.

20.	Monitoring Point Role Type will be automatically populated as it is linked to Monitoring Role Type Dropdown.

21.	Enter the Associated Flow Point ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Point Selection form, select a Association Flow Point ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

22.	The Associated Flow Point Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Association Flow Point ID.

23.	Enter the Downstream Flow Association ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Flow Association Selection form, select a Downstream Flow Association ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

24.	The Downstream Flow Association Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Downstream Flow Feature ID.

25.	Enter the Point Latitude of the Flow Association Source Feature which must be between –35 and –22 degrees.

26.	Enter the Point Longitude of the Flow Association Source Feature which must be between 16 and 33 degrees

27.	Enter the Latitude and Longitude Capture Method Code of the Flow Association Source Feature.

28.	Enter the Projection Type Code of the map where the Flow Association Source Feature coordinate is obtained from.

29.	Enter the Destination Point Latitude of the Flow Association Destination Feature which must be between –35 and –22 degrees.

30.	Enter the Destination Point Longitude of the Flow Association Destination Feature which must be between 16 and 33 degrees.

31.	Enter the Destination Latitude and Longitude Capture Method Code of the Flow Association Destination Feature.

32.	Enter the Destination Projection Type Code of the map where the Flow Association Destination Feature coordinate is obtained from.

33.	Enter the Catchment Management Numbering System Level Code for a point.

34.	Enter the Catchment Management Numbering System Level Number for a point.

 Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Filter Criteria form.

 The Exit button will close the form and return to the main menu.

 the Report button will open a Report Option Decision Form with a list of applicable reports that can be run for the Flow Association Maintenance Form to make a selection.

Related System Topics

Geographical Feature Selection

Flow Association Selection


Monitoring Point Maintenance for Selection
Monitoring Point Group Maintenance for Selection

Description

The Monitoring Point Group Maintenance for Selection form is used to select monitoring points group.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

  Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Range button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Selection button to return the record to Request List.

5.	Click on the Save as Group button to save your Request List and click OK button

Related System Topics


Objective/Standard Compliance Determination Parameter View

Description:

The Objective/Standard Compliance Determination Parameter View is used to define the particular standard/objective applicable for each variable and each monitoring point.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

Searching for Standard/objective compliance parameter:

1.1	You can search for the Standard/objective compliance parameter in one of the following ways:

•	Search by Objective Compliance Parameter ID: Click on the Find on Objective Compliance Parameter ID only radio button, and enter the ID in the Objective Comply Parameter ID field.

•	Search on Date: Ensure the Find on Other Criteria on this form radio button is checked. Check the Search on Date checkbox. The From and To Date fields will be enabled. Enter the dates, or click on the From and To Date [image] Drop Down buttons to open the calendar and select the required dates for the objective compliance parameter.

•	Search by Extraction Parameter ID: Ensure the Find on Other Criteria on this form radio button is checked. In the Extraction Parameter ID field, enter the ID.

•	Search by Objective Type: Ensure the Find on Other Criteria on this form radio button is checked. Click on the Objective Type Drop Down button and select the required objective type from the list.

•	Search by Objective Reason: Ensure the Find on Other Criteria on this form radio button is checked. Click on the Objective Reason Drop Down button to open the Class Type form, and select the required objective reason, by clicking on it, and click on the Select button to return the information to the previous form.

1.2 	Enter the search criteria as described above and click on the [image] Range button. The results will be displayed in the Results tab.

 TIP: When viewing a record with a Run date, you will be able to see a list of Monitoring Features and Monitors/Laboratories with compliance result records, and view a list of monitoring features with no compliance results. The failure can be a result of one or more of the following: the applicable objective type and objective reason combination was not created from the extraction period on the compliance parameter record before the Compliance Determination process was activated, or which was not finalised or the extraction period differs or no released results exist for the analyst/monitor, monitoring point, variable and period combination.

How to Add Objective Compliance Parameter:

 Ensure that you have already setup your extraction parameters in the Extraction Parameter form.

2.1	On the Objective Compliance Parameter Results tab, click on the objective compliance parameter record with the required Extraction Parameter record that you would like to add objective compliance parameters to, to highlight the record.

2.2	Then click on the Maintain button to open the Maintain Compliance Parameter form.

2.3	Click on the Add button, a new objective compliance parameter ID will automatically appear in the ID field.

2.4	In the Objective Type field, click on the Drop Down button to select either a Point Objective or Point Standard from the list.

2.5	In the Objective Reason field, click on the Zoom button to open the Class Type form and select the required Objective Reason by clicking on the record, and clicking on the Select  button.

2.6	The Extraction From Date is displayed as the Objective From Date. Enter another date if required.

2.7	The Extraction To Date is displayed as the Objective To Date. Enter another date if required.

2.8	Click on the Accept button to accept the new record.

How to Maintain an Objective Compliance Parameter:

3.1	First search for the Objective Compliance Parameter record in View Objective Compliance Parameter to be edited. Focus on the record to be edited and click on the Edit button.

3.2	Edit the record as required. The following fields can be edited when the run date is empty: Objective Type and Objective Reason. Objective Compliance From Date and/or Objective Compliance To Date.

3.3	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new information.

How to Delete an Objective Compliance Parameter:

Note: You can only delete the Objective Compliance Parameter record when the run date is empty, i.e. compliance has not yet been determined.

4.1	Click on the required Objective Compliance Parameter record to highlight it.

4.2	Click on the [image] Delete button.

4.3	A message will be displayed asking if you are sure you want to delete the record, click on the OK button.

Related System Topics:


Adhoc Compliance Determination Parameter View

Description:

The Adhoc Compliance Determination Parameter View is used to quickly determine compliance against a value, irrespective of the variable or variables selected.

Pre-requiste:

The only requirement is that the variables must have the same/convertible measuring unit. is set-up to allow you to run compliance on an adhoc basis (according to the upper and lower boundary limits and measuring unit).

Step:

How to Search for an Adhoc Compliance Parameter:

TIP: When viewing a record with a Run date, you will be able to see a list of Monitoring Features with compliance result records.

1.1	To search for a record, scroll through the list of records displayed or Search on Date: Check the Search on Date checkbox. The From and To Date fields will be enabled. Enter the dates, or click on the From and To Date [image] Drop Down buttons to open the calendar and select the required dates for the adhoc compliance parameter, then Click on [image] Range button.

 How to Add an Adhoc Compliance Parameter:

2.1	On the Objective Compliance Parameter Results tab, click on the objective compliance parameter record with the required Extraction Parameter record that you would like to add objective compliance parameters to, to highlight the record.

2.2	Then click on the Maintain button to open the Maintain Compliance Parameter form.

2.3	 Click on the Add button, a new objective compliance parameter ID will automatically appear in the ID field.

2.4	On the View Extraction Parameter form, click on the required Extraction Parameter record that you would like to add adhoc compliance parameters to, to highlight the record.

   2.5 	Then click on the Maintain button to open the Maintain Extraction Parameter form. Click on the View/Create Compliance Parameter Manually button to open the Maintain Compliance Parameter form.

2.6	Enter the information you require for the adhoc parameters (information may already appear in the fields, you may select or enter other information) By default the Extraction From and To Dates will be displayed as the default adhoc compliance parameter dates, but you may change it. Note: The default measuring unit is Mg/l. You may change it. The adhoc compliance will only be executed for monitoring variables with the same measuring unit.

     2.7	Click on the Accept button to accept the new record.

How to Edit an Adhoc Compliance Parameter:

3.1	First search for the Adhoc Compliance Parameter record to be edited on the View Adhoc Compliance Parameter form.

3.2	Focus on the record to be edited and click on the Edit button and perform the required changes. The following fields can be edited: Boundary type, Unit of Measure and Boundary Value when the record has no run date yet.

3.3	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new information.

 Note: An Adhoc Compliance Parameter may only have one upper and one lower boundary record.

How to Delete an Adhoc Compliance Parameter:

Note: You can only delete an Adhoc Compliance Parameter when the run rate is empty, i.e. no adhoc compliance results exist. When the Batch comply process was successfully completed, old compliance results will automatically be removed from the database.

4.1	Click on the required Adhoc Compliance Parameter record to highlight it.

4.2	Click on the [image] Delete button.

4.3	A message will be displayed asking if you are sure you want to delete the record, click on the OK button.

Related System Topics:


Select Monitoring Variables

Description:

The Select Monitoring Variables form is used to select one or more multiple variables for Monitoring Points.

Pre-requisite:

None

Steps:

2.1	You can search for the extraction parameter (Monitoring Variables) in one of the following ways:

•	Search on the Extraction Groups tab:

•	Search on the Monitoring Groups tab.

•	Search on the Monitoring Programmes tab.

•	Search on the Variable Type tab.

•	Search on the Variable Class tab.

•	Search on the Monitoring Type tab.

2.2	Enter the search criteria as described above and click on the [image] Range button.  The results will be displayed in the Variables tab.

Related System Topics:


Reporting Extraction Parameter View

Description:

The Reporting Extraction Parameter View form is used to specify the exact combination of Monitoring Feature(s) and Monitoring Variable(s) with an extraction period, to obtain the required information from the system.

Steps:

How to add an Extraction Parameter:

Note: Duplicate records are not allowed. A record is a duplicate if it has the same Monitoring Point(s) and Variable(s) as another record.

2.1	First perform a Search for the Extraction Parameter (Both Monitoring Point Groups and Monitoring Variable Groups). If the required Parameter does not exist, in the Results tab, click on the Add button to open the Maintain Extraction Parameters form.

Tip: To successfully add an Extraction Parameter, the following fields are compulsory:

If you do not enter these correctly, ACCEPT will fail.

- Name

- Feature or Feature Group

- Start date < End Date

2.2	Enter the new Extraction Parameter Name in the field.

2.3	In the Extraction From Date field, enter the From date or click on the Drop Down button to open the Calendar and select the date from which the data must be extracted.

2.4	In the Extraction To Date field, enter the to date or click on the Drop Down button to open the Calendar and select the date to which the data must be extracted.

2.5	In the Result Data Type field, click on the Drop Down button and select either Single, Multiple, Depth Profile or Time Series from the drop down list.

2.6	In the Start Depth field, enter a Start Depth.

2.7	In the End Depth field, enter an End Depth.

2.8	Specify either a Feature or a Feature Group as follows:

•	In the Feature field, click on the Zoom button and select the required Feature from the Select Monitoring Point form. (See how to Select a Monitoring Point in the Select Monitoring Feature Parameter module)

•	In the Feature Group field, click on the Drop Down button and select the required Feature Group from the drop down list. Only the public and private groups for the logged on user will be displayed in the list.

2.9	Optionally, specify either a Variable or a Variable Group as follows:

•	In the Variable field, click on the Zoom button to open the Select Monitoring Variables form, and select a record.  (See how to Select a Monitoring Variable)

•	In the Variable Group field, click on the Drop Down button and select the required Variable Group from the drop down list.

Important: If neither a monitoring Variable nor a Group of Monitoring Variables was selected, you will not be able to execute the compliance determination process against an ad-hoc limit.

2.10	To filter by Monitor or Analyst, Click on either the Monitor or Analyst radio  button, and then click on the Range button. A list of possible monitors/analysts will be displayed, check the checkbox next to the required Liaison Entity.

Important: If you do not specify any of the parameters in step 3.9 or 3.10, and you execute the compliance determination program, it implies that you re-run the Batch Comply for the specified period and monitoring point(s). It is unnecessary and may take a while. Take this option carefully into consideration before executing it.

2.11	To specify the Owner of the Extraction parameters as an organisation or person registered in a specific structure, click on the Drop Down button to open the Liaison Entity Zoom form. Select the required record by clicking on the record, and clicking on the Select button to return the information to the previous form.

2.12	In the Remarks field, you may enter any remarks/reason for creating the extraction parameter.

2.13	Click on the Accept button to accept the new record.

Note: The replication strategy for the extraction parameter is data consolidation. Data is sent from the regions to the central servers, therefore your extraction parameter record will only be seen by your own, and central servers. Don't change an existing extraction parameter created by another user, rather create or change your own record.

How to Maintain an Extraction Parameter:

3.1	First search for the Extraction Parameter record to be edited.

3.2	Edit the Extraction From Date and/or Extraction To Date and perform the necessary changes to the fields that require editing. The change will not be applied to existing Compliance Records created for the extraction parameter. You can only edit the Monitoring Point(s) and Monitoring Variable(s) of existing extraction parameter records if no compliance parameter exists for the specific extraction parameter record.

3.3	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new information.

How to Delete an Extraction Parameter:

You can only delete an extraction parameter when no compliance parameters exist for it.

4.1	Click on the required Extraction Parameter record to highlight it.

4.2	Click on the [image] Delete button.

4.3	A message will be displayed asking if you are sure you want to delete the record, click on the OK button.

Related System Topics:


Welcome to WMS Help

Welcome to the Department of Water Affairs and Forestry’s (DWAF’s) Water Management System Help or WMS Help! The WMS is a computer-based system specifically developed for DWAF to support decision-making, and to provide you, the user with the technology and information needed to effectively manage water resources, sources and monitoring in South Africa. The WMS Help system is designed to assist you in using this system effectively.

How do I use the help?

The WMS Help system is displayed in a tri-pane window containing a content, index and search option.

Each form (screen) help is displayed in the tri-pane window, and can be accessed by:

•	Clicking on the WMS FORM HELP button [image] appearing on each WMS screen.

•	Clicking on the Help menu option on the WMS system, and selecting WMS Help.

Each field help is displayed in a pop-up window, and can be accessed by:

•	Clicking on the required field appearing on the screen, and then clicking F1 on your keyboard.

•	Search for the field name in the Tri-pane help window's index.


Master Lists Overview

Description

The Master Lists module is used to create and maintain standard reference information and standard processes in WMS, for the Resource Management sub-system. In Master Lists you will find classification structures where information is categorised into logical groupings, data sources, and templates/methods of environmental characteristic surveys, spatial display components like colours and symbols, standard seasonal parameters, and standard correspondence templates.

  Note: Making changes to the System Administrator modules can result in inconsistencies between the WMS and its Manual and Help. Should necessary change be identified, please log a call to ensure that changes on the system are reflected in Manual and Help.

Scope

The Master List management component deals with the following modules:

•	Classification Management

•	System Datasource Maintenance Overview

•	Map Display Properties

•	Seasonal Date Ranges

•	System Administration

•	Layer Adminitration

•	Address Code Administration

Important

The information entered into Master Lists sets the standard for reference data and defines the processes in WMS. To ensure consistency of information, all data is entered at a central point. All new information or changes are first submitted to an Operational User Group for agreement between WMS Stakeholders. Contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information.

Related System Topics

Classification Management Overview

Source Providing Data Maintenance Overview

Environmental Survey Method Setup

Map Display Properties

Seasonal Date Ranges Overview


Classification Management Overview

Description

The Classification Management module is used to classify categories of information into logical groupings known as Class Types and consists of a hierarchy of Class Items in a Class Structure. The Structure Level specifies the depth of the hierarchy.

Scope

The Classification Management module deals with the following sub-modules:

•	Class Types (a hierarchy of class items in a class structure)

•	Class Items  (items of information that will be categorised into related groups)

•	Class Structure (determines which related items are to be arranged into groups)

•	Class Structure Level (all the possible levels to be used in a class structure)

Related System Topics

Master Lists Overview

Class Type

Class Item Maintenance

Classification Structure Maintenance

Class Structure Level Maintenance


Class Type Maintenance

Description

Class Types are divided into parent and child types and represent a hierarchy of Class Items in a Class Structure. The Class Type form is used to group class items into class structures. For example, a river is an item in a class type that is represented in a class structure called Water Features.

Pre-requisites

•	Class Structures (parents) must be completed in the Class Structure Maintenance form with the relevant number entered for the different hierarchical levels.

•	Complete Class Items.

Steps

View a Class Type:

1.	Open the Class Type form.

2.	Go to the Class field, and press the [image] Drop Down button to display the existing class structures in a list.

3.	Select a Class Structure by clicking on the record. All the sub-types will be displayed in a list (you can expand some levels by clicking on the +).

4.	By clicking on the class type record, all the related types and related type reasons (if any) will be displayed.

Add a Parent Class Type:

1.	If the parent level class type does not yet exist, click on the [image] Add Root button, this will automatically open the Class Item form.

2.	Ensure that the new item to be added does not yet exist by searching for the item. To perform a search, enter the item name or portion of the name with an * in the Find field, and click on the [image] Range button. If the item does exist, it will be displayed. An error message will be displayed if you try adding an item that already exists.

3.	If the item does not exist, add the item by clicking on the [image] Add button.

4.	Enter all the required information in the Class Item form and accept the changes by clicking on the [image] Accept button.

5.	Select the newly added item by clicking on the [image] Select button. The item will be returned to the Class Type form. Accept the new class type by clicking on the [image] Accept button.

Add a Child Class Type:

1.	If the parent class type does exit and you would like to add a child class type, click on the parent class type and click on the [image] Add button to add. This will automatically open the Class Item form.

2.	Ensure that the new item to be added does not yet exist, by searching for the item.

3.	To perform a search, enter the Item name or portion of the name with an * in the Find field, and click on the [image] Range button. If the item does exist, it will be displayed. An error message will be displayed if you try adding an item that already exists.

4.	If the Item does not exist, add the item by clicking on the [image] Add button.

5.	Enter all the required information in the Class Item form and accept the changes by clicking on the [image] Accept button.

6.	Select the relevant Class Item by clicking on the record, and clicking on the [image] Select button to return to the Class Type form.

7.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Add a Related Type:

1.	Select the Class Type that the Related Type will be added to, by clicking on the record.

2.	Click on the Related Types Name field, and click on the [image] Add button, this will automatically open another Class Type form.

3.	Click on the Class Structure Maintain that the required Class Type belongs to. An error message will be displayed if the two types belong to the same Class Structure.

4.	Click on the required Class Type to select the record, and click on the [image] Select button. The Class Type will be returned to the original Class Type form, and the Related Type Reason form will immediately open.

5.	Select a Reason by clicking on the relevant record and clicking on the [image] Select button, to return the reason to the Class Type form. If the Related Type Reason does not exist Add a Related Type Reason.

Add a Related Type Reason:

1.	Click on the Related Type Reason field.

2.	Click on the [image] Add button, the Related Type form will automatically open – if no related type exists for the selected Class type, an error message will be displayed, and you will first need to Add a Related Type.

3.	Click on the [image] Add button, and enter the Reason in the Related Type Reason field.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

5.	Click on the new record and click on the [image] Select button, to return the new reason to the Class Type form.

Edit a Class Type:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record, this will open the Class Item form.

3.	Click on the [image] Edit button and edit the record.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

5.	Click on the [image] Select button, to return the edited record to the Class Type form.

6.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Class Type:

1.	Click on the Class Type record to be deleted, to highlight it Note: You have the option of removing a single category item from the list of categories for a category class

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the current item and all its children. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Add Map Display Properties to a Class Type:

Click on the Spatial Information button to add Map Display Properties to a Class Type.

Important

A Class Type can be related more than once, for different reasons.

Related System Topics

Classification Management Overview

Class Item Maintenance

Class Structure Maintenance

Class Structure Level Maintenance


Subset &/or Class Type Relation Reason Maintenance

Description

The Subset &/or Class Type Relation Reason Maintenance form is used to select and maintain a reason for the relationship between class types.

Steps

Add a Related Type Reason:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button, and enter the Reason in the Related Type Reason field.

2.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

Select a Related Type Reason:

1.	Click on the required Related Type Reason record, and click on the [image] Select button, to return the reason to the Class Type form.

Related System Topics

Class Type


Class Structure Level Maintenance

Description

The Class Structure Level Maintenance form specifies the depth of a hierarchy of items within a Class Type and displays all the possible levels of a hierarchy that can be used in a Class Structure.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

View a Structure Level:

1.	Open the Structure Level form.

2.	The form displays existing Structure Levels.

Add a Structure Level:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Enter the Structure Level Number and Name.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Edit a Structure Level:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and enter the Structure Level Number and Name.

2.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Structure Level:

1.	To delete a record, first view the structure level to check that no types exist in the structure linked to this level. If the type is used in the system, you will not be able to delete the record.

2.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

3.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

All class items stored in the WMS have been or will be assigned to a class structure(s), with their own class type and level assigned to them.

Related System Topics

Classification Management Overview

Class Item Maintenance

Classification Structure Maintenance


Map Display Property Information

Description

The Map Display Property Information form allows you to specify how a specific type will be displayed spatially.

Pre-requisites

The Map Display Property Information record in Map Colour, Map Symbol, Fill Pattern Maintenance and Map Scale must exist.

Steps

Add Map Display Property Information:

1.	On the Spatial Display characteristics tab, click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Click on the Feature Colour [image] Drop down button to open the Colour form.

3.	Select a record by clicking on the required record and clicking the [image] Select button.

4.	The selected record will be returned to the Spatial Information form.

5.	Click on the Symbol Colour [image] Drop down button to open the Colour form.

6.	Select a record by clicking on the required record and clicking the [image] Select button.

7.	The selected record will be returned to the Spatial Information form.

8.	Click on the Map Symbol [image] Drop down button to open the Symbol form.

9.	Select a record by clicking on the required record and clicking on the [image] Select button.

10.	The selected record will be returned to the Spatial Information form.

11.	Click on the Fill Pattern [image] Drop down button to open the Fill Pattern form.

12.	Select a record by clicking on the required record and clicking the [image] Select button.

13.	The selected record will be returned to the Spatial Information form.

14.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

15.	On the Layers tab, click on the [image] Add button, to automatically open the Layer form.

16.	Select a record by clicking on the required record and clicking the [image] Select button.

17.	The selected record will be returned to the Spatial Information form.

18.	Click on the Scale field [image] Zoom button to zoom to the Map Scale Maintenance form.

19.	Select a record by clicking on the required record and clicking the [image] Select button.

20.	The selected record will be returned to the Library Folder form.

21.	The description field for default colour and outline colour is a display only field.

22.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Edit Map Display Property Information:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, as explained in the Add steps 2-19.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record, this will zoom you to the related form.

3.	Edit the record.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete Map Display Property Information:

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button. Ensure the correct record has been deleted and click on the [image] Accept button to confirm the deletion.

Important

Map Display Property Information characteristic records must exist before adding layer records.

Related System Topics

Class Type


Class Item Maintenance

Description

The Class Item Maintenance form is used to enter all the possible items to be used to classify information into logical groupings known as Class Types.

Pre-requisites

•	The Monitoring Variable Maintenance must already exist when using "minimum required variables for monitoring type".

•	The Measuring Unit Maintenance must exist before associating a measuring unit with an item.

Steps

View an existing Class Item:

1.	Open the Class Item form.

2.	The system automatically displays the Name, Code, Description, Measure Unit or Monitoring Variables of all existing class items in a list ordered by item name.

3.	Select the required item from the list, by clicking on the record that you would like to include in the classification structure.

Search for a Class Item:

1.	Enter a name, or a portion of the name with a * in the name field and click on the [image] Range button.

Add a Class Item:

1.	First do a Search for the Class Item.

2.	If the item does not yet exist, click on the [image] Add button.

3.	Enter the Name of the Item.

4.	If the item has a Measure Unit associated with it, click on the Measuring Unit Abbreviation field [image] Zoom button to zoom to the Measure Unit form, and select the unit by clicking on the record, and then clicking on the [image] Select button.

5.	Enter a Class Item Description in the description field.

6.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Add Minimum Required Variables to a Monitoring Type

1.	Click on the Item name record that you would like to add Minimum Required Variables to.

2.	Click on the Minimum required variables field and click on the [image] Add button to open the Monitoring Variable form.

•	Select the Eco-Compartment from the drop down list by clicking on the [image] Drop down button.

•	Select the variable type from the drop down list by clicking on the [image] Drop down button.

•	Select the variable abbreviation and name by clicking on the required record from the drop down list.

3.	Click on the [image] Select button to return the new record to the Class Item form.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Edit a Class Item:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Edit the record.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

5.	If there are monitoring variables associated with the class item, you will not be able to select a measuring unit for editing.

6.	If there is a measuring unit associated with the class item, and you delete the measure unit value field, the value based indicator will automatically be set to false.

Delete a Class Item:

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the item. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

3.	If there are monitoring variables associated with the class item, the class item and all associated monitoring variables will be deleted.

Important

Before editing an item ensure that the meaning of the item referenced elsewhere in the system, remains unchanged.

Related System Topics

Classification Management Overview

Class Type

Monitoring Variable Maintenance

Measuring Unit Maintenance


Classification Structure Maintenance

Description

Classification Structure refers to the specific group of classification types that are distinct. Class Structures are often hierarchical, in which one or more Class Types are represented by another (parent) type. These are referred to as sub-types of the parent type.

Pre-requisites

The following fields must be completed:

•	A name for the Class Structure.

•	The hierarchical Class Structure Levels contained within the Class Structures.

Steps

View a Classification Structure:

1.	Open the Class Structure form.

2.	The entire list is automatically displayed.

Add a Classification Structure:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Enter a Class Structure name in the field.

3.	Enter an explanation.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

5.	This automatically opens the Class Structure Level Maintenance form.

6.	Select a Level for the new class structure with the [image] Select button.

7.	You will return to the Classification Structure Maintenance form. Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Edit a Classification Structure:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and enter the name and/or explanation.

2.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Classification Structure:

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected and click on the [image] Accept button.

Important

No duplication of names will be accepted. When Class Types are used in programmes they are defined as fixed data types and cannot be edited or deleted.

Related System Topics

Classification Management Overview

Class Item Maintenance

Classification Structure Maintenance

Class Type Maintenance


Class Structure Select

Description

The Class Structure Select form is used to search for and select a specific class structure. Class Structure (or Classification structure) refers to the specific group of classification types that are distinct. Class Structures are often hierarchical, in which one or more Class Types are represented by another (parent) type. These are referred to as sub-types of the parent type.

Pre-requisites

The required class structure must be setup in the Class Structure Maintenance form.

Steps

Click on the required Class Structure record to highlight it.

Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics

Template Characteristic Maintenance

Maintain Category Types


Class Type High Levels Maintenance

Description

The Class Type High Levels Maintenance form is a system administrative function used to define high-level types. High Level Types are fixed class types defined by the business for which specific set physical database structures are implemented. This form is used to control filter feature type records on environmental survey methods to enforce high-level validation rules. More than one filter feature type can be selected if they belong to the sane high level. In the future, these class type high level records will ensure that no invalid new root level records will be created on class type.

Steps

Add a new high-level value:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	The Class Type Selection form will open, select a class type record, and click on the Select button. The information will be returned to the Class Type High Levels Maintenance form. Note: If the selected item was incorrectly selected, you have the option of removing the record from the list.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a high level value:

Note: Records can only be deleted if they are not linked to other class types on the system.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected and click on the [image] Accept button.

Note: You have the option of removing a single category item from the list of categories for a category class

Related System Topics


Source Providing Data Maintenance Overview

Description

The purpose of the Source Providing Data Maintenance form is to maintain a record of computerised or manual sources from which data is imported, or can be obtained.

Pre-requisites

•	The Custodian of each Source providing Data must exist in the person or organisation Details form.

•	The required Data Type must exist in the Class Types form.

Steps

Search for a Source Providing Data:

You can search on the name, custodian or any of the indicators in the Find tab to identify specific Sources Providing Data. Only the records that satisfy the search criteria are then displayed.

1.	You can search for a Source Providing Data in the following ways:

•	Enter a name, or a portion of the name with an * in the Source Providing Data Name field, and click on the [image] Range button.

•	Click on the [image] Zoom button, next to the Custodian of Data field. This will open the Person or Organisation Select form. Enter the required search criteria, and select the correct organisation from the person or organisation tab by clicking on the record and clicking on the [image] Select button. This will return you to the Source Providing Data Maintenance form. Click on the [image] Range button.

•	Click on one of the Commission Status indicators (Out of Commission, In Commission or Both) and click on the [image] Range button.

Add a Source Providing Data:

1.	First perform a Search for a Source Providing Data.

2.	If the record does not yet exist, click on the [image] Add button.

3.	Enter the Source Providing Data Name, and press the tab key.

4.	To enter the Custodian of Data, click on the [image] Zoom button in the Custodian of Data field. This will open the person or organisation Zoom form. Scroll down the list of records, and select the correct organisation (the Custodian must be an organisation) from the person or organisation tab by clicking on the record and clicking on the [image] Select button. This will return you to the Source Providing Data Maintenance form.

5.	Double-click on the Out of Commission indicator if the Source Providing Data is no longer in use.

6.	If you have checked the indicator in step 5, click on the [image] Zoom button in the Out of Commission Date field. The Date Picker form will be opened, select the required date and click on the OK button to return the information to the Sources Providing Data Maintenance form.

7.	In the Data Type field on the Possible Types of Data available at Source grid, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select the required option.

8.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Edit a Source Providing Data record:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit the record.

3.	Enter the changed information. (Refer to the Add a Source Providing Data steps 3-7)

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Source Providing Data record:

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button. A message will be displayed asking if you are sure that you want to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

3.	Data Sources used elsewhere in the system cannot be deleted.

Important

Records added by a region can only be updated/deleted by users from that specific region, however the records can be used and viewed nationally. A Source Providing Data must always have at least one Data Type specified.

Related System Topics

Person or Organisation Select


Geographical Feature Reference Code

Description

The Geographical Feature Reference Codes form is used to maintain reference codes for geographical features. Reference codes provide a link between WMS feature ID's and numbering conventions used by Sources Providing Data. The link is made to access data that is either imported to WMS, or that can be obtained from the Source Providing Data.

Pre-requisites

•	The Geographical Feature Reference Code form is accessed from the following forms:

Monitoring Point Maintenance, Management Areas, Water Features, Transfer Features, or Reaches.

•	The Feature must have been registered in one of the following forms:

Monitoring Point Maintenance, Management Areas, Water Features, Transfer Features, or Reaches.

•	The Sources Providing Data must have been registered in the Source Providing Data Maintenance form.

•	The relevant Numbering Conventions and Feature Reference Purposes must have been registered in the Class Types form.

Steps

Add a Feature Reference Code

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	In the Source Providing Data field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, select the required option, and tab.

3.	In the Numbering Convention field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, select the required option, and tab.

4.	Enter the Feature Reference Code in the field.

5.	Click on the Feature Reference Purpose field, click on the [image] Drop Down button and select the required option. (More than one Feature Purpose can be added to the same Feature Reference Code.)

6.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Edit a Feature Reference Code

Only the Feature Reference Code field can be edited. To edit information on any other Feature Reference Code fields, the entire record will need to be deleted, and a new record added.

1.	Select the Feature Reference Code record to be edited.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit the record.

3.	Enter the changed information.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Feature Reference Code

1.	Select the Feature Reference Code record to be deleted.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you are sure that you want to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

One Reference Code cannot be linked to two features of the same geographical type, e.g. Feature Reference Code 2229CC00494 cannot be linked to Borehole 180725 and Borehole 183160.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Point Maintenance

Management Areas Maintenance

Water Features Maintenance

Transfer Features Maintenance

Reaches

Source Providing Data Maintenance


Environmental Survey Method Setup Overview

Description

The Environmental Survey Method Setup module is used to create standard Environmental Survey Method Template Maintenance and Environmental Survey Methods, for the purpose of gathering information about the environmental state of geographical features. This module ensures that data is obtained on a standardised basis to effectively assess, interpret and provide information (spatially and attribute related) in order to identify a remedial action for water resource management and disseminate information.

Scope

The Environmental Survey Method Setup module deals with the following sub-modules:

•	Environmental Survey Template (used to assimilate questions of a similar topic that will be applied to setup survey methods)

•	Environmental Survey Method (used to define related questions and the way in which the questions should be answered)

Important

Related System Topics

Environmental Survey Template Maintenance

Environmental Survey Method


Environmental Survey Template Maintenance

Description

The Environmental Survey Template Maintenance form is used to create and define standard environmental survey templates.  Environmental Survey Templates form the basis of Environmental Survey Methods that are used to conduct surveys for the purpose of gathering and capturing information about the environmental state of geographical features.

Environmental Survey Templates are created in two processes:

•	The Environmental Survey Template is created with a name and definition in the Environmental Survey Template form. The Maintain Template Characteristics button is then clicked to open the Template Characteristic Maintenance form.

•	The Template Characteristic Maintenance form is used to define and maintain all possible groups of questions that may be needed for the associated Environmental Survey Template. The groups of questions, also known as template characteristics are arranged using a maximum of three levels in hierarchical structures.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Search for an Environmental Survey Template:

1.	Enter a name, or a portion of the name with * in the Find Env Survey Template field and click on the [image] Range button. The required information should be displayed if the template record exists.

Add an Environmental Survey Template:

1.	First do a Search for the Environmental Survey Template.

2.	If the record does not yet exist, click on the [image] Add button.

3.	Enter an Environmental Survey Template Name in the field and tab.

4.	Enter an Environmental Survey Template Definition in the field.

5.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

Edit an Environmental Survey Template:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Edit the record.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept changes to the record.

Edit/ Add Environmental Survey Template structure changes:

1.	Click on the Maintain Template Characteristics button to define and maintain all possible groups of questions that may be needed for the associated Environmental Survey Template.

Delete an Environmental Survey Template:

A record cannot be deleted if the Environmental Survey Method record's Accept Completed Method button has been clicked, and the validation process has been successfully completed. If an Environmental Survey Template is linked to Template Characteristics, the dependant child record(s) will first need to be deleted, before you can continue deleting the Environmental Survey Template record.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the item. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

When editing the Environmental Survey Template Name take care not to change the meaning of the name. An Environmental Survey Template name must always be unique; therefore no two records can have the same name.

Related System Topics

Environmental Survey Method Setup Overview

Environmental Survey Method Maintenance

Template Characteristic Maintenance


Template Characteristic Maintenance

Description

The Template Characteristic Maintenance form is used to define and maintain groups of questions that are used in Environmental Survey Templates.    Tips on creating questions.

The groups of questions, also known as template characteristics are arranged using one to a maximum of three levels in hierarchical structures. The environmental structure and template characteristics form the basis of Environmental Survey Methods (questionnaires) that are used to conduct surveys. A question is formulated by combining a maximum of three structure levels, with only the lowest level characteristics being answered when conducting surveys.  The top level, known as the root level is always an Environmental Characteristic Variable, while the other levels can contain Environmental Characteristic Variable, Classified Characteristics and Non-Classified Characteristic Parameters.

Example 1: For the South African Scoring System - Environmental Survey Template, the 1st level contains "Invertebrate, Stones in Current" - Environmental Characteristic Variable, the 2nd level contains "all Invertebrae such as Baetidae" - Classified Characteristic, and the 3rd level contains a Non-classified Characteristic "1 species" or " > 2 species".

Pre-requisites

The Environmental Survey Template record must already exist.

Steps

Add Template Characteristic Types

1.	First ensure that the record you selected in the Environmental Survey Templates form is correctly displayed in the Environmental Survey Template Name field.

If the correct record is displayed:

•	To add the first Template Characteristic or a root level template characteristic, click on the [image] Add Root button. The Template Characteristic field will automatically be updated with Environmental Characteristic Variable as only Environmental Characteristic Variables can be inserted on the root level. Continue with Step 4 of Add an Environmental Characteristic Variable.

•	For all other additions, click on the [image] Add button, the Template Characteristic Type selection form is automatically displayed. Three different template characteristic types exist, namely Classified Characteristics, Environmental Characteristic Variables, and Non-Classified Characteristic Parameters. Depending on the template characteristic type that you would like to add, follow the adding process for the specific Characteristic Type below:

Add an Environmental Characteristic Variable:

Complete steps 1-3 of the Add Template Characteristic Types then click on the Environmental Characteristic Variable radio button.

1.	Enter an Environmental Characteristic Variable Name in the highlighted field.

2.	Enter an Environmental Characteristic Variable Abbreviation in the field.

3.	If required, link the Environmental Characteristic Variable to a Class Structure by either entering the Class Structure Name or by clicking on the [image] Zoom button to open the Class Structure form. Select the structure by clicking on the record, and then clicking on the [image] Select button.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button to save the new record information.

Add a Classified Characteristic:

Classified Characteristics can only be added in the following conditions:

A Class Structure is linked to the immediate parent (if the parent does not have a Class Structure, the system will first open the Class Structure form, and you will need to select a class structure);

A Class Structure is linked to the Template Characteristic; or

A Class Structure is linked to another Classified Characteristic child from the same parent.

Classified Characteristic parameters cannot be added to the root level of a tree or hierarchy

Complete steps 1-3 of the Add Template Characteristic Types then click on the [image] Classified Characteristic radio button, to open the Multiple Class Type Select form. Select the required class types in the request list by clicking on the promote button, and then clicking on the OK button. The selection will be returned to the Template Characteristic Maintenance form.

Add a Non-Classified Characteristic Parameter:

Non-Classified Characteristic parameters cannot be added to the root level of a tree

Complete steps 1-3 of the Add Template Characteristic Types then click on the [image] Non-Classified Characteristic Parameter radio button

1.	Enter a Non-Classified Characteristic Parameter Name in the highlighted field.

2.	Click on the [image] Accept button to save the new record information.

Edit a Template Characteristic:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Edit the record. Template Characteristic Types, and Classified Characteristics, including Class Structures that contain Classified Characteristics as children, cannot be edited.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Template:

Template Characteristics can only be deleted if they are not used as Environmental Characteristics.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the item. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

 TIP: The Change Level button is used to move the selected template characteristic up or down in the hierarchical tree view.

Rules for Valid Level changes:

1.	You can always move up and down within the same level.

2.	Once template characteristics are incorporated in an Environmental Survey Method, you can no longer move the template characteristics from one level to another level.

3.	Root levels can only contain Environmental Characteristic Variables.

4.	Environmental Characteristic Variables can be a root level, 2nd and 3rd level. 2nd and 3rd levels can also be moved to root level, and vice versa.

5.	Classified Characteristics cannot be moved to the root level that has no children. Rather add the classified characteristic to the root levels through the Multiple Class Type Selection form.

6.	Classified Characteristic children cannot be added to a parent Classified Characteristic.

7.	If a Characteristic with children is moved, all the children will also be moved to the new destination, except when the end result is greater than 3 levels.

Move Template Characteristics

1.	Select the Template Characteristics that are to be moved, by clicking on the records.

2.	Click on the Change Level button.

3.	A confirmation message will be displayed asking whether you are certain that moving it to another parent will not change the meaning of the characteristic. If you are certain, click on the Yes button.

4.	Another message will be displayed asking you to select the destination Template Characteristic. The Template Characteristic that you are moving will be inserted in front of this destination Template Characteristic. Click on the Accept Level button, and if the move is valid, the selected Template Characteristic will be moved.

5.	If another Template Characteristic needs to be moved, follow the same procedure.

6.	To save all the changes, click on the [image] Accept button.

7.	If the move is incorrect, click on the [image] Cancel button, to undo all the changes.

Related System Topics

Environmental Survey Template Maintenance

Multiple Class Type Selection


Multiple Class Type Selection

Description

The Multiple Class Type Selection form is used to select one or more class types for use in categorising Environmental Survey Templates.

Steps

1.	Select the required class types, by scrolling through the type list.

2.	Press the [image] Promote button to add the class type to the request list.

3.	To remove class types from the request list, press the [image] Demote button.

4.	Once you have promoted all the required type records to the request list, click on the OK button.

Related Topics

Template Characteristic Maintenance


Enviromental Characteristics Interpretative and Lookup Category Maintenance
Enviromental Characteristics Interpretative and Lookup Category Maintain Category Type

Description

The Environmental Characteristics Interpretative and Lookup Category Maintain form is used to maintain and link category classes with their category items to an environmental characteristic.

There are two main category types:

•	Category Lookup - When the Category Class is linked as a Category Lookup, an answer selection list is defined. Only one category class can be specified per environmental characteristic.

•	Interpreted Categories for Numeric Values  - When the Category Class and Category items are linked to a Numeric Value answer (including a Calculated Characteristic answer); they will be used to interpret the numeric value's result. More than one interpretation classification can be specified.

A numeric Range From and Range To should be specified for a category item to interpret the answer. A Weight provides a level of significance to an Environmental Characteristic, and is usually used in a calculated answer.

Pre-requisites

The required Category Class must exist in the Class Structure Maintenance.

The required Class Item must exist in the Class Item Maintenance form.

Steps

Add a Category Class with associated Category Items:

When adding a new record, if the category class is associated with the physical table for the first time, the class structure will automatically be created against the table and column. See the Table Column Class Maintenance form.

1.	Focus on the Category Class grid, and click on the [image] Add button.

2.	The Class Structure Select form will open. Click on the required record to highlight it, and click on the [image] Select button to select the record.

3.	The Type Select form will open. Select the required type(s) by clicking on the [image] Promote button, to ensure all the selected records appear in the Request List. Then click on the OK button.

4.	All the information will appear in the Maintain Category Type form.

5.	Click on the Accept Category Items button to accept the new category items for the category class, and mark it as completed.

 Tip: It is important to check that the category setup is complete after clicking on the Accept button. The Environmental Survey Method will not be correctly validated if the category class has not been completed.

Add a Category Item to a Category Class:

Focus on the Category Items field, and click on the [image] Add button.

The Type Selection form will open. Select the required type(s) by clicking on the [image] Promote button, to ensure all the selected records appear in the Request List. Then click on the OK button.  A warning message will be displayed asking if all the selected Category Items are correct, if they are correct, click on the Yes button to display the newly added items.

Edit a Category Item:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the [image] Edit button.

2.	You may enter a Range From, Range To and Weight.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

 Tip: As soon as new category items are added, the status of the Category Class record changes to incomplete, and you will to need to validate the record again. When a weight is specified for one category item, it must be specified for all items of the category class. When ranges are specified, no gaps or overlaps are allowed. The number of decimal digits must be the same for all items of a category class.

Delete a Category Class with all its Category Items:

When removing a category class that is currently not linked to another global or specific environmental survey method record, the class structure will automatically be removed from the physical table and column. See Table Column Class Maintenance.

1.	Place focus on the Category class to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed confirming that the Category Class and its Items will be deleted. Ensure the correct record has been selected and click on the OK button.

Delete a single Category Item:

1.	Click on the category item record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed confirming that the Category Item will be deleted. Ensure the correct record has been selected and click on the OK button.

Related System Topics

Environmental Characteristic Maintenance

Environmental Survey Method


Environmental Survey Method

Description

The Environmental Survey Method form defines environmental survey methods used to perform environmental surveys. Each Environmental Survey Method is applicable to geographical feature types. Survey Methods can change over time.

Environmental Survey Methods can be applied globally for nationally conducted surveys e.g. South African Scoring System (SASS) or applied to specific localised geographical features e.g. the distribution of fish species is dependant on ecological conditions and river systems and therefore this survey method will be more specific.

Useful Terminology:

Filter Features types are used to define feature types e.g. rivers, dams and water care works for the selected/filtered geographical feature type e.g. Management Area, Transfer Feature, Water Feature, and Reaches. These feature types will indicate the type of location where the survey method will take place.

Filter Feature criteria is used to define particular geographical features e.g. Andriesspruit, and Apies River for the selected/filtered Feature Type. These geographical features indicate the exact location where certain customised questions for Specific (localised) survey methods (questions) will be answered.

Survey Feature types - are used to define geographical feature types that a survey method will be applied to.  For Specific (localised) survey methods the feature type that is defined will be for the particular filter feature e.g. A Specific Survey method can be conducted on any Monitoring Point (survey feature type) of the Apies River (filter feature criteria).

Environmental Characteristics - are used to define the environmental characteristic questions for the environmental survey method. For Specific (localised) survey methods the customised questions for the survey methods (questions) will be defined.

 Tip: The environmental survey method can only be used in a survey once the method construction is complete, the method has been validated successfully, and the system date occurs in the non-historical method's time period.

Pre-requisites

The Environmental Survey Template with its characteristics must exist.

Steps

Search for an Environmental Survey Method:

You can search for an environmental survey method in the following ways. Entering multiple field criteria and then clicking on the Range button can refine the search.

Search by Template:

In the Template field, enter a name, or a portion of the name with * or click on the [image] Drop Down button to display a list of all the Environmental Survey Templates registered on the system. Select the required record, and click on the [image] Range button.

Search by Environmental Survey Method:

In the Environmental Survey Method field enter a name, or a portion of the name with * and click on the [image] Range button.

Search by Environmental Survey Method checkbox:

On the Construction checkbox you can select one of the following values:

?  the query will retrieve Environmental Survey Methods that are still under construction and Environmental Survey Methods that are not under construction (have a registration date)

Y  the query will only retrieve Environmental Survey Methods that are still under construction.

N  the query will only retrieve Environmental Survey Methods that are not under construction (have a registration date)

Then click on the [image] Range button.

On the Global Checkbox you can select one of the following values:

?  the query will retrieve Global Env Survey Methods and Specific Env Survey Methods

Y  the query will only retrieve Global Env Survey Methods

N  the query will only retrieve Specific Env Survey Methods

Then click on the [image] Range button.

On the Active Methods Checkbox you can select one of the following values:

?  the query will retrieve all Env Survey Methods that are currently used for surveys or ready to be used for surveys and methods that are inactive

Y  the query will only retrieve active Env Survey Methods

N the query will only retrieve inactive Env Survey Methods

Then click on the [image] Range button.

On the Historical Methods Checkbox you can select one of the following values:

?  the query will retrieve Historical Env Survey Methods and Non-Historical Env Survey Methods

Y  the query will only retrieve Historical Env Survey Methods

N  the query will only retrieve Non-Historical Env Survey Methods

Then click on the [image] Range button.

Search by Geographical and Survey Feature Types:

Click on the required Survey Geographical Feature type radio button (Monitoring Feature; Transfer Feature; Management Area; Reach Zoning Purposes; Water Quality Feature). Then click on the Survey Feature Type Zoom button to open the Class Type form, and select the required type.

Search by Geographical and Filter Feature Types for filter criteria:

Click on the required Geographical Feature type radio button (Management Area; Water Quality Feature, Transfer Feature, Reach Zoning Purposes) then follow one or more of steps 9-12.

In the Filter Feature Type field, click on the Zoom button to open the Class Type form and select a type.

In the Feature Name field, either enter a name or a portion of the name with * , OR click on the Zoom button to open the required form and select a record, then click on the [image] Range button. The Feature Name is the name of a feature that can be linked to the Method and Filter Feature Description as a Filter Feature.

In the Feature ID field, enter a Feature ID and click on the [image] Range button. The Feature ID is the ID of the feature that can be linked to the method and Filter Feature Description as a Filter Feature.

In the Filter Feature Description field, enter a Filter Feature Description or a portion of the description with * and click on the [image] Range button.

The required information should be displayed in the Survey Method Results tab if the survey method record exists.

 BASIC STEPS: How to add  Global and Specific Environmental Survey Methods

First determine if you want to add a global (for nationally conducted surveys) or a specific (for localised geographical feature surveys) survey method.

How to add a Global Environmental Survey Method:

1.	Add the Environmental Survey Method on the Maintain Environmental Survey Method form.

2.	Define Geographical & Survey Feature Type(s) for the method on the Environmental Survey Method form.

3.	Add environmental characteristics in the Maintain Environmental Characteristics form. Environmental Characteristics must either be linked to a Lookup Category Class, or an environmental characteristic on the child level must be specified as a datatype.

4.	Click on the Accept Completed Method button, if any problems occur, click on the View Method Validation Problems button. Resolve the problems, and re-click the Accept Completed Method button.

5.	A completed method is a Global or Specific method that has a registration date.

How to add a Specific Environmental Survey Method:

1.	Add the Environmental Survey Method on the Maintain Environmental Survey Method form.

2.	Define Geographical & Survey Feature Types for the method on the Environmental Survey Method form.

3.	Filter Feature Types must be defined for the method (specific methods only)

4.	Filter Features must be defined for the method (specific methods only)

5.	Add environmental characteristics in the Maintain Environmental Characteristics form. Environmental Characteristics must either be linked to a Category Class, or an environmental characteristics on the child level must be specified as a datatype.

6.	Click on the Accept Completed Method button, if any problems occur, click on the View Method Validation Problems button. Resolve the problems, and re-click the Accept Completed Method button.

7.	A completed method is a Global or Specific method that has a registration date.

Add an Environmental Survey Method:

1.	First do a Search for the Environmental Survey Method.

2.	If the record does not yet exist in the Results tab, click on the [image] Add button, to open the Environmental Survey Method Maintenance form. See how to Add an Environmental Survey Method in the Maintain Environmental Survey Method for more information.

Add a Filter Feature Description:

 This is only used for specific environmental survey methods.

1.	Place focus on the specific methods grid on the Survey Method Results tab or on the specific methods grid on the Filter Feature Criteria tab.  (Note: the Filter Feature Criteria tab will not be visible if there are no Filter Feature Types defined for the specific method).

2.	Click on the [image] Add button.

3.	If the method is preceded by a specific method, another instance of the Environmental Survey Method will be opened and all the Filter Feature Descriptions for the preceding method will be retrieved.  Select a preceding Filter Feature Description. If the method does not have a preceding method, enter a Filter Feature Description.

 Tip: The new Filter Feature Description will inherit all the possible feature types, features, and environmental characteristics belonging to the previous Filter Feature Description. The same Filter Feature Description can be selected as a preceding method more than once. This can assist you in dividing the Filter Feature Description in more than one superceded Filter Feature Description.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.  NOTE : You will not be able to enter information into the Registration Date field, or check the construction indicator field, as this information will be automatically entered by the system.

Edit a Filter Feature Description:

 This is only used for specific environmental survey methods.

1.	Click on the on the specific methods grid on the Survey Methods Results tab or on the specific methods grid on the Filter Feature Criteria tab on the Filter Feature Description that must be updated.  (Note: the Filter Feature Criteria tab will only be visible if there are Filter Feature Types defined for the specific method).

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Edit the record.  Tip: The Filter Feature Description must be unique for the Environmental Survey Method.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept changes to the record.

Delete Filter Feature Description:

The Filter Feature Description can only be deleted when no filter feature records and environmental characteristic records exist.

1.	Click on the on the specific methods grid on the Survey Methods Results tab or on the specific methods grid on the Filter Feature Criteria tab on the Filter Feature Description that must be deleted.  (Note: the Filter Feature Criteria tab will only be visible if there are Filter Feature Types defined for the specific method).

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected and click on the OK button.

Edit an Environmental Survey Method:

 TIPS: The current(active) method or historical method can be edited if they are not scheduled in a survey or if survey results have already been received. Only ONE historical and ONE other non-historical method can be under construction for an Environmental Survey Template at the same time.

The latest or historical completed method's status can be changed to "under construction" at any time.

A new amended calculated characteristic can be added to the Environmental Characteristic Method after construction has been completed and the method successfully validated.

1.	In the Survey Methods Results tab, click on the Environmental Survey Method record to be updated, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record.

3.	The Maintain Environmental Survey Method window will open, and you can edit the following fields:

•	Environmental Survey Method Name (when you begin entering, a warning message will be displayed)

•	From date

•	Objective/Standard Reason

•	Global indicator

•	If the method is a specific method, you can change the Geographic Filter Feature Type

•	If the method is specific, you can change the method to be a global method.  A message will be displayed warning that any existing Filter Features, Filter Feature Types and Environmental Characteristics will be deleted.

•	A global method can be edited to become specific.  In this case you must select a Geographical Filter Feature Type from the Geographical Feature Type for Filter Feature group.

 NOTE:  You cannot change the Template, To Date, Registration Date, Construction indicator, or the preceding environmental survey method.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept changes to the record.

Delete an Environmental Survey Method:

The Environmental Survey Method can only be deleted when no filter feature description, feature types, features or environmental characteristic records exist.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion, click on the OK button.

Add a Filter Feature Type:

If the Environmental Survey Method is specific method, you will need to add Filter Feature Types.

1.	Place focus on the Filter Feature Types tab, and click the [image] Add button.

2.	The Class Type form will open, select a Filter Feature Type by clicking on the required record, and clicking on the [image] Select button.

3.	On returning to the Environmental Survey Method form, the system will automatically accept the new record.

 NOTE: If other filter feature types exist for the method and the filter feature types has a high level parent specified for it (this is done in the Maintain High Level Values form by the WMS System Administrator), you will only be allowed to select children of this high level parent.

If Geographical and Survey Feature Types exists for the method, you will not be allowed to add the same type as a Filter Feature Type.

Delete a Filter Feature Type:

You cannot delete a Filter Feature Type if Filter Features exists for any of the Filter Feature Descriptions of the specific method or when the Environmental Survey Method is completed.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion, click on the OK button.

Add Geographical and Survey Feature Types:

If Filter Feature Types exists for the method, you will not be allowed to add the same type as a Survey Feature Type. You will only be allowed to add certain Survey Feature Types for a specific filter feature type. These associations are setup by the WMS System Administrator in Subset Types.

1.	If no Geographical and Survey Feature Types exist, you must first select a Geographical Feature type from the [image] Drop Down list and tab out of the drop down list to automatically accept the changes or click on the [image] Accept button. However if a Geographical Feature exists, click on the survey feature types grid to highlight it, and click on the [image] Accept button.

2.	The Class Type form will open, select a Feature Type by clicking on the required record, and clicking on the [image] Select button.

3.	On returning to the Environmental Survey Method form, the Geographical and Survey Feature types will be automatically saved to the database.

Delete a Survey Feature Type:

Survey Feature Types cannot be deleted once the Environmental Survey Method has been completed.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion, click on the OK button.

Delete a Geographical Survey Feature Type and Survey Feature Type:

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion, click on the OK button.

 NOTE: The Geographical Feature Type with all its Survey Feature Types will be deleted.

Print Reports

Three reports on Environmental Survey Methods can be printed namely:

•	Environmental Survey Method List - This provides a list of Global and Specific Environmental Survey Methods and indicates which environmental survey methods are under construction, and also provides their registration dates.

•	Environmental Survey Method Detail Report - Specific - This provides a detailed report of Specific Environmental Survey Methods including Survey and Filter Feature Types, Filter Feature Descriptions, Environmental Characteristics and Calculation Dependencies.

•	Environmental Survey Method Detail Report - Global - This provides a detailed report of Global Environmental Survey Methods including Survey Feature Types, Environmental Characteristics and Calculation Dependencies.

1.	To obtain these reports click on the Print button.

2.	A Print Drop Down form will be displayed. Select the required Report option by clicking on the report.

3.	Select a Drive and Folder to store the file information.

Related System Topics

Class Type

Environmental Survey Method Maintenance

Maintain Category Type


Survey Method Maintenance

Description

The Survey Method Maintenance form is used to maintain the information that should be gathered at a Geographical Feature e.g. a mine, when conducting a specific type of survey.

Environmental Survey Methods can be applied globally for nationally conducted surveys e.g. South African Scoring System (SASS) or applied for specific localised geographical features e.g. the distribution of fish species is dependant on ecological conditions and river systems and therefore this survey method will be more specific. The time period that an environmental survey method is used is specified with a Method From Date and Method To Date, and this determines the sequence of current and preceding methods.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Survey Method:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record.

If a new survey method already exist that is not active, an error message will be displayed. Complete and activate that method before you can add a new survey method.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

 Note: The Survey Method ID will be automatically generated by the system once the record has been accepted.

2.	Enter a unique Survey Method Name and tab.

3.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Monitoring Variable Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Variable Type ID.

5.	The Survey Method From Date will be automatically updated by the system once the survey method has been activated. i.e. This date will be the system date.

6.	The Survey Method To Date will be disabled. You cannot update this field. When the user specify a subsequent survey method, the system will update the To date of the preceding method and the subsequent method’s From date will be the following day if both are not historical methods.

7.	Check the Historical Indicator, if the new Survey method is part of historical information i.e. it is not being used anymore but it is registered on the system for the purpose of capturing historical information.  Note: The Activate Method button will be disabled if the new survey method is a historical method.

8.	Enter the Preceding Method ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Survey Method Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

9.	The Preceding Method Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Preceding Method ID.  Note: The To Date of this preceding method will be automatically updated by the system.

10.	Click on the Activate Method button, to activate the survey method.  Note: This  button will be disabled if the new survey method is a historical method.

Edit a Survey Method:

 Note: Only the Central administrator may modify the record if it is not referenced elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the [image] Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Survey Method:

 Note: Only the Central administrator may delete the record if it is not referenced elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Type Selection

Survey Method Selection


View Method Validation Problems

Description

The View Method Validation Problems form is used to view all validation problems that may be encountered when creating an Environmental Survey Method.  Once an Environmental Survey Method has been completed and accepted, a validation is performed. If the validation is unsuccessful, this form can be used to view the problems.

 Important: Every time a method's validation is executed, the existing validation problems are replaced.

Steps

All validation problems for the specific environmental survey method will be displayed in the problem description field.

1.	Click on the Print button to print a Method Validation Problems report.

2.	If any validation problems do occur, try solving the problems with these TIPS ON SOLVING VALIDATION PROBLEMS:

PROBLEM	SOLUTION
• No geographical feature types are defined.	• Add a geographical feature type on the Environmental Survey Method form - Survey Feature Types tab
• No survey feature types are defined.	• Create survey feature types on the Environmental Survey Method form - Survey Feature Types tab
• No filter feature types are defined.	• Create filter feature types on the Environmental Survey Method form - Filter Feature Types tab
• No filter features are defined.	• Create filter features on the Environmental Survey Method form - Filter Feature Criteria tab
• Environmental survey method must have at least one environmental characteristic.	• Focus on the survey method and click on the Maintain Environmental Characteristic button to create at least one environmental characteristic.
• A lowest level environmental characteristic must have at least one data type.	• On the Environmental Characteristic Maintenance form, focus on every child level environmental characteristic record, and ensure that at least one data type related property is defined for each record.
• The compulsory minimum or maximum is larger than the number of child characteristics for this environmental characteristic.	• On the Environmental Characteristic Maintenance form, focus on the environmental characteristic high level, and edit the number of characters to be answered. The Maximum must be equal or less than the total amount of children, and the Minimum must be less than the Maximum.
• A calculated environmental characteristic must have at least one required environmental characteristic.	• On the Environmental Characteristic Maintenance form, focus on the calculated environmental characteristic, and click on the Calculation Dependencies tab to add or select the required characteristics.
• All required environmental characteristics for this calculated environmental characteristic must have a weight or should be linked to a category item with weights.	• On the Environmental Characteristic Maintenance form, focus on the Calculation Dependencies tab and enter the weight next to the required characteristic OR focus on the required calculated characteristic, if it is a lookup category click on the Zoom button and enter the weight, if it is not a lookup, the environmental characteristic must be a numeric.
• The completed indicator for the category classes for an environmental category must be true.	• On the Environmental Characteristic Maintenance form, focus on an environmental characteristic, if the category lookup is checked, zoom to the Maintain Category Type OR press the Interpreted Category button, on the Maintain Category Type, focus on the incomplete category class and press the Accept Categories button.
• There is no calculation method for a calculated environmental characteristic.	• On the Environmental Characteristic Maintenance form, focus on the calculated environmental characteristic and ensure that a Calculation Method has been selected and linked to the record.
Related System Topics

Environmental Survey Method Maintenance


Environmental Characteristic Maintenance

Description

The Environmental Characteristic Maintenance form is used to specify environmental characteristics (questions) for a specific Environmental Survey Method and the way in which the questions should be formatted and answered.

The kind of answers expected for the survey method that can be set-up are Numerical Values, Calculated Values, Category Lookup Pick List, Multimedia Object, Dates, Coordinates, Yes/No and Description.

Interpretive Categories used to interpret numerical values can be added from this form

Pre-requisites

The environmental survey method must be set-up in the Environmental Survey Method Maintenance form.

The Template Characteristics must exist for the Environmental Survey Method's Survey Template.

Steps

Add children (questions) to an Environmental Characteristic:

If the Maintain Environmental Characteristics button on the Environmental Survey Method form is pressed and the Environmental Survey Method does not have any records linked to it and a preceding Method exists with data to copy, then the system will display an option to copy the preceding method's data. If such copied data contains any amended records, then the amended records will be copied as normal numeric, calculated records.

1.	Click to focus on the environmental characteristic that you would like to add children (questions) to.

 TIP: You can check the Validate on Scroll Checkbox to perform a validation before scrolling off the record. You may use this functionality at any time to simplify work as well as to become acquainted with the validation rules.

To complete a method on the Environmental Survey Method programme, press the Accept Environmental Survey button. Any validation problems can be viewed by pressing the View Method Validation Problems button. These problems can be on the Environmental Survey Method or on the Environmental Characteristics Maintenance programme.

Scrolling through items in the Environmental Characteristics Maintenance tree with the Validate on Scroll Checkbox checked validates the selected record.

You will have the option to either move to the next selected record or stay on the current record.

2.	Click on the [image] Add button.

3.	The Template Characteristic Maintenance form opens. Select the children or parent that you would like to add, and click on the [image] Select button to return the information.

4.	A warning message may be displayed: Carefully read the message and select the yes or No option.

5.	If the child has been correctly added, click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

Edit properties for an Environmental Characteristic:

1.	Click to focus on the environmental characteristic that you would like to add properties to. Note: Only certain fields will be available for adding depending on whether a Parent or Child environmental characteristic has been focused on.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to specify properties, If you are affecting changes on the Parent level, the property changes will have an effect on all children with none properties set - by implication this means that once set properties will not be overridden by the properties of the parent, unless you initialise all properties previously set. A warning message will be displayed. Click on the Yes option.  Note: Changes for Objective/Standard and Calculation Method can only be made on the child level. Changes on Min/Max records to be answered can only be made on the parent level.

3.	Check the Numeric Value checkbox.

4.	You can optionally enter From and To Numeric Value ranges.

5.	If Value Ranges have been entered you must specify if the ranges will be used as a Guideline or as Validation purposes.

6.	If you have selected a numeric value entering Measuring Unit is required.  This can be done by manually entering a valid value or by clicking the [image] Zoom button or pressing F2 to open the Measuring Unit form and select the required record.

7.	Specify the significant number of digits. (This is compulsory if you have selected a Numeric Value)

8.	Press the Select Interpretive Category(ies) button to select interpretive categories for the environmental characteristic. The Maintain Category form will open, and you can select the Interpreted Categories with their associated category items. You can remove the selected items if they have been incorrectly selected. (This button will only be enabled once you have selected a Numeric value). You must first delete Category records before the numeric Indicator can be unchecked.

9.	Specifying a calculation method for a calculated characteristic is only allowed on child level.

10.	Check the Calculated characteristic checkbox to enable the Calculation Method field.

11.	Enter a valid calculation method manually or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Calculation Method Select form and select the required environmental characteristic related calculation method.

12.	You can indicate that the environmental characteristic is a compulsory answer.

13.	You can indicate if the characteristic is compulsory on a Questionnaire or for Validation purposes.

14.	Set Category Lookup checkbox. This is only allowed if the record is not numeric.

15.	Click on the [image] Zoom button or press F2 to open the Maintain Category Types window. Only one Category Lookup record may be inserted in the Maintain Category Types window. The user may delete the Category Lookup record and replace it by another one. You can delete a single category item from the list of categories for a category class. The Category Lookup record currently linked, will be returned to the calling window. This will happen on pressing then Select button as well as closing the Maintain Category Types window. The user must first delete the Category Lookup record, before the Category Lookup Indicator can be unchecked

16.	Specify the Multimedia Object, Description (Name/Comment), Coordinates, Yes/No and/or Date checkboxes.

17.	Specify minimum and/or maximum values. The minimum value must be <= the maximum value. The maximum value may not be larger than the number of child characteristics for this Environmental Characteristic.

18.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new properties for the environmental characteristic method.

 TIP: If the environmental characteristic is under construction you can add non-numeric records or numeric records that are not calculated. If the environmental characteristic is not under construction, you can only add a Numeric, Calculated amended record. Such a record can only be added when the Environmental Survey Method cannot be put under construction again. When the Environmental Survey Method can be put under construction again, the system will display a message indicating that the record must be put under construction again and you will need to add numeric, calculated records.

A Numeric, Calculated Amended record needs to have one or more Calculation Dependencies defined for it. A required Calculated Environmental Characteristic may not be the same as the Calculated Environmental Characteristic. There are certain other rules that must be adhered to, in order to complete an amended characteristic. The user can press the Accept Calculated Characteristic button to validate the amended characteristic. The Amended Calculated Characteristic complete check box will become checked if all rules are adhered to. The user may not edit or delete completed records. The user may add or Change Interpreted Categories, but completion of Categories will be enforced on the Maintain Category Types window.

If a record is added, the hierarchal view is populated with the selected item(s) and the properties are empty, except when the preceding Environmental Survey Method is copied. You will then need to edit the properties to contain the required values. After adding an Amended Environmental Characteristic, the dataset is put in edit mode with the compulsory values set. Cancelling may result in the record to be deleted if it is not edited to have the compulsory values. When an amended Calculated Environmental Characteristic is not completed, it may not be used to calculate a derived variable.

Related System Topics

Environmental Survey Method Maintenance


Map Display Properties Overview

Description

The purpose of the Map Display Properties module is to define symbols, colours, fill patterns, map scale, layers and libraries for referencing during spatial displays, or in documents.

Scope

The Map Display Properties module contains the following:

•	Symbol

•	Colour

•	Fill Pattern

•	Map Scale

•	Layer

•	Layer Folder

Important

This module is centrally maintained; contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information.

Related System Topics

Class Types

Map Symbol Maintenance

Map Colour Maintenance

Fill Pattern Maintenance

Map Scale Maintenance

Layer Maintenance

Layer Folder


Map Symbol Maintenance

Description

Each GIS feature type in the system can be allocated a Symbol and a Colour. This form enables you to specify the Symbols to be used when spatially displaying any features.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Select a Map Symbol:

1.	Open the Map Symbol Maintenance form.

2.	Click on the required Symbol ID, or Picture to highlight it, and click on the [image] Select button.

Add a Map Symbol:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Enter the Symbol ID.

3.	Tab and double click on the Picture field to open a new form. Select the correct bitmap from the form, this will return you to the Symbol form.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Edit a Map Symbol:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Select a new Picture.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Map Symbol:

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you want to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

3.	Symbols used in the system cannot be deleted.

Important

This data is centrally maintained; contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information. Only bitmaps can be used in the picture field.

Related System Topics


Map Colour Maintenance

Description

Map Colour Maintenance refers to the colour that is used to depict features of specific types and their symbols, on maps. This form allows you to define and specify the colour to be associated with a class type.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Select a Map Colour:

1.	Open the Map Colour Maintenance form.

2.	Click on the required Map Colour ID, Name or Picture to highlight it, and click on the [image] Select button.

Add a Map Colour:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Enter the Map Colour ID, Name and select and place the Picture of the map colour in the new field.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button, if the new information is correct.

Edit a Map Colour:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit the record.

3.	Enter the Name, ID and/or select a new Picture.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Map Colour:

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you want to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the yes option to confirm the deletion.

3.	Colours used in the system cannot be deleted.

Important

This data is centrally maintained; contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information. Only bitmap pictures can be used.

Related System Topics


Fill Pattern Maintenance

Description

A Fill Pattern represents features of a specific type on a map. They are used to fill polygon shapes when they are represented on maps. This form allows you to define and specify the fill pattern associated with a class type.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Select a Fill Pattern:

1.	Open the Fill Pattern Maintenance form.

2.	Click on the required Fill Pattern ID or picture to highlight it, and click on the [image] Select button.

Add a Fill Pattern:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Enter the Fill Pattern ID.

3.	Tab and double click on the Picture field to open a new form. Select the correct bitmap from the form, this will return you to the Fill Pattern form.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept tool if the new information is correct.

Edit a Fill Pattern:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button, to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Enter the new ID and/or select a new Fill Pattern Picture.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Fill Pattern:

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you want to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the yes option to confirm the deletion.

3.	Fill Patterns used in the system cannot be deleted.

Important

This data is centrally maintained; contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information. Only bitmap pictures can be used.

Related System Topics


Map Scale Maintenance

Description

The Scale is the size of the map display in relation to reality. This form is used to define and specify the Scale to be associated with a Class Type or Layer Maintenance.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Select a Map Scale:

1.	Open the Map Scale Maintenance form.

2.	Click on the required map scale record to highlight it, and click on the [image] Select button.

Add a new Map Scale:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Enter the Name and Map Scale in the new fields.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Edit a Map Scale:

1.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Enter the new Name and/or Description.

4.	To set a Default Map Scale, double click in the default indicator on the selected map scale record.

5.	A tick should appear in the block.

6.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Map Scale:

1.	Click on the Map scale record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you want to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the yes option to confirm the deletion.

3.	Scales used in the system cannot be deleted.

Important

The name and scale must be unique as no duplicates are accepted by the system. A default record must always be selected.

Related System Topics


Layer Maintenance

Description

The Layer Maintenance form is used to define and specify Spatial Layers. Layers represent a grouping of similar types of spatial features that form a unit in the spatial database, e.g. water bodies, sites and monitoring points.

A layer consists of a name, description, library, type, default colour and outline colour. Layers are always captured in a specific map scale, e.g. a layer captured in a 1:10 000 map scale would contain much more detail than a layer captured in a 1: 50 000 map scale.

When a layer is opened on a map, all features will be displayed in a default colour as specified in the layer setup, e.g. all features in the MINES layer will be displayed in a petite pink colour.

Background layers can be specified for layers. When a layer, e.g. MINES is opened, the following background layers will automatically be opened as well: Residential areas, monitoring points, industries, rivers and quaternary drainage regions.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Search for a Layer:

1.	Open the Layer Form.

2.	In the Find field search for a specific layer or group of layers, in one of the following ways:

•	enter a name, or a portion of the name with an * in the layer name field;

•	enter a description, or a portion of the layer description with an * in the description field;

•	enter a library name in the library field.

3.	Press the [image] Range button to display the specific layer information.

Add a Layer:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Enter the Layer Name and Layer Description in the new field.

3.	Click on the Library field, the [image] Zoom button will appear, click on this to open the Layer Maintenance form.

4.	Select the required library by clicking on the record and clicking on the [image] Select button.

5.	Click on the Default Colour field, the [image] Zoom button will appear, click on this to open the Colour form.

6.	Select the required default colour by clicking on the record and clicking on the [image] Select button.

7.	Click on the Outline Colour field, the [image] Zoom button will appear, click on this to open the Colour form.

8.	Select the required outline colour by clicking on the record and clicking on the [image] Select button.

9.	The programme automatically displays the picture to each colour that you have selected.

10.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Edit a Layer:

1.	Click on the Layer to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Enter the new information.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Layer:

1.	Click on the Layer to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you want to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the yes option to confirm the deletion.

Add a Background Layer:

1.	Click on the foreground layer name.

2.	Click on the background layer grid.

3.	Select the [image] Add button.

4.	Click on the [image] Zoom button to open another layer form.

5.	Click on the layer record that you would like to select as a background layer, and click on the [image] Select button; this will return you to the Layer form.

6.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Background Layer:

1.	Click on the background layer record to be deleted.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you want to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the yes option to confirm the deletion.

3.	Deleting a background layer deletes the layer as a background layer, without deleting the layer record.

Important

This data is centrally maintained; contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information.

Related System Topics

Layer Maintenance

Map Colour Maintenance


Layer Folder

Description

A Layer Folder is a collection of spatial layers in a specific Scale, used in the Arcview Geographical Information System (GIS).

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Select a Layer Folder:

1.	Open the Layer Folder form.

2.	Click on the required library name or description to highlight it, and click on the [image] Select button.

Add a Layer Folder:

1.	Click on the  [image] Add button.

2.	Enter the Library Name and Description in the new field.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Edit a Layer Folder:

1.	Click on the Library to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the  [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Enter the new Name and/or Description.

4.	Click on the  [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Layer Folder:

1.	Click on the Layer Folder to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you want to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the yes option to confirm the deletion.

3.	A layer folder used in the system cannot be deleted.

Important

This data is centrally maintained; contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information.

Related System Topics


Seasonal Date Ranges Overview

Description

The Seasonal Date Ranges form is used in Standards and Objectives to specify a seasonal period which has a From Date and a To Date. This specification enables you to obtain information that is specific to the selected season.

Pre-requisites

The Standard/Objective for a specific Monitoring Point and Monitoring Variable should already exist.

Steps

Select a Seasonal Date Range:

1.	Open the Seasonal Date Ranges form.

2.	Click on the correct season to highlight it, and click on the [image] Select button.

Add a Seasonal Date Range:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Enter the From Date and To Date in the new field (month first MM and then the day DD in numerics).

Edit a Seasonal Date Range:

1.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record.

2.	Click on the Seasonal Date Range to be edited to highlight it, and enter the new date.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Seasonal Date Range:

 Note: The user may not delete the record if it is referenced elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the Seasonal Date Range to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a message will be displayed asking if you want to delete the record. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the yes option to confirm the deletion.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button.

Important

This data is centrally maintained; contact your WMS Superuser to submit new or changed information.

Related System Topics

Seasonal Date Ranges Selection


Calculation Method Select

Description

The Calculation Method Select form is used to search for and select a specific Calculation Method. When this form is opened from Environmental Characteristics, only calculation methods for environmental characteristics will be displayed.

Pre-requisites

The required Calculation Method must be setup in the Calculation Method Maintenance form in Monitoring Management.

Steps

1.	Click on the required Calculation Method record to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics

Calculation Method Overview

Calculation Method Maintenance

Environmental Characteristics Maintenance


Multimedia Overview

Description

The Multimedia module contains information about media types, like documents, audio clips, video clips, and image files. This media information is stored in the Library, a central information repository to facilitate easy information referencing. This module also allows for the storage of media relationship information between two media items, and between a media item and person or organisation (ies), for specific reasons. The media relationship information ensures effective correspondence management between organisations and/or persons.

Scope

This module deals with the following sub-modules:

•	Library (a central repository used to store media information)

•	Related Multimedia (used to create relationships between multimedia records for specific reasons)

•	Multimedia Data Maintenance Report (provides information on the amount of MultiMedia records registered)

Related System Topics

Multimedia Library Maintenance

Related Multimedia Maintenance

LE Member Selection

Registration Productivity Report


Multimedia Library Maintenance

Description

The Multimedia Library is a central repository used to view, add and modify media information and media relationship information. Media Types, like documents, audio clips, video clips, and image files contain information that assists with the management of water quality and quantity, policy documents, and research studies. The multimedia can also be linked to organisations and persons as well as to each other, for a specific reason.

Pre-requisites

•	The person or organisation must have been registered, if relevant.

•	The Class Structures must exist to be able to specify the Media Type, Content, Purpose, Trigger/Cause, and/or Subject.

•	Electronic files must be available.

Steps

Search for a Layer Folder record:

You can search for a Multimedia record in one of the following ways:

Search by Multimedia ID:

•	Click on the Find by Media ID  button, enter the Media ID and click on the [image] Range button.

Search by Multimedia Detail:

This search can be refined by entering or selecting multiple field criteria.

•	Click on the Find by Media Detail radio button, enter search criteria information or a portion of the information with * for one or more of the fields Electronic File Name, Description and Dwaf File No and click on the [image] Range button. Or select information by means of the [image] Drop Down buttons for one or more of the fields Media Type, Media Purpose, Content Type, Cause/Trigger, Subject Area, or select the Generated From Date and Generated To Date from the [image] Date/Time Picker Calendar and click on the [image] Range button.

Search by Person or Organisation Detail:

This search can be refined by entering or selecting multiple field criteria.

•	Click on the organisation checkbox, enter the Name or a portion of the Name with * or enter the Abbreviation or a portion of the Abbreviation with * or select organisation Type(s), and click on the [image] Range button.

•	Click on Person checkbox, enter the Surname or a portion of the surname with a *, or enter Initials or a portion of the initials with *, click on the Titles drop down button and select a title or enter the Preferred Name or portion of the preferred name with * and click on the [image] Range button.

•	Click on the Liaison Media Association Drop Down button, select the required option and click on the [image] Range button.

Search by Correspondence:

•	Click on the Correspondence Checkbox until the Y option appears. Click on the Outgoing radio button and select information by means of the [image] Drop Down buttons for one or more of the fields: Not Sent Reason, Status, or select the Expected Feedback From Date and Expected Feedback To Date from the [image] Date/Time Picker Calendar and click on the [image] Range button.

Search by Calculation Method:

•	Click on the Calculation Method Checkbox until the Y option appears. Enter the Calculation Method ID and/or enter a Description or a portion of the Description with * and click on the [image] Range button.

Search by person or organisation Detail:

If this form is called from LE Details Result tab, via the links menu, the LE Detail will be displayed and you can refine the search by specifying the criteria. This search can be refined by entering or selecting multiple field combination search criteria except with the person or organisation Detail

 Tip On the Multimedia Results tab, to scroll through the records at a faster pace, uncheck the Refresh Object on Scroll checkbox. The viewable media object will not be displayed. In order to view a specific media object, check the Refresh Object on Scroll checkbox, and then focus on the required multimedia record.

Add a Layer Folder record:

When adding an Electronic file as the object, step 6 and 13 are optional. However when adding a multimedia file for reference purposes WITHOUT LINKING the electronic object, step 5 must be ignored, but steps 6 and/or 13 become compulsory.

1.	First do a Search for the Multi Media record.

2.	If the media does not yet exist in the Results tab, click on the [image] Add button this will open the Maintain MultiMedia form.

3.	In the Media Type field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a media type by clicking on the required option, and tab.

4.	In the Content Type field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a content type by clicking on the required option, and tab.

5.	In the Electronic File Name field, select the name by clicking on the File button to open the Open File dialogue box, and select the required file type. The Media Version Date and Media Creation Date should be automatically updated with the selection of the Electronic File name.

6.	In the DWAF File No field; enter the file number and tab.

7.	In the Media Version Date field, if the field has not yet been automatically updated, enter the media version date and time or click on the [image] calendar, and select the correct date and time and tab.

8.	In the Media Creation Date field, if the field has not yet been automatically updated, enter the media creation date and time or click on the [image] calendar, and select the correct date and time and tab.

9.	In the Description field, enter description for the record and tab.

10.	In the Media Purpose field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a media purpose by clicking on the required option, and tab.

11.	In the Cause/Trigger field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a cause/trigger by clicking on the required option, and tab.

12.	In the Subject Area field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a subject area by clicking on the required option, and tab.

13.	In the Reference field, enter a media reference.

14.	If the record contains correspondence, continue with the steps 15-20, if not; click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

15.	Check the Correspondence checkbox, then click on either the Outgoing or Incoming Correspondence radio button. If the Incoming button has been selected, click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record. The system will ask you to add at least one person or organisation to the Multimedia record for a specific reason. Continue with the Addition of a relationship between a Multimedia and person or organisation. If the Outgoing radio button has been selected, continue with the relevant steps 16-19.

ONLY THE RELEVANT field in STEPS 16-19 SHOULD BE COMPLETED before proceeding to STEP 20.

16.	After clicking on the Outgoing radio button, in the Status field click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a status by clicking on the required record, and tab.

17.	In the Not Sent Reason field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a Reason for not sending the correspondence to the interested person or organisation.

18.	In the Expected Feedback Date field, enter the expected feedback date or click on the [image] calendar, and select the correct date and tab.

19.	In the Not Sent Description field, enter a Description of the Reason for not sending the correspondence to the interested person or organisation.

20.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

Edit a Layer Folder record:

The Electronic File Name cannot be edited. If the Auto Generated Checkbox is activated, only the status of outgoing correspondence can be edited. The Media Version Date field cannot be edited for Outgoing Correspondence records. If you have created a Reference MultiMedia record, you can link the record to the real object via the Electronic File Name field.

1.	First do a Search for the Library record.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Edit the record.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new information.

Delete a Layer Folder  record:

If a Multimedia record is linked to either a person or organisation, Feature Survey, or another Multimedia, you will first need to delete the association links before you will be able to delete the Multimedia record.  If the record has been Auto Generated, you will be unable to delete the record.

1.	Click on the MultiMedia record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record, click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

View a Multimedia object:

1.	First do a Search for the Multi Media record.

2.	Click on the multimedia record on the Result tab, and press the View Media Object button when it is enabled, the object will be displayed in read-only mode.

Add a Multi Media record to a Single or Multiple person or organisation/ies:

1.	First do a Search for the Multi Media record. (If the person or organisation is received from the person or organisation form, clear the Received person or organisation ID before clicking on the range button.)

2.	Once you have found the record on the Results tab, click on the person or organisation tab, if the relationship between the person or organisation and the Multi Media record does not yet exist, click on the [image] Add button to open the Multimedia LE Selection form.

You can continue to ADD EITHER A SINGLE PERSON/organisation, RECEIVED person or organisation OR MULTIPLE MEMBERS with the following steps:

Add a Single Person/organisation:

1.	Click on the Single Person/organisation radio button.

2.	Select a Media Association Reason by clicking on the [image] Drop Down button, and clicking on the required Media Association Reason option.

3.	Click on the OK button to open the person or organisation Browse form. Select the required person or organisation and press the [image] Select button to return the related person or organisation information. The new record should appear in the Multimedia Library person or organisation Results tab.

Add a Received person or organisation:

This option will only be available if the MultiMedia Library LE Selection form was opened from the person or organisation Links menu.

1.	Click on the Received person or organisation radio button.

2.	Select a Media Association Reason by clicking on the [image] button, and clicking on the required Media Association Reason option.

3.	Click on the OK button.

Add Multiple Members:

1.	Click on the Multiple Member Selection radio button.

2.	Click on the OK button to open the person or organisation Details form. Perform a Search for the correct owner organisation and relationship reasons for the person or organisation structure, click on the Range button to open the Results tab, and click on the [image] button.

3.	The Select/Link LE Member form will open, click on the required person or organisation Multimedia Association Reason from the [image] Drop Down button. Select the correct Liaison Entities and enter into the Records to be Generated request list. Then click on Generate Multimedia person or organisation Records button. For a different person or organisation association reason, you can repeat the process.

4.	Close the form. The new record should appear in the Multimedia Library person or organisation Results tab.

Delete a person or organisation Association:

1.	Click on the MultiMedia record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	If the multimedia is the last linked correspondence record, click on the [image] Delete button, a warning message will be displayed with two delete options. Either click on the "Add a new person or organisation and then delete the current person or organisation" radio button or "Delete the person or organisation and then delete the Multimedia that is linked to it" radio button and click on the OK button to confirm the deletion.

3.	If the multimedia is not correspondence related, or not the last record, click on the Delete button, a confirmation message will be displayed, click on the OK option to confirm deletion.

View Layer Folder Reports:

Multimedia Data Maintenance Summaries for the logged on user, and Media per person or organisation Reports can be obtained by selecting the applicable report option on the Reports Menu option.

Important

A Layer Folder record can be created without linking the Electronic File Name to the Multimedia Record, as the Electronic File can always be added to the specific Multimedia record at a later stage. Multiple Multimedia records can be created with the same Electronic File Name, however, the Version Date will always differ.

Related System Topics

LE Member Selection


LE Member Selection

Description

The LE Member Selection form is used to select and link (associate) multiple Liaison Entities to a Multimedia record for a specific reason.

Pre-requisites

•	The relevant members or employees in an employee structure must have been created in the person or organisation form with a Structure Reason for the "Employee Structure" or "Member(s) of " with an organisation as owner of the structure.

•	The person or organisation Multimedia Association Reason must exist.

Steps

Add a Multi Media record to Multiple person or organisation/ies:

1.	First do a Search for the Multi Media record.

2.	Once you have found the record on the Results tab, click on the person or organisation tab, if the relationship between the person or organisation and the Multi Media record does not yet exist, click on the Add button to automatically open the Multimedia LE Selection form.

3.	Click on the Multiple Member Selection radio button.

4.	Click on the OK button to open the person or organisation Details form. Perform a Search for the correct owner organisation and relationship reasons for the person or organisation structure. Specifying the Qualification(s) and From and To Date on the Find tab can refine the search criteria. Click on the Range button to open the Results tab, and click on the Select button.

5.	The Select/Link LE Member form will open, click on the required person or organisation Multimedia Association Reason from the [image] Drop Down button. Select the correct Liaison Entities and enter the Records to be Generated request list. Then click on Generate Multimedia person or organisation Records button. For a different person or organisation association reason, you can repeat the process.

6.	Close the form. The new record should appear in the Multimedia Library person or organisation Results tab.

Important

The same Member can be linked to the same Multimedia record for different reasons.

Related System Topics

Organisation and Person Functional Structure Maintenance

Multimedia Library Maintenance


Multimedia Selection Criteria

Description

The Multimedia Selection Criteria form is used to select information criteria in order to obtain a Multimedia Data Maintenance Summary.

Pre-Requisites

The Multimedia records must have been registered in the system.

Steps

Perform a general selection:

1.	Click on the OK button to obtain a report on all records registered by all the different operators on all the different servers at any time.

Perform a refined selection:

Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this search.

2.	To obtain a report on a specific operator. Click on the User Name field, enter the user name or a portion of the name with a *, or click on the [image] Drop Down button and click on the required option.

3.	To obtain a report on a specific server. Click on the Server Name field, enter the server name or a portion of the name with a *, or click on the [image] Drop Down button and click on the required option.

4.	To obtain a report on records generated for a specific period. Enter the required Generated From Date and/or Generated To Date or click on the [image] Calendar button to open a window displaying the current month's calendar and select the required date(s), and press the OK button. The date(s) will be displayed in the MultiMedia Selection Criteria form.

5.	Once you are satisfied with your search criteria, click on the OK button to display the report.


Registration Productivity Report

Description

The Registration Productivity Report provides information on the amount of MultiMedia records registered in a specific time period by an operator or operators.

Pre-Requisites

The Multimedia records must have been registered in the system.

Steps

View a Management Report:

In the Multimedia Selection Criteria form a MultiMedia Data Maintenance Summary can be obtained by selecting the report criteria in the following ways:

Perform a general selection:

1.	Click on the OK button to obtain a report on all records registered by all the different operators on all the different servers at any time.

Perform a refined selection:

Entering or selecting multiple field criteria can refine this search.

2.	To obtain a report on a specific operator. Click on the User Name field, enter the user name or a portion of the name with a *, or click on the [image] Drop Down button and click on the required option.

3.	To obtain a report on a specific server. Click on the Server Name field, enter the server name or a portion of the name with a *, or click on the [image] Drop Down button and click on the required option.

4.	To obtain a report on records generated for a specific period. Enter the required Generated From Date and/or Generated To Date or click on the [image] Calendar button to open a window displaying the current month's calendar and select the required date(s), and press the OK button. The date(s) will be displayed in the MultiMedia Selection Criteria form.

5.	Once you are satisfied with your search criteria, click on the OK button to display the report.

View an Operator Progress Report:

The Multimedia Data Maintenance Summary can be obtained by the person logged into the system for a specific period. Other Find filter criteria that you may specify will not influence the summary report.

1.	On the Multimedia Library Find panel, define the period when the multimedia records were generated by the system.

2.	Click on the [image] Range button to obtain a report on all the records that you have registered.

3.	Under the Reports menu option, click on the Multimedia Data Maintenance Summary to display a report of all the records that you have registered within the specified period.

Related System Topics

Multimedia Library Maintenance


Related Multimedia Maintenance

Description

The Related Multimedia Maintenance form is used to create relationships between multimedia records for specific reasons.

An example of a Related Multimedia is a compliance letter (multimedia) sent to a Municipality (person or organisation) that may require a feedback report. When the letter explaining the compliance violation is received, the link between the compliance letter and feedback report can be created.

Four different types of relationships can exist:

•	Outgoing/Incoming - correspondence related displayed a Master/Related.

•	Incoming/Outgoing- correspondence related displayed as Related/Master.

•	Master/Related all types of multimedia records including correspondence with subsequent versions of the same document or related information.

•	Related/Master- all types of multimedia records including correspondence with subsequent versions of the same document or related information.

Pre-requisites

The relevant multimedia records must already have been system generated or manually created in the Library form.

Steps

Search for a Related Multimedia:

1.	First perform a Search for a Multimedia record.

2.	Click on the required record to highlight it for selection.

3.	Click on the Links Menu to display the option, and click on Related Multimedia. (This will automatically open the Related MultiMedia form with all existing related multimedia records for the selected record.)

4.	In the Related Multimedia form, if the selected record exists in the Master and Related position, a message will be displayed asking how you would like to view the record. You can click on the OK option to view all related records for the selected master record, or click on the No option to view all the master records for the selected related record.

5.	All the linked Multimedia records with associated Liaison Entities will be displayed.

Add a Related Multimedia record:

1.	If the relationship between the records does not yet exist, click on the Related Information grid (the bottom grid). Records can only be added on the detail (bottom) grid.

2.	Click on the [image] Add button to open the Libray  find form.

3.	Search for the required multimedia record (See Search for a MultiMedia), and click on the [image] Select button. This will return the record to the Related Multimedia form.

4.	A dropdown box will automatically be displayed in the Related Multimedia Reason field. Click on the relevant Related Media Reason option.

5.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

Delete a Related Multimedia record:

Only Related Multimedia records in the Related Information grid can be deleted. There should always be at least one record associated to an Outgoing record if the "Not Sent Reason" field in the Master grid has been completed.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button. A confirmation message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Ensure the correct record has been selected, and click on the OK option.

View a Multimedia object:

1.	Click on the multimedia record in the top or bottom grid to highlight it, and press the View Document button, the object will be displayed in read-only mode.

Important

Related Multimedia records cannot be edited.

Related System Topics

Multimedia Library Maintenance


Organisation and Person Functional Structure Maintenance

Description

A person or organisation is a person, organisation, or organisational unit involved in the management or execution of water related tasks, persons and organisations using water, and interested and affected parties.

The Organisation and Person Functional Structure Maintenance form is used to query information pertaining to organisations and individuals such as people employed or associated with Government Departments, Provincial Departments, Local Authorities, Companies, Forums, Water Users (mines, industries, sewage works), Interested and Affected Parties etc. People and Organisations can also be linked to reporting structures in order to define their organisational functions, roles and responsibilities.

 Note: You can also open the Multimedia Library form to link a multimedia item to the person or organisation. Report option is also available from this form.

The Department of Water Affairs and Forestry is the "owner" of the Monitoring and Laboratory Analysis relation Structure.  All other relation structures belong to the organisation itself.  The procedure to Add an organisation to the Monitoring or Laboratory Analysis structures is therefore different from that of other relation structures.

Steps

Search for a person or organisation:

You can search for a person or organisation in three different ways, by Person, by Organisation, or by LE Structure.

•	Find by Person

You can enter or select information for one or more of these fields to refine this search.

1.	Click on the Person [image] checkbox.

2.	In the Surname field, enter the person's FULL surname or a portion of the surname followed by * and / or preceded by *. The "wild card" (*) can be used to simplify a search in many ways e.g. a search for "VAN DER MERWE" can be done by entering *V*D*MER*. If the surname is not known insert a * in this field.

3.	In the Initials field, enter the person's initials or a portion of the initials followed by *.

4.	In the Title field, use the [image] drop down menu button to open the Class Type form and select the relevant Title.

5.	In the Preferred Name field, enter the person's initials or a portion of the preferred name followed by *.

6.	Click on the [image] Range button.

•	Find by Organisation

You can enter or select information for one or more of these fields to refine this search.

1.	Click on the Organisation [image] checkbox.

2.	In the Type field, click on the [image] Drop Down button to open the Class Type form, select the Organisational Class Type (Assembly Types / Company Types) and select the relevant "Organisation" Type.

3.	In the Abbreviation field, enter the organisation's abbreviation or portion of the abbreviation followed by * and / or preceded by *.

4.	In the Name field, enter the organisation's name or a portion of the name followed by * and / or preceded by *. The "wild card" (*) can be used to simplify a search in many ways e.g. a search for "DWAF-GEOHYDRO PTA" can be done by entering DWAF*GEO*PTA.

5.	In the Division field, enter the organisation’s Division or a portion of the division followed by * and / or preceded by *.

6.	In the Area Office field, enter the organisation’s Area office.

Or just the system ID number

7.	Click on the [image] Range button.

•	Find by Structure Reason

You can enter or select information for one or more of these fields to refine this search.

1.	Check the Use Structure checkbox(es) next to the required Structure Reason(s), or to select all the Structure Reasons for a search, click on the Select All button.

2.	Click on the [image] Range button.

 Note:  The search can be filtered by entering information in the fields above, e.g. for Area Office = PRETORIA and Laboratory Analysis structure reason, the laboratories in Pretoria are shown.

Add an Organisation to a Monitoring or Laboratory Analysis Relation Structure:

Different kinds of relationships exist in a structure. For Monitoring and Laboratory Analysis there are only three levels: level1 is a Managing, level2 is Responsible and level3 is Executive. Each organisation with a qualifying relationship of Managing must have at least one organisation on a level of Responsible and at least one organisation on an Executive level.  An organisation can exist on all three levels of a qualifying relationship. Only organisations qualified as Executive can perform Monitoring or Analysis actions. Monitoring and Laboratory Analysis may not have Persons in the relation structure.

Add an Organisation to the Monitoring or Laboratory Analysis Relation Structure

1.	Click on the Organisation [image] checkbox.

2.	Range on Abbreviation = DWAF (without a wild card [*]) – DWAF is the owner of these two structures.

3.	In the Results tab, the record(s) will appear, and the Relation Structure Reasons will also show on the right hand bottom of the form.

4.	Select the applicable Relation Structure Reason.

5.	Click on the Reporting Structure tab.

6.	Check if organisation exists on the root (Managing Level):

IF NOT:

•	Add by clicking [image] Add Root button. The Organisation Selection form will be displayed, select the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

•	The tree view will be populated with the organisation.

•	Press the [image] Accept button to accept the new record or [image] Cancel button to cancel the new record.

•	Add the Qualifying Relationship by clicking in the "Qualifying Relationship Type ID" field and then the Add icon.

•	The "From" and "To" dates of the "LE in structure" can be edited.

 Note: The From and To dates entered here in the Monitoring structure becomes the default from and to dates if the monitor is linked to a monitor point. The from date of the monitor at a monitoring point cannot be smaller (before) the from date of the Organisation in the functional structure.

IF ORGANISATION EXISTS on Managing Level then:

7.	Open to check if the appropriate organisation exists on Responsible Level:

IF NOT:

•	Select the appropriate Managing Organisation then add the Responsible Organisation by clicking the [image] Add button. The Organisation Selection form will be displayed, select the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

•	The tree view will be populated with the organisation. Press the [image] Accept button to accept the new record or [image] Cancel button to cancel the new record.

•	Add the Qualifying Relationship. The "From" and "To" dates of the "LE in structures" can be edited.

IF ORGANISATION EXISTS on Responsible Level then:

8.	Open to check if the appropriate Organisation exists on Executive Level:

IF NOT:

•	Select the appropriate Responsible Organisation then add the Executive Organisation by clicking the [image] Add button. The Organisation Selection form will be displayed, select the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

•	The tree view will be populated with the organisation. Press the [image] Accept button to accept the new record or [image] Cancel button to cancel the new record.

•	Add the Qualifying Relationship. The "From" and "To" dates of the "LE in structures" can be edited.

Add an Organisation to other Relation Structures: (Impactor Structure)

•	Register Impactor Structure

 Note: Always work on the structure already in existence with DWAF (LE 10055) as owner.

1.	Find or Add (root) your Regional Office on the root level e.g. DWAF-WESTERN CAPE-RO.

2.	Under your Regional Office find or add the subsection of your Regional Office e.g. DWAF-BERG WMA-WRM/WQM.

3.	Under the subsection of your Regional Office find or add the Organisation owning/managing the source feature.  If unsure, ask yourself whom you want to contact if the compliance indicates a serious problem.

4.	Select the Organisation owning/managing the source feature and Add Site Owner in the field for "Qualify relationship".

5.	Add the Source Feature in the field for "at Feature ".

Related System Topics

Associated Class Type Selection

Organisation Selection

Person Selection


Organisation and Person Select

Description

The Person and Organisation Select form is used to search for records pertaining to organisations and individuals such as people employed or associated with Government Departments, Provincial Departments, Local Authorities, Companies, Forums, Water Users (mines, industries, sewage works), Interested and Affected Parties etc.

A person or organisation is a person, organisation, or organisational unit involved in the management or execution of water related tasks, persons and organisations using water, and interested and affected parties.

Steps

Search for a Person or Organisation:

You can search for a person or organisation in three different ways, by Person,  by Organisation, or by All (all Person and Organisation records). Depending on the requirements of the calling form, you may only be able to select an organisation or person.

•	Search by Person

You only need to enter the search criteria that you have available, however you can enter or select information for one or more of these fields to refine this search.

1.	Click on the Person radio button.

2.	In the Surname field, enter the person's surname or a portion of the surname followed by *.

3.	In the Name field, enter the person's name or a portion of the name followed by *.

4.	In the Preferred Name field, enter the person's initials or a portion of the preferred name followed by *.

5.	In the Title field, enter the person's title or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Class Type form and select the relevant Title.

6.	In the ID number field, enter the person's identity number.

7.	In the Language field, enter the person's language, or click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select the language from the list.

8.	Click on the Apply Filter button, to filter all the records appearing on the left hand side of the form according to your selection criteria.

9.	If the required record appears in the list, click on the record to highlight it, and click on the [image] Select button to return the record to the previous form.

10.	If the required record does not appear in the list, click on the Clear Filter button, to clear the selection criteria, and re-enter the required filter criteria.

•	Search by Organisation

You only need to enter the search criteria that you have available, however you can enter or select information for one or more of these fields to refine this search.

1.	Click on the Organisation radio button.

2.	In the Name field, enter the organisation's name or a portion of the name followed by *. The "wild card" (*) can be used to simplify a search in many ways e.g. a search for "VAN DER MERWE" can be done by entering *V*D*MER*.

3.	In the Abbreviation field, enter the organisation's abbreviation.

4.	In the Type field, enter the Organisation Type, or click on the [image] Drop Down button to open the Class Type form, and select the relevant Organisation Type.

5.	In the Addressee Type field, enter the Addressee, or click on the [image] Drop Down button to open the Class Type form, and select the relevant Addressee.

6.	In the Mission Statement field, enter the Mission Statement.

7.	Click on the Apply Filter button, to filter all the records appearing on the left hand side of the form according to your selection criteria.

8.	If the required record appears in the list, click on the record to highlight it, and click on the [image] Select button to return the record to the previous form.

9.	If the required record does not appear in the list, click on the Clear Filter button, to clear the selection criteria, and re-enter the required filter criteria.

•	Search by All

1.	Click on the All radio button.

2.	All the Person and Organisational records will now appear in the list on the left-hand side of the form.

3.	You will have to scroll through the list to serach for the required record. To assist,  you can press the letter of the alphabet on your keyboard that begins with the name you require. The alphabetical list will then scroll to that section of records.

4.	If the required record appears in the list, click on the record to highlight it, and click on the [image] Select button to return the record to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Organisation Selection

Description

The Organisation Selection form is used to select organisational records.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the  Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record’s information to the previous form.  Tip: You can quickly search for records by clicking in any of the various fields on the form, and then typing in the first alphabetical letters of the field name that you are searching for.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Login Organisation Selection

Description

The Login Organisation Selection form is used to select organisational records in order to obtain access to the Water Management System. This access will only permit you to work on the records for the organisation that you logged in as.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the  Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.  Tip: You can quickly search for records by clicking in any of the various fields on the form, and then typing in the first alphabetical letters of the field name that you are searching for.

Related System Topics

Organisational Login


Member Organisation Selection

Description

The Member Organisation Selection form is used to select an assembly. Examples of an assembly are Blesbokspruit Forums or National Radioactivity Committee.

Steps

1.    Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.    Click on the Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.

Related System Topics

Organisation Maintenance


Member Selection

Description

The Member Selection form is used to select a member of an organisation.

Steps

1.	Enter the Organisation ID or Organisation Name in the relevant fields. All the related member records will appear in the list.

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection, and click on the Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Transfer Feature Selection

Description:

The Transfer Feature Selection form allows you to select a specific Transfer Feature.

Steps:

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

 Note: The out of use records will be displayed in dimmed grey.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics:


Geographical Area Maintenance

Description

The Geographical Area Maintenance form is used to maintain Geographical Area records.

Steps

Search for a Geographical Area:

1.	On the Filter Criteria area, enter the Geographical Area Name and/or Code, or part thereof with an asteriks (*).

2.	Click on the Filter button to filter out the records according to the specified filter criteria.

(For More on How to Search for a record, please refer How to Search for records on WMS)

 Note: The Central Administrator will be able to Add, Edit and Delete records of all the Area Types, whereas the Regional User will be able to Add, Edit and Delete the records of the selected area types, namely, Subcatchments, Officer Areas and Forum Areas.

Add a Geographical Area:

1.	The Geographical Area ID will be automatically generated by the system.

2.	Enter the Geographical Area Name.

3.	Enter the Geographical Area Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Class – Type Selection form.

4.	The Geographical Area Type will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Geographical Area Type ID.

5.	Enter the Geographical Area Code.

6.	Enter the Description for the Geographical Area.

7.	While focusing on the Subcatchment or DWAF Water Resource Area, enter the Belong To WMA ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Geographical Area Hierarchy Selection form, to select the applicable record, click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Belong to WMA Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Belong to WMA ID.

9.	While focusing on the Subcatchment or DWAF Water Resource Area, enter the Management Authority Organisation ID, or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, to select the applicable record, click on the Select button to return your selection.

10.	The Management Authority Organisation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Management Authority Organisation ID.

11.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open a Login Organisation Selection form, make a selection and click on the Select button to return your selection. Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner for the Geographical Area  will automatically be created with the Login Organisation ID, but you may change it.

12.	The Data Owner Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

13.	On the QA Date field, the last date on which the record was Quality Assured will be automatically displayed.

14.	Click on the QA button to indicate that the Geographical Area’s information is Quality Assured on WMS. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

15.	The Close Date field indicates the date when the Geographical Area record was set to ‘Out of Use’ for WMS usage. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

16.	Click on the Close button to indicate that the Geographical Area is no longer active for WMS usage. Note: This can only be performed by the Central Administrator.

17.	Click on the Forum Area M button to link a Geographical Area of type Forum Area to one or more Forums (Organisations/Assemblies). This will open the Forum Area Maintenance form.

18.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

19.	Click on the Report button to generate a .csv file with all the information of the records retrieved according to the parameters received as input to this form.

20.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Edit a Geographical Area:

 Note: Data Owners for the different Geographical Areas will be implemented to prevent non Data Owners from updating other Organisations’ Geographical Area information. Only the Data Owner may edit its Geographical Area record.

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the Edit button.

 Note: If you want to assign the new Data Owner to edit the record, enter the Data Owner Organisation ID, or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	Edit the record as required.

3.	Click on another record to accept the newly modified record.

Delete a Geographical Area:

 Note: Data Owners for the different Geographical Areas will be implemented to prevent non Data Owners from deleting other Organisations’ Geographical Area information. Only the Data Owner may delete its Geographical Area record.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the Delete button.

3.	A confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record.

4.	Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Associated Class - Type Selection

Report Option Decision Criteria

Forum Area Maintenance

Organisation Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Geographical Area Hierarchy Selection


Geographical Area Type

Description	The Geographical Area Type uniquely identifies a sub-type of a geographical area, for example a drainage area, or province.

Format(s)	Select a geographical area type by its description from the displayed list.

Examples	Secondary drainage region, Catchment management area, Province


Geographical Area Code

Description	The Geographical Area Code uniquely identifies the code for the Geographical Area.

Format(s)	Alphanumeric, Uppercase

Examples	C23


Area Name

Description	The Area Name defines the Geographical Forum-Area's name.

Format(s)	Characters

Examples	Limpopo


Forum Area Maintenance

Description

The Forum Area Maintenance form is used to maintain forums associated with the area’s records.

Steps

Add a Forum or Area:

 Note:. Only the data owner may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Area ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open a Geographical Area Selection form, and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

 Note: Click on the Area M button to create a new area if it does not exist.

3.	The Area name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Area ID.

4.	Enter the Forum ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form , and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

  Note: Click on the Organisation M button to create a new forum if it does not exist.

5.	The Forum Abbreviation and the Forum Name fields will be automatically populated as they are both linked to the Forum ID.

6.	Enter the Data Owner Organistion ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Login Organisation form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.  Note:  The Data Owner Organisation ID will automatically be populated with the login Organisation Id, but it may be changed to another Data Owner.

7.	The Data Owner Organisation and Data Owner Abbreviation fields will  be automatically populated, because it is the same as the organisation logged in.

8.	Click on the Report button to select the applicable report option. The information of the records that you retrieved according to your input parameters to this form will display on your report.  Note: The Report is enabled when one or more records exist.

Edit a Forum or Area:

 Note:. Only the data owner may modify the record.

1.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a Forum or Area:

 Note:. Only the data owner may delete the record.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record.

4.	Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related Systems Topics

Geographical Area Maintenance

User Organisation Selection

Organisation Maintenance

Geographical Area Selection

Organisation Selection


Geographical Area Decision Criteria

Description:

The Geographical Area Decision Criteria form enables you to choose a filter criteria option for Geographical Areas from the applicable list.

Steps:

1.	Select an option by clicking on the applicable radio button.

2.	Click on the Next button to close the form and open the selected form.

3.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

Related System Topics

Geographical Area Filter Criteria

Geographical Area History Filter Criteria

Geographical Feature in Geographical Area Filter Criteria

Forum Area Filter Criteria


Forum Area Filter Criteria

Description

The Forum Area Filter Criteria form enables you to enter or select search criteria for a specific Forum-Area or Forum.

Steps

 Note: It is not compulsory to enter the filter criteria for any of fields on this form. Please refer to the heading "Important´below.

1.	The Area Type field will be automatically populated.  Note: If there is more than one value, you may select the record from the [image] drop-down list.

2.	Enter the Area ID or click on the  [image] Zoom button to open the Geographical Area  Selection form, click on the required record and click on the  [image] Select button to return the selection.

3.	The Area Name will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Area ID.

4.	Enter the Forum ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, click on the required record and click on the  [image] Select button to return the selection.

5.	The Forum Name will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Forum ID.

6.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, click on the required record and click on the  [image] Select button to return the selection.

7.	The Data Owner Organisation Name will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

 Note: When this form is called from a Water Network Forum Area menu, it will have an OK button, and when you click on the OK button the Forum Area Maintenance form will be opened, but when the form is called from a Geographical Area Decision Criteria form, it will open in the wizard mode with the Back and Next buttons. When you click on the Next button, the Geographical Area Selection Wizard will open.

Important

When no Filter Criteria is specified and the OK button is activated, all the Forum Areas will be displayed on the Forum Area M Form, and when no filter criteria is specified and the Next button is activated, the Forum Area selection Wizard form will display with all the the forum areas.

Related System Topics

Forum Area Maintenance

Forum Area Selection

Geographical Area Selection

Organisation Selection

Login Organisation Selection


Forum Area Selection

Description

The Forum Area Selection form is used to select a forum area associated with a forum.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Next button to open the Geographical Area Maintenance form.

5.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

6.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

Note: Steps 4-6 applies only when the form is opened in Wizard mode, when the form is opened in normal selection mode, the Select button will be applicable for the selection of a record.

Related System Topics

Geographical Area Maintenance

Organisation Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Geographical Area Selection


Geographical Area Filter Criteria

Description:

The Geographical Area Filter Criteria form enables you to specify the Direct filter criteria from Geographical Area.

Steps:

1.	On the High Level Geographical Area Types, click on the WMA, Sub-catchment, Drainage Region, DWAF Water Resource Officer Area or Other Geographical Types radio buttons to select a specific High Level Geographical Area Type.

Note: The selection of WMA, Subcatchment or DWAF water Resources Officer Area will bring up only one high level geographical type default value and the Drainage Regions selection will bring up an Associated Classes – Type Selection form with a list of drainage regions to choose the applicable one from. When you change the High Level Geographical Area Type from Subcatchment or DWAF Water Resource Officer Area to any other type that is not related to WMA, the Belong to WMA field will be cleared.

2.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

3.	The Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID

4.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Groundwater Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

5.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID.

6.	Enter the  Management Authority Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button.

7.	The Management Authority Organisation Abbreviation and the Management Authority Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organistion ID.

8.	Enter the Belong to WMA ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Geographical Area Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button.

9.	The Belong to WMA Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Belong to WMA ID.

10.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Login Organisation form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

11.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organistion ID.

12.	Click on the Next button to open the Geographical Area Maintenance form with the specified Filter criteria.

13.	Click on the Back button to return to the Decision Criteria form.

14.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Associated Classes - Type Selection

Geographical Area Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Geographical Area Maintenance

Organisation Selection form


Geographical Area History Filter Criteria

Description:

The Geographical Area History Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter Criteria for Geographical Area History Records

Steps:

1.	On the High Level Geographical Area type, click on the WMA, Sub-catchment, Drainage Region, DWAF Water Resource Officer Area or Other Geographical Types radio buttons to go to the applicable records.

2.	Select the Feature Type from a drop-down list.

3.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Geographical Area History Selection form.

4.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID.

5.	Enter the Management Authority Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, click on the Select button to return the selection.

6.	The Management Authority Organisation Abbreviation and the Management Authority Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Management Authority Organisation ID.

7.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, and click on the Select button to return the selection.

8.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Organisation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

9.	Enter the Change User Login or click on the Zoom button to open the User Selection form, and click on the Select button to return the selection.

10.	The Change User Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Change User Login.

11.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, and click on the Select button to return the selection.

12.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation and the Change User Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Change User Organisation ID.

13.	Click on the Next button to open the Geographical Area History Selection Wizard form with the specified Filter criteria.

14.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

15.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

User Selection

Organisation Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Geographical Area History Selection


User Selection

Description:

The User Selection form allows you to select a specific user code.

Steps:

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Ckick on the Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics:


Geographical Area History Selection

Description:

The Geographical Area History Selection form allows you to select a specific Geographical Area history record.

Steps:

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection

4.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

5.	Click on the Next button to go to the Transfer Feature Maintenance form.

6.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

Note: Steps 4-6 applies only when the form is opened in Wizard mode, when the form is opened in normal selection mode, the Select button will be applicable for the selection of a record.

Related System Topics:

User Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Organisation Selection

Geographical Area Maintenance

Multimedia Selection


Geographical Area Selection

Description:

The Geographical Area Selection form allows you to select a specific Geographical Area.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the applicable records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics:

Geographical Area Maintenance

Associated Classes - Type Selection

Login Organisation Selection

Organisation Selection

Multimedia Selection


Geographical Feature in Geographical Area Filter Criteria

Description:

The Geographical Feature in Geographical Area Filter Criteria enables you to select only an applicable Feature’s Type and Geographical feature.

Steps:

 Note: Steps on this form depend on the type of the future you are working on.

1.	On the High Level Geographical Feature Types, will be automatically selected

 Note: all the other options will be disabled

2.	Enter the Geographical Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

3.	The Geographical Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Geographical Feature Type ID.

4.	Enter the Geographical Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the following forms, thereafter make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

•	Geographical Feature Selection form (When you select the All Features option)

•	Geographical Area Selection form (When you select the Geographical Area option)

•	Transfer Feature Selection form (When you select the Transfer Feature option)

•	Water Use Site Selection form (When you select the Water Use Site option)

•	River Selection form (When you select the River option)

•	Groundwater Point Selection form (When you select the Groundwater Point option)

•	Water Body Selection form (When you select the Water Body option)

•	Monitoring Point Selection form (When you select the Monitoring Point option)

•	Sector Selection form (When you select the Sector option)

•	Reach Selection form (When you select the Reach option)

5.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed

6.	On the High Level Geographical Area Types, click on the WMA, Sub-catchment, Drainage Region, DWAF Water Resource Officer Area or the Other Geographical Types option to filter out records associated with a selected type of Geographical Feature

7.	Enter the Geographical Area Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Geographical Area Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Geographical Area Type ID.

9.	Enter the Geographical Area ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Geographical Area Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

10.	The Geographical Area Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Geographical Area ID.

11.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

12.	Click on the Next button to open the Geographical Feature in Geographical Area Selection form with the records for the specified filter criteria.

13.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Geographical Feature Selection

Geographical Area Selection

Transfer Feature Selection

Associated Class-Type Selection


Geographical Feature in Geographical Area Selection

Description:

The Geographical Feature in Geographical Area Selection form allows you to select a specific Geographical Feature in a Geographical Area.

Steps:

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

5.	Click on the Next button to go to the Geographical Feature Maintenance form.

6.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

 Note: Steps 4-6 applies only when the form is opened in Wizard mode, when the form is opened in normal selection mode, the Select button will be applicable for the selection of a record.

Related System Topics:

Geographical Area Selection

Geographical Feature Selection


Geographical Feature Selection

Description:

The Geographical Feature Selection form allows you to select a specific Geographical Feature.

Steps:

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select a specific record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to close the form and return to the calling form.

Related System Topics:


Transfer Feature Decision Criteria

Description:

The Transfer Feature Decision Criteria form enables the user to select an option from the radio group. All these options lead to the Transfer Feature Maintenance form, from where the user can maintain or create new records. i.e. by choosing Transfer Feature Filter Criteria option, user can go on to maintain selected Transfer Feature records.

Steps:

1.	Select an option by clicking on the applicable radio button.

2.	Click on the Next button to close the form and open the selected form.

3.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Transfer Feature Filter Criteria

Transfer Featuer in Geographical Area Filter Criteria

Transfer Feature History Filter Criteria


Transfer Feature Filter Criteria

Description:

The Transfer Feature Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for Transfer Feature records.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature Type ID

3.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Transfer Feature Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID.

5.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection

6.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

7.	Click on the Next button to open the Transfer Feature Maintenance form with the specified Filter criteria.

8.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

9.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Login Organisation Selection

Associated Classes - Type Selection

Transfer Feature Selection


Transfer Feature History Filter Criteria

Description:

The Transfer Feature History Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for the Transfer Feature History records.

Steps:

1.	In the Feature Type field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a Feature Type by clicking on the required option, and tab.

2.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Groundwater Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

3.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID.

4.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection

5.	The Data Owner Organisation Abbreviation and the Data Owner Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

6.	Enter the Change User Login or click on the Zoom button to open the User Selection form, and click on the Select button to return the selection.

7.	The Change User Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Change User Login.

8.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, and click on the Select button to return the selection.

9.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation and the Change User Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Change User Organisation ID.

10.	Click on the Next button to open the Transfer Feature History Selection form with the specified Filter criteria.

11.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

12.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Transfer Feature History Selection

Login Organisation Selection

User Selection

Organisation Selection

Associated Classes - Type Selection


Transfer Feature History Selection

Description:

The Transfer Feature History Selection form allows you to select a specific Transfer Feature history record.

Steps:

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

5.	Click on the Next button to go to the Transfer Feature Maintenance form.

6.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

Note: Steps 4-6 applies only when the form is opened in Wizard mode, when the form is opened in normal selection mode, the Select button will be applicable for the selection of a record.

Related System Topics:


QA button

Click on this button to enable the Central Administrator to indicate that the Geographical Feature’s information is Quality Assured on WMS on a specified date.


Close Date

Description	The Close Date is the date on which the feature was set out of use for WMS use.

Format(s)	YYYY-MM-DD

Important	When a Feature is set out of use on WMS, the record displaying in dimmed grey  clearly indicates that it is currently Inactive on WMS.

Examples	9999-12-31


Close button

Click on this button to enable the Central Administrator to indicate that the Geographical Feature is no longer an Active Geographical Feature for WMS.


Data Owner Organisation ID

Description	The Data Owner Organisation ID uniquely identifies the organisation that is the Data Owner for the specific record.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of  2 147 483 647

Important	Only the current data owner or the database administrator may change the content of the record including the owner, or delete the unused record. The organisation creating a record, will by default be the record’s data owner.

Examples	10797


Database User ID

The Database User ID defines the people who should be able to log on to WMS, such as the Users and the Development Team.


Database Type

Description	The Database Type is used to manage the data maintenance of geographical feature on specific high level types at geographical features.

Format(s)	Maximum 2  characters

Important	Database type value shall not physically be created by you, the user. Database type gets value according to the type of feature that is created. After creating a geographical feature, the database type may not change again.

Examples	A – When a geographical feature is an Area record.

T – When a geographical feature is a Transfer Feature.

U – When a geographical feature is a Water Use Site.

V – When a geographical feature is a River.


Geographical Feature Type ID

Description	The Geographical Feature Type ID uniquely identifies the type of geographical feature.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 Numerics

Examples	1282829


Bi-Directional Reason

Description	The Bi-Directional Reason is the reason why a Transfer Feature is bi-directional (flowing in two directions).

Format(s)	Maximum 40 characters.

Examples


Transfer Feature Code

Description	The Transfer Feature Code uniquely identifies a Transfer Feature.

Format(s)	Alphanumeric, Uppercase

Examples	'X1H040'


Transfer Feature Decision Group

Description	The Transfer Feature Decision Group gives you the applicable options through which you can get to the Transfer Feature Maintenance form.

Format(s)	Radio Group

Examples	Water Bodies, Rivers, Groundwater Features, Water Use Sites, Monitoring Points, Sectors, Reaches


Geographical Area Decision Group

Description	The Geographical Area Decision Group gives you different options through which you can get to the Geographical Area Maintenance form for the purpose of maintaining Geographical Areas.

Format(s)	Radio Group

Examples	Geographical Area, Geographical Area History, Geographical Area Forum (Organisation), Feature in Geographical Area


Belong to WMA ID

Description	The Belong to WMA ID is a Geographical Area ID used to uniquely define the WMA (Water Management Area) to which the sub-catchment or DWAF Water Resource Officer Area belongs.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of  2 147 483 647

Examples	UPPER VAAL Water Resource Officer Area belongs to WMA GAUTENG NORTH


Management Authority Organisation ID

Description	The Management Authority Organisation ID uniquely identifies an organisation that manages a WMA, sub-catchment or officer area. A cluster manages a WMA (Water Management Area), and a Sub-catchment or Office Area will be managed by a Regional Office or CMA (Catchment Management Authority).

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of  2 147 483 647

Important	This is a compulsory field for geographical areas, WMA, sub-catchment or officer area

Examples	10945


Forum Area Maintenance button

Click on this button to maintain Forum Sub-Catchment records.


Area ID

Description	The Area ID uniquely identifies the Area associated to an Organisation.

Format(s)	Maximum 10 numerics with a maximum value of  2 147 483 647

Examples	187633


Area Maintenance button

Click on this button to maintain Geographical Areas.


Organisation Maintenance button

Click on this button to maintain Organisations.


Decision Radio Group

Description	The Decision Radio Group gives you the valid options to get to the relevant functionality of the system.

Format(s)	Radio Group

Examples	Software Item Filter Criteria


Multiple Member/Employee Selection

Description

The Multiple Member/Employee Selection form to give the user the ability to select multiple Liaison Entities and specify a 'Related Media Association Reason' in order to generate Multiple Multi Media Liaison entity records.

Steps

1.	Enter any existing Organisation Id (Company or Assembly) in the Organisation Id Field or press the Zoom button and open the Organisation Selection form to select an existing Organisation.

2.	The chosen existing Organisation is either an Assembly or Company. If it’s a company, the Liason Entity Details Grid will be populated with a list of Employees.  Specify the Related Media Association Reason by selecting a reason from the Liason Entity MultiMedia Association Reason dropdown list.

3.	If the chosen Organisation is an Assembly specify the relevant  Media Association Reason in a similar way.

4.	Highlight the Organisation/s to be selected from the  Liason Entity Details Grid and  select them into the Records To Be Generated ListBox.

5.	Press the 'Generate Multi Media Liaison Entity records' button for a MultiMediaLE record to be created for every Organisation in the Records To Be Generated ListBox with the specified reason.

6.	If the user closes the form, the user shall view a list of all Liaison Entities and Associate Reasons with a specific multi media record in the 'Multi Media Liaison Entity Tab'.


Employee Selection

Description

The Employee Selection form is used to select an employee of an organisation.

Steps

1.	The Organisation ID or Organisation Name specified in the calling form will be  displayed in their fields. All the related employee records will appear in the list.

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

3.	Click on the Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Organisation Maintenance

Description

The Organisation Maintenance form is used to maintain and view organisation related information.

 Note: History and Report options are also available.

Steps

Add an Organisation:

1.	Make sure any Organisation record is highlighted and click on the [image] Create button. Note: The LE Id is a system generated value and cannot be updated by the user. Other non-editable fields are Organisation Type, Addressee Type, Org of Abbreviation.

2.	In the Abbreviation field, enter an abbreviation for the organisation, and tab.  Ensure that this Abbreviation is unique!

3.	In the Basic Organisation Type field, select either Company or Assembly from the drop down list.

4.	Check the DWAF Indicator   if relevant. Note: If the DWAF Indicator is checked for a company, the Rank required checkbox will automatically be checked, and you will be prompted, but not forced to enter a Rank for the employee. The user may uncheck the Rank required indicator for a company but not for a rank for an assembly where it is required.

 Note: There can be many organisations with the same Name and Division/Subdivision BUT must have different Area Offices, hence In the combination of these 3 fields (Organisation Name, Division/Subdivision, Area Office), at least ONE of these MUST be unique. (Steps 5 – 7)

5.	In the Organisation Name field click on Zoom to open the Organisation Name Select form. If the Organisation Name, Division/Subdivision or Area Office exists, select the record, and the information will be populated in the Organisation Maintenance form. If the Organisation Name, Division/Subdivision or Area Office does not yet exist, click on the Not Found button.  You will return to the Organisation Maintenance form , and you can  enter the full name of the organisation in the Organisation Name field, and tab. Check that the spelling is correct!

6.	In the Division/Subdivision field, press F5 and Zoom to open the Division/Subdivision Select form. If the Division/Subdivision exists, select the record, and the information will be populated in the Organisation Maintenance form. The user may modify the value after selecting it. If the Division/Subdivision does not yet exist, click on the Not Found button.  You will return to the Organisation Maintenance form, and you can begin entering the Division/Subdivision of the organisation in the field, and tab. Check that the spelling is correct!

7.	In the Area Office field, press F5 and Zoom to open the Area Office Selection form. If the Area Office exists, select the record, and the information will be populated in the Organisation Maintenance form. The user may modify the value after selecting it If the Area Office does not yet exist, click on the Not Found button. You will return to the Organisation Maintenance form, and you can enter the organisation's area office in the field, and tab. Check that the spelling is correct!

8.	In the Organisation Type ID field, enter the Organisation Type ID, or press F5 and Zoom to open the Class Type form. Select the relevant Organisation Type, click on the Select button to return the selection, and tab. The entered value is validated on exit of the field.

9.	Enter the From Date , or select the date from the [image] Date button. The To Date is automatically populated as 9999-12-31. The from Date may not be in the Future.

10.	In the Addressee ID field, enter the rank/position that all correspondence to this organisation should be addressed to, and tab, or press F5 and Zoom button to open the Class Type form. Select the relevant Rank/Position, click on the Select button to return the selection, and tab. The entered value is validated on exit of the field.

11.	In the Organisation of field, enter the Organisation ID representing the "parent" organisation. A parent is selected from organisations with the same Organisation Name, Dwaf Related Indicator and Basic Org Type values. Press F5 and Zoom to open the Organisation Hierarchial Selection form. Select the relevant Organisation, click on the Select button to return the selection. The entered value is validated on exit of the field.

12.	In the Mission Statement field, enter the Organisation's mission statement.

13.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, exit the record to accept the new record. You have a choice to click the Organisation History View button to view the history or changes of the focused organisation.

14.	You have an option to associate a forum with sub catchment Geographical Areas, click on the Forum Area Maintenance button to open the Geographical Area Forum Maintenance form.

15.	At this stage you have the option of adding the Organisation's Address details, click on the Maintain Organisation Address button to open the Organisation Address Maintenance form.

16.	If no Correspondence or Residential Address information exists, you will have the option of adding the address. Click on the Maintain Organisation Address button, and add the address.

To add an Employee for the Company:

Note: When entering information, ensure that the information is valid, otherwise an error message will appear. The Employee Id is a system generated value and can not be updated by the user. You may click the Employee History View button to view the history or  changes of all the employee’s records  for the organisation.

1.	Enter the Person ID and tab, or press F5 and Zoom to open the Person Selection form, and select the required record. The entered value is validated on exit of the field.

2.	Select the Status of the employee within the organisation as "Active" or "Out of Use" from the drop down list.

3.	In the Rank ID field, if the organisation's rank required indicator has been checked, you will need to enter a rank, otherwise this is an optional action. If required, enter the Rank ID and tab, or press F5 and Zoom button to open the Class Type form, and select the required record. The entered value is validated on exit of the field. The Rank Id may only be entered if the employee is active.

4.	If the Status of the employee is "Active", enter the Office Room Number.  The Get Member Effective date will open and prompt for dates for the Status (required) Rank (if entered) and Supervisor (if entered). Note: On WMS, a person may only be an active employee of ONE company at any given time.

5.	Enter the Supervisor ID and tab, , or press F5 and Zoom to open the Employee Hierarchy Selection form, and select the required record. Note: Only employees for the focussed organisation will be displayed. The entered value is validated on exit of the field.

6.	Exit the record to accept the new record.

To add a Member of an Assembly:

Note: When entering information, ensure that the information is valid, otherwise an error message will appear. The Member Id is a system generated value and can not be updated by the user.

1.	Enter the Person ID and tab, or press F5 and Zoom to open the Person Selection form, and select the required record.

2.	The Rank ID field,  is required  for an assembly indicator has been checked, you will need to enter a rank, otherwise this is an optional action. If required, enter the Rank ID and tab, or press F5 and Zoom  to open the Class Type form, and select the required record. The entered value is validated on exit of the field.

3.	Select the Status of the member within the assembly as "Active" or "Out of Use" from the drop down list.

4.	Select the Representation Type as "Myself", "Assembly" or "Company".

5.	In the Represented Organisation field:

•	If the Represented Type is an "assembly", enter the Represented Organisation, and tab or click on the Zoom button to open the Member Organisation Selection form, and select the required record. Note: The represented assembly must be different from member's assembly. A person may be created as a member of more than one assembly, however then the Represented Assembly may not represented by that same person. A member must be an active member of an assembly to represent that Assembly at another assembly.

•	If the Represented Type is a "company", the Represented Organisation where the person is actively employed, will automatically be populated by the system.

•	If the Represented Type is "myself", the represented organisation is not applicable.  A member may only be represented as myself if the organisation represented is on the leaf level.  Exit the record to accept the new record.

Edit an Employee record:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Modify button or  Ctrl + M  to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Edit the record. The fields Status, Rank or Supervisor can be modified.

4.	Note that when the Status is out of use, the user will not be able to edit the record.

5.	Move focus out of the record to accept changes to the record.

6.	The From Date for new values or To Date, when Rank or Supervisor is cleared must be provided.

7.	Move focus out of the record to accept changes to the record.

Edit a Member record:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Modify button or  Ctrl + M  to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Edit the record. The fields Status, Rank or Represented Organisation can be modified.        Note that when the status is out of use, the user will not be able to edit the record.

4.	Move focus out of the record to accept changes to the record.

5.	User may only be able to change Represented Organisation to certain values on certain records.

•	Only Assemblies on the lowest level may have members representing themselves.

•	A Member may only represent their Company when he is an active Employee of a company at that point in time.

•	A Member may only represent its Assembly when it is an active Member of the Assembly.  This will hold provided the focused assembly is higher in the Organisation hireachy or in a different Organisation hireachy or lastly in no hireachy at all.

Edit an Organisation record:

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Make sure that a required orgnisation record is highlighted

4.	Click on the [image] Modify button or  Ctrl + M  to enable you to edit a record. Note: The LE Id is a system generated value and cannot be updated by the user. Other non editable fields are Organisation Type , Addressee Type, Org of Abbreviation.

5.	In the Abbreviation field, change the abbreviation for the organisation if it needs to be changed, and tab.  Ensure that this Abbreviation is unique!

6.	In the Basic Organisation Type field, change the type from Company to Assembly or vice versa from the drop down list. It can only be done if a Company has no Employee or an Assembly has no Member.

7.	Check the DWAF Indicator if relevant. Note: If the DWAF Indicator is checked for a company, the Rank required checkbox will automatically be checked, and you will be prompted, but not forced to enter a Rank for the employee. The user may uncheck the Rank required indicator for a company but not for a rank for an assembly where it is required.

8.	If the Organisation Name needs to be changed, then in the Organisation Name field, click on Zoom to open the Organisation Name Select form. If the Organisation Name, Division/Subdivision or Area Office exists, select the record, and the information will be populated in the Organisation Maintenance form. If the Organisation Name, Division/Subdivision or Area Office does not yet exist, click on the Not Found button.  You will return to the Organisation Maintenance form , and you can enter the full name of the organisation in the Organisation Name field, and tab. Check that the spelling is correct! If the Organisation has children or  Parents, then the user must choose between unlinking the Organisation or change or the names of the parents and children in the hierarchy.

9.	If the Division/Subdivision field needs to be changed, then in the Division/Subdivision field, press F5 and Zoom to open the Division/Subdivision Select form. If the Division/Subdivision exists, select the record, and the information will be populated in the Organisation Maintenance form. The user may modify the value after selecting it. If the Division/Subdivision does not yet exist, click on the Not Found button.  You will return to the Organisation Maintenance form, and you can begin entering the Division/Subdivision of the organisation in the field, and tab. Check that the spelling is correct!

10.	If the Area Office needs to be changed, then in the Area Office field, press F5 and Zoom to open the Area Office Selection form. If the Area Office exists, select the record, and the information will be populated in the Organisation Maintenance form. The user may modify the value after selecting it If the Area Office does not yet exist, click on the Not Found button. You will return to the Organisation Maintenance form, and you can enter the organisation's area office in the field, and tab. Check that the spelling is correct!

11.	If the Organisation Type needs to be changed , then in the Organisation Type ID field, enter the Organisation Type ID, or press F5 and Zoom to open the Class Type form. Select the relevant Organisation Type, click on the Select button to return the selection, and tab. The entered value is validated on exit of the field.

12.	If the From Date needs to be changed, then enter the From Date or select the date from the  Date button. The To Date is automatically populated as 1960-01-01. The from Date may not be in the Future.

13.	If the the Addressee needs to be changed, then in the Addressee ID field, enter the rank/position that all correspondence to this organisation should be addressed to, and tab, or press F5 and Zoom button to open the Class Type form. Select the relevant Rank/Position, click on the Select button to return the selection, and tab. The entered value is validated on exit of the field.

14.	If the the Addressee needs to be changed, then in the Organisation of field, enter the Organisation ID  representing the "parent" organisation. A parent is selected from organisations with the same Organisation Name, Dwaf Related Indicator and Basic Org Type values. Press F5 and Zoom  to open the Organisation Hierarchial Selection form. Select the relevant Organisation, click on the Select button to return the selection. The entered value is validated on exit of the field.

15.	If the Mission Statement needs to be changed, then in the Mission Statement field, enter the Organisation's mission statement.

16.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, exit the record  to accept the change. You have a choice to click the Organisation History View button to view the history or changes of the focused organisation.

17.	You have an option to associate a forum with an Area(s), click on the Forum Area Maintenance button to open the Geographical Area Forum Maintenance form.

18.	At this stage you have the option of adding or updating the Organisation's Address details, click on the Maintain Organisation Address button to open the Organisation Address Maintenance form.

19.	If no Correspondence or Residential Address information exists, you will have the option of adding the address. Click on the Maintain Organisation Address button, and add the address. There is a checkbox that can be checked in order to validate the existence of such Address Information when scrolling.

20.	Move focus out of the record to accept changes to the record.

Delete an Employee  record:

Note: You can only delete an employee record  when all associated links , whether direct or indirect, are removed or not existing.  A direct link can be made on Multimedia, Monitoring Programme, Non Scheduled Samples and Monitor at Point. An inderect  link can exist  when a Member ecord represents the Employee’s company.

When deleting a record the following fields and information must be provided: "To Date " of the Status, Rank (if  specified) , Supervisor ( if specified)  Represented Organisation (when populated),   as well as the relevant reason for the deletion as a "Business Event" or "Error" from the Get Employee Effective Date form.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

3.	Press F3 or Edit-Delete Line, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record. Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Delete a Member record:

Note:You can only delete a member record  when all associated links , whether direct or indirect, are removed or not existing.  A direct link can be made on Multimedia, Monitoring Programme, and  Non Scheduled Samples . An indirect  link can exist  when a Member record represents another assembly.

When deleting a record the following fields and information must be provided: "To Date " of the Status, Rank (if  specified) , Supervisor ( if specified)  Represented Organisation (when populated),   as well as the relevant reason for the deletion as a "Business Event" or "Error" from the Get Member Effective Date form.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

3.	Press F3 or Edit-Delete Line,  a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record.  Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Delete an Organisation  record:

You can only delete employee and organisation records when all associated links, whether direct or indirect, are removed. When deleting a record, the "To Date" of the Status, Rank, and Represented Organisation (when populated) must be provided as well as the relevant reason for the deletion as a "Business Event" or "error" from the Get Employee Effective Date form.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

3.	Press key F3 or menu  Edit->Delete, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record, click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Person Address Maintain

Employee Hierarchy View

Organisation Hierarchy Selection

Organisation Name Selection

Organisation Division / Subdivision Selection

Organisation Area Office Selection

Organisation Address Maintenance

Get Employee Effective Dates

Get Member Effective Dates

Employee Hierarchy Selection

Organisation and Person Selection

Member Organisation Selection

Employee History View

Member History View

Forum Area Maintenance


Organisation Address Maintenance

Description

The Organisation Address Maintenance form is used to maintain and view organisation addresses and related information.

Note: History and Report options are also available.

Pre- Requisites

Note: If the required Organisation has an "Out of Use" status, you will only be able to view the address information, and cannot maintain records. However, if the Organisation has an "Active" status, you will be able to maintain the address records for this organisation, as well as the Organisation's addressee.

Steps

Add an Organisation's  Address:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

Telecommunication Address Maintenance:

2.	The Telecommunication Address ID and Business/Home fields are automatically populated by the system.

3.	If the telephone number is local, check the local indicator [image], is the number is international, leave the checkbox unchecked.

4.	In the Telecommunication Type field, click on the [image] drop down button and select the relevant telecommunication type, and tab.

5.	In the Direct/Switchboard field, specify whether it is a "Direct" or "Switchboard" telephone line and tab.

6.	In the Dialing Code field, enter the relevant area's dialling code, and tab.

7.	In the Number field, enter the relevant telephone number, and tab.

8.	If required, enter the Extension number or any other additional dialing information in the Telephone Extension field.

Electronic Address Maintenance:

9.	The Electronic Address ID and Business/Home fields are automatically populated by the system.

10.	In the Electronic Address Type field, click on the [image] drop down button and select the type of electronic address (E-mail, IP, or Web), and tab.

11.	In the Electronic Address Text field, enter the electronic address where information can be sent.

Post Box Private Bag Address Maintenance:

12.	The Postal Address ID and Business Home fields will be automatically populated by the system.

13.	In the Post/Private Bag Type field, click on the drop down list and select either PO - Post Box or PR- Private Bag, then tab.

14.	In the Bag Box Text field, enter the address, and tab.

15.	In the Postal Code field, enter the postal code number or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Postal Code Area Selection form, and select the required record.

16.	In the Parcel Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that parcels will be collected at this address.

17.	In the Correspondence Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that correspondence can be sent to this address.

18.	In the Billing Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that accounts or bills will be collected at this address.

19.	The Postal Code Country Town Suburb information will be automatically populated by the system.

Physical Address Maintenance:

20.	The Physical Address ID and Business Home fields will be automatically populated by the system.

21.	In the Post/Location Type field, click on the drop down list and select either P- Post, L- Location or B - Post & Location, then tab.

22.	In the Postal Code field, enter the postal code number or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Postal Code Area Selection form, and select the required record.

23.	In the Building field, enter the physical location and associated number, and tab.

24.	In the Place/Street field, enter the physical or residential building or area, and tab.

25.	In the Residential Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that this address is a residence.

26.	In the Parcel Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that parcels will be collected at this address.

27.	In the Correspondence Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that correspondence can be sent to this address.

28.	In the Billing Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that accounts or bills will be collected at this address.

29.	The Street Code Country Town Suburb information will be automatically populated by the system.

30.	If the post Location Type specified is an "L" , you will need to specify the Country Town Suburb combination. In the Country Town Suburb ID field, enter a  valid Country Town Suburb ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Country Town Suburb Selection form, and select the required record.

31.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

Edit an Organisation Address:

The Physical Address ID, Postal Address ID, and Telecommunication Address ID cannot be edited.

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the [image] Edit button.

2.	Edit the record as required.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete an Organisation Address:

You can only delete records if they are not being referenced by other records, and used in other forms.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record, click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Organisation Maintenance


Employee Hierarchy Select

Description

The Employee Hierarchy Selection form is used to select a record in the hierarchical view. The selected record will be added as the supervisor for the focused employee record in the Organisation/Person Employee Maintenance form.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record in the tree view to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.

Related System Topics

Organisation Maintenance


Employee Hierarchy View

Description

The Employee Hierarchy View form is used to view a specific employee's position in the organisation's employee hierarchical tree. This form is opened from the Organisation Employee Maintenance or Person Employee Maintenance forms.

Steps

This is a display-only form.

Related System Topics

Organisation Maintenance

Person Maintenance


Organisation Hierarchy Select

Description

The Organisation Hierarchy Selection form is used to select a record in the hierarchical view. The selected record will be added as the parent for the focused organisation record in the Organisation Maintenance form.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record in the tree view to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.

Related System Topics

Organisation Maintenance


Organisation Hierarchy View

Description

The Organisation Hierarchy View form is used to view a specific organisation's position within the parent organisation's hierarchical tree. This form is opened from the Organisation Maintenance form.

Steps

This is a display-only form.

Related System Topics

Organisation Maintenance


 Area Office Selection

Description

The Area Office Selection form is used to select area offices registered for organisations and assemblies that exist on the database. This minimises the possibility of record duplication during the creation of new organisation records.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button to return the selected record information to the previous form.

3.	If the record does not appear in the list, click on the Area Office Not Found button to close the form, and enter the required information in the Organisation Maintenance form.

Related System Topics

Organisation Maintenance


Division/Subdivision Select

Description

The  Division/Subdivision Select form is used to select Divisions/Subdivisions registered for organisations and assemblies that exist on the database. This minimises the possibility of record duplication during the creation of new organisation records.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button to return the selected record information to the previous form.

3.	If the record does not appear in the list, click on the Division/Subdivision Not Found button to close the form, and enter the required information in the Organisation Maintenance form.

Related System Topics

Organisation Maintenance


Organisation Name Select

Description

The Organisation Name Select form is used to select an organisation name registered for organisations and assemblies that exist on the database. This minimises the possibility of record duplication during the creation of new organisation records.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button to return the selected record information to the previous form.

3.	If the record does not appear in the list, click on the Organisation Not Found button to close the form, and enter the required information in the Organisation Maintenance form.

Related System Topics

Organisation Maintenance


Country Town Suburb Selection

Description

The Country Town Suburb Selection form is used to select a country, town, and suburb combination. This information is used to contact persons and organisations that are linked to the WMS system.

Steps

Search for a Country town suburb combination:

1.	Enter a Postal Code, Town or Suburb or part thereof with a  wildcard ( *  ),  and click on the Filter button.

2.	If the record exits, it will appear on the top line.

3.	If you wish to select an existing record click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information

         to   the previous form.

Related System Topics


Country Town Suburb Maintenance

Description

The  Country Town Suburb Maintenance form is used to view and maintain country, town, and suburb information.  This information is used to contact persons and organisations that are linked to the WMS system.

Note : Click on the field to be maintained to enable Maintenace Controls.

Steps

Add a  Country town suburb record:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	The Country Town Suburb ID is a system generated number that is automatically allocated.

3.	In the Primary Place field, enter the Primary Place and tab.

4.	In the Secondary Place field, enter the Secondary Place and tab.

5.	In the Country field, enter the Country Name, and tab.

6.	Moving from the new record should automatically post it when all the fields requiremets are met.

Edit an address country town suburb record:

A record can only be edited if it is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Edit the record as required.

3.	Moving from the new record should automatically post it when all the fields requiremets are met.

Delete an address country town suburb record:

A record can only be deleted if it is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted to highlight it, and click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the F3 key or menu option Edit->Delete, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record, click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Important

System Users with normal access rights can only add records, while the WMS Liason Entity Administrator has the function of maintaining information.

Related System Topics


Dialing Code Maintenance

Description

The Dialing Code Maintenance form is used to view and maintain Dialing Code information.  The Dialing Code Maintenance form contains numerics that make up telephone numbers. This information is used to validate telenumbers to contact persons and organisations that are linked to the WMS system. Dialing code information is purchased from Telkom.

Note: The Grid or Control to be used for maintaining data must receive focus to enable the Maintenance Controls.

Steps

Add a new dialing code:

1.	Click on the [image]  Create button.

2.	In the Exchange Name field, enter the name of the exchange and tab.

3.	In the Dialing Code field, enter the dialing code and tab.

4.	In the First Three Numbers field, enter the first three digits, and tab.

5.	In the Start Number field, enter the lowest number that the telephone number associated with the dialing code begins at. Then tab.

6.	In the End Number field, enter the maximum number that the telephone number associated with the dialing code ends at. Then tab.

7.	In the Dialing Procedure Code field, enter the code.

8.	Moving from the new record should automatically post it when all the fields requirements are met.

Edit a dialing code:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Edit the record as required.

3.	Moving from the new record should automatically post it when all the fields requirements are

        met.

Delete a dialing code:

1.	Click on the [image]  Modify button.

2.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

3.	Press key F3 or menu Edit->Delete, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record, click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Important

Only the WMS Liaison Entity Administrator User  has the rights to maintain(insert, modify and delete) records.  All other WMS users have the rights to view Dialing Codes.

Related System Topics


Postal Code Area Selection

Description

The Postal Code Area Selection form is used to select a postal code associated with a specific country, town, or suburb combination.

Pre-requisites

The Postal Code Area must exist.

Steps

Select a Postal Area Code:

1.	Enter the Filter Criteria in the edit box above the grid and press the Filter button. In the Filter Criteria you are allowed to enter  either one of the Postal Code, Suburb , Town or part thereof with a  star wildcard (  *  ) combination. E.g Pretor*

2.	All the records with the applicable Postal Code, Suburb or Town that adhere to the entered criteria will be displayed in the grid.

3.	Additionally, you may use the standard  sort, query or range functionality in the grid to get to the required records.

4.	If the record does not yet exist, and you would like to create a new record, click on the Postal Code Not Found button to open the Postal Code Area Maintenance form.

5.	If you wish to select an existing record click on the required record to highlight the selection.

6.	Click on the Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.

Important

Please verify that a valid country, town or suburb combination does not exist before adding a new combination.

Related System Topics

Postal Code Area Maintenance

Person Address Maintenance

Organisation Address Maintenance


Postal Code Area Maintenance

Description

The Postal Code Area  Maintenance form is used to view and maintain postal code area information.  This information is used to contact persons and organisations that are linked to the WMS system.

Steps

Add a postal code record:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	The Postal Code Area ID is a system generated number that is automatically allocated.

3.	In the Postal Code Type field, enter the postal code type and tab.

4.	In the Postal Code field, enter the postal code and tab.

5.	The Verify Indicator will remain unchecked until the central administrator has verified the correctness of the postal code.

6.	Enter the Country Town Suburb ID, or click on the Zoom button to open the Country Town Suburb Selection form, and select the required record. (The Suburb, Town and Country Name information will be automatically provided by the system once you have entered the ID number)

7.	Moving from the new record should automatically post it when all the fields requirements are met.

Edit a postal code record:

A record can only be edited if it is not being used in another form, however the central or regional super user may edit the postal code area value, even when the postal code area record is referenced elsewhere on the system.

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Edit the record as required.

3.	Moving from the new record should automatically post it when all the fields requirements are met.

Delete a postal code record:

A record can only be deleted if it is not being used in another form.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted to highlight it, and click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the F3 key or menu option Edit->Delete, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record, click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Important

Only the Central Superuser can verify the correctness of the postal code by changing the verify indicator to true.

Only the WMS Liason Entity Central Administrator has the rights to maintain(insert, modify and delete) records. All other WMS users have the rights to view or insert records.

Related System Topics

Country Town Suburb Selection


Person Selection

Description

The Person Selection form is used to select a person.

Pre-requisites

The Person record must exist.

Steps

Select a Person:

All Person records will automatically appear in the alphabetical list, however you can refine your search as follows:

1.	Click in any of the fields, e.g. Surname and begin entering the person's surname or a portion of the surname. Note: You also have the option of sorting records by clicking on the titles of the grid

2.	If the record exits, it will appear on the top line.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.

Related System Topics

Organisation Employee Maintenance


Layer Permission View

This Form will give the User the opportunity to view the Permissions for a specific Layer (SDE Layer Table) & Column (Shape) and Role(s) that the User belongs to.


Attribute Permission View

The Attribute Permission View is used to view the permissions allocated for a layer and the logged in user. Permissions will be displayed per column and role.


Logical Table Maintenance

Description

The Logical Table Maintenance form is used to view and maintain logical table records. These tables will be used as Logical Subtype tables. Logical tables are subset tables that have been "rolled up" into the physical supertype table and therefore are not physically implemented on the database as a subtype table.

Steps

Add a new logical table record:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	A Logical Table ID will automatically be generated by the system.

3.	In the Table Name field, enter a Table Name, and tab.

4.	In the Description field, enter a Logical Table Description.

5.	The Related Subset Indicator is automatically checked by the system when the logical table is used as a subset table.

6.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

Edit a logical table record:

The Table Name can only be edited if a logical table record is not used as a subset table.

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the [image] Edit button.

2.	Edit the record as required.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a logical table record:

A logical table record can only be deleted if it is not being used as a subset table.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record, click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Logical Table Selection


Logical Table Selection

Description

The Logical Table Selection form is used to select logical table records. These tables will be used as Logical Subtype tables. Logical tables are subset tables that have been "rolled up" into the physical supertype table and therefore are not physically implemented on the database as a subtype table.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the [image] Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.

Related System Topics

Logical Table Maintenance


Subset Type View

Description

The Subset Table View form is used to view the logical or physical Subtype table for a specific Supertype database table with their associated related subset table records for a specific reason.This form is also used to open the Subset Table Maintenance form in order to add or edit record information.

Steps

Add/Edit a new Subset Table record:

To add or edit subset table information click on the add or edit button, to open the Subet Table Maintenance form, and perform the necessary additons/changes.

Delete a Subset Table:

You can only delete records when all associated links are removed, no related subset records exist, and the table is not used as a related subset record.

1. 	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record, click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Delete a Related Subset Type record:

1. 	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2. 	Click on the [image] Delete button, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record, click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Subset Table Maintenance


Subset Table Maintenance

Description

The Subset Table Maintenance form is used to add or edit subset information or related subset information depending on which form it is opened from.

1)	 When opened to create subset type records: The Subset Table Maintenance form is used to specify the logical or physical Subtype table for a specific Supertype database table. The form is also used to specify the Class type, Class Stucture or Caption for the table combination. When a database subset code is stored on a specific column on the supertype table, the user has the option to specify it.

2) 	When opened to create related subset type records: The Subset Table Maintenance form is used to specify the related supertype & Subtype table for the Focused Supertype & Subtype table with an association reason.

Pre- Requisites

In order to specify a class structure or class type, store the applicable class structure against the supertype table and type related column e.g. on supertype table = "institution" and type related column = "institution_type_id" , and store class structure = "Company Types" and "Assembly Types".

Steps

Add a new Subset Table record:

1.	On the Subset Type View form, click on the [image] Add button.

2.	An ID will automatically be generated by the system.

3.	In the Supertype Table field, enter a Supertype Table Name, or select the required record from the selection form, and tab.

4.	In the Subset Type field, enter a L for Logical or P for Physical, and tab.

5.	In the Subtype Table field, enter a Subtype Table Name, or select the required record from the Database Table Selection or Logical Table Selection form, and tab. Note: (i) The selection list of possible physical subtype tables must have a foreign key from the supertype table. (ii) A logical subtype table may be selected for more than one supertype table.(iii) You will not be able to edit the class type or class structure, when it is physically used on that table and column on the db(database).

6.	Specify either a Class Structure, Class Type or Caption, associated with the Supertype, Subtype Table combination.

7.	If a database code is associated with the supertype subtype table combination, enter the specific code and the column where it is stored on the supertype table.

8.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

Edit a Subset Table:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the [image] Edit button.

2.	Edit the record as required. Note: (i) If a Related Subset Table record exists, you can only edit the caption, however if no related subset table record exists, you can edit everything except the id. (ii) The db column code can only change when it is not yet used on the physical db. (iii) The db column can only change to another db column with a 1 to 3 character format.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Add a Related Subset Type record:

1.	On the Subset Type View form, click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Click on the Zoom, button to open the Subset Table Selection form, and select a Related Subset record.

3.	Enter a reason for the relation between the subset table and related subset table combination.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

Related System Topics

Subset Table View


Database Table Attribute Maintenance

Description

The Database Table Attribute Maintenance form is used to view and edit all physical database table information. A database table is an actual table that exists on the database and stores user data. The "existence" code indicates whether the table exists on WMS or GIS, or is no longer on the database.

Pre- Requisites

The physical table must exist on the WMS or GIS databases and will automatically be created by a stored procedure on db-table.

Steps

You cannot add or delete records - a stored procedure run by a DataBase Administrator (DBA) will insert or remove records.

Edit a Database Table Attribute:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Edit the record as required. Note: Only the Long Name and Purpose fields can be edited.

3.	Moving from the new record should automatically post it when all the fields requirements are met.

Related System Topics

Database Table Selection


Database Table Selection

Description

The Database Table Selection form is used to select a database table as a supertype table and/or physical subtype table.

Steps

Search for a Database Table record:

1.	Click in either the Table Name or Table Long Name fields and enter the first letter(s) of the Database Table's name to filter through the existing records.

2.	Click on the [image] Select button to return the selected record information to the previous screen.

Related System Topics

Database Table Attribute Maintenance


Table Column Class Maintenance

Description

The Table Column Class Maintenance form is used to maintain column information for a specific physical database table as well as the associated classes stored on the table and column.

Pre- Requisites

The table and column must be created by the stored procedure, and the class structure must first be created.

Steps

Add a Class to a Table and Column

1.	Click on the Table and Column record, and click on the class grid, then click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Select a Class Structure record.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record

Edit a Table Column Class:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the [image] Edit button.

2.	Edit the record as required. Note: Only the column long name, column description, class related indicator ( when the Class Related Indicator is checked, you will be prompted to select a class structure), interpreted indicator, and or the associated class structure fields can be maintained. When the class type values are already stored on the table and in the specific column, the class structure cannot be changed.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Table Column Class:

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record, click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Table Column Selection


Table Column Selection

Description

The Table Column Selection form is used to select table columns when maintaining information on subset types.

Steps

Select a Table Column record:

1.	Click on the required table column record to highlight the selection, and click on the [image] Select button to return the selected record information to the previous screen.

Related System Topics

Subset Types Maintenance


Get Employee Effective Date

Description

The Get Employee Effective Date form is used to specify the cause of change and effective dates from which the rank, supervisor, and status of an employee are valid The status from date is the date on which there is a change in the employment status of the person with respect to the organisation. This applies both when a person joins or leaves and organisation.

Pre- Requisites

Steps

1.	Click on the required Cause of Change option radio button. (Business Event or Error Fix)

2.	Click on the Date Calendar [image] to select the required date, or enter the date in the space provided.

3.	Click on the OK button to verify that the correct date has been selected/entered.

Related System Topics

Person Member Maintenance


Get Member Effective Date

Description

The Get Member Effective Date form is used to specify the cause of change and effective dates from which the represented organisation,  rank,  and status of a member are valid.

Pre- Requisites

Steps

1.	Click on the required Cause of Change option radio button. (Business Event or Error Fix)

2.	Click on the [image] Date Calendar to select the required date, or enter the date in the space provided.

3.	Click on the OK button to verify that the correct date has been selected/entered.

Related System Topics

Organisation Member Maintenance


Person Validation

Description

The Person Validation form is used to validate the existence of a person's record on the system. This is to prevent duplication of records.

Steps

Search for a Person record:

All Person records will automatically appear in the alphabetical list, and you can filter out the records according to the first characters of the surname, or you can filter records by clicking on the titles of any column in the "Existing Person Information" grid as follows:

1.	Click in any of the fields, e.g. Surname and begin entering the person's surname or a portion of the surname.

2.	If the record exits, it will appear on the top line.

3.	You also have the option of sorting records by clicking on the titles of the "Existing Person Information" grid.

4.	If the person’s record that you have searched for does not exist, click on the Create New Person button. The Person Maintenance form will open, and you will be able to add the person's record.

5.	If the person's record already exists, focus (mouse-click) on the required record in the "Existing Person Information" group and click on the Select an existing record button. The Person Maintenance form will appear, and the selected record will be highlighted.

Related System Topics

Person Maintenance


Person Maintenance

Description

The Person Maintenance form is used to maintain and view person related information.

Note: History and Report options are also available.

Pre- Requisites

Steps

Add a Person:

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	In the Surname  field, enter the Person's surname, and tab.

3.	In the Preferred Name  field, enter the preferred name (first name or nickname), and tab.

4.	In the Title Id field, press F5 to open the Class Type form. Select the relevant Title and click on the  Select button to return the selection, and tab.

5.	In the Initials field, enter the person's initials, and tab. (Note: No spaces or full stops allowed!)

6.	In the ID Type field, click on the [image] Drop Down list, and select the Person's ID type, and tab.

7.	In the Id Number field, enter the person's identity number, and tab.

8.	In the Language Id field,  press F5 to open the Class Type form, and select the person's preferred language, then click on the Select button to return the selection, and tab.

9.	In the Registered Names field, enter the registered name.

10.	Tab out of the field or focus on another record in order to save the person record.  Person Validation form opens to give the user the option to validate the record againts existing person records.

To add an Employee to a Company:

Note: When entering information, ensure that the information is valid, otherwise an error message will appear.

1.	Enter the Org ID and tab, or press F5 to open the Organisation Selection form, and select the required record.

2.	In the Rank ID field, enter Rank ID and tab, or press F5 to open the Class Type form, and select the required record.

3.	Select the Status of the employee within the organisation as "Active" or "Out of Use" from the drop down list.

4.	If the Status of the employee is "Active", enter the Office Room Number and tab. Note: On WMS, a person may only be an active employee of ONE company at any given time.

5.	Enter the Supervisor ID and tab, or press F5 to open the Employee Hierarchy Selection form, and select the required record. Note: Only employees for the focussed organisation will be displayed.

6.	Moving from the new record should automatically accept it.

7.	In accepting the record,  the Get Employee Effective Date form will open and you will have to enter the From Date, Of The Status, Rank(when populated), Supervisor(when populated) and the Reason is automatically entered as a "Business Event".

To add a Memberof an Assembly:

Note: When entering information, ensure that the information is valid, otherwise an error message will appear.

1.	Enter the Assembly Org ID and tab, or press F5 to open the  Organisation Selection form, and select the required record.

2.	In the Rank ID field, if the organisation's rank required indicator has been checked, you will need to enter a rank, otherwise this is an optional action. If required, enter the Rank ID and tab, or press F5  to open the Class Type form, and select the required record.

3.	Select the Status of the member within the assembly as "Active" or "Out of Use" from the drop down list.

4.	Select the Representation Type as "Myself" , "Assembly" or "Company".

5.	In the Represented Organisation field:

•	If the Represented Type is an "assembly", enter the Represented Organisation, and tab or press F5 to open the Member Organisation Selection form, and select the required record. Note :The represented assembly must be different from member's assembly. A person may be created as a member of more than one assembly, however then the Represented Assembly may not represented by that same person. The Represented Assembly is  the "parent assembly" of the member's assembly .

•	If the Represented Type is a "company", the Represented Organisation where the person is actively employed, will automatically be populated by the system

•	If the Represented Type is "myself", the represented organisation is not applicable. Move focus out of the record to accept the new record.

6.	The Get Employee Effective Date form will open and you will have to enter the From Date, Of The Status , Rank ,  Repesented Org( when populated)  and the reason is automatically  entered as a "Business Event".

Edit a Person  record:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Modify button or Ctrl + M to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Edit any of the fields in the record except for the Person Id.

4.	Note: When a record already exist with the same Surname, Preferred Name, Title and Initials Person   Validate form opens to give the user a list of persons with Surnames starting with the same character. When user presses the ‘Select an Existing Person’ button, the newly entered person will not be created. When the user presses button ‘ Update Person ’ and it causes a duplication of Surname, Preferred Name, Initials and Title, the User will be asked to enter a unique number.

5.	Move focus out of the record to accept changes to the record.

Edit an Employee record:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Modify button or  Ctrl + M  to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Edit the record. The fields Status, Rank or Supervisor can be modified.

4.	Note that when the Status is out of use, the user will not be able to edit the record.

5.	Move focus out of the record to accept changes to the record.

6.	The From Date for new values or To Date, when Rank or Supervisor is cleared must be provided.

7.	Move focus out of the record to accept changes to the record.

Edit a Member record:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Modify button or  Ctrl + M  to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Edit the record. The fields Status, Rank or Represented Organisation can be modified.        Note that when the status is out of use, the user will not be able to edit the record.

4.	Move focus out of the record to accept changes to the record.

5.	User may only be able to change Represented Organisation to certain values on certain records.

•	Only Assemblies on the lowest level may have members representing themselves.

•	A Member may only represent their Company when he is an active Employee of a company at that point in time.

•	A Member may only represent its Assembly when it is an active Member of the Assembly.  This will hold provided the focused assembly is higher in the Organisation hierarchy or in a different Organisation hierarchy or lastly in no hierarchy at all.

Delete a Person record:

Note: You can only delete a  person record  when all associated links, whether direct or indirect, are removed. E.g Person Not linked to Multimedia; Liaison Entity Functional Structure can either be linked as an employee or member.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

3.	Press F3 or Edit-Delete Line, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record. Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Delete an Employee record:

Note: You can only delete an employee record when all associated links, whether direct or indirect, are removed or not existing.  A direct link can be made on Multimedia, Monitoring Programme, Non Scheduled Samples and Monitor at Point. An indirect link can exist when a Member record represents the Employee’s company.

When deleting a record the following fields and information must be provided: "To Date " of the Status, Rank (if specified) , Supervisor ( if specified)  Represented Organisation (when populated),   as well as the relevant reason for the deletion as a "Business Event" or "Error" from the Get Employee Effective Date form.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

3.	Press F3 or Edit-Delete Line, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record. Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Delete a Member record:

Note:You can only delete a member record  when all associated links , whether direct or indirect, are removed or not existing.  A direct link can be made on Multimedia, Monitoring Programme, and  Non Scheduled Samples . An indirect  link can exist  when a Member record represents another assembly.

When deleting a record the following fields and information must be provided: "To Date " of the Status, Rank (if  specified) , Supervisor ( if specified)  Represented Organisation (when populated),   as well as the relevant reason for the deletion as a "Business Event" or "Error" from the Get Member Effective Date form.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

3.	Press F3 or Edit-Delete Line,  a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record.  Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Person Validation

Person Address Maintenance

Associated Organisation Address

View Employee Hierarchy


Person Address Maintenance

Description

The Person Address Maintenance form is used to maintain person related address information.

Note: History and Report options are also available.

Pre- Requisites

Steps

Add a Person Address:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Telecommunication Address Maintenance:

3.	The Telecommunication Address ID field is system generated.

4.	In the Business/Home field, specify whether it is a "Business" or "Home" telephone number and tab.

5.	If the number is local, check the local indicator [image], ii the number is international, leave the checkbox unchecked.

6.	In the Direct/Switchboard field, specify whether it is a "Direct" or "Switchboard" telephone line and tab.

7.	In the Telecommunication Type field, click on the [image] drop down button and select the relevant telecommunication type, and tab.

8.	In the Dialling Code field, enter the relevant area's dialling code, and tab.

9.	In the Number field, enter the relevant telephone number, and tab.

10.	If required, enter the Extension number or additional dialling information in the Telephone Extension field.

Electronic Address Maintenance:

11.	In the Business/Home field, specify whether it is a "Business" or "Home" telephone number and tab.

12.	In the Electronic Address Type field, click on the [image] drop down button and select the type of electronic address (E-mail, IP, or Web), and tab.

13.	In the Electronic Address Text field, enter the electronic address where information can be sent.

Post Box Private Bag Address Maintenance:

14.	The Postal Address ID and Business Home fields will be automatically populated by the system.

15.	In the Post/Private Bag Type field, click on the drop down list and select either PO - Post Box or PR- Private Bag, then tab.

16.	In the Bag Box Text field, enter the address, and tab.

17.	In the Postal Code field, enter the postal code number or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Postal Code Area Selection form, and select the required record.

18.	In the Parcel Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that parcels will be collected at this address.

19.	In the Correspondence Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that correspondence can be sent to this address.

20.	In the Billing Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that accounts or bills will be collected at this address.

21.	The Postal Code Country Town Suburb information will be automatically populated by the system.

Physical Address Maintenance:

22.	The Physical Address ID and Business Home fields will be automatically populated by the system.

23.	In the Post/Location Type field, click on the drop down list and select either P- Post, L- Location or B - Post & Location, then tab

24.	In the Postal Code field, enter the postal code number or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Postal Code Area Selection form, and select the required record.

25.	In the Building field, enter the physical location and associated number, and tab.

26.	In the Place/Street field, enter the physical or residential building or area, and tab.

27.	In the Residential Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that this address is a residence.

28.	In the Parcel Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that parcels will be collected at this address.

29.	In the Correspondence Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that correspondence can be sent to this address.

30.	In the Billing Indicator field, check the checkbox on [image] to verify that accounts or bills will be collected at this address.

31.	If the Residential checkbox has been checked, the Point Location group field will be active, and you can optionally enter the latitude and longitude point location for this residential address.

32.	The Street Code Country Town Suburb information will be automatically populated by the system.

33.	If the post Location Type specified is an "L" , you will need to specify the Country Town Suburb combination. In the Country Town Suburb ID field, enter a  valid Country Town Suburb ID, or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Country Town Suburb Selection form, and select the required record.

34.	Click on the [image] Accept button to accept the new record.

Edit a Person Address:

The Physical Address ID, Postal Address ID, and Telecommunication Address ID cannot be edited.

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the [image] Edit button.

2.	Edit the record as required.

3.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Delete a Person Address:

You can only delete records if they are not being referenced by other records, and used in other forms.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record, click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Person Maintenance


Person Address View

Description

The Person Address View form is used to view person related address information.

Steps

This is a display-only form.

Related System Topics

Person Selection

Person Validation

Member Maintenance


Single Sample Result Report

Description

The Single Sample Water Quality Result Report is used to obtain a list of samples taken at a specific monitoring point and to view, save or print an individual sample's results and analysis detail. The report is comprehensive, displaying detailed information about the sample such as the analyst, variable's method of measurement or its calculation, accreditation status, and quality assurance status for each variable.

Pre-requisites

The results must have been released.

Steps:

To obtain a Single Sample Water Quality Result Report

1.	Once you have selected the Single Sample Report, and if no Monitoring Point was previously selected, or if more than one was selected, the Select Monitoring Point form will open. Select the required Monitoring Point, and click on the OK button.  TIP: Only one Monitoring point may be selected to obtain a report.

2.	 TIP: If you have already selected a Monitoring Point, the Single Sample form will open directly, and you can proceed. If at any stage you would like to change the monitoring point selection, click on the Parameters menu option, and select the Change Selected Monitoring Points menu option to open the required form and select the record.

3.	The Single Sample Water Quality Result Report form will open.

4.	Enter a Sampling Date From and Sampling Date To.

5.	It is optional to deselect a Seasons Selection by clicking on the required radio button (No Season, Summer (October to March inclusive), Winter (April to September inclusive).

6.	It is optional to specify the Type of Results Required by clicking on the required checkbox(es). (Logger, Depth Profile, Single, Multiple)

7.	It is also optional to specify Feature Reference Code Display Options. You can do this by clicking on the Source Providing Data [image] Drop Down button and selecting a source, and then clicking on the Numbering Convention [image] Drop Down button and selecting a numbering convention.

8.	Click on the [image] Range button.

9.	Click on the Report button to display the Report and Export Options form.

10.	Click on the applicable report option and click OK.

11.	The following report options will be displayed on the Report and Export Options form:

•	Display Results on Screen: The results will be displayed on an Inventory of Samples form.

•	Export Single Samples  to Word Document (*.doc): This will generate a Word document.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Point Group Maintenance for Selection

Select Monitoring Variables


Sample or Analyses Inventory Report

Description:

The Sample or Analyses Inventory Report is used to obtain a summary of released results that are available. Two different types of inventory reports are available:

•	Inventory of Samples - This report displays an inventory of samples taken at specified monitoring points. The report provides a summary of the number of samples taken at a monitoring point, as well as the period wherein monitoring was performed.

•	Inventory of Analyses - This report displays an inventory of analyses done for specific monitoring variables at specified monitoring points. The report provides a summary of the number of analyses done per monitoring variable at a monitoring point, as well as the period wherein these analyses were done.

The Sample or Analyses Inventory Report’s are available in the following formats:

•	As an MS Word document

•	Comma Delimited format (CSV) : This creates .CSV files in a specified location - for import into eg. Excel

•	Arcview format (DBF): This creates .DBF files (DBASE IV format) in a specified location - for import into e.g. Arcview

•	On Screen – This displays the results on screen.

Pre-requisites:

The results must have been released.

Steps:

To obtain an Inventory Report

1.	Once you have selected the Inventory report, and if no monitoring point(s) were previously selected, the Select Monitoring Point form will open. Select the required monitoring point(s), and click on the OK button.

2.	 TIP: If you have already selected a monitoring point(s), the Sample or Analyses Inventory form will open directly, and you can proceed. If at any stage you would like to change or add to the monitoring point selection, click on the Parameters menu option, and select the Select Monitoring Points menu option to open the required form and select the record(s).

3.	The Sample or Analyses Inventory Report form will open with the selected records.

4.	Select either a Samples taken or Variables analysed inventory report, by clicking on the relevant radio button.

•	For Samples Taken, continue with step 9.

•	For Variables analysed: If no monitoring variable(s) have been specified, the Select Monitoring Variables form will automatically open, and you will need to select one or more variables. The Dates, Depth, Season, and Result Type fields will then become visible.

5.	Enter a Sampling Date From and Sampling Date To range option.

6.	Enter a Sampling Depth From and Sampling Depth To range option.

7.	It is optional to select Seasons by clicking on the required [image] radio button (No Season, Summer (October to March inclusive), Winter (April to September inclusive).

8.	It is optional to specify the Type of Results Required by clicking on the required checkbox(es). (Time Interval, Depth Profile, Single, Multiple)

9.	It is also optional to specify Feature Reference Code Display Options. You can do this by clicking on the Source Providing Data [image] Drop Down button and selecting a source, and then clicking on the Numbering Convention [image] Drop Down button and selecting a numbering convention.

10.	Click on the Report button to display the Report and Export Options form.

11.	Click on the applicable report option and click OK.

12.	The following report options will be displayed on the Report and Export Options form:

•	Display Results on Screen: The results will be displayed on an Inventory of Samples form.

•	Export Inventory of Samples to Word Document (*.doc): This will generate a Word document.

•	Export to CSV Comma-delimited file (*.csv): This creates .CSV files in a specified location - for import into eg. Excel. A message will appear asking you what maximum size the files must be: "none", "stiffy (1.44mb)", "CD-R (650mb)", "CD-RW (550mb)" or "other" in which case you will have to enter a file size. If there is more data than can fit into a single file, another file is automatically created. The file name will be the name supplied by you, and if any subsequent files need to be created, the name will be suffixed by _1, _2etc.

•	Export to DBF4 dBase IV file (*.dbf): This creates DBF files in a specified location - for import into e.g. Arcview. To do this, ensure that your computer has enough disc space available. You will need to enter a name and destination. Two files are created with the extension DBF of which one is suffixed with "L".

Related System Topics

Monitoring Point Group Maintenance for Selection

Select Monitoring Variables


Descriptive Statistics Report

Description:

The Descriptive Statistics Report is used to obtain a standard set of statistics for a specific monitoring point(s) and monitoring variable(s) for a given period of time. Statistics will be calculated for each monitoring variable according to its unique sample begin and end depth.

The Descriptive Statistics Report’s are available in the following formats:

•	As an MS Word document

•	Comma Delimited format (CSV) : This creates .CSV files in a specified location - for import into eg. Excel

•	Arcview format (DBF): This creates .DBF files (DBASE IV format) in a specified location - for import into e.g. Arcview

 Note: There is a limit of 48 monitoring variables for Standard Statistics Report

Pre-requisites:

The results must have been released.

Steps:

To obtain a Descriptive Statistics Report

1.	Once you have selected Descriptive Statistics, and if no monitoring point(s) were previously selected, the Select Monitoring Points form will open. Select the required monitoring point(s), and click on the OK button. If no monitoring variable(s) have been specified, the Select Monitoring Variables form will automatically open, and you will need to select one or more variables.

2.	 TIP: If you have already selected a monitoring point(s) and variable(s), the Descriptive Statistics form will open directly, and you can proceed. If at any stage you would like to change or add to the monitoring point selection or the monitoring variable selection, click on the Parameters menu option, and select either the Change Selected Monitoring Points menu option or the Change Selected Monitoring Variables menu option to open the required form and select the record(s).

3.	The Descriptive Statistics form will open. The following descriptive statistics are available by default, you can deselect those not required:

•	Number of Elements

•	Minimum Value

•	Maximum Value

•	Average/Mean

•	Geometric Mean

•	Standard Deviation Statistics

•	% Variation Coefficient

•	5% Percentile

•	10% Percentile

•	25% Percentile

•	Median (50% Percentile)

•	75% Percentile

•	90% Percentile

•	95% Percentile

•	Lower 95% confidence limit around the mean

•	Upper 95% confidence limit around the mean

4.	Enter a Sampling Date From and Sampling Date Torange option.

5.	Enter a Sampling Depth From and Sampling Depth To range option.

6.	It is optional to select Seasons by clicking on the required [image] radio button (No Season, Summer (October to March inclusive), Winter (April to September inclusive).

7.	It is optional to specify the Type of Results Required by clicking on the required checkbox(es). (Time Interval, Depth Profile, Single)

8.	It is also optional to specify Feature Reference Code Display Options. You can do this by clicking on the Source Providing Data [image] Drop Down button and selecting a source, and then clicking on the Numbering Convention [image] Drop Down button and selecting a numbering convention.

12.	Click on the Report button to display the Report and Export Options form.

13.	Click on the applicable report option and click OK.

14.	The following report options will be displayed on the Report and Export Options form:

•	Display Results on Screen: The results will be displayed on a Water Quality – Summary Statistics Report.

•	Export Standard Statistics to Word Document (*.doc): This will generate a Word document.

•	Export to CSV Comma-delimited file (*.csv): This creates .CSV files in a specified location - for import into eg. Excel. A message will appear asking you what maximum size the files must be: "none", "stiffy (1.44mb)", "CD-R (650mb)", "CD-RW (550mb)" or "other" in which case you will have to enter a file size. If there is more data than can fit into a single file, another file is automatically created. The file name will be the name supplied by you, and if any subsequent files need to be created, the name will be suffixed by _1, _2etc.

•	Export to DBF4 dBase IV file (*.dbf): This creates DBF files in a specified location - for import into e.g. Arcview. To do this, ensure that your computer has enough disc space available. You will need to enter a name and destination. Two files are created with the extension DBF of which one is suffixed with "L".

Related System Topics

Formulae used for statistics

Monitoring Point Group Maintenance for Selection

Select Monitoring Variables


Formulae used for statistics

For a sample [image] where the elements are sorted from smallest to largest:

Number of Elements:

Minimum:

Maximum:

Mean:

Geometric Mean:

Standard Deviation:

% Variation Coefficient:

Percentiles:

Percentiles are calculated with the weighted average at X(n-1)p method.

where

(the integer part of f)

(fractional part of f)

Lower 95% confidence limit around the mean:

Upper 95% confidence limit around the mean:

The assumption is made we are dealing with a relatively large number of samples.  Since the upper / lower 95% confidence limit is to be obtained, the z-value for á=0.05 is used: = 1.96.


Sample Analyses Status Report

Description:

The Sample Analyses Status Report is used to obtain an overview or indication of the analysis status of samples taken at specific monitoring points. The report displays a list of all samples that have been received for the sampling time period at specific monitoring points, and will assist you in determining whether the requested analysis has been performed. The report will indicate each sample's current status of analysis, i.e. whether the sample is in process (of being analysed) completed or has been rejected, in which case a rejection reason will be supplied.

Pre-requisites:

The Sample must have been registered.

Steps:

To obtain a Sample Analyses Status Report

1.	Once you have selected Sample Status and if no Monitoring Point(s) was previously selected, the Select Monitoring Point form will open. Select the required Monitoring Point(s), and click on the OK button.

 TIP: If you have already selected a Monitoring Point, the Sample Status form will open directly, and you can proceed. If at any stage you would like to change the selection of monitoring points, click on the Parameters menu option, and select the Change Selected Monitoring Points menu option open the required form and select the records.

3.	The Sample Status form will open.

4.	Enter a Sampling Date From and Sampling Date To.

5.	It is optional to provide a Seasons Selection by clicking on the required [image] radio button (No Season, Summer (October to March inclusive), Winter (April  to September inclusive).

6.	It is also optional to specify Feature Reference Code Display Options. You can do this by clicking on the Source Providing Data [image] drop down button and selecting a source, and then clicking on the Numbering Convention [image] Drop Down button and selecting a numbering convention.

7.	Click on the Report button to display the Report and Export Options form.

8.	Click on the applicable report option and click OK.

9.	The following report options will be displayed on the Report and Export Options form:

•	Display Results on screen: This will display an on-screen report.

•	Export Sample Status  to Word Document (*.doc): This will generate a Word document report.

Important

By default only one year's data can be printed in a report at a time, and you will always only be able to obtain data for the last five years, however at present you will only be able to access data from 1 October 1999, as this was the first date when data was entered into the WMS system.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Point Group Maintenance for Selection

Select Monitoring Variables


Standard Results Report

Description:

The Standard Results Report is used to obtain a standard set of results taken for a specific monitoring point(s) and monitoring variable(s) for a given period of time.

The Standard Results Report’s are available in the following formats:

•	As an MS Word document

•	Comma Delimited format (CSV) : This creates .CSV files in a specified location - for import into eg. Excel

•	Arcview format (DBF): This creates .DBF files (DBASE IV format) in a specified location - for import into e.g. Arcview

 Note: A maximum of 48 variables may be selected due to Windows constraints.

Pre-requisites:

The results must have been released.

Steps:

To obtain a Standard Results Report

1.	Once you have selected Standard Results, and if no monitoring point(s) were previously selected, the Select Monitoring Point form will open. Select the required monitoring point(s), and click on the OK button. If no monitoring variable(s) have been specified, the Select Monitoring Variables form will automatically open, and you will need to select one or more variables.

 TIP: If you have already selected a monitoring point(s) and variable(s), the Standard Results form will open directly, and you can proceed. If at any stage you would like to change or add to the monitoring point selection or the monitoring variable selection, click on the Parameters menu option, and select either the Change Selected Monitoring Points menu option or the Change Selected Monitoring Variables menu option to open the required form and select the record(s).

3.	The Standard Results form will open.

4.	Enter a Sampling Date From and Sampling Date To  range option.

5.	It is optional to select Seasons by clicking on the required [image] radio button (No Season, Summer (October to March inclusive), Winter (April to September inclusive).

6.	It is optional to specify the Type of Results Required by clicking on the required checkbox(es). (Time Interval, Depth Profile, Single, or Multiple)

7.	Enter a Sampling Depth From and Sampling Depth To range option.

8.	It is also optional to specify Feature Reference Code Display Options. You can do this by clicking on the Source Providing Data [image] Drop Down button and selecting a source, and then clicking on the Numbering Convention [image] Drop Down button and selecting a numbering convention.

9.	Click on the Report button to display the Report and Export Options form.

10.	Click on the applicable report option and click OK.

11.	The following report options will be displayed on the Report and Export Options form:

•	Export Standard Results to Word Document (*.doc): This will generate a Word document.

•	Export to CSV Comma-delimited file (*.csv): This creates .CSV files in a specified location - for import into eg. Excel. A message will appear asking you what maximum size the files must be: "none", "stiffy (1.44mb)", "CD-R (650mb)", "CD-RW (550mb)" or "other" in which case you will have to enter a file size. If there is more data than can fit into a single file, another file is automatically created. The file name will be the name supplied by you, and if any subsequent files need to be created, the name will be suffixed by _1, _2etc.

•	Export to DBF4 dBase IV file (*.dbf): This creates DBF files in a specified location - for import into e.g. Arcview. To do this, ensure that your computer has enough disc space available. You will need to enter a name and destination. Two files are created with the extension DBF of which one is suffixed with "L".

•	Export to External System: This creates a set of .CSV files in a specified location - for import into external system eg. Hydstra.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Point Group Maintenance for Selection

Select Monitoring Variables


Troubleshooting

If you are a "new" WMS user, and are experiencing a problem with the WMS system, please discuss your problem with any other regular user because they should know what the system can do.

Please do not despair or get frustrated if the system does not do what you would like it to do.  It might be that you have used an unusual, but still legal approach, which no one else has used. This is very good because WMS must work without problems even with the not so common paths to a "destination".

Please do us a favour and tell us what you tried to do, exactly how you did it up to the point where the problem occurred.  YOU might have discovered a new bug in the system!

Users often experience operational problems with WMS.  Since deployment of WMS several procedures were tried out to inform the programmers and maintenance team of problems, bugs and changes that are required.  Many of these reporting procedures were quite complicated.  As from the beginning of 2001 a simplified reporting system was introduced.

How to Log a call

If you find that any module of WMS does not function as it should:

1.	Make a Screen print and save it somewhere where you can access it again.

2.	Write down the steps that you took to get to the point where the problem started.

3.	Contact your local Network Controller (use your local call logging procedure) and explain your problem.  The Network Controller must ascertain if the problem is a local (network) problem or a WMS system error.

•	If it is a local problem the Network Controller must rectify it.  These include: Local network problems, installation of the software required for WMS, updating of software version,

•	If it is System error, you, the user, must report it by logging a call.

4.	Log a call:

4.1.	Open a new mail message and address it to: Computer Helpline.

4.2.	In the subject line, enter the system, module and the "path" to the form where you encountered the problem.  Examples:

•	WMS; Water Resource Management; Register Monitoring point; Link Monitor to Monitoring point.

•	WMS; WATER RESOURCE MANAGEMENT; person or organisation; POSTAL ADDRESS; POSTAL CODE.

•	WMS; Monitoring Management; Peripheral Information; Monitoring Action and Frequency; Frequency Specification.

•	WMS; MONITORING MANAGEMENT; PERIPHERAL INFORMATION; MONITORING ACTION AND FREQUENCY; MONITORING ACTION.

It is important that your subject starts with WMS, because Computer Helpline handles all help calls for all systems in DWAF and must know where to route your WMS call.

4.3.	Copy the Subject line to the first line of the message.

4.4.	Skip one line, then describe your problem in as much detail as possible to enable the person that will attend to your problem to recreate it.

4.5.	Skip a line and describe a possible solution (if known) or the alteration that is required.

4.6.	Insert your contact detail, telephone number etc.

4.7.	DO NOT ATTACH ANY FILES OR SCREENPRINTS at this stage.

4.8.	Send your message.

5.	You will receive an answer from Computer Helpline very soon.  This answer will have a "reference number for your call in the "Subject line"", e.g. "Reference number for this call is 18/6/2001 –271".  Save this number if you need to refer to this call again.

6.	If you had screen prints to illustrate your problem or help the programmers to trace the problem, attach it to the answer that you received from Computer Helpline and forward it to:

6.1.	Deon van Zyl (ahd@dwaf.pwv.gov.za) if it is a Monitoring Management problem (Magic).

6.2.	Bafana Ngubeni (NgubeniB@dwaf.pwv.gov.za) if it is a Water Resource Management problem (Delphi / Arc View).

7.	SHOWSTOPPER	A showstopper is a bug or error in the system that prevents you from doing your work.  Showstoppers get immediate attention.  PLEASE mark your message clearly if it is a showstopper.

8.	Enhancements required on the system must be requested in the same way as problems or bugs are reported.


Contacting us

Contact us should you require support with regards to queries or any problems that you may be experiencing while working with the WMS. There are three lines of support available to you, and we propose that you work through the lines of support, beginning with the first line.

•	The First line of support

Contact your Region’s Super User and Network Controller.

•	The Second line of support

All Hardware / Network and Application problems that are not resolved at the 1st line of support, can be reported to the Help Desk Tel: 0860 724365.  Trained help desk staff will identify the type of problem and provide support accordingly.

•	The Third line of support

For Monitoring Management system queries contact Kobus Myburgh at (012) 808 0374.

For Water Resource Management system queries contact Geert Grobler at (012) 323 8691


# Master_Lists_Overview

$ Master Lists Overview

+ MAIN:0

K Master Lists Overview

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Types_Overview

$ Types Overview

+ MAIN:0

K Types Overview

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Class_Type

$ Class Type

+ MAIN:0

K Class Type

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Spatial_Information

$ Spatial Information

+ MAIN:0

K Spatial Information

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Class_Item

$ Class Item

+ MAIN:0

K Class Item

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Structure_Level

$ Structure Level

+ MAIN:0

K Structure Level

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Class_Structure

$ Class Structure

+ MAIN:0

K Class Structure

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Source_Providing_Data_Maintenance_Overview

$ Source Providing Data Maintenance Overview

+ MAIN:0

K Database Sources of Monitoring Data Overview

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Feature_Reference_Codes_Maintenance

$ Feature Reference Codes Maintenance

+ WMS-ML:0

K Feature Reference Codes Maintenance

@ Status|0|||0||||||

# Environmental_Survey_Method_Setup_Overview_

$ Environmental Survey Method Setup Overview

+ MAIN:0

K Environmental Survey Method Setup Overview

> Main

@ Status|0|||0||||||

# Environmental_Survey_Template

$ Environmental Survey Template

+ MAIN:0

K Environmental Survey Template

> Main

@ Status|0|||0||||||

# Spatial_Display_Overview

$ Spatial Display Overview

+ MAIN:0

K Spatial Display Overview

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Map_Symbol

$ Map Symbol

+ MAIN:0

K Map Symbol

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Map_Colour

$ Map Colour

+ MAIN:0

K Map Colour

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Fill_Pattern

$ Fill Pattern

+ MAIN:0

K Fill Pattern

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Map_Scale

$ Map Scale

+ MAIN:0

K Map Scale

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Layer

$ Layer

+ MAIN:0

K Layer

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Library

$ Library

+ MAIN:0

K Library

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Seasons_Overview

$ Seasons Overview

+ MAIN:0

K Seasons Overview

> Main

@ Status|0|0|0|0||||||

# Multimedia_Overview

$ Multimedia Overview

+ WMS-ML:0

K Multimedia Overview

> Main

@ Status|0|||0||||||

# Multimedia_Library

$ Multimedia Library

+ WMS-ML:0

K Multimedia Library

> Main

@ Status|0|||0||||||

# LE_Member_Selection

$ LE Member Selection

+ WMS-ML:0

K LE Member Selection

> Main

@ Status|0|||0||||||

# Multimedia_Data_Maintenance_Report

$ Multimedia Data Maintenance Report

+ WMS-ML:0

K Multimedia Data Maintenance Report

> Second

@ Status|0|||0||||||

# Related_Multimedia

$ Related Multimedia

+ WMS-ML:0

K Related Multimedia

> Main

@ Status|0|||0||||||


Timeseries

Description

The Time Series Graph Form is used to define time interval, Objective/Standard, Liason Entity and Graph Type for selected Monitoring Points and Variables.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

  Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.   Specify the Start Date and End Date for graph results interval.

2.   Click on the required radio button to select Graph Type.

3.   Click on the required radio button to select Objective/Standard.

4.   Click on the required radio button to select Liason Entity.

5.   Click on the Graph Tab to view the results.

Related System Topics


Feature Reference Filter Criteria

Description:

The Feature Reference Filter Criteria enables you to select an applicable Geographical feature.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	On the High Level Geographical Feature Type, click on the Reach, Sector, Water Body, Monitoring Point, River, Groundwater Point, Transfer Feature, Water Use Site, Geographical Area or the All Features (or None) option to filter out records associated with a selected type of Geographical Feature.

 Note: The Water Use Site, River, Groundwater Point, Monitoring Point, Sector and Reach High Level Geographical Feature Types are for future implementations. When you select the All Features or None options, the Geographical Feature Type ID field will be disabled.

2.	Enter the Geographical Feature Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

3.	The Geographical Feature Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Geographical Feature Type ID.

4.	Enter the Geographical Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the following forms, thereafter make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

•	Geographical Feature Selection form (When you select the All Features option)

•	Geographical Area Selection form (When you select the Geographical Area option)

•	Transfer Feature Selection form (When you select the Transfer Feature option)

•	Water Use Site form (When you select the Water Use Site option)

•	River Selection form (When you select the River option)

•	Groundwater Point Selection form (When you select the Groundwater Point option)

•	Water Body Selection form (When you select the Water Body option)

•	Monitoring Point Selection form (When you select the Monitoring Point option)

•	Sector Selection form (When you select the Sector option)

•	Reach Selection form (When you select the Reach option)

5.	Enter the Source Providing Data ID or click on the Zoom button to open the System Datasource Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Source Providing Data Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Source Providing Data ID.

7.	Enter the Numbering Convention Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Numbering Convention Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Numbering Convention Type ID.

9.	Enter the Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

10.	The Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Organisation ID.

11.	Click on the Next button to open the Feature Reference Maintenance form with the records for the specified filter criteria.

12.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Geographical Feature Selection

Feature Reference Maintenance


Feature Reference Maintenance

Description

The Feature Reference Maintenance form is used to maintain reference/s for features used by systems external to WMS.

Pre-requisites

Feature must be registered.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Feature Reference:

 Note: The used indicator will by default be unchecked and may not change when inserting a record because this feature reference is not used elsewhere in the system (Its new). The system will automatically update (check the used indicator) during electronic data import, to indicate that the feature reference is used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

 Note: The Change User Organisation ID, Change User Organisation Abbreviation, Change User Login, Change User Name & Change Date will be automatically displayed and the user may not change these values because they are used to identify the logged in user & the date on which he/she creates a record. In addition to these fields, the Database Type, Feature ID and Feature Name will be automatically displayed when the form is called from another Maintenance form and the user may not change these values.

2.	Click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select the Descriptive Name of the Database Type (Subset Type) by clicking on the required option, and tab.

3.	The Database Type will be automatically displayed.

4.	Enter the Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Geographical Feature Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

5.	The Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID.

6.	Enter the Feature Reference Code and tab.

 Note: If the Feature with the same Database Type as this new Feature is already linked to the Feature Reference Code, an error message will be displayed indicating that a feature of that type is already linked to the Feature Reference Code. Click ok button and enter another Feature Reference Code.

7.	Enter the System Datasource ID or click on the Zoom button to open the System Datasource Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

8.	The System Datasource Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the System Datasource ID.

9.	Enter the Numbering Convention Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Classes – Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

10.	The Numbering Convention Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Numbering Convention Type ID.

11.	Check the Current indicator, if the Reference Code is the current code for the datasource.

 Note: If the new Feature record is the first record with the combination of Datasource, Numbering Convention Type & Feature Name then the current indicator will be checked by default and may not be unchecked.

12.	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open a Login Organisation Selection form, make a selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.  Note: By default the Data Owner Organisation is the same as the Login Organisation ID. When you insert a new record, the Data Owner for the Feature Reference will automatically be populated with the Login Organisation ID, but you may change it.

13.	The Data Owner Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

14.	Once you have completed all the relevant information, click on the down arrow if if no other record exists to accept the new record.

Edit Feature Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record or Central Administrator may modify the record. The current indicator may only be checked for one record for a specific Datasource, Numbering Convention Type & Feature Name combination. If the record with this combination is unchecked, then automatic updates will be done for the other record with this combination.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a Feature Reference:

 Note: Only the current data owner of the record or Central Administrator may delete the record and only if it is not  referenced elsewhere in the system.i.e. the used-indicator is unchecked.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

3.	Press F3 or Edit-Delete Line, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record. Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

System Datasource Selection

Associated Class Type Selection

Transfer Feature Selection

Login Organisation Selection


Feature Reference Selection

Description:

The Feature Reference Selection form allows you to select a specific Feature Reference Code.

Steps:

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics:


Geographical Area Hierarchy Selection

Description

The Geographical Area Hierarchy Selection form is used to select a record in the hierarchical view. It allows the user to select the Geographical Area record that  will be added as the parent.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record in the tree view to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button to select the records.

3.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form

Related System Topics

Geographical Area Maintenance


Survey Variable Parameter Class List Selection

Description

The Survey Class List Selection form is used to select a parameter for a specific survey class.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Unclassified Survey Parameter Selection

Description

The Unclassified Survey Parameter Selection form is used to select survey parameters that do not belong in a formal classification structure.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Variable History Selection

Description

The Monitoring Variable History Selection form is used to select a specific monitoring variable history record.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Next button to go to the Transfer Feature Maintenance form.

5.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

6.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

 Note: Steps 4-5 applies only when the form is opened in Wizard mode, when the form is opened in normal selection mode, the Select button will be applicable for the selection of a record.

Related System Topics


Multiple Variable History View

Description

The Multiple Variable History View form is used to view multiple monitoring variable history records.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related System Topics


Survey Variable History View

Description

The Survey Variable History View form is used to view historical information for survey monitoring variable records. It shows all the historical changes made to the survey variable record.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related System Topics


Single Variable History View

Description

The Single Variable History View form is used to view single variable history records.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related System Topics


Derived Variable History View

Description

The Derived Variable History View form is used to view derived variable history records.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on  the form.

Related System Topics


Survey Variable Parameter History View

Description:

The Survey Variable Parameter History View form is used to view all historical changes made to the Survey monitoring variable parameter records.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

 Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button.

Related System Topics


Multiple Variable Parameter History View

Description:

The Multiple Variable Parameter History View form is used to view all historical changes made to the multiple monitoring variable parameter record.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps:

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on  the form.

Note: You also have the option of generating a report by clicking on the Report button.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Variable Selection

Description

The Monitoring Variable Selection form is used to select a specific monitoring variable record.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	The form will be automatically displayed with the monitoring variable records’ information.

2.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

3.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

4.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Variable Filter Critera

Description:

The Monitoring Variable Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for Monitoring Variable records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and the Monitoring Variable Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID.

3.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Class ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Class Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Monitoring Variable Class Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Variable Class ID.

5.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Variable Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Monitoring Variable Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Variable Type ID.

7.	Enter the Measuring Unit ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit Selection Valid form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Measuring Unit Name and the Measuring Unit Abbreviation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Measuring Unit ID.

9.	Enter the Standard Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

10.	The Standard Monitoring Variable Name and the Standard Monitoring Variable Abbreviation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the standard monitoring variable ID.

11.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Variable View form.

12.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

13.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Monitoring Variable Selection

Monitoring Variable View

Measuring Unit Selection

Monitoring Variable Type Selection

Monitoring Variable Class Selection


Monitoring Variable History Filter Criteria

Description:

The Monitoring Variable History Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for Monitoring Variable History records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable History Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and the Monitoring Variable Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID.

3.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Class ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Class Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Monitoring Variable Class Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Variable Class ID.

5.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Variable Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Monitoring Variable Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Variable Type ID.

7.	Enter the Mearuring Unit ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit Selection Valid form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

8.	The Measuring Unit Name and the Measuring Unit Abbreviation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Measuring Unit ID.

9.	Enter the Standard Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable History Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

10.	The Standard Monitoring Variable Name and the Standard Monitoring Variable Abbreviation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the standard monitoring variable ID.

11.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Change User Organisation Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

12.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation and the Change User Organisation Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Change User Organisation ID.

13.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Variable History Selection form.

14.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

15.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Monitoring Variable History Selection

Measuring Unit Selection

User Organisation Selection

Monitoring Variable Class Selection

Variable Type Selection


Option Decision Criteria

Description:

The Option Decision Criteria form enables you to choose a valid option from the list.

Steps:

1.	Select an option by clicking on the applicable radio button.

2.	Click on the Next button to close the form and open the selected form.

3.	Click on the Back button to return to the previous form.

 Note: The back button will only be enabled if the form was not called from the main menu.

4.	Click on the Exit button to return to the main menu.

Related System Topics


Single Variable Maintenance

Description

The Single Variable Maintenance form is used to maintain a single monitoring variable.  It enables you to maintain specific attributes needed to define a single variable.  An example of a single monitoring variable is chloride.

Pre-requisites

The variable type, monitoring variable class and the measuring unit must exist before the user can select them.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new single variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record. A variable added will be a single Fundamental variable.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter a Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and tab.

3.	Enter the new Monitoring Variable Name and tab

4.	Enter the Variable Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Type Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

5.	The Monitoring Variable Type Name and the Ecological Compartment ID fields  will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Variable Type ID. The Ecological Compartment Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Ecological Compartment ID.

6.	Enter the Measuring Unit ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

7.	The Measuring Unit Abbreviation and the Measuring Unit Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Measuring Unit ID.

8.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Class ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Class Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

9.	The Monitoring Variable Class Name  will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Variable Class ID.

10.	The Fundamental/Derived Type field will display Fundamental and the user will not be able to change it.

11.	In the Method Indicator field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a sample, observation or both method indicator.

12.	In the Non Standard Type field, click on the [image] Drop Down button and select either the Standard or Non Standard option and tab.

13.	If the new variable  is a non-standard variable, the Standard Monitoring Variable field will be displayed, Enter the Standard Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the variable and tab.

14.	The Standard Monitoring Variable Abbreviation field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Standard Monitoring Variable ID.

15.	Enter the Conversion Factor and tab. This field is not relevant if the user selected "Standard " option  in the Non Standard Type field

16.	Enter the Conversion Exponent and tab. This field is not relevant if the user selected "Standard " option  in the Non Standard Type field

 Note: Conversion Exponent is used in conjunction with the Conversion factor to convert the non-standard variable to its associated standard variable.

17.	If the Anion/Cation field, click on the Anion/Cation field [image] Drop Down button and select either the Anion or Cation option and tab.

18.	Click on the Maintenance button to open the Decision Criteria form from where certain forms are maitained:

•	Variable Type Maintenance form allows the user to maintain variable type records.

•	Variable Class Maintenance form allows the user to maintain variable class records.

•	Measuring Unit  Maintenance form allows the user to maintain measuring unit records.

•	Analysis Method Maintenance form allows the user to maintain analysis method information.

Edit a Single Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

 Note: The Non-Standard Type field  cannot be changed from ‘Standard’ to ‘Non-standard’’ or visa versa.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a Single variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Selection

Measuring Unit Selection

Option Decision Criteria

Monitoring Variable Type Selection

Monitoring Variable Class Selection


Multiple Variable Maintenance

Description

The Multiple Variable Maintenance form is used to maintain multiple monitoring variables. Multiple variables have a minimum of one parameter linked to it. An example of a multiple monitoring variable is algae identification that contains a parameter list of algae genera.

Pre-requisites

The variable type, monitoring variable class and the measuring unit must exist before the user can select them.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new multiple variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	Enter a Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and tab.

3.	Enter the new Monitoring Variable Name and tab

4.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Type Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

5.	The Monitoring Variable Type Name and the Ecological Compartment fields  will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Variable Type ID.

6.	Enter the Measuring Unit ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

7.	The Measuring Unit Abbreviation and the Measuring Unit Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Measuring Unit ID.

8.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Class ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Class Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

9.	The Monitoring Variable Class Name  will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Variable Class ID.

10.	The Fundamental/Derived Type field will display Fundamental option and the user will not be able to change it.

11.	In the Method Indicator field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a sample, observation or both method indicator.

12.	Enter the Class Structure ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Parameter Class List Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

13.	The Class Name  will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Class Structure ID.

14.	In the Value Input Choice field, click on the [image] Drop Down button and select the Alpha, Numeric, Both or Either option and tab.

15.	If you selected Numeric, Both or Either option in the Value Input Choice field, the Max Total Value field will be highlighted, enter the value and tab.

16.	In the Values Required Choice field, click on the [image] Drop Down button and select the All or Partial option and tab.

17.	If you selected Alpha, Both or Either option in the Value Input Choice field, the Valid Alpha Characters field will be highlighted, enter the characters and tab.

18.	Click on the Next button to enter parameters for the multiple monitoring variable.

 Note: At least one parameter shall exist for a multiple monitoring variable record.

19.	Click on the Maintenance button to get certain Maintenance form options.

•	Variable Type Maintenance form allows the user to maintain variable type records.

•	Variable Class Maintenance form allows the user to maintain variable class records.

•	Measuring Unit  Maintenance form allows the user to maintain measuring unit records.

•	Analysis Method Maintenance form allows the user to maintain analysis method information.

Edit a Multiple Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a Multiple Variable:

 Note: The Central Database Administrator may not delete the record if an analysis method(s) and result QC method(s) exists for the variable. May not be deleted if the variable is used in a monitoring program and is part of a non-scheduled sample.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Parameter Class List Selection

Analysis Method Maintenance

Measuring Unit Selection

Option Decision Criteria

Monitoring Variable Type Selection

Monitoring Variable Class Selection


Derived Variable Maintenance

Description

The Derived Variable Maintenance form is used to maintain derived monitoring variables. Derived variables obtain its value through calculation of one or more variable’s results. A calculation method is used for the calculation of Derived Variables.

 Note: The type or kind of variables that will be used to calculate a derived variable must be specified on this form. i.e. Singles & Derived, Multiple or Survey type.  A variable can only be calculated (derived) from certain kind/type of variables hence a derived variable cannot obtain its value through the calculation of a survey variable & multiple variable combined. This business rule ensures that only variables measured/observed in one sample are used in calculation of a derived variable.

Pre-requisites

The variable type, monitoring variable class and the measuring unit must exist before the user can select them.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new derived variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	Enter a Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and tab.

3.	Enter the new Monitoring Variable Name and tab.

The Monitoring Variable ID field will be automatically populated.

4.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Type form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

The Eco Compartment is automatically populated with the Variable Type field. Tab to the Measuring Unit field.

5.	Enter the Measuring Unit ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

6.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Class ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Class form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

7.	The Fundamental Comp Type field will be automatically displayed.  Note: It defines whether the variable defined is Fundamental, Derived or Survey

8.	The Analysis Method Choice will be automatically populated from a [image] Drop-down list. The options are Sample, Observation or Both (Sample and Observation), Derived, Questionnaire

9.	Enter the Calculation Method ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Calculation Method Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab

10.	The Calculation Method Description and the Process Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Calculation Method ID.

11.	The Date Created field will automatically display the date on which the calculation method was created.

12.	The Date Terminated field will automatically display the date on which the calculation method has or will be terminated.

13.	In the Derived Variable Sub Type field, click on the [image] Drop Down button, and select a Single & Derived, Multiple or Survey type.

14.	Click on the Maintenance button to open the Decision Criteria form for Derived Monitoring Variable Maintenance from where certain forms are maintained:

•	Variables for Derived Variable Maintenance form allows user to maintain variable for derived variables

•	Related Variable Maintenance form allows the user to maintain variables that are related/associated with derived variables (calculated variables).

•	Variable Type Maintenance form allows the user to maintain variable type records.

•	Variable Class Maintenance form allows the user to maintain variable class records.

•	Measuring Unit Maintenance form allows the user to maintain measuring unit records.

•	Calculation Method Maintenance form allows the user to maintain analysis method information.

15.	Click on the Next button to open the Variables for Derived Variable Maintenance form.

16.	Click on the Exit button to close the form.

Edit a Derived Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Tab to another record or click on either the Back, Next or Exit button, a Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have edited a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a Derived Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Line button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

A derived variable may not be deleted or modified if there are results for that record.

Related System Topics

Calculation Method Selection

Options Decision Criteria

Monitoring Variable Type Selection

Measuring Unit Selection


Survey Variable Maintenance

Description

The Survey Variable Maintenance form is used to maintain survey variables. Survey variables a re used in questionnaires and provide qualitative information about water resource environment. A survey variable can be extended into many questions (multiple) by addition of survey parameters.

 Note: Survey Parameters are required when a survey monitoring variable is of type ‘multiple’.

Pre-requisites

The variable type and monitoring variable class must exist before the user can select them.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new survey variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

The Monitoring Variable ID will be automatically generated and displayed once the new record is accepted.

2.	Enter a Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and tab.

3.	Enter the new Monitoring Variable Name and tab

4.	Enter the Variable Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Type Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

5.	The Variable Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Variable Type ID.

6.	The Ecological Compartment ID applicable for the variable type and the Ecological Compartment Name field will be automatically populated.

7.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Class ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Class Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

8.	The Monitoring Variable Class Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Variable Class ID.

9.	The Fundamental Comp Type field will display Survey option and the user will not be able to change it.

10.	The Analysis Method Choice field is automatically populated with the valid analysis method choice/s for a survey variable. e.g. Questionnaire

11.	In the Multi/Single Survey Type field, click on the [image] Drop Down button and select either Multiple or Single Type option and tab.

 Note:  At least one parameter for the survey monitoring variable should be defined when the new survey variable is of type ‘Multiple’.

12.	In the Classified Parameter Level field, click on the [image] Drop Down button to indicate the level on which classified parameters should be created and select None, First or Second Level option and tab.

 Note: If the new survey variable is of type ‘Single’, the Classified Parameter Level field will be automatically populated with ‘None’ option.

13.	Enter the Class ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Survey Class List Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

 Note: This field is compulsory when the new survey variable is of type ’Multiple’.

14.	The Parameter Class Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Survey Variable Class ID.

15.	Tab to accept the new record.  Note: The new Monitoring Variable ID will be automatically generated by the system.

16.	Click on the Next button to open the Survey Variable Parameter Maintenance form if the newly created survey monitoring variable record is of type ‘Multiple’. At least one parameter record must be created.

17.	Click on the Maintenance button to get certain Maintenance form options.

•	Variable Type Maintenance form allows the user to maintain variable type records.

•	Variable Class Maintenance form allows the user to maintain variable class records.

•	Measuring Unit Maintenance form allows the user to maintain measuring unit records.

•	Survey Method Maintenance form allows the user to maintain survey method information.

•	Survey Class List Maintenance form allows the user to maintain a possible list of survey variable classes.

Edit a survey Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may modify the record. Survey Variable Class ID may only be modified when the survey variable is of type ‘Multiple’ and when the Classified Parameter Level is on ‘First’ or ‘Second’ Level.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	By clicking on either the Back, Next or Exit button, a Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have edited a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a survey Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Line button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

4.	A Change Cause message will appear on the screen, If you have deleted by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid deletion, click on the "Business Event" radio button, and then press the continue button to proceed.

Related System Topics

Survey Class List Selection

Option Decision Criteria

Monitoring Variable Type Selection

Monitoring Variable Class Selection


Survey Class List Maintenance

Description

The Survey Class List Maintenance form is used to maintain a list of applicable classes for survey monitoring variables.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Add a Survey Class:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Class ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Class Structure Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Class Name and the Class Explanation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Class ID.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Delete a Survey Class:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Class Structure Selection


Survey Variable Parameter Maintenance

Description

The Survey Variable Parameter Maintenance form is used to maintain parameters for Multiple Survey Variables. This form enables the user to select classified or unclassified parameters on level 1 or level 2, depending on the classified parameter level set when survey variable was defined.

Pre-requisites

The classified types for the class structure and unclassified parameters must exist before the user can select them. Survey variable must exist.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Survey Parameter Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

 Note: Survey Monitoring Variable record information will be automatically displayed. e.g. monitoring variable ID, class name, classified parameter level, etc. The Survey Variable Parameter ID will be automatically generated and displayed once the new survey variable parameter record is accepted.

2.	In the Level 1 Parameter field, enter the Classified Parameter ID when the classified parameter level is specified as ‘First’ or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associated Class Type Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	When the classified parameter level is specified as ‘Second’ or ‘None’, enter the Unclassified Parameter ID in the Level 1 Parameter field or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Unclassified Survey Parameter Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

4.	The Abbreviation and Name fields will automatically be displayed.

4.	In the Level 2 Parameter field, enter the Classified Parameter ID when the classified parameter level is specified as ‘Second’ or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Associated Class Type Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

5.	When the classified parameter level is specified as ‘First’ or ‘None’ and the Level 1 Parameter field is not empty, enter the Unclassified Parameter ID in the Level 2 Parameter field or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Unclassified Survey Parameter Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

6.	The Abbreviation and Name fields will automatically be displayed.

7.	In the Answer Type field, click on the [image] Drop Down button to indicate the answer type associated to the survey variable parameter and select Numeric, Varchar (255), Coordinates, DateTime, Boolean or Lookup option and tab.

8.	If the Answer Type is ‘Lookup’, enter the Lookup Class ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Multiple Classified Parameter Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

 Note: This field is used to specify the class structure for the lookup answer type of the survey variable parameter.

8.	The Lookup Class Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Lookup Class ID.

9.	If Answer Type is ‘Numeric’, enter the Measuring Unit ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Measuring Unit Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the [image] Select button to return the record and tab.

10.	The Measuring Unit Name and the Measuring Unit Abbreviation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Measuring Unit ID.

11.	In the Active Indicator checkbox, indicate if the parameter is active for monitoring variable by                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    clicking the checkbox

12.	Tab to accept the new record.  Note: The new Survey Parameter ID will be automatically generated by the system.

Edit a Survey Parameter Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a survey Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Line button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

4.	A Change Cause message will appear on the screen, If you have deleted by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid deletion, click on the "Business Event" radio button, and then press the continue button to proceed.

Related System Topics

Unclassified Parameter Selection

Multiple Class Type Selection

Associated Class Type Selection

Multiple Classified Parameter Selection

Measuring Unit Selection


Unclassified Survey Parameter Maintenance

Description

The Unclassified Survey Parameter Maintenance form is used to maintain the unclassified survey variable parameters.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add Unclassified Survey Parameter:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Unclassified Parameter Abbreviation field and tab.

3.	Enter the Unclassified Parameter Name field and tab.

4.	Enter the Unclassified Parameter Description and tab.

5.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Edit An Unclassified Survey Parameter:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete an Unclassified Survey Parameter:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Variable View

Description

The Monitoring Variable View form is used to view monitoring variable records.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Click on the Maintenance button to create associative records applicable to monitoring variable. e.g. Monitoring Variable Group, Monitoring Variable Reference

2.	Click on the Add button to add a specific monitoring variable record.

3.	Click on the Next button to maintain the focused monitoring variable record.

4.	Click on the Report button to produce a standard Magic Report of the information on the screen.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Variable History View

Description

The Monitoring Variable History View form is used to view monitoring variable history records.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related System Topics


Software Item Selection

Description

The Software Item Selection form is used to select a particular software item e.g. form, report, format, etc.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Related Software Item Selection

Description

The Related Software Item Selection form is used to select a particular related software item.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Next button to open the Software Item Maintenance form.

5.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

6.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics

Software Item Maintenance


Related Reason Selection

Description

The Related Reason Selection form is used to select a reason for relating two records to each other, e.g. reason for relating two software items.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Software Item Filter Criteria

Description:

The Software Item Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for Software Item records, to be used on Software Item Maintenance.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Software Item ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Software Item Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Software Item Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Software Item ID.

3.	Enter the Software Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Class-Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Software Type Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Software Type ID.

5.	Click on the Next button to open the Software Item Maintenance form.

6.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

7.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Software Item Selection

Associated Class-Type Selection

Software Item Maintenance


Related Software Item Filter Criteria

Description:

The Related Software Item Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for Related Software Item records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

 Note: It is not compulsory to enter all the filter criteria. The user can enter any of the criteria, to narrow down the number of records retrieved.

1.	Enter the Software Item ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Software Item Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Software Item Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Software Item ID.

3.	Enter the Related Software Item ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Software Item Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Related Software Item Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Related Software Item ID.

5.	Enter the Related Type Reason ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Related Reason Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Related Type Reason will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Related Type Reason ID.

7.	Click on the Next button to open the Related Software Item Selection form.

8.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

9.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Software Item Selection

Related Reason Selection

Related Software Item Selection


Software Item  Maintenance

Description

The Software Item Maintenance form is used to maintain the list of all software items in WMS. These include logical screens, reports, formats of reports, DLL’s, etc. This form is also used to relate software items to each other on the bottom-grid.

 Note: Software items can be related to each other more than once for different purposes or reasons but cannot be related to itself. The reasons for relating these items should be unique per software item.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a Software Item:

 Note: Only a user with Admin group rights (e.g. Central Administrator or an Analyst) may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Software Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Associated Class Type Selection form.  Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Item Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Software Type ID.

4.	Enter the Software Item Name and tab.

5.	Enter the Software Item Description and tab.

 Note: The description must be unique per software type regardless of the case.

6.	Enter the Default Report Directory and tab.

7.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

8.	The Software Item ID will be automatically created by the system.

9.	To relate another software item to the current record, refer to "Add a Related Software Item"

Edit a Software Item:

 Note: Only a user with Admin group rights (e.g. Central Administrator or an Analyst) may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row to accept the record.

Delete a Software Item:

 Note: Only a user with Admin group rights (e.g. Central Administrator or an Analyst) may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

3.	Press F3 or Edit-Delete Line, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record. Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

 Tip:This is the minimum information required to add, edit and delete a software item To add, edit and delete related software items for the focused software item, you can continue with the process below.

Add a Related Software Item: (for the selected software Item in the upper half of the form)

 Note: This section is used to relate software items to each other for a particular reason and is displayed in the bottom half of the form.

1.	Enter the Related Software Item ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Software Item Selection form.  Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

2.	The Related Software Item Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Related Software Item ID.

3.	Enter the Related Type Reason ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Related Reason Selection form.  Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

4.	The Related Type Reason will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Related Type Reason ID.

5.	If the current record is to be the default, the Default Indicator can be checked.

 Note: Only one default allowed.

6.	The Active Indicator checkbox is checked to indicate that the relationship is in use in the particular database.

7.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

8.	Click on the Related Reason M button to maintain related reasons.

Edit a Related Software Item:

 Note: Only a user with Admin group rights (e.g. Central Administrator or an Analyst) may modify the record. Only the default indicator & Active indicator may be updated else the user must first delete the incorrect relationship and then add the correct one, or vice versa.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row to accept the record.

Delete a Related Software Item:

 Note: Only a user with Admin group rights (e.g. Central Administrator or an Analyst) may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

3.	Press F3 or Edit-Delete Line, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record. Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Associated Class Type Selection

Software Item Selection

Related Reason Selection

Related Reason Maintenance


Related Software Item Maintenance

Description

The Related Software Item Maintenance form is used to relate software items to each other for a particular reason.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a Related Software Item:

 Note: Only a user with Admin group rights (e.g. Central Administrator or an Analyst) may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Related Software Item ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Software Item Selection form.  Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Related Software Item Description  will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Related Software Item ID.

4.	Enter the Related Type Reason ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Related Reason Selection form.  Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

5.	The Related Type Reason  will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Related Type Reason ID.

6.	The Default Indicator will be automatically checked for each software item and reason combination.

7.	Click on the Maintenance Button to maintain related reasons.

8.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Delete a Related Software Item:

 Note: Only a user with Admin group rights (e.g. Central Administrator or an Analyst) may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

3.	Press F3 or Edit-Delete Line, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record. Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Software Item Selection

Related Reason Selection


Related Reason Maintenance

Description

The Related Reason Maintenance form is used to maintain reasons for relating items to each other, e.g. class types, software items or subset types.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a Related Reason:

 Note: Only users in the WMSADMIN group  may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Related Reason.  Note: The reason must be unique regardless of the case.

3.	Click another record or tab to another record to accept the new record.

Edit a Related Reason:

 Note: Only users in the WMSADMIN group  may modify the description/reason, only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row to accept the record.

Delete a Related Reason:

 Note: Only users in the WMSADMIN group  may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

3.	Press F3 or Edit-Delete Line, a confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record. Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics


Standard/Objective Audit Report

Description:

The Standard/Objective Audit Report is used to display the Finalised/Not finalised standards/objectives of a specific monitoring point. Objectives are goals intended to be attained for a specific monitoring point and are not legally enforceable, whereas Standards are legally enforceable and must be complied with. A specific monitoring point can have one standard and more than one objective.

Steps:

1.	The selected monitoring points for the session will display, or monitoring point selection will open by default for the user to select monitoring point(s).

2.	User can change monitoring points by re-selecting it through Parameters menu option.

3.	Select Standard and/or Objective to be reporting on. Both, will return both Standards and Objectives.

4.	Select Finalised, Not Finalised or both to include all records irrespective of the finalisation (records with from-date and to-date are finalised, and may be used for compliance determination).

5.	In the Type field, select one or more specific types of standards or objectives. Depending on value selected on 3.

6.	Click on the [image] Range button to generate the report information.

Related System Topics

Class Type Selection

Monitoring Point Group Maintenance for Selection


Objective/Standard Maintenance

Description

The Objective/Standard Maintenance form is used to maintain all the Objectives/Standards set at a chosen monitoring point. It also displays all the monitoring variable limits and each limit’s seasons for a Standard/Objective.

Pre-requisites

Monitoring Point should already exist for the Standard/Objective.

Steps

Add New Objective:

 Note: If the objective has the same type and reason for the feature, it must be linked to a preceding objective.

1.	Click on the [image] Add button.

2.	Select/Choose the Add New Objective/Standard option.

3.	In the Objective/Standard field, click on the [image] Drop Down button and select either Point Objective or Point Standard Type option and tab.

4.	In the Reason field, click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Class Type Selection form, and select the required record, and then clicking on the [image] Select button.

5.	Click on the Accept button to accept the objective.

 Note: The monitoring Variable Limit form will be automatically displayed to maintain monitoring variable limits.

Add Subsequent Objective :

1.	Choose an Objective or Standard to supersede by focusing on it and clicking on the [image] Add button.

2.	Select/Choose the Add Subsequent Objective/Standard from Scratch or Add Subsequent Objective/Standard from Previous option.

3.	The Standard/Objective type and reason will by default have the values of the focused record, and the user may not change it.

4.	Click on the Accept button to accept the Objective/Standard.

5.	When Add Subsequent Objective/Standard from previous was selected, Monitoring Variable Limit form will open with the previous standard/objective, monitoring variable limits as the default.

6.	When Add Subsequent Objective/Standard from scratch was selected, monitoring variable limit form will open with no variable limits.

Edit an Objective/Standard:

1.	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it.

2.	Choose Edit menu option or Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit an Objective/Standard record.

3.	Change the Objective/Standard reason if it was not created as subsequent of another record or if not finalised yet.

 Note: User may change the From and/or To dates.

4.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

 Note: It is allowable to have gaps between periods of subsequent objectives, but dates of different standard/objective records for the same reason may not overlap.

Delete an Objective/Standard:

 Note: Objective can only be deleted when all the monitoring variable limits and variable limit seasons for the objective has been removed. An objective that is not yet finalised can be deleted if it does not have any monitoring variable limits.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Finalise Objective/Standard

1.	Focus on the record to be finalised to highlight it.

2.	Choose from Edit menu, Finalise Objective.

3.	Enter or select a From and To Date when the record should be used for compliance determination.

Related System Topics

Class Type Selection


Monitoring Variable Limit Maintenance

Description

The Monitoring Variable Limit Maintenance form is used to maintain all the monitoring variable limits for a selected objective. The seasons for each limit is also selected on this form. When Objective/Standard’s variable limits were used for compliance determination, the user will have the option to maintain the monitoring variable limits and seasonal values.

Pre-requisites

The Objective/Standard for the Monitoring Point should already exist.

Steps

Add Monitoring Variable Limit:

1.	Click on the [image] Add button. The Monitoring Variable Selection form will be automatically displayed. Select the required fields, and then click on the [image] Select button.

2.	In Measuring Unit field, the standard measuring unit for the chosen variable will by default display.

3.	In the Boundary Type field, click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Class Type Selection form. Select the required record, and then click on the [image] Select button and tab.

4.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Limit Value and tab.

5.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the new information is correct.

Edit Monitoring Variable Limit:

1.	Click on the Maintenance button on Objective/Standard Maintenance form to open the Monitoring Variable Limit Maintenance form.

2.	Click on the [image] Edit button to enable you to edit a record.

3.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

4.	Edit the record as required.

5.	Click on the [image] Accept button if the changed information is correct.

Delete Monitoring Variable Limit:

 Note: A monitoring variable limit record may only be deleted when no seasonal information is linked to it.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Selection

Measuring Unit Selection

Class Type Selection


Monitoring Variable Group Filter Criteria

Description:

The Monitoring Variable Group Filter Criteria form enables you to define filter criteria for Monitoring Variable group records containing monitoring variables that will be frequently used to speed up the data capturing process in the design of a monitoring programme.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Variable Group ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Variable Group Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Variable Group Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Variable Group ID.

3.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Monitoring Variable Name and the Monitoring Variable Abbreviation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID.

5.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Variable Group View form.

6.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

7.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

 Note: The Back button (step 6) will only be available when called in wizard mode.

Related System Topics:

Variable Group Selection

Monitoring Variable Selection

Monitoring Variable Group Selection


Monitoring Variable Group Selection

Description

The Monitoring Variable Group Selection form is used to select monitoring variables group record containing monitoring variables that will be frequently used to speed up the data capturing process in the design of a monitoring programme.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form.

5.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

6.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Note: Steps 4-5 applies only when the form is opened in Wizard mode, when the form is opened in normal selection mode, the Select button will be applicable for the selection of a record.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Variable Group Maintenance

Description

The Monitoring Variable Group Maintenance form is used to maintain the monitoring variables group containing monitoring variables that will be frequently used to speed up the data capturing process in the design of a monitoring programme. The monitoring variable can be used in different variable groups.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Add a new Monitoring Variable Group:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

3.	The Monitoring Variable Name and the Monitoring Variable Abbreviation fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID.

4.	Enter the new Monitoring Variable Group ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Variable Group Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection and tab.

5.	The Variable Group Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Monitoring Variable Group ID.

6.	Click on the Next row to accept the new record.

7.	Click on the Maintenance button to maintain two software item records, one for monitoring variable maintenance for variable and the other one for monitoring variable maintenance for group.

Edit a Monitoring Variable Group:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record.

4.	Click on the Next row to accept the record.

Delete a Monitoring Variable Group:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the Monitoring Variable Group record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete option.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

This form is centrally maintained. Variables are linked to a group or groups in the Monitoring Variable form.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Maintenance


Monitoring Variable Selection (WRM)

Description

The Monitoring Variable Selection form is used to select a specific monitoring variable record.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Click on the Eco Compartment field [image] Drop Down button and select the required option.

2.	Click on the Variable Type field [image] Drop Down button and select the required option.

3.	The applicable records’ information will be displayed.

4.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

5.	Click on the Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.

6.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Variables for Derived Variable Maintenance

Description

The Variables for Derived Variable Maintenance form is used to maintain variables needed to define a derived variable. Derived variable obtain its value through calculation of one or more variable’s results. These variables are of a certain type, either Single & Derived, Multiple or Survey depending on what the user selected from the Derived Maintenance form.

 Note: Parameters are required when a Variable is of type Multiple or Survey.

Pre-requisites

Variables must be of either type Single & Derived, Multiple or Survey. The monitoring variable ID must exist before the user can select it.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new variable for Derived variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	The Derived Variable ID field will be automatically populated with Derived Variable ID.

3.	The Derived Variable Abbreviation and the Derived Variable Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Derived Variable ID.

4.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form. Click on the required record (A valid monitoring variable ID related to a calculated (derived) variable) and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

5.	The Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and the Monitoring Variable Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID.

6.	If the variable is a multiple variable, then in the Parameter Choice field, click on the [image] Drop Down button and select the either Full or Partial option and tab.  Note: If the variable is a single variable, the parameter choice is "NO", and the user may not change it.

7.	If user selected "Full"option, then the user will be required to enter a mantissa and exponent for each parameter.

8.	Enter the Factor that will be used to calculate the derived variable and tab.

9.	Enter the Exponent that will be used to calculate the derived variable and tab.

10.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form (Derived Monitoring Variable).

 Note: When the Derived Variable is of type "Single & Derived" then the next button will be disabled. Parameters are only required when a Variable is of type ‘Multiple’ or ‘Survey’.

11.	Click on the Next button to open the following:

Multiple Parameters for Derived Variable Maintenance form if the Derived Variable is of	 type ‘Multiple"

Survey Parameter for Derived Variable Maintenance form if the Derived Variable sub type is ‘Survey’.

12.	Click on the Exit button to close the form.

Edit a Variable for Derived Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may modify the record when there are no results.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Tab to another record or click on either the Back, Next or Exit button, a Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have edited a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a Variable for Derived Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

Only the Central Database Administrator may add, modify or delete variables. Nothing may change when results exists.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Selection

Multiple Parameters for Derived Variable Maintenance

Survey Parameters for Derived Variable Maintenance


Multiple Parameters for Derived Variable Maintenance

Description

The Multiple Parameters for Derived Variable Maintenance form is used to maintain parameters for Multiple Variables that are used to calculate a derived variable. Multiple Monitoring Variables have many parameters linked to them, and therefore many results can also be expected. An example of a multiple monitoring variable is algae identification that contains a parameter list of algae genera. When a Multiple Monitoring Variable is used in calculating a derived variable, one or more parameters are specified.

Pre-requisites

The Derived Variable must be of type ‘Multiple’.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add new Multiple Parameters for Derived variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	The Derived Variable ID field will be automatically populated with Derived Variable ID.

3.	The Derived Variable Abbreviation and the Derived Variable Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Derived Variable ID.

4.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form. Click on the required record (A valid monitoring variable ID related to a calculated (derived) variable) and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

5.	The Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and the Monitoring Variable Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID.

6.	Enter the Multiple Variable Parameter ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameters Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

7.	The Multiple Variable Parameter Abbreviation field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Multiple Variable Parameter ID.

8.	Enter the Factor that will be used to calculate the derived variable and tab.

9.	Enter the Exponent that will be used to calculate the derived variable and tab.

10.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

11.	Click on the Exit button to close the form.

Edit a Multiple Parameter for Derived Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may modify the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Tab to another record or click on either the Back, Next or Exit button, a Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have edited a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a Multiple Parameter for Derived Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may delete the record only if it is not used elsewhere in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

Only the Central Database Administrator may add, modify or delete variables. Nothing may change when results exists.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Selection

Multiple Variable Parameter Selection


Survey Parameters for Derived Variable Maintenance

Description

The Survey Parameters for Derived Variable Maintenance form is used to maintain parameters for Survey Variables needed to calculate a Derived Variable. An example of a survey monitoring variable is Habitat that contains an invertebrate as a parameter. When a Survey Monitoring Variable is used in calculating a derived variable, one or more parameters are specified.

Pre-requisites

The Derived Variable must be of type ‘Survey’.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Survey Parameter for Derived variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record. The record may not be inserted when results exists.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	The Derived Variable ID field will be automatically populated with Derived Variable ID.

3.	The Derived Variable Abbreviation and the Derived Variable Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Derived Variable ID.

4.	Enter the Monitoring Variable ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form. Click on the required record (A valid monitoring variable ID related to a calculated (derived) variable) and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

5.	The Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and the Monitoring Variable Name fields will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID.

6.	Enter the Survey Variable Parameter ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Survey Variable Parameter Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

7.	The Survey Variable Parameter field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Survey Variable Parameter ID.

8.	Enter the Factor that will be used to calculate the derived variable and tab.

9.	Enter the Exponent that will be used to calculate the derived variable and tab.

10.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

11.	Click on the Exit button to close the form.

Edit a Survey Parameter for Derived Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may modify the record. The record may not be changed when results exist for Survey Parameter.

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Tab to another record or click on either the Back, Next or Exit button, a Change Reason form will appear on the screen, If you have edited a record by mistake, click on the "error fix" radio button, however if you are performing a valid edit, click on the "business event " radio button, and then press the continue button to accept changes to the edited record.

Delete a Survey Parameter for Derived Variable:

 Note: Only the Central Administrator may delete the record. The record may not be deleted when results exist for survey parameter.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

Only the Central Database Administrator may add, modify or delete variables. Nothing may change when results exists.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Selection

Survey Variable Parameter Selection


Monitoring Variables Group View

Description

The Monitoring Variables Group View (wizard) form is used to view monitoring variables group record containing monitoring variables that will be frequently used to speed up the data capturing process in the design of a monitoring programme.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Next button to open the Monitoring Variable View form.

3.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

4.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Survey Method Filter Criteria

Description:

The Survey Method Filter Criteria form enables you to filter out the monitoring variable for maintenance through survey methods.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Enter the Survey Method ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Survey Method Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Survey Method Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Survey Method ID.

3.	Enter the Variable Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Variable Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Variable Type ID.

5.	Enter the Preceding Method ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Survey Method Selection form, make your selection and click on the Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Preceding Method Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Preceding Method ID.

7.	Click on the Next button to open the Survey Method Maintenance form.

8.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

9.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics

Survey Method Selection

Monitoring Variable Type Selection

Survey Method Maintenance


Survey Method Selection

Description:

The Survey Method Selection form allows you to select a specific survey method.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the applicable records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Survey Method Parameters Maintenance

Description

The Survey Method Parameters Maintenance form is used to maintain survey parameters for Survey Method. It is used to indicate which Survey Variables and Survey Variable Parameters are associated with which Survey Methods.

Pre-requisites

Survey Method must exist.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a new Survey Parameter for Survey Method:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record.  The Survey Variable Parameter Selection form may also be used to add records manually.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	Enter the Survey Variable Parameter ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Survey Variable Parameter Selection form. Click on the required record and click on the Select button to return the record and tab.

3.	The Survey Variable Parameter field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Survey Variable Parameter ID.

4.	Click on the Complete button to complete setting up the survey parameters for a survey method. A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the decision. Click on the Yes option to confirm the decision.

5.	Click on the Populate Parameters button to populate the survey variable parameters.

6.	Click on the Exit button to close the form.

Edit a Survey Parameter for Survey Method:

 Note: There are no updates allowed on survey parameters for survey method records. Instead the user must delete the record and re-create it again.

Delete a Survey Parameter for Survey Method:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may delete the record if the record is not referenced else where in the system.

1.	Focus on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

Only the Central Database Administrator may add or delete records.

Related System Topics

Survey Variable Parameter Selection


Survey Variable Parameter Selection

Description:

The Survey Variable Parameter Selection form allows you to select a specific survey variable parameter.

 Note: User may not select parameters for variables with the same type as variable type of the survey method.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button to select the applicable records.

3.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Questionnaire Template Filter Criteria

Description:

The Questionnaire Template Filter Criteria form enables you to filter out the monitoring variable for maintenance through Questionnaire Template.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

1.	Enter the Questionnaire ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Questionnaire Template Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

2.	The Questionnaire Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Questionnaire ID.

3.	Enter the Variable Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

4.	The Variable Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Variable Type ID.

5.	Enter the Sample Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

6.	The Sample Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Sample Type ID.

7.	Enter the Change User Organisation ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form, and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

8.	The Change User Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Change User Organisation ID.

9.	Click on the Next button to open the Questionnaire Template Selection form.

10.	Click on the Back button to go to the previous form.

11.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics

Questionnaire Template Selection

Monitoring Variable Type Selection

Sample Type Selection

Organisation Selection


Questionnaire Template Selection

Description

The Questionnaire Template Selection form allows you to search and select an applicable Questionnaire Template.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the [image] Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Questionnaire Template Maintenance

Description

The Questionnaire Template Maintenance form is used to create and define standard environmental survey templates.  Questionnaire Templates form the basis of Environmental Survey Methods that are used to conduct surveys for the purpose of gathering and capturing information about the environmental state of geographical features.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer to How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

Add a Questionnaire Template:

 Note: Only the Central Database Administrator may add the record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	 Note: The Questionnaire ID will be automatically generated by the system once the record has been accepted.

3.	Enter a Questionnaire Name in the field and tab.

4.	Enter the Variable Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

5.	The Variable Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Variable Type ID.

6.	Enter the Sample Type ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Sample Type Selection form, make your selection and click on the [image] Select button to return your selection.

7.	The Sample Type Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Sample Type ID.

8.	Enter a Questionnaire Description in the field and tab.

9.	Tab to accept the new record.

 Note: The Back button will close the Questionnaire Template Maintenance form and return to either the Questionnaire Template Filter Criteria Wizard or Feature Type for Questionnaire Template Filter Criteria depending on the menu it was called from.

 Note: The Maintenance button will close the Questionnaire Template Maintenance form and open the Option Decision Criteria for Questionnaire Template Maintenance form from where Variable Type, Sample Type and Feature Types for Questionnaire Template are maintained

 Note: The Next button will close the Questionnaire Template Maintenance form and open the Feature Type for Questionnaire Template Maintenance form displaying the features types for questionnaire template

Click the Exit to close the form

Edit a Questionnaire Template:

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the [image] Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a Questionnaire Template:

 Note: Only the Central administrator may delete the record if it is not referenced elsewhere in the system.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete Record button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Important

When editing the Questionnaire Name take care not to change the meaning of the name. A Questionnaire Template name must always be unique; therefore no two records can have the same name.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Variable Type Selection

Sample Type Selection


Feature in Layer Filter Criteria Wizard

Description:

The Feature in Layer Filter Criteria Wizard enables you to select only an applicable Layer’s Type and Geographical feature.

Steps:

1.	On the High Level Geographical Feature Type, click on the Reach, Sector, Water Body, Monitoring Point, River, Groundwater Point, Transfer Feature, Water Use Site, Geographical Area or the All Features option to filter out records associated with a selected type of Geographical Feature.

 Note: The Water Use Site, River, Groundwater Point, Monitoring Point, Sector and Reach High Level Geographical Feature Types are for future implementations. When you select the All Features options, the Geographical Feature Type ID field will be disabled. The All option is selected by default

2.	Enter the Geographical Feature ID or click on the Zoom button to open the selection form according to the criteria specified on the High Level Geographical Feature Type, select the Feature and click on the Select button to return the selection.

 Note:  If the Geographical Area option is selected from the High Level Geographical Feature type then the Geographical Area Selection form will be opened

3.	The Geographical Feature Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Feature ID

4.	On the High Level Layer Type, click on the Work, Generated or the None option to filter out records associated with a selected Layer Type. .

5.	Enter the Layer ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Layer Directory Selection form, select the applicable Layer and click on the Select button to return the selection.

6.	The Layer Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Layer ID.

7.	The Layer Table Name will be automatically updated for the chosen layer

8.	Click on the Next button to open the Feature in Layer View form with the records for the specified filter criteria.

9.	Click on the Exit button to go to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Layer Directory Selection

Feature in Layer View


Feature in Layer View

Description

The Feature in Layer  View  form is used to display layers with their associated geographical features.

Pre-requisites

Geographical Feature must exist and be digitised on the named layer.

Steps

This is a view only form.

Related System Topics


General Assessment Category Selection

Description

The General Assessment Category Selection form gives the user a list of Assessment Categories to select from and return as parameter calling form. The user can also exit without selection.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


General Assessment Category Maintenance

Description

The General Assessment Category Maintenance form enables the user to maintain the Assessment Category records.

Pre-requisites

Steps

Add a new General Assessment Category record:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	The Category Id will automatically displayed, as is a system-generated value. {bmc

qustion2.bmp} Note: The value cannot be updated by the user.

3.	Select an Assessment Type from the drop down list

4.	Enter the Category Name and tab.

5.	Enter the Sub-Category Name and tab

6.	Click F10 to exit the form.

Edit a General Assessment Category:

Note: Only the Central Database Administrator has the rights to update records. Other users only has view rights

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a General Assessment Category:

 Note: Deletion will only be possible if the record is not  being used in another form. Only the Central Database Administrator has the rights to delete records.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics


Evaluation Classification Filter Criteria

Description

The Evaluation Classification Filter Criteria form is used to filter out the Evaluation Classification Records for maintenance

Steps

Filter Evaluation Classification Records:

1.	On the Assessment Type, click on the Use, Compliance or Risk option to filter out records associated with a selected type of General Assessment Category

2.	Enter the Evaluation Classification ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Evaluation Classification Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

3.	The Evaluation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID.

 Note: the Back button will return to the previous form

4.	Click the Next button to open the Evaluation Classification Maintenance form displaying the Evaluation Classification records according to the filter criteria

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics

Evaluation Classification Selection

Evaluation Classification Maintenance


Evaluation Classification Selection

Description

The Evaluation Classification Selection form gives the user a list of Evaluation Classification to select from and return as parameter calling form. The user can also exit without selection.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Evaluation Classification Maintenance

Description

The Evaluation Classification Maintenance form enables the user to maintain the Evaluation Classification records.

Pre-requisites

Steps

Add a new Evaluation Classification record:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	The Evaluation Classification ID will automatically displayed, as is a system-generated value.  Note: The value cannot be updated by the user.

3.	Select an Assessment Type from the drop down list

4.	Enter the Evaluation Name and tab.

5.	Enter the Evaluation Class and tab

6.	 Enter the Evaluation Colour and tab

7.	Click F10 to exit the form.

Edit an Evaluation Classification:

Note: Only the Central Database Administrator has the rights to update records. Other users only has view rights

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete an Evaluation Classification:

 Note: Deletion will only be possible if the record is not  being used in another form. Only the Central Database Administrator has the rights to delete records.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics


General Guidelines Single Range Filter Criteria

Description

The General Guidelines Single Range Filter Criteria form is used to filter out the General Guidelines Single Range Records for maintenance

Steps

Filter General Guidelines Single Range Records:

1.	On the Assessment Type, click on the Use, Compliance or Risk option to filter out records associated with a selected type of General Assessment Category

2.	Enter the Single Range Id or click on the Zoom button to open the General Guidelines Single Range Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

3.	The Interpretation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID " displaying the interpretation that provide the guidelines for deciding if water supply to the community is safe".

4.	Enter the Category ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Assessment Category Selection form and select the required Category.

5.	The Category Name  of the Assessment Category will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Category ID

6.	Enter the Evaluation Classification ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Evaluation Classification Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

7.	The Evaluation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID

8.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form and select the required Monitoring Variable.

9.	The Monitoring Variable  Abbreviation and Monitoring Variable  Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID

10.	Enter the Multimedia  Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Multimedia  Selection form and select the required Multimedia .

11.	The Multimedia Content Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia ID

 Note: the Back button will return to the previous form

12.	Click the Next button to open the General Guidelines and Standards Single Range Maintenance form displaying the General Guidelines and Standards Single Range records according to the filter criteria

13.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics

General Guidelines Single Range Selection

Assessment Category Selection

Evaluation Classification Selection

Monitoring Variable Selection


General Guidelines Single Range Selection

Description

The General Guidelines and Standards Single Range Selection form gives the user a list of General Guidelines and Standards Single Range to select from and return as parameter calling form. The user can also exit without selection.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


General Guidelines Single Range Maintenance

Description

The General Guidelines Single Range Maintenance form enables the user to maintain the General Guidelines and Standards Single Range records.

Pre-requisites

Steps

Add a new General Guidelines Single Range record:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	The Single Range ID will automatically displayed, as is a system-generated value.  Note: The value cannot be updated by the user.

3.	Select an Assessment Type from the drop down list.

4.	Enter the Interpretation that provide guidelines for deciding if the water supply to the community is safe and tab

5.	Enter the Lower Boundary value or border that indicate the lower limit

6.	Enter the Upper Boundary value or border that indicate the upper limit. Note: either the lower or the upper boundary should have a value, if you are entering a value for the upper boundary it should always be grater that the lower boundary

7.	Enter the Interpretation Explanation and tab

8.	Enter the Category ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Assessment Category Selection form and select the required Category.

9.	The Category Name  of the Assessment Category will be automatically displayed as it is linked    to the Category ID

10.	Enter the Evaluation Classification ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Evaluation Classification Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

11.	The Evaluation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID

12.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form and select the required Monitoring Variable.

13.	The Monitoring Variable  Abbreviation and Monitoring Variable  Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID

14.	Enter the Multimedia Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Multimedia Selection form and select the required Multimedia.

15.	The Multimedia Content Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia ID

 Note: the maintenance button will open the option decision for General Guidelines Single Range maintenance form from where the Assessment category, Evaluation Classification and Single Monitoring Variable are maintained

 Note: the Back button will return to the previous form

16.	Click the Exit button or F10 to exit the form.

Edit a General Guidelines Single Range:

Note: Only the Central Database Administrator has the rights to update records. Other users only has view rights

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a General Guidelines Single Range:

 Note: Deletion will only be possible if the record is not  being used in another form. Only the Central Database Administrator has the rights to delete records.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

General Guidelines Single Range Selection

Assessment Category Selection

Evaluation Classification Selection

Monitoring Variable Selection


General Guidelines Multiple Range Filter Criteria

Description

The General Guidelines Multiple Range Filter Criteria form is used to filter out the General Guidelines Multiple Range Records for maintenance

Steps

Filter General Guidelines Multiple Range Records:

1.	On the Assessment Type, click on the Use, Compliance or Risk option to filter out records associated with a selected type of General Assessment Category

2.	Enter the Multiple Rang Id or click on the Zoom button to open the General Guidelines Multiple Range Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

3.	The Interpretation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID " displaying the interpretation that provide the guidelines for deciding if water supply to the community is safe".

4.	Enter the Category ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Assessment Category Selection form and select the required Category.

5.	The Category Name  of the Assessment Category will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Category ID.

6.	Enter the Evaluation Classification ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Evaluation Classification Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

7.	The Evaluation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID

8.	Enter the Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form and select the required Monitoring Variable.

9.	The Multiple Monitoring Variable Abbreviation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multiple Monitoring Variable ID

10.	Enter the Multimedia  Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Multimedia  Selection form and select the required Multimedia .

11.	The Multimedia Content Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia ID

 Note: the Back button will return to the previous form

12.	Click the Next button to open the General Guidelines and Standards Multiple Range Maintenance form displaying the General Guidelines Multiple Range records according to the filter criteria

13.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics

General Guidelines Multiple Range Selection

Assessment Category Selection

Evaluation Classification Selection

Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Selection


Multimedia Selection

Description

The Multimedia Selection form is used to select the media item.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

3.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


General Guidelines Multiple Range Selection

Description

The General Guidelines Multiple Range Selection form gives the user a list of General Guidelines Multiple Range to select from and return as parameter calling form. The user can also exit without selection.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


General Guidelines Multiple Range Maintenance

Description

The General Guidelines Multiple Range Maintenance form enables the user to maintain the General Guidelines Multiple Range records.

Pre-requisites

Steps

Add a new General Guidelines Multiple Range record:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	The Multiple Range ID will automatically displayed, as is a system-generated value.  Note: The value cannot be updated by the user.

3.	Select an Assessment Type from the drop down list.

4.	Enter the Interpretation that provide guidelines for deciding if the water supply to the community is safe and tab

5.	Enter the Lower Boundary value or border that indicate the lower limit

6.	Enter the Upper Boundary value or border that indicate the upper limit. Note: either the lower or the upper boundary should have a value, if you are entering a value for the upper boundary it should always be grater that the lower boundary

7.	Enter an Alpha value that is valid as an alpha result value

8.	Enter the Interpretation Explanation and tab

9.	Enter the Category ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Assessment Category Selection form and select the required Category.

10.	The Category Name  of the Assessment Category will be automatically displayed as it is linked    to the Category ID

11.	Enter the Evaluation Classification ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Evaluation Classification Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

12.	The Evaluation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID

13.	Enter the Multiple Monitoring Parameter Variable Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Selection form and select the required Monitoring Variable.

14.	The Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Abbreviation and Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Multiple Monitoring Variable ID

15.	Enter the Multimedia  Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Multimedia  Selection form and select the required Multimedia .

16.	The Multimedia Content Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia ID

Note: the maintenance button will open the option decision for General Guidelines Multiple Range maintenance from where the Assessment category, Evaluation Classification and Multiple Monitoring Variable are maintained

 Note: the Back button will return to the previous form

17.	Click the Exit button or F10 to exit the form.

Edit a General Guidelines Multiple Range:

Note: Only the Central Database Administrator has the rights to update records. Other users only has view rights

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a General Guidelines Multiple Range:

 Note: Deletion will only be possible if the record is not  being used in another form. Only the Central Database Administrator has the rights to delete records.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

General Guidelines Multiple Range Selection

Assessment Category Selection

Evaluation Classification Selection

Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Selection


General Guidelines Survey Range Filter Criteria

Description

The General Guidelines Survey Range Filter Criteria form is used to filter out the General Guidelines Survey Range Records for maintenance

Steps

Filter General Guidelines Survey Range Records:

1.	On the Assessment Type, click on the Use, Compliance or Risk option to filter out records associated with a selected type of General Assessment Category

2.	Enter the Survey Rang Id or click on the Zoom button to open the General Guidelines Survey Range Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

3.	The Interpretation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID " displaying the interpretation that provide the guidelines for deciding if water supply to the community is safe".

4.	Enter the Category ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Assessment Category Selection form and select the required Category.

5.	The Category Name  of the Assessment Category will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Category ID

6.	Enter the Evaluation Classification ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Evaluation Classification Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

7.	The Evaluation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID

8.	Enter the Survey Variable Parameter ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form and select the required Monitoring Variable.

9.	The Survey Variable Parameter Abbreviation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Survey Variable Parameter ID

10.	Enter the Multimedia Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Multimedia Selection form and select the required Multimedia .

11.	The Multimedia Content Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia ID

 Note: the Back button will return to the previous form

12.	Click the Next button to open the General Guidelines and Standards Survey Range Maintenance form displaying the General Guidelines Survey Range records according to the filter criteria

13.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics

General Guidelines Survey Range Selection

Assessment Category Selection

Evaluation Classification Selection

Survey Monitoring Variable Parameter Selection


General Guidelines Survey Range Selection

Description

The General Guidelines Survey Range Selection form gives the user a list of General Guidelines Survey Range to select from and return as parameter calling form. The user can also exit without selection.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


General Guidelines Survey Range Maintenance

Description

The General Guidelines Survey Range Maintenance form enables the user to maintain the General Guidelines Survey Range records.

Pre-requisites

Steps

Add a new General Guidelines Survey Range record:

1.	Click on the [image] Create Records button.

2.	The Survey Range ID will automatically displayed, as is a system-generated value.  Note: The value cannot be updated by the user.

3.	Select an Assessment Type from the drop down list.

4.	Enter the Interpretation that provide guidelines for deciding if the water supply to the community is safe and tab

5.	Enter the Lower Boundary value or border that indicate the lower limit

6.	Enter the Upper Boundary value or border that indicate the upper limit. Note: either the lower or the upper boundary should have a value, if you are entering a value for the upper boundary it should always be grater that the lower boundary

7.	Click the Yes/No indicator to indicate that the answer type for the Survey Variable parameter is ‘Yes’ or ‘No’

8.	Enter the Interpretation Explanation and tab

9.	Enter the Category ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Assessment Category Selection form and select the required Category.

10.	The Category Name  of the Assessment Category will be automatically displayed as it is linked    to the Category ID

11.	Enter the Evaluation Classification ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Evaluation Classification Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

12.	The Evaluation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID

13.	Enter the Survey Variable Parameter Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form and select the required Monitoring Variable.

14.	The Survey Variable Parameter Abbreviation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Survey Monitoring Variable ID

15.	Enter the Multimedia  Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Multimedia  Selection form and select the required Multimedia .

16.	The Multimedia Content Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia ID

17.	Enter the Lookup Type ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Class Item Selection form and select the required Multimedia .

18.	The Lookup Item Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia ID

Note: the maintenance button will open the option decision for General Guidelines Survey Range maintenance from where the Assessment category, Evaluation Classification and Survey Monitoring Variable are maintained

 Note: the Back button will return to the previous form

19.	Click the Exit button or F10 to exit the form.

Edit a General Guidelines Survey Range:

Note: Only the Central Database Administrator has the rights to update records. Other users only has view rights

1.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button.

2.	Click on the field to be edited to highlight it.

3.	Edit the record as required.

4.	Click on the Next row button to accept the record.

Delete a General Guidelines Survey Range:

 Note: Deletion will only be possible if the record is not  being used in another form. Only the Central Database Administrator has the rights to delete records.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted, to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Delete button.

3.	A message will be displayed asking you to confirm the deletion. Click on the Yes option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

General Guidelines Survey Range Selection

Assessment Category Selection

Evaluation Classification Selection

Survey Variable Parameter Selection

Class Item Selection


General Guidelines Single Range History Filter Criteria

Description

The General Guidelines Single Range History Filter Criteria form is used to filter out the General Guidelines Single Range History Records for maintenance

Steps

Filter General Guidelines Single Range History Records:

1.	On the Assessment Type, click on the Use, Compliance or Risk option to filter out records associated with a selected type of General Assessment Category

2.	Enter the Single Range Id or click on the Zoom button to open the General Guidelines Single Range History Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

3.	The Interpretation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID " displaying the interpretation that provide the guidelines for deciding if water supply to the community is safe".

4.	Enter the Category ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Assessment Category Selection form and select the required Category.

5.	The Category Name  of the Assessment Category will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Category ID

6.	Enter the Evaluation Classification ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Evaluation Classification Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

7.	The Evaluation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID

8.	Enter the Monitoring Variable Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form and select the required Monitoring Variable.

9.	The Monitoring Variable Abbreviation and Monitoring Variable Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID

10.	Enter the Multimedia Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Multimedia Selection form and select the required Multimedia.

11.	The Multimedia Content Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia ID

12.	Enter the Change User Organisation Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form and select the required Monitoring Variable.

13.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation and Change User Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID

 Note: the Back button will return to the previous form

14.	Click the Next button to open the General Guidelines and Standards Single Range History View form displaying the General Guidelines Single Range History records according to the filter criteria

15.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics

General Guidelines Single Range History Selection

Assessment Category Selection

Evaluation Classification Selection

Monitoring Variable Selection

Organisation Selection


General Guidelines Single Range History Selection

Description

The General Guidelines Single Range History Selection form gives the user a list of General Guidelines Single Range History to select from and return as parameter calling form. The user can also exit without selection.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


General Guidelines Single Range History View

Description

The General Guidelines Single Range History View form enables the user to view the General Guidelines and Standards Single Range History records.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related System Topics


General Guidelines Multiple Range History Filter Criteria

Description

The General Guidelines Multiple Range History Filter Criteria form is used to filter out the General Guidelines Multiple Range History Records for maintenance

Steps

Filter General Guidelines Multiple Range History Records:

1.	On the Assessment Type, click on the Use, Compliance or Risk option to filter out records associated with a selected type of General Assessment Category

2.	Enter the Multiple Rang Id or click on the Zoom button to open the General Guidelines Multiple Range History Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

3.	The Interpretation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID " displaying the interpretation that provide the guidelines for deciding if water supply to the community is safe".

4.	Enter the Category ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Assessment Category Selection form and select the required Category.

5.	The Category Name  of the Assessment Category will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Category ID.

6.	Enter the Evaluation Classification ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Evaluation Classification Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

7.	The Evaluation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID

8.	Enter the Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form and select the required Monitoring Variable.

9.	The Multiple Monitoring Variable Abbreviation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multiple Monitoring Variable ID

10.	Enter the Multimedia Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Multimedia Selection form and select the required Multimedia.

11.	The Multimedia Content Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia ID

12.	Enter the Change User Organisation Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form and select the required Monitoring Variable.

13.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation and Change User Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID

 Note: the Back button will return to the previous form

14.	Click the Next button to open the General Guidelines and Standards Multiple Range History View form displaying the General Guidelines Multiple Range History records according to the filter criteria

15.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics

General Guidelines Multiple Range History Selection

Assessment Category Selection

Evaluation Classification Selection

Multiple Monitoring Variable Parameter Selection

Organisation Selection


General Guidelines Multiple Range History Selection

Description

The General Guidelines Multiple Range History Selection form gives the user a list of General Guidelines Multiple Range History to select from and return as parameter calling form. The user can also exit without selection.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


General Guidelines Multiple Range History View

Description

The General Guidelines Multiple Range History View form enables the user to view the General Guidelines Multiple Range History records.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related System Topics


General Guidelines Survey Range History Filter Criteria

Description

The General Guidelines Survey Range History Filter Criteria form is used to filter out the General Guidelines Survey Range History Records for maintenance

Steps

Filter General Guidelines Survey Range History Records:

1.	On the Assessment Type, click on the Use, Compliance or Risk option to filter out records associated with a selected type of General Assessment Category

2.	Enter the Survey Rang Id or click on the Zoom button to open the General Guidelines Survey Range History Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

3.	The Interpretation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID " displaying the interpretation that provide the guidelines for deciding if water supply to the community is safe".

4.	Enter the Category ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Assessment Category Selection form and select the required Category.

5.	The Category Name  of the Assessment Category will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Category ID

6.	Enter the Evaluation Classification ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Evaluation Classification Selection form and select the required Evaluation Classification.

7.	The Evaluation Name will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Evaluation Classification ID

8.	Enter the Survey Variable Parameter ID or click on the Zoom button to open the Monitoring Variable Selection form and select the required Monitoring Variable.

9.	The Survey Variable Parameter Abbreviation will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Survey Variable Parameter ID

10.	Enter the Multimedia Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Multimedia Selection form and select the required Multimedia.

11.	The Multimedia Content Description will be automatically displayed as it is linked to the Multimedia ID

12.	Enter the Change User Organisation Id or click on the Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form and select the required Monitoring Variable.

13.	The Change User Organisation Abbreviation and Change User Organisation Name will be automatically displayed as they are linked to the Monitoring Variable ID

 Note: the Back button will return to the previous form

14.	Click the Next button to open the General Guidelines and Standards Survey Range History View form displaying the General Guidelines Survey Range History records according to the filter criteria

15.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics

General Guidelines Survey Range History Selection

Assessment Category Selection

Evaluation Classification Selection

Survey Monitoring Variable Parameter Selection

Organisation Selection


General Guidelines Survey Range History Selection

Description

The General Guidelines Survey Range History Selection form gives the user a list of General Guidelines Survey Range History to select from and return as parameter calling form. The user can also exit without selection.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


General Guidelines Survey Range History View

Description

The General Guidelines Survey Range History View form enables the user to view the General Guidelines Survey Range History records.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related System Topics


Class Item Selection

Description

The Class Item Selection form gives the user a list of Class Items to select from and return as parameter calling form. The user can also exit without selection.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Water Use Site Water Use Filter Criteria Wizard

Description:

The Water Use Site Water Use Filter Criteria form is used to filter out Water Use Site Water Use records.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps:

1.	Enter the Geographical Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Water Use Site Selection form, select a WMS Water Use Site to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

2.	The Water Use Site Full Name field will be automatically populated as it is linked to the Geographical Feature ID

3.	Enter the Register Number and the Form Number combination or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the WARMS Water Use Site Selection form, select a Register Number and Form Number to be used as a filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

4.	The Water Use Description field and Water Use Form Number will be automatically populated as they are linked to the Register Number and Form Number.

5.	Click on the Next button to open the Water Use Site Water Use Maintenance Wizard form with records for the specified Filter Criteria.

 Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Water Use Site Water Use Decision Criteria Wizard form and the Exit button will close the form and return to the main menu.

Related System Topics:

Water Use Site Selection

Water Use Site Water Use Maintenance

WARMS Water Use Selection


Water Use Site Water Use Maintenance Wizard

Description:

The Water Use Site Water Use Maintenance form is used to link WMS Water Use Site to a WARMS Water Use.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information. Records cannot be modified.

Add a new Water Use Site Water Use record:

 Note: Only the central Administrator or Data Owner may add a Water Use Site Water Use record.

1.	Click on the [image] Create button.

2.	An empty row will be opened at the bottom left side of the maintenance form.

3.	Enter the Geographical Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Water Use Site Selection form, select a WMS Water Use Site to be linked to the water use and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection

4.	Enter the Register Number and the Form Number combination or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the WARMS Water Use Site Selection form, select a Register Number and Form Number to be linked to the water use site  and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

5.	Tab to accept the records

 Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Filter Criteria form, the Exit button will close the form and return to the main menu and the Maintenance button will open the Option Decision Criteria where the user can select to maintain or view the parent or children records for the selected record.

Delete a Water Use Site Water Use record:

 Note: Only the Data Owner may delete its Water Use Site Water Use record and the Central Administrator may delete any record.

1.	Click on the record to be deleted to highlight it.

2.	Click on the [image] Modify Records button to enable the [image] Delete button.

3.	Click on the [image] Delete button.  Note: When records are referenced elsewhere in the system, the delete option will be disabled.

4.	A confirmation message will be displayed asking if you would like to delete the record.

5.	Click on the OK option to confirm the deletion.

Related System Topics

Water Use Site Selection

WARMS Water Use Selection


Class Structure Selection

Description

The Class Structure Selection form is used to search for and select a specific class structure

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Click on the required Class Structure record to highlight it.

Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Program Group Selection

Description

The Monitoring Program Group Selection form is used to search for and select a specific monitoring program group

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Click on the required monitoring program group record to highlight it.

Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Tag Selection

Description

The Tag Selection form is used to search for and select a specific tag

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Click on the required Tag record to highlight it.

Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Action Monitoring Point next 3months Selection

Description

The Monitoring Action Monitoring Point next 3months Selection form is used to search for and select a specific monitoring action monitoring point

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Click on the required monitoring action monitoring point record to highlight it.

Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Program Priority Selection

Description

The Monitoring Program Priority Selection form is used to search for and select a monitoring program priority

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Click on the required monitoring program priority record to highlight it.

Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Monitoring Variable Class Group Selection

Description

The Monitoring Variable Class Group Selection form is used to search for and select a specific monitoring variable class group

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Click on the required monitoring variable class group record to highlight it.

Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


All Consolidated Samples Selection

Description

The All Consolidated Samples Selection form is used to search for and select all consolidated samples

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Click on the required record to highlight it.

Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Person Program Reason Selection

Description

The Person Program Reason Selection form is used to search for and select a specific person program reason

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Click on the required person program reason record to highlight it.

Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Calculation Method Selection

Description

The Calculation Method Selection form is used to search for and select a specific calculation method

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Click on the required calculation method record to highlight it.

Click on the [image] Select button to return the information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Default value in monitor active at monitoring point within next 3 months selection

Description

The Default value in monitor active at monitoring point within next 3 months selection form is used to select value in monitor active at monitoring point within next 3 months.

Pre-requisites

The Person record must exist.

Steps

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Person Assigned to Monitoring Programmes Selection

Description

The Person Assigned to Monitoring Programmes Selection form is used to select a person assigned to monitor programmes.

Pre-requisites

The Person record must exist.

Steps

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button or double-click on the record to return the selected record information to the previous form.

Related System Topics


Water Use Filter Criteria


WARMS Regional Office Selection

Description

The WARMS Regional Office Selection form is used to select WARMS Regional Office.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


WARMS WMA Selection

Description

The WARMS WMA Selection form is used to select WARMS Water Management Area.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


WARMS CMA Selection

Description

The WARMS CMA Selection form is used to select WARMS Catchment Management Agency.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Accreditation Method Selection

Description

The Accreditation Method Selection form is used to select Accreditation Method.

Pre-requisites

None.

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Specify the applicable filter criteria and click on the Filter button.

2.	The filtered records’ information will be displayed.

3.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

4.	Click on the Select button to select the records.

5.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Geographical Feature Stakeholders View

Description

The Geographical Feature Stakeholders View form is used to Geographical Feature Stakeholders

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

This is a display only form and as a result no Maintenance or Selection options will be available on the form.

Related System Topics


Monitor at Feature Route Filter Criteria Wizard

Description

The Monitor at Feature Filter Criteria form enables the user to filter out records for maintenance of monitor at feature records.

Pre-requisites:

None

Steps:

2.1	Enter the Feature ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Monitoring Point Selection form. Select the Geographical Feature ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

2.2	The Feature Name field will automatically be populated as it is linked to the Feature ID.

2.3	Enter the Monitor Operational Organisation ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form Select the Monitor Operational Organisation ID to be    used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

2.4	The Operational Caption Name field will automatically be populated as it is linked to the Monitor Operational Organisation ID.

2.5	Enter the Organisation Responsible ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form. Select the Responsible Organisation ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

2.6	The Responsible Organisation Name field will automatically be populated as it is linked to the Responsible Office ID.

2.7	Enter the Managing Organisation ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Organisation Selection form. Select the Managing Office ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

2.8	The Managing Organisation Name field will automatically be populated as it is linked to the Managing Office ID.

2.9	Enter the Frequency ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Visit Frequency Selection form. Select the Frequency ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

2.10	The Frequency Description field will automatically be populated as it is linked to the Frequency ID.

2.11	Enter the Data Owner Organisation ID or click on the [image] Zoom button to open the Login Organisation Selection form. Select the Data Owner Organisation ID to be used as filter and click on the [image] Select button to return the selection.

2.12	The Data Owner Organisation Name field will automatically be populated as it is linked to the Data Owner Organisation ID.

Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Calling Form.

Note: The Report button will open a Report Option Decision Criteria Wizard for the Reports available for Monitor at Feature Maintenance Form.

Note: View Schedule button display the information on Monitoring Schedule Report View form.

Note: To print tags click on the Print Tags button from this form. After viewing the information close the form to return to the previous form.

Note: The Exit button will close the form and return to the main menu.

2.13	Click on the Next button to open the Monitor at Feature Route Maintenance form with records for the specified Filter criteria.

Related System Topics

Monitoring Point Selection

Organisation Selection

Visit Frequency Selection

Login Organisation Selection


Monitor Route Name Selection Form

Description

The Monitor Route Name Selection form is used to select the Monitor Route Name for a monitor at feature.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

 Note: Please refer How to Search for records on WMS for more information.

1.	Click on the required record to highlight the selection.

2.	Click on the Select button to select the record.

3.	Click on the Exit button to exit the form.

Related System Topics


Monitor at Feature Route Maintenance

Description

The Monitor Route Name Selection form is used to maintain Monitor Route Name and Monitor Route Sequence of a monitor at feature.

Pre-requisites

None

Steps

3.1	Click on the record to be edited to highlight it, and click on the [image] Modify Records button.

Note: Only Monitor Route Name and Monitor Route Sequence fields can be edited. On the Monitor at Feature Route Maintenance you can’t Create or Maintain the records.

Note: Monitor Route Name Selection form will only have Route Names which already exist to select from.

3.2	Edit the Monitor Route Name or [image] Zoom to Monitor Route Name Selection form to select route name already in use.

3.3	Edit the Monitor Route Sequence field as required.

3.4	Click on another record to accept the newly made changes on a record.

Note: The Back button will close the form and return to the Calling Form.

Note: The Report button will open a Report Option Decision Criteria Wizard for the Reports available for Monitor at Feature Maintenance Form.

Note: View Schedule button display the information on Monitoring Schedule Report View form.

Note: To print tags click on the Print Tags button from this form. After viewing the information close the form to return to the previous form.

Note: The Exit button will close the form and return to the main menu.

Note: To print a report click the Print Report button and insert date range.

Related System Topics

Monitor Route Name Selection